JP6882696B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In the rotating body type game machine (slot machine), one game is started when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the rotating cylinders (reel) in a plurality of rows and stopping the rotating cylinder by making full use of the rotating cylinder stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating operation, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the effective line. When combinations of ) Is generally the type that shifts to). In such a rotating game machine, it is common to have a box-shaped back box (base) having an opening on the front side and a front door that can open and close this opening.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183331 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-052902

In such a revolving pachinko machine, if the front door is closed while the medals are scattered in the back box, the medals may be caught between the front door and the back box, and the front door is opened. It may not be possible to close smoothly.
Therefore, it is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the medal from being pinched when the front door is closed.
Further, it is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly proceeding with the gaming.

The gaming machine according to this aspect
First information display means and
Second information display means and
MAX bet lamp and
MAX bet switch and
And an internal lottery means,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-game club that controls the production <br />
The game section has a first section and a second section.
In the first section, the first information display means is configured so that information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed.
In the first section, the second information display means is configured so that information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed.
In the second section, the first information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second section, the second information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second section, in a game in which the specific lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a predetermined situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the first information display means provides information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After being displayed, the second information display means is configured to display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
Information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch for the second information display means in a game in which the specific lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a specific situation in which the minimum game time has not elapsed in the second section. Is displayed, the first information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
The main game department can send the first command to the sub game department side,
The main game department can send a second command to the sub game department side,
The sub-game unit can start measuring the rotation time of the reel when the first command is received.
When a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command, the second information display means may display stop suggestion information prompting the stop operation of the stop switch.
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. After the front door is opened and the front door is opened, and after the front door is closed and the front door is closed before the predetermined time elapses after receiving the first command. When the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command without receiving the second command, the stop suggestion information can be displayed on the second information display means. ,
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. When the front door is opened and the front door is opened, information regarding the opening of the front door is displayed on the second information display means, and after the front door is opened, the first command is received. After the front door is closed after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second information display means is configured to display the stop suggestion information.
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. When a predetermined error occurs and the predetermined error occurs, information about the predetermined error is displayed on the second information display means, and after the predetermined error occurs, the first command is received. After the predetermined error is cleared after the predetermined time has elapsed, the stop suggestion information is not displayed on the second information display means.
In the game in which the predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped based on the acceptance of the player's stop operation.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be given.
The predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a predetermined game in a certain situation, and then the number of bets related to the next game of the predetermined game is "0", and the storage number display means displays the storage number. When a predetermined number is displayed, the MAX bet lamp is lit, and then when one game medium is inserted into the slot, the MAX bet is placed at the first timing after the game medium is inserted. Bet by operating the switch is not possible, but the MAX bet lamp is lit, and at the second timing thereafter, betting by operating the MAX bet switch is possible and the MAX bet lamp is configured to be lit. It is a game machine characterized by.
<Additional notes>
In addition, although other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, it is possible to carry out without any limitation.
The gaming machine according to this other aspect is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a predetermined open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via the predetermined communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "base bottom") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "front door bottom"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
When the front door is closed, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship where they overlap each other.
Even when the front door is in a predetermined open state, the first piece and the second piece are configured to overlap each other.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the medal from being pinched when closing the front door, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly proceeding with the game .

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment in a state where the door is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal insertion slot in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list of symbol combinations 1 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of conditional devices in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small winning combination, re-gaming combination, and bonus appearance rate in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting changing device control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an execution process for adding the number of games on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a rotating cylinder drive control process on the main control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reel in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a power supply cutoff process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a push order display in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub-main loop process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the processing when the power is cut off on the sub-side on the sub-control board side in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an effect-related determination process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution enablement / non-execution determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during AT on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the revival possibility / non-recovery effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a special precursor processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a special processing for adding when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of BB internal processing, which is advantageous when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first cylinder stop reception reception process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the second cylinder stop reception reception process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop effect-related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the third cylinder stop on the sub-control board side in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a winning game of a replay game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an action diagram in a winning game of a replay game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an action diagram in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a side sectional view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a stop freeze execution determination process on the main control board side in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of an AT start effect execution in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a payout configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of an action at the time of operating the settlement button, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the second timing of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. It is a timing chart which shows the aspect of. FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is a state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding credits, a process of paying out game medals, and a process of outputting a game medium granting sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation in the case where there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation in the case where there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of push order navigation including voice when there is no weight in the AT state, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the voice when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation at the time of winning the push order bell combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation at the time of winning the push order bell combination in the AT state, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation at the time of winning the push order re-game combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation at the time of winning the push order re-game combination in the AT state, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of a change in the display mode of the reel stop control and the push order navigation in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a game progress control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals of the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor on the main control board side and the credit addition process, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by a shoot sensor on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first throwing sensor, the second throwing sensor, and the shoot sensor, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of a game medal flowing down a medal return member, which can be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a locus diagram of a game medal paid out to a medal receiving entrance, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode between the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of a disk rotation mode from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor, which can be applied to the spinning machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the settlement process. It is the first pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the settlement process. It is a second pattern figure which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 124 shows a main control board applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the weight period. It is a pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is the first pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side of. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a second pattern diagram which showed the audio output processing of the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side of. FIG. 127 is a table relating to the numbering numbers applicable to this example. FIG. 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of the main control board housed in the main board case applicable to the spinning machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion of a main board case applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram of the inside of the medal selector at the time of inserting a game medal, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the shoot main body at the time of inserting a game medal, which is applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 137 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter, which can be applied to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 138 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the game medal payout number counting processing applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and the payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a flowchart of a payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of a firing control signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an example of an external terminal transmission content determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of an error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 182 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 186 is a flowchart of a motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 187 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the instruction image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 193 is a flowchart of a special gaming effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 194 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 195 is a front view and a perspective view of the structure of the grand prize opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 197 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of a distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 200 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 201 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 202 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 208 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 209 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a flowchart of a distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an opening pattern of a large winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 213 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 214 is a flowchart of a start demo effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 215 is an operation diagram in the power-off processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting processing of the total discharge game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of the game balls. FIG. 216 is an operation diagram in the power-off processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment and the counting processing of the total discharge game balls in the total discharge confirmation sensor of the game balls. FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed after the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. is there. FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed before the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Is. FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process is completed before the stop button sensor off, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Is. FIG. 220 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 221 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the ratio calculation process in the second ROM / RAM area applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the ratio display process in the second ROM / RAM area applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) (variant 1) on the main control board side, which is applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 227 is a test display example of a performance display device applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 228 is a test display example of a performance display device applicable to the spinning machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 229 is a configuration related to stop / automatic settlement in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 231 is an in-mode item selection image diagram of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 232 is an image diagram when there is a notification in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the 14th embodiment. FIG. 233 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 234 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 235 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 236 is a display image diagram of a stop suggestion image applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 237 is a configuration relating to a setting / reset button applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 238 is a perspective view of the locking device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 239 is a front view of the locking device in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment as viewed from the back surface side of the front door. FIG. 240 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the attachment of the lock portion in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 241 is a rear view of the back box of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 242 is for explaining the arrangement relationship of the locking device, the auxiliary tank, the medal payout device, and the power supply unit when the inside of the housing is viewed from the back side, which is applicable to the spinning machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. It is a rear view. FIG. 243 is a perspective view for explaining a state in which the locking device is operated from the first opening of the back surface of the back box of the rotating machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 244 is a side surface for explaining the height relationship of the reel unit, the auxiliary tank, the medal payout device, and the power supply unit when the inside of the housing of the spinning machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is viewed from the side surface side. It is a figure. FIG. 245 is a perspective view schematically showing a housing in a state where the front door of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is in an open state. FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU of the rotating body type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is closed. FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU of the spinning machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is slightly open. FIG. 248 is a side view schematically shown for explaining the open / closed state of the front door and the flow path of medals associated therewith according to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 249 is an image diagram for explaining a state in which the stop operation related to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is invalidated.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes called a lottery) for determining some game content in a rotating game machine, and is a random number in a narrow sense in addition to a random number. Pseudo-random numbers are also included (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, re-game roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. Can be mentioned. The term "CPU" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) and processing performance used. "Power outage" means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine is below a certain level regardless of whether or not the power switch provided in the gaming machine is operated. For example, power supply It also includes the interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, "1" if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, and conducts. If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1" if it is stored, and if it is not stored, it is not. It is set to "0". It should be noted that it is generally configured so that backup power is supplied to a part or all of the data held in the RAM at the time of power failure). The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easily obtained and is advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, which is called a bonus game, a first-class BB, a second-class BB, or the like. ), The winning rate of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value. Examples include the reel stop order for winning a medal, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Further, even in the normal game state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state is different, the high probability normal game state, the low probability normal game state, etc. (in this example, it is referred to as the lottery state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery for shifting to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. Further, in this example, the state related to AT and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the state related to AT is referred to as "normal gaming state". Collectively, the state related to ART may be referred to as a "normal game state" or the like as a state related to ART. The "winning combination" is a type (or condition device number) of a conditional device won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal note lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation, which will be described later, and even if the game is won by a conditional device in which push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order. , If the state related to AT is a state in which push order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be a "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of games that can be executed for notification games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "number of playable notification games" is 1 or more (the game in which "0" is set may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the "number of playable notification games", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of input) obtained based on the winning of small wins (mainly the push order bell role) and the number of pushes The number of times the winning bell role is won may be adopted. Further, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, it is referred to as an "additional specialization state". The "predetermined gaming state" may be any one or a combination of a plurality of states such as the gaming state and the notification state described in this example. Further, the "specific condition" is a condition in which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and the specific condition is, for example, that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special bonus" is a bonus that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate, and is determined in advance. It operates when it is played, and the operation can be continued until the result of the game is obtained not more than 12 times, and it is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). The "first-class special bonus continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special bonus, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it may be called BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Type 2 special accessory" is an accessory that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery, and it operates when it is determined in advance, and the result of one game can be obtained. If this happens, the operation will be terminated, and it may be called CB (Challenge Bonus). The "type 2 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate the type 2 special accessory, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated in the above, and it may be called MB (middle bonus) or type 2 BB. The "ordinary accessory" is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number operates, and is a specific symbol. It operates when the combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when a first-class BB combination wins a prize, it is regarded as JACIN, and the first-class BB is always in RB during execution. Further, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which the non-RB and the RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. The "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after the stop operation is not executed is not executed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel of. The "all CB type" is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The "CB transition lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(The present embodiment)
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the rotating body type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure on the front side of the rotating drum type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The revolving gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet and a base), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPU MC is mounted) and a sub control board S (a board on which a sub control chip SC including a CPU SC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for enabling input of the game medium, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visible, the reel window D160, the input number indicator lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the number of credits. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of the game medium and the input of the number of bets (number of bets), the medal insertion slot D170, the bet button D220, and the mechanism for enabling the withdrawal of the inserted game medium are settled. Button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as a mechanism for operating the reel. The rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting the game medals necessary to start one game) are lit. It is configured as. Specifically, the input number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In the case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are two game medals bet, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212 : Lights up, 3-bet lamp D213: turns off, and when there are 3 game medals bet, 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, 2-bet lamp D212: lights up, and 3-bet lamp D213: lights up (re-game). This is not the case in the next game where is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of LEDs and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (accepting the operation), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (the operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is composed of LEDs, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game when the re-game is stopped and displayed is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 lights up (may be blinking) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. In addition, the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the total number of payouts may be made by the effect display device S40 (also referred to as the second information display unit) described later. By configuring to display, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (the number of credits) stored in the game machine as the player's medals. Further, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). The winning combination may differ depending on the stop order of D43) {so-called push order combination (sometimes referred to as a combination with push order), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination displayed as stop is different Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which the profit margin (the number of payouts, the RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different. It is configured so that the stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays, that is, the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that is most profitable to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to AT that is advantageous for the player, which is guaranteed when the game progresses (in this example, it may be referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game, and details will be described later). It is configured as. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games for which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of LEDs, and is configured to turn on when it is in the "advantageous section" and turn off when it is not in the "advantageous section" (for lighting and extinguishing timing). Will be described later). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional reel-cylinder-type gaming machine, it is easy to obtain a game medal and a special gaming state (so-called jackpot game, which is a bonus game) that is advantageous for the player. , 1st class BB, 2nd class BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the replaying combination is a predetermined value. The re-game probability fluctuation game state (RT state), the stop order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, and the RT state and the AT state are A compound ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", any one of the three "game sections" of "normal section", "standby section" and "advantageous section". Can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, and either the "normal section" or the "advantageous section" is set. Of these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other "game sections". For example, the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state. It is associated with an "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, but as will be described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also the setting control of the "game state". Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous to the player depends on the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It is possible to tell the player without telling a lie. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, but in that case, it remains. Since the state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (the information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set "game section" also affects the transition of the "game state". It can be given, and as a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a "game state" such as an AT state or an ART state, which has a relatively high degree of freedom in design. It is. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the revolving pachinko machine according to this example is the push that can acquire the small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that make up the "push order combination (combination with push order)". Sequential navigation One execution (for example, if there are seven, three, or one small winning combination as the small winning combination, the seven small winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be obtained. If there is a push order combination in which 7 or 1 cards can be obtained depending on the push order and a push order combination in which 3 cards can be obtained depending on the push order, the push order navigation in which 3 cards can be obtained is referred to here. "Not applicable to push order navigation)" or "Winning any of BB, RB, MB" and "Arbitrary end condition (40G 1 set loop lottery non-winning (AT), fixed 32G" The end condition is to satisfy "Progress (precursor), etc.)" or "Advantageous section 1500G". In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (example: there is a push order for replay to shift the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts differs depending on the push order). The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigation that can acquire the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, as the small winning combination constituting the pushing order combination, the small winning combination corresponding to the 11-card combination and the small combination including the small winning combination corresponding to the 1-card combination are formed, so that "the number of payouts is the largest". "One execution of push order navigation that can win small wins" means to notify the push order in which 11 medals can be won (11 wins can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of the game medium will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting medals, and the game medals inserted into the slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be accepted. Further, as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided to the inside of the gaming machine. When it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet medal. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by a player, and is configured so that a stored medal (credit medal) can be bet by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medals (credit medals) and / or the bet medals can be refunded to the player by the operation. There is. The game medals refunded by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the reel operations can be sequentially stopped by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating body type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be lit in various lighting modes as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game. (Fig.), Door substrate D for signal relay, medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, middle panel (intermediate decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , Upper panel D130, lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the front door DU on the back surface side so that the display unit for displaying the effect or the like can be visually recognized through the perspective region formed on the upper panel. Further, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emitting source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating cylinder type game machine P, and the decorative lamps are on the right side and the left side of the lower panel D140. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 are collectively referred to as a lamp unit). ). Further, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and input signals such as the above-mentioned stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 are attached to the door board D. Is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M described later. Further, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU to detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and to simplify the detection. It has a function of performing proper authenticity, guiding the appropriate medal to the hopper H40 described later, and returning the inappropriate medal to the medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right below the door substrate D. The middle panel is an upper part of the operation console and a lower part of the upper panel D130, and is a panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB2 attached to the operation console D190 described above are an operation on the menu screen described later and a button continuous striking effect on the sub-control board S side (continuous striking operation of the sub-input button SB). It is a member used for the progress of a mini-game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the "AT state") or the like (for example, an effect relating to whether or not a bonus has been won). The front door DU of the revolving pachinko machine P can detect the open / closed state of the medal tray D230 for receiving the game medal (or simply called a medal) released from the discharge port D240, and the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Further, in the present embodiment, the error state (door opening error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. There is. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided on each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player indicates that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on the presence / absence (or blinking) of the stop button lamp S60 and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived by. It should be noted that, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid because it is configured so that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the effective stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the effective stop button D40. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. As the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43 is lit, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other. Further, by differentizing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (they may be different such as lighting / blinking or low-speed blinking / high-speed blinking), the push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be stopped at present. For example, all the reels are rotating, and the pressing order of "left → middle → right" is correct ( When the push order bell that is the maximum number of payouts is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button are stopped. When the button lamp is turned on in blue and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is supported. The stop button lamp may be blinked in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be lit in blue.

Next, the back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a substrate) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to the substantially center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button on the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is configured to enable the rotation operation and the stop operation of the respective reel portions. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the outer circumference of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that the outer circumference of the reel portion can be visually recognized as if it were lit by the light transmitted through the reel. Further, above the reel M50, a rotating cylinder K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

A main control board M, which will be described later, controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. 1 are on the left side of the reel M50. The sub-control board S, which will be described later, controls the control of various effects performed by using The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process described later (for changing the setting), and a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value and canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. Although the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown in FIG. 2, they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M such as the board (that is, the front door DU is opened). If not, it may be installed in a position where artificial access is difficult).

Below the reel M50, a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are paid out from the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating body type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the rotating body type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s that serves as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided to guide the driver. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that the insertion reception sensor D10s does not conform to this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) is configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. If a game medal is inserted before the player operates the start lever D50 (when the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medals are selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those that satisfy the standard are satisfied. The medals that have been inserted into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (when the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the inserted game medal is inserted regardless of whether or not the standard is satisfied. Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (in the back of the flow path), a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided, and when a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted passes, the first insertion sensor D20s And, it is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it is turned on by pressing the two protruding mechanisms, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. .. Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard and has a diameter smaller than that of the game medal, for example) is inserted, two protruding mechanisms are pressed. Not done. Since the medal cannot maintain the standing state, such a medal cannot pass through the passage (the medal collapses), and is refunded to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can determine an error even when the ON time is continuous for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). ..

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s immediately after passing. This input sensor (first input sensor D20s and second input sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (they are arranged adjacent to each other at intervals smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off status (the transition order of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured in.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and the top view of the medal payout device H of FIG. The medal payout device H is operated by the settlement button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start the game) are present. It will be activated when the game medal is paid out by winning or winning. When operating, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. The payout sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (first payout sensor H10s and second payout sensor H20s on / off). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the off combination, etc.) and the on / off time. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 is normally passed, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the release urging means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Since the sensor state transition is sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , It can be exemplified that it is configured to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a specified number (maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20. , The effective line for which the winning is determined is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is one (the correspondence between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replaying role-> small role (bell, watermelon, etc.)-> bonus". For example, when the replaying role and the bonus are established at the same time, , The combination of symbols that will be the replaying role is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. In addition, when the bell and watermelon are established, if the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be pulled in (the position within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to the small winning combination with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 5 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if the line is changed to one line of the left reel M51 lower, the middle reel M52 middle, and the right reel M53 upper). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small winning combination that gives different benefits to the player depending on the pushing order is won, a small winning combination with a large number of payouts is performed when the push order is operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is controlled to be pulled in with priority (number of sheets priority control), and if the operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order, the stop display is possible (at a position within 4 frames from the stop operation). Control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning among the (arranged) symbols (the most likely to win among the combinations of multiple symbols that can be won).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotating drum type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (Nos. 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", and " There are 10 types: "sheep", "blank", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol not constituting the winning combination, but a symbol constituting the winning combination including "blank". As a combination, for example, "Watermelon B / Replay A / Blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if the type of symbol is increased / decreased or changed.

Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are a list of symbol combinations 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device, and as will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, any of them will be used. The combination of symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the above-mentioned one line). Even if the same type of symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is easy for the player to align the same symbols in a row on the line other than the effective line (in the case of watermelon, in the middle row). Three watermelon symbols are aligned in a straight line on any of the reels, such as in a straight line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols serving as a first-class BB combination (a so-called first-class special accessory-related accessory continuous operation device, which may be simply referred to as a BB combination) is used. Type 1 BB-A (RB-A is operated continuously and ends with a payout of more than 264 sheets) "Sheep / Sheep / Sheep" and Type 1 BB-B (RB-B is operated continuously to end 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" that ends with a payout that exceeds, and "White Seven / White Seven / that ends with a payout of more than 132 sheets by continuously operating RB-B). It has three symbol combinations with "White Seven". In the present embodiment, when the first-class BB combination is won and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. It is configured to draw a winning combination (small combination, replaying combination) other than the winning combination by referring to the lottery table (a method in which the table referred to during the combination lottery is not switched during the execution of one BB). (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the first-class BB combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to at the time of the combination lottery may be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is "RT1" and the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replays 04 is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to RT0 (for details on the RT state, refer to the details of the RT state. Will be described later). Since "RT0" is in an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" may be referred to as a fall. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes the replay 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is displayed at No. 18. When the symbol combination that becomes the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" can be stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous to the player, and the reels are numbered 21 to 27. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Prize 01" to "Prize 03" are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order that is most advantageous for the player. , The symbol combinations of "Prize 08" to "Prize 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed on the top, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices according to this embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, the re-game combinations are provided from re-game-A to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and are in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-game combination to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of "conditional apparatus" in the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 are used according to the stop order and stop position. It is configured so that different types of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and among the multiple types of condition devices, the condition devices with the same winning number are grouped together and are in the third column from the right, "condition device (name)". It is illustrated in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, "replay" is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three types of condition devices, "01", "re-game 02", and "re-game 03", are configured to be stopped and displayed. The "conditional device (name)" may be simply referred to as a conditional device. In addition, a condition device related to a re-game such as "re-game 01" may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as "winning 01" may be referred to as a small role. A condition device in which the BB starts when a stop display such as "Type 1 BB-A" is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, if the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB combination and the small combination will be won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small combination will be stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, while the symbol corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop and display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination does not stop and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is not displayed. Is configured to stop and display. Specifically, for example, when the condition device of the winning number 21 is "Type 1 BB-B + Winning-C", the cherry that is "Winning 12" or "Winning 13" and "Type 1 BB" Any of the black sevens that are "-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 are placed on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which (see the reel arrangement of) is located, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "winning 12" is stopped at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to the above are stopped, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Seed BB-B" is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located at the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In that case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "Type 1 BB-B" is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, "1" is placed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "Type BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the "role" item, what kind of role the "condition device (name)" plays is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to the re-game in which the re-game combination whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the "reverse push white 7-matched replay" corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. It is a condition device related to the re-game in which the state does not change and the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. However, when the reel is pushed backward (the reels are stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51), the right reel M53 The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are stopped at the operation timing located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be aligned on the lower row from the player's point of view. There is. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-B and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at "White Seven" by pushing backward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect. The "forward push black 7 set replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay combination in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel. By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is placed at the bottom of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Is stopped and displayed, and it is configured so that the black sevens appear to be aligned in the lower row when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that won the re-game-C and won the AT addition lottery, the AT addition lottery was won by executing the effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player to that effect.

In addition, the "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any of the stop buttons). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (), and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the RT state does not shift to re-game 01, re-game 02, or re-game 03. Is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on (whether or not), and when the first stop reel is set to the middle reel M52, the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the first When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)" corresponding to winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (operate any stop button). It is a condition device in which the re-game combination displayed as stopped may differ depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. Then, when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the push order of "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), stopping in the order of "123" = "left → middle → right" (correctly answering in the order of pressing) is the maximum number of winnings. The symbol combination that becomes "winning 01" that can acquire 11 game medals will be stopped and displayed. In addition, "123" and the like of "push order bell 123" indicate the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of winning sheets in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of winning sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one reel is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as "AT in progress", the push order of the re-game combination and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the "normal game state" is displayed. It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit margins of the players are different so that the push order is not navigated to the AT-related states such as. The state related to AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can obtain 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning 04 to the winning 07 is stopped, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a conditional device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a bell regardless of the push order. Further, the "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. 9 is won. In No. 14, three watermelons A are aligned in the middle of each reel. Further, the "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the diagonal line. For example, the prize number 66 in FIG. 9 is won. In No. 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium and weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device in which three bells can be aligned on the effective line, and details will be described later, but the winning is done during the BB. It is a condition device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing so. Further, the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the left reel M51 upper stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 upper stage. Although the details will be described later, it is a conditional device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by winning during the BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) is the winning number (19) that includes one type BB-A. Bonus winning information of 1, 1 type BB-B included winning number (20-23) bonus winning information 2, 1 type BB-C included winning number (24-27) bonus winning information 3 It is supposed to be. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which BB is established and which BB combination is won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning numbers 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the re-game winning combination and the small winning combination are set to 0 for the winning / re-game winning information. , 1-18 winning / re-game winning information is distributed to each condition device for the winning number including the re-game combination or the small combination. By storing the winning / re-game winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store the information relating to which re-game combination or small combination is won. The details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "directing group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned to each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the production group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball output group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and the stored payout group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT addition lottery) to execute a lottery process related to AT. It is possible to reduce the program and data capacity for this. Even if the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if the condition device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. Further, even when the condition device in which the payout group number is 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery may be executed, and in such a configuration, the payout group number is set. When the condition device to be 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery is executed, it is preferable to configure the lottery result so that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning combinations) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB combinations) relating to the small winning combination and the replaying combination in the present embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. It is a list showing (also called a winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

First, the lottery probabilities in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the re-game combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the "re-game combination" (the total appearance of all the re-game combinations) appears. The rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "re-game 04" (so-called fall re-game combination, "RT1", and a symbol corresponding to the re-game combination in a situation where the bonus is not won, which can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6. When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0" thereafter) is mainly won in "RT1", and almost never appears in "RT0". In "RT2", "re-game 04" that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. When "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it shifts to "RT0", that is, it is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40). (Displayed as "Sorry") is executed, and when "Re-game 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed even though the "re-game 04" was stopped and displayed. You can improve your sex. In addition, in such a configuration, the sound effect output by the stop display of "re-game 04" and the re-game combination other than "re-game 04" (for example, "re-game" in which the RT state does not shift). The sound effect output when "01") is stopped and displayed may be different from the sound effect, and the player recognizes that "re-game 04" is stopped and displayed by such a configuration. It can be easily configured. In addition, there are cases related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal gaming state" and may be referred to as non-AT gaming state) and states related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, "". It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress" and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when the winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT game state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, it is possible to shift the gaming state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, being careful not to let the RT state fall. In addition, "re-game 05" that can be stopped and displayed at winning number 2 or 3 (re-game role that can notify that the lottery has been won by adding AT when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly "RT1". It appears in, and almost never appears in other RT states. It should be noted that the transition of the state related to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as the replaying combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order, which is most advantageous to the player, can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. .. There is no problem even if the lottery probability is changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured so that it can overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which the bonus and the small winning combination overlap.

Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the BB roles of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single roles that do not overlap with the small roles). If a BB role is won, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB), the new winning of the BB role is invalid, and only the winning of the small role is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carrying over) the 1st class BB-A, the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won. , Class 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 0 "loss" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not in operation, the small winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are If the overlapping conditional devices are won, the new winning of the BB combination is invalid, and only the winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the player is "RT2" and has won (carried over) Class 1 BB-A, he has won "Class 1 BB-B + Winning-C" with winning number 21. In that case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C becomes valid. That is, the situation is the same as when the winning number 14 "winning-C" is won. In addition, the carry-over type 1 BB-A will continue to be in the winning state. It should be noted that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small role, and may overlap with a part of the replay role. For example, a part of the re-game combination of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying role in which the RT state can be transitioned), the bonus is also won when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to give the player expectations. In this configuration, the RT state is controlled so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have shifted the RT state (shifted to the RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), but the replay probability is not low (frequently won the replay), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, while the BB is operating, the "common bell" of the winning number 13 and the "BB medium-weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" of the winning number 17 and the "BB medium-strong rare small role" of the winning number 18 It is configured so that three small roles with "(V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and while the BB won in "AT in progress" is operating, "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" Alternatively, if the player wins the "BB medium-strong rare small role (V-shaped bell alignment)", the AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

Further, in the upper part of the figure, the appearance rate of small wins when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 steps in this example). Specifically, the number in setting 1 is 3204, the number in setting 2 is 3404, the number in setting 3 is 3604, the number in setting 4 is 3904, the number in setting 5 is 4204, and the number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player advances a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning times) of a common bell, the common bell is frequently won, thereby relating to the gaming machine being played. The game can be advanced with the expectation that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, but depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery related to AT).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT in progress state", the reel is stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small wins, also called the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game ( It is the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals to be inserted when playing with a 3-card bet. If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, it is expected. The value will be negative and the number of medals will decrease). The average number of payouts per game is "total number of replays (total number of replays 1 to 6) x number of replays (3) + small wins (11). Sum of the number of placements (small combination appearance rate) of the combination (total number of placements for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts (11 sheets) in the small combination (11-card combination) / total number of all placements (65536) ) ”Can be calculated. Further, the expected value of increase / decrease in medals per game can be calculated as "average number of medals paid out per game / number of medals inserted per game (3 cards)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, medals are expected to increase or decrease per game. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game of "RT1" is relatively large. The figures in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game is advanced in the situation where the push order navigation occurs (it is also referred to as the case where the operation is performed in the optimum operation mode or the case where the operation is performed in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in "RT1". Although not shown in "RT0" and "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is less than 1 under the condition that the push order navigation does not occur, and the medal. Will decrease. In this embodiment, even in "RT0" or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game is larger than 1 when there is push order navigation, but the expected value is not limited to 1, and "RT0" is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game when there is push order navigation may be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination to be the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but in calculating the expected value of medal increase / decrease in this embodiment, medals are used. The calculation is based on the assumption that three medals will be paid out. In addition, one game may be referred to as one game.

Further, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0" and 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. In the case of "RT2", it is 3.67137146. Further, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0" and 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", which is the RT state. Is 1.223790487 when is "RT2", and when there is push order navigation, the RT state is "RT1", which is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is the value when the setting is 1. The winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small wins and replays are just examples. For example, the expected value of medal increase / decrease per game in "RT2" where BB is being established internally (when there is push order navigation). The expected value of increase / decrease in medals) may be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, when push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), when the bonus is not aligned in the game where the bonus can be aligned. However, the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and in the situation where push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when BB is being established internally), it is intentional in a game where bonuses can be arranged. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals held by not arranging bonuses. Specifically, it is preferable to design so that the probability of losing in "RT2" is higher than the winning probability of all the small wins (winning-A1 to winning-I) won in "RT2". It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-game combination so that it is designed as follows. (If the winning probability of the re-game combination is designed to be high, the probability of losing is reduced by that amount, so the winning probability of the re-game combination is high. It is preferable to design it so that it does not become too much). In "RT2" of this example, the winning probability of all the small wins is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of all the small wins combined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the first type BB-A is assigned to 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the appearance rate of the first type BB-C is assigned to 160, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the first type BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the 1st class BB-A and the 1st class BB-C may be referred to as a setting difference BB and a setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB with a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference and a bonus with a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rate of all of the 1st class BB-A, the 1st class BB-B and the 1st class BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state (in "RT0" and "RT1"). The appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the set value. The total appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, the electrical schematic configuration of the rotating drum type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning machine according to the present embodiment, the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is centered, and the sub control board S, the door board D, the spinning board K, the power supply board E, the relay board IN, The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line in the figure shows the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

The main control board (sometimes referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game unit) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed by the spinning machine P. The main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the CPUC100 (sometimes also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC110, the built-in RAMC120, and the like are connected to the main control chip C so that data can be exchanged with each other by a bus. It is installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub control board S, the door board D, and the rotating cylinder board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K or the like {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is output toward the sub control board S. By outputting (also referred to as), the sub-control board S can execute push-order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Further, the sub-control board SC (sometimes referred to as a sub-control means, a sub-board, a sub-control means, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S is also mounted with the sub-control chip SC as in the above-mentioned main control board M. The sub-control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is configured to be connected by a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. Further, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating cylinder backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the rotating cylinder backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotating cylinder backlight S30, and the like. Is being produced. In the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example, the player covers nine ranges of the left reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, middle reel upper stage, middle stage, lower stage, and right reel upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the rotating cylinder backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is lit, and all the other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is lit. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player indicates that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30. It is configured so that the backlight effect (sometimes referred to as the backlight effect) suggested in is feasible.

On the door substrate D, the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. Lever D50, settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game {not shown, but described above. The input number indicator lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game status display device D250, and the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 are the credit number display device D200 and the advantageous section. A collection of display devices such as a display YH}, a door switch D80 for determining the opening / closing of the front door, canceling an error, and changing a set value, a game medal (or a game medal) judged to be incompatible after being inserted. , Other foreign matter) is connected to a blocker D100 or the like for refunding to the discharge port D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so as to exchange data. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, the signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, a rotating cylinder motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating cylinder sensor K20 for detecting the rotation position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating cylinder substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at a determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. There is. Further, in the rotating drum type gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the rotating cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for the reel M50 to rotate once. Further, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is set with a predetermined number (for example, 20) symbols having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel lap are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on the control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation to put out. The medal payout device H is provided with a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s, and a disk H50, which determine whether or not the medals have been paid out normally and measure the number of game medals paid out. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected to the hopper motor H80.

These various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from the power supply board E (the board that controls the presence / absence of power supply by the power supply switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a broken line arrow. As shown in the drawing, electric power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotating cylinder board K, relay board IN) are supplied with electric power. Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, the power supply board E is supplied to each of the control boards and boards.

Further, on the main control board M, a setting key switch M20 used for executing the setting change device control process described later (for changing the setting), a setting / reset capable of changing the setting value, canceling an error, and the like can be executed. Button M30, is connected. Further, the main control board M is a state related to a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) and AT which is advantageous for the player. AT lottery means to execute AT transition lottery to shift to, and AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT in progress state". It has an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown in rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown in rectangles), judgments (shown in diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are illustrated by another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is illustrated as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the development stage of a gaming machine, a gaming machine having different specifications is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (which is executed by a gaming machine having different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is executed for the first time on the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the rotating machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). .. First, in step 1000, the power of the rotating drum type game machine P is turned on, and then in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method setting) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area. (Checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off / recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all the RAMs (in step 1006). (Check result of) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the process when the power is turned off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the returned stack pointer.

If No in step 1016, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the backup error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error processing described later.

If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, it will be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). Set to). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error processing described later.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power off processing flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). (Check result in 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to the storage area that stores the set value (set value data), but the total number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section +). As a result of calculating the number of games (normal section) and the stay ratio of the "advantageous section", etc. are also within the range not included in the RAM initialization range. With this configuration, the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio) can be calculated and displayed. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. In addition, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, it is displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at 5 second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio-> continuous character ratio per 6000 games-> character ratio per 6000 games-> cumulative continuous character ratio-> cumulative character ratio". Is displayed. The continuous bonus ratio is "the number of payouts when the RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the bonus ratio is the "number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a specific range including the storage area for storing the set value (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting change device control process described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which the special game is executed. (To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed immediately after the start of the program processing due to noise or cheating). Further, although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and the information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to memorize only the information related to the random number (do not memorize other information such as various timer values) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise or the like. To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed in 1 to 6, it is necessary to perform the initialization of the RAM and return it to "1" when the set value becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the set value (set value data) is corrected after the RAM is initialized (step 1106 and). The processing of step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the most disadvantageous value for the player) in the set value (set value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC100 of the main control board M indicates to the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112. Move to. As described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used to notify the push order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure has occurred in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on) and the push order is notified, incorrect information can be notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, by making the payout number display device D270 fully turn on "88" of the 7-segment while the setting change device is operating, it can be confirmed whether or not the 7-segment is out of order, which is not suitable for the player. It is possible to prevent giving profits. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), the storage of the RAM for displaying the set value for storing the data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value. It may be configured to have an area and display a set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 1112, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added result set value (set value data) exceeds 5). The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Even if No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processes of steps 1112 to 1116 are looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error display LED (not shown) indicating that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and displays the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is terminated is executed on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (and called in another flowchart) in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUC100 of the main control board M disables interrupts (after that, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to the various LEDs and the drive output to the various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process is concerned. Is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (That is, it goes into an infinite loop, so it does not accept any operation that prompts it to return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processes of steps 1306 to 1310 are processes for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the hall computer side provides information on the error and the game progress status when the error occurs. It is possible to output to).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes at the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, valid lines for winning, etc.). In step 1203, the data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, the condition device number (winning number), the effect group number, the instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). The process of setting the data) in the RAM is also included. It should be noted that the condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information, and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set in step 1704. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (step 1420 in FIG. 21, step 1429, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Set the state related to AT determined in step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3 in FIG. 23, and step 1444-4). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state related to AT may be executed in step 1416 and step 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the state related to AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit, and the state related to AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, an “advantageous section”) in the game (the game section determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is determined by the continuity / non-conduction of the current due to (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on. ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the display of the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the storage display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been cleared (for example, the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and is set / set. Whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and then steps. Move to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the acceptance of medal insertion (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replaying role), and the next process (step 1220). Process). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process for forming the medal flow path). Specifically, when the re-game combination is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current number of stored cards (credits) is less than the predetermined value (50 cards in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is uniformly turned on. With this configuration, even if the re-game combination is established, if the number of stored cards (credits) does not reach the predetermined value, the game medal can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") where the winning probability of the re-game role is higher than that of the RT state, or when the re-game role is difficult to understand by appearance (re-game pretending to be a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game medal has not been bet or saved (credit does not exist). In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on, the condition is satisfied). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number indicator light D210). The value is displayed (the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode), and the step 1221 proceeds on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the process for sending a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode Is executing a process to send a command indicating that it will end. If No in step 1220 or 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the insertion of medals). It has two throw-in sensors for detection, and when the first throw-in sensor D20s or the second throw-in sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been accepted). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s are off (the first closing sensor D20s or the second closing sensor D20s or the second closing sensor D30s). When the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed through the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, it is determined that the CPUC100 of the main control board M has accepted the insertion of one normal game medal. Although not shown, after step 1231, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a maximum number of credits (50 in this example) and a maximum number of bets (3 in this example). Is determined, and if Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). If No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if No in step 1226 or 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Pay out one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is paid out). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not specified in the flowchart, if the previous game was a re-game, only the remaining number of credits will be subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). .. Specifically, did the situation of determining that the medal was not paid out continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal was transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps. Move to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If No in step 1241 or 1247, the process proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the start lever D50 is effective for the CPUC100 of the main control board M in step 1251 (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted, etc.). ), And it is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. If No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added to the lottery. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are "AT in progress state", "additional specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous for the player if the player does not dare to align the symbol combinations of the BB in the "advantageous BB internal medium game". In addition, it may be configured so that the AT addition lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and in such a configuration, the AT addition lottery is won in the "advantageous BB internal middle game". However, it may be configured to notify the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the execution process for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, even if No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to AT, but the lottery probability does not differ depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). Execute a lottery) is preferable. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the conditional device number management process described later.

Here, the states related to AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The "low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus combination has not been won. Since the "low probability state" is a so-called "normal state", it may also be referred to as a "normal state". (2) The "normal BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) The "normal BB state" is when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB combination is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, it is a state of being executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal medium game". (4) The "high probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to the "AT in progress state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. , It is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". As will be described later, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is made, the transition to the "low probability state" is not performed until the number of high-securing obstacle games has elapsed. (5) "AT in progress state" "" Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuous lottery described later is won, the predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT in progress state" continues (6) "Specialization precursor state". Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state", has been acquired. (7) The "additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) "Advantageous BB internal medium game" means that the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and the BB role is It is in a state of not winning a prize. (9) "Standby BB internal medium game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .. (10) The "advantageous BB state" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB role by winning the BB role in the "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". The BB combination is won and is executed when the stop display is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", or in the "low probability state". , The AT lottery was won by the BB combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination was stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal medium game". It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) The "state for producing the resurrection possibility" is a state related to the AT that shifts when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the "resurrection possibility production state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If you win, you will be in a "low probability state".

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point creation request (rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and the stop order is determined. It is determined whether or not there is a problem (required as appropriate depending on the stop position of other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, even if No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal reel game", in the game in which the push order bell was won, the stop buttons were not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1). Even if the stop button is not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), 11 symbol combinations will be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win a prize. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance / rejection check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). .. On the other hand, even if No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes all reel stop check processing. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stoptable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined to be). The determination of whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal determines whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, and the winning combination is won. In the game being played, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win a prize, the reel position actually stopped is not normal (the winning is possible as determined by the internal lottery). Even if the winning combination is not displayed as a stop from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination will be awarded. The payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area) in step 1270. Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an unrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning a prize. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a prize for paying out the game medal {the game medal obtained by the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medal will be paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (the flag that is turned on when driving the hopper motor H80), and executes the payout of one game medal. .. Next, in step 1277, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

On the other hand, if No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). .. In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the inside of the medal empty error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and steps 1282. Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). When the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal in which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the prize (the prize that became Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, transition process of the game state, etc.), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing the internal lottery in which the winning number and the number of places to be compared with the acquired random numbers are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It should be noted that the winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if the bonus and the small role are won in duplicate, or if the bonus and the replay role are won in duplicate, both the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same set number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is used for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are push order replaying roles. Since the number of consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12, which are the push order bell roles, is the same, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bells are used. The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. It should be noted that the lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 which are the push order replaying roles are acquired and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 which are the pushing order bell roles are acquired are as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259) without executing the determination (lottery) for the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processes of steps 361 to 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number) in step 3620, and proceeds to step 3604 to move to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a winning group number related to the game as an additional AT game (in the "AT in progress state", a winning number capable of adding the remaining number of AT games). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the re-game-B, the re-game-C, and the winning-D). If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, when the state related to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the payout group number related to the game added to the BB. In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). To judge. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can add the number of remaining AT games to the specializing middle addition role (in the "additional specialization state"), the payout group number related to the game can be added. In the "AT in progress state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, a replay-D1 to D3, and a winning-A1 to A6). (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 2, 13). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning game number lottery table and determines the number of AT added games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). It should be noted that determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined number of AT-added games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S receives the command. It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. In addition, the lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed even in the case of the ball ejection group numbers 7 to 11, which are the ball ejection group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus. ..

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, " If the additional winning combination is won at the time of winning in "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If "0" is determined, the number of remaining AT games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT additional games when the additional combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure, and as a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In the case, {number of games (600) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of games (100) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (30) + number of games ( 24) × number of AT additional games (100)} / total number of placements (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number of placements (500) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (200) x number of AT additional games (50) + Calculated as number of units (300) x number of AT additional games (100) + number of units (24) x number of AT additional games (300)} / total number of units (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, {number of games (300) x number of AT additional games (10) + number of games (600) x It can be calculated as the number of AT additional games (30) + the number of placements (124) × the number of AT additional games (50)} / the total number of placements (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "addition specialized state". It has become.

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-weak rare role, {number of placements (800) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (100) x number of AT addition games (10) + number of placements (100) ) × Number of AT additional games (30) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium-strong rare role, {number of placements (300) x number of AT additional games (0) + number of placements (300) x number of AT addition games (30) + number of placements (400) ) × Number of AT additional games (50) + Number of placements (24) × Number of AT additional games (300)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 35.4 (Game).

In the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the AT addition games may differ depending on the type of winning combination, but the AT addition games number may differ depending on the set value. The average values are configured so that they do not differ. Here, when the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 execute the same processing as the AT addition lottery, the winning number is 7. It is necessary to execute the process of determining whether or not the number is 8, but the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured to execute the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as the AT additional lottery, the process related to the AT additional lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 should be executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2. Will be possible.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine by the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Is a winning number for re-game-B (reverse-push white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which White Seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by replay-B, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-B. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and reverse push (“right → middle → left”). Will be executed to instruct the white sevens to be aligned), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the reverse push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the white sevens on the invalid line is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1526. Even if No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information, the payout group number, etc.) related to the game as the replay-C (or the payout group number, etc.). It is determined whether or not it is a replay (forward push black 7 replay) in which the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by the forward push. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has added the number of AT games by replay-C, in other words, the number of AT games added by winning the regame-C. It is determined whether or not it was 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is an invalid line by a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side and forward push (“left → middle → right”). (The effect of instructing the black sevens to be aligned) is set in, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command to avoid the forward push (a command to the sub control board S side, and is a command other than the forward push (“left → middle → right”). The push order is instructed, and the effect of not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to subordinate. It is configured so that the control board S side can execute the effect related to the push order navigation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the AT additional lottery is won, the fact that the AT additional lottery is won and the number of AT additional games are related. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the process of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the push order navigation is performed on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to. As an example, in a game in which the re-game-B is won and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), a production mode in which a reverse push is instructed is selected. It may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined condition (for example, a specific replay combination (for example, replay)) is executed. In a game in which (game-B or C) has been won), an effect of instructing a push order in which seven lines can be aligned on the invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous production may be executed at the same time, in that case, the final game of the continuous production) is satisfied, the number of AT games is added to the production (displayed by the production display device S40). It is an effect that the display related to the number of remaining AT games is increased. For example, (displayed as "+ 30G") may be executed. In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. The display is configured to be able to be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In a game in which B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the effect of adding the number of AT games in the game that has been played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that encourages the winning of the bonus is being executed on the sub-control board S side (inside the bonus). Then, since the winning probability of re-game-B is low (including 0%), if the push order in which 7 matches are possible is notified, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won), etc. There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect. In addition, the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery, and the sub control board S side determines that the number of remaining AT games has been added. The information includes (1) the number of AT remaining games transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the lottery with the AT added. After that, the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time on the sub control board S side. Calculate the difference between the information about the game and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. (2) Obtained as a result of the AT additional game on the main control board M side. A command regarding the number of AT additional games has been transmitted to the sub-control board S side. If the AT additional lottery is not won, a command relating to the fact that the AT additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. When the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the production mode of the effect related to the push order navigation. As an example, the replay-B may be used. It ’s a winning game Then, in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games is not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order avoids 7 sets). It may be configured to select and execute the effect mode for instructing. The lottery for adding AT was executed on the main control board M side, but the information on the sub control board S side determining that the number of remaining AT games was not added is as follows: (1) Information on the number of remaining AT games. After the AT addition lottery, transmission is performed from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, on the sub-control board S side, the difference between the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time from the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is 1, it is judged that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command regarding the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the state related to the AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the "high probability state", and by winning the BB in the "high probability state", the "advantageous BB internal medium game". After that, when the BB combination wins a prize, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", the game shifts to the "normal BB internal medium game" and does not shift to the "AT in progress state" thereafter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the BB is won in the "normal game state", the AT lottery may be won with the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and then the BB is changed. By aligning them, it will shift to the "advantageous BB state". In the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BBs are not aligned, the game section may be set as the "advantageous section" or the "standby section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a first-class BB-A or a first type BB combination in which there is no setting difference BB combination. Species BB-C) is determined. In this embodiment, the winning numbers of the BB without setting difference (winning numbers 19 and 24) and the winning numbers of the BB without setting difference and the small winning combination (winning numbers 25, 26, 27) are used. Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "advantageous BB internal middle game", and proceeds to step 1410. Further, even if No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In this embodiment, when the AT-related states are different, the AT winning rate (whether or not the AT can be won) related to the AT lottery is different, but when the AT-related states are the same. The AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (if the BB is won in the "high probability state", the AT is always won regardless of the set value = then " Transition to "AT in progress").

Next, in step 1410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a small condition device related to the game that can shift from a “low probability state” to a “high probability state” by winning. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a cherry). In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem even if it is changed). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter to the “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 1 for the high securement failure counter KHc (the final game of the high securement failure, which is the 10th game since the "high probability state" is reached. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is the "high probability state", the game section is the "advantageous section", and when the game section is the "advantageous section", the push order It is configured so that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed once or more, or the predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) "advantageous section" continues. Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed more than once, the "high-probability state" will not end. ). If the BB combination is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be performed at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as a push order combination (a winning number in which the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit margin of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 are provided. In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation of the winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. In addition, even if No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426 or step 1428, the process proceeds to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition to the "high probability state" is made, 10 games, which are high-securing obstacle games, are set in the high-securing obstacle counter KHc, and until the counter value becomes 0. Is configured not to transition to a "low probability state". It should be noted that such a lottery method is just an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after the transition to the "high-probability state" (the stay in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), After the lapse of the 10 games, a lottery for shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game. The AT lottery combination (low probability AT lottery combination, high probability AT lottery combination) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all the set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, watermelon B With a 1/2 chance of winning the game, you can get the right to move to the "additional specialization state" and move to the "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". , AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, a lottery (specialization) to acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" even if you win the watermelon B It is configured so that it does not execute the state transition lottery) and does not shift to the "specialization precursor state" and the "additional specialization state". The lottery is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" (also known as the specialized state transition lottery). It may be configured to be able to execute (sometimes referred to as), and in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialized state" is given. If the lottery to be won is won, it may be configured so that the next game that wins the lottery can be (shifted to) a "specialized precursor state" or an "additional specialized state", or the AT counter value. May be configured to be (or transition to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" when becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or the game won in the lottery. After executing a predetermined number of games, it may be configured so that it can become (or shift to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state". In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not always necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state". For example, the configuration is such that the transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state" can be performed directly. You may. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC100 of the main control board M can execute a lottery in which the conditional device related to the game can execute a lottery to acquire the transition right to the specialization transition combination (“additional specialization state””. It is a role, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the “specialization precursor state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is reached). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery to win with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to step 1444-1 (AT state shiftable condition). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirements. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game to the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the final AT game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to 50 games, which is the initial value, again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the final AT game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of AT (the first game newly in the "AT in progress" state or the AT counter M60). The first game) may be configured to perform a continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it has already been determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue) in the "AT in progress state". , The effect during AT can be different depending on whether the continuous lottery is won or not. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (song is played, etc.) in a situation where the number is 1 or more (during the execution of AT), or to execute an effect in which it is definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state for effecting whether or not it can be restored. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is set to the resurrection role (in the next game by winning the condition device related to the game in the "resurrection possibility production state"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the "AT in progress state", in other words, a role that can pull back the AT). Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection combination includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus combination (only the BB combination without setting difference, and does not include the BB combination with setting difference). When the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection role, it is said that the resurrection lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transitionable condition. On the other hand, if No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to the "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Even if No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game is the final AT game and the continuous lottery is not won, the game shifts to the "resurrection possibility production state" and is revived in the "revival possibility production state". If the lottery can be won, it is configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" from the next game. In addition, although the "state for revival possibility production" is "advantageous section", the lottery related to AT (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) in the "AT in progress state" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. It is configured, and the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in-progress state" and the "revival possibility production state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state related to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, “specialization precursor”. Satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of precursor games, are exhausted in "State"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT in the next game and thereafter, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, "specialization". If the number of precursor games is exhausted in "precursor state", it will be decided as "additional specialization state"). In addition, even if No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC100 of the main control board M guarantees a high secured fault counter value command (in this example, it is a command to the sub side, and the current high secured fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command related to the remaining number of games that has been played) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB internal medium game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security fault counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450). Even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1450).

In this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB combination (BB combination with no setting difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is won. No (after that, it does not shift to the "AT in progress state") On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) is won in the "high probability state", the AT transition lottery is won (then the "AT in progress state" is set. However, it is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as the AT lottery, and the states related to the AT, which is the "advantageous section", are "high probability state A" and "high probability". When configured to have a "state B", if the condition device A is won in the "high probability state A", the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device is won in the "high probability state B". If A is won, the AT transition lottery may be won by 1/2. If the AT transition lottery is won, the state shifts to the "AT preparation state", which is the preparation state until the transition to the "AT in progress state" as the state related to AT, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation"). It may be configured to shift to the "AT in progress state" when 10 games have passed since the shift to the "state".

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replay winning related to the game). Set the command related to information). Next, in step 1454, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the condition device related to the game is a combination with a push order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the push order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a push order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and gives an instruction. It is stored in the RAM address for storing the number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When executing the push order guessing game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See FIG. 34 for an image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the reel stop order, which is the most profitable for the player, on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as a push order navigation, a push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left → middle → right" is displayed by the push order display device D270 as "= 1". In both the push order bell and the push order replay, the display is configured to be "= 1". In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of displaying the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" on the push order display device D270 in the game related to the push order bell, and in the game related to the push order replay game, " The display mode may be different from the case where the push order navigation of "left → middle → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of the push order navigation display mode displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is used as the predetermined address of the RAM. Remember in. Here, when the winning / replay winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, it is considered as a high profit related to the game. The push order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing mask processing {processing for keeping the winning / replay winning information (particularly information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game. By configuring it to send to, it is configured so that the highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As the mask processing method in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (winning / replay winning information having a similar role is preferable, and for example, the RT state shifts depending on the pushing order. A plurality of winning / re-gaming winning information that can stop and display a combination of symbols serving as a re-gaming role is set as one production group number (for example, winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 are designated as production group 4). The group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the provided winning / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replay after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. Also, even in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information among the existing winning / replay winning information such as the production group number is used as one winning / replay winning information for winning / replaying after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the game winning information to be provided (for example, the winning / re-gaming winning information 4 to 6 is the winning / re-gaming winning information 19 (newly provided winning) which is the winning / re-gaming winning information after mask processing.・ Re-game winning information), etc.). If it is determined that the game is to notify the operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to AT on the main control board M, the winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In this configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets it in the register area), and then steps. Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus is won can be recognized by the sub side) (for example, the command to the sub side). It is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In the present embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, and the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as a display example of the push order navigation, in the case of "AT in progress", (1) when the fall replay combination is included → the fall replay combination is not stopped and displayed. The order is navigating, (2) in the case of bells (1 card combination, 11 card combination) → the push order with the largest number of payouts is navigating, etc. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. (A number that can specify) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous push order for the player), while the sub-control board S when the game section is a "normal section" It is configured so that the production group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game, including the winning / replay winning information in which the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order, is used as it is on the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", the winning / replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ depending on the pushing order. In the case of winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

When the game section is not an "advantageous section", mask processing is executed when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. In addition, the production group number is the winning / replay winning information, and the winning / replay winning information related to the winning combination (for example, the replaying role including the falling replaying role, the push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and numbers are assigned. It is configured to execute mask processing {processing to keep the winning / replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) confidential} on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and then transmit it to the sub-control board S. This prevents a situation in which the information related to the winning / replay winning information is recognized due to an illegal act, and the pushing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer to measure. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts by newly setting the minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an output request during reel rotation start standby related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, a command for indicating that the reel starts rotating can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the game situation which is advantageous for the player such as when the state related to AT is "AT in progress state". It is a game section that is easy to set in. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is initially set to 1500, which is the subtraction counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section". The counter value of (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the "advantageous interval") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is the “AT in progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). In addition, even if No in step 3402, step 3408 or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the "AT in progress state", the AT counter value for each game is subtracted, but the "advantageous BB state" and "advantageous BB state" In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the state shifts from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is maintained while maintaining the AT counter value. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state"-> "specialization precursor state"-> "additional specialization state". Even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible not to subtract 1 from the AT counter value when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. You may control it. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the AT counter value is "30". Is stored, or "30 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored, but is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α" which is the sum of the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery (note that the "α" obtained by the addition lottery is , Without notifying in the game, "α" is set in a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game). You may notify). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of remaining AT games is subtracted for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning when the bonus is won in a state where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress" can be executed. That is, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games that encourages whether or not the bonus is won can be executed by using the effect display device S40 or the like to enhance the interest of the game. The number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is "30", or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of winning and adding as a result of the AT addition lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, continuous production over multiple games is executed to incite whether or not the bonus has been won, and the AT counter value is "1". , The winning number (or winning / re-game winning information, or ball output group number) in which the game can be executed and the AT addition lottery can be executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". If is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "0". Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing continuous production may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transitionable conditions are the execution of RAM clear (RAM initialization), the stop display of the re-game (in this example, the stop display of the re-game 04), and the winning / starting of the BB. -It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transitionable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). (Refer to the figure), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). Even if No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the shift timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for shifting the RT state (memorizing the RT number in the RAM) can be appropriately determined.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and the RT states are satisfied by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. Will be migrated. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition to "RT0" is performed. The stop display of the re-game 04 is specifically when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1". , Re-games 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if the "re-game-D1" is won in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. , The RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

In addition, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the winning game (the condition device related to the first type BB-A, B, C operates. ) And the RT state shifts to "RT2". In addition, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (type 1 BB-A, B, C operates), it shifts to "type 1 BB-A, B, C". Further, when BB ends at "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (operation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the process shifts to "RT1". If the state related to AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. Since the push order navigation does not occur in the state, when the "re-game-D1 to D3" is won, the wrong push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button). One of the three choices is the correct push order and the re-games other than the re-game 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are the incorrect push order and the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the game 04, the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts from "RT1" to "RT0". In addition, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", the BB is won, and if the BB ends, the RT state is reached. Will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push-order navigation occurs, and even when "Re-game-D1 to D3" is won, re-game 04 Will navigate the correct push order that does not stop and display, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transitionable condition is satisfied in the game. The conditions for shifting to the AT state are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state" is completed, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, and (3) the revival lottery is won. Satisfy if you do. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M newly shifts to the "AT precursor state", and the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, and "AT in progress" The number of games in which the subtraction is started after the transition to the "state" is set in the AT counter M60, and the transition to step 1756 is performed. Even if No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a high-probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT in the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the number of high-securing obstacle games (10 in this example) in the high-securing obstacle counter, and performs the next processing (processing of step 3500). Transition. Even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal medium game", by winning the BB, the game shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and the AT game in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and the "advantageous BB state" shifts to the "AT in progress state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is added by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, when the player is informed that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT in progress state". It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, instead of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the initial value is set at the start of the "AT in progress state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT in progress state" or in a state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added. It is possible to enhance the interest in the additional production that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process in step 1400 described above. Further, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game (the state related to AT is "AT in progress") after the end of BB. (The subtraction does not start during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , "Advantageous BB internal game", "Advantageous BB state", and "Resurrection possibility production state", and there are 10 AT-related states. The state will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the "AT in progress state" and the special state transition lottery that wins in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "specialization precursor state". In addition, when 10 games have passed (digested) after shifting to the "specialized precursor state", the game is configured to shift to the "additional specialized state". As the game section, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal medium game", and "normal BB state" are set to "normal section", and "high probability state" and "during AT". The seven AT-related states of "state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", "advantageous BB state", and "recoverable / non-recoverable production state" are now "advantageous sections". Set. That is, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" are transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. Set to "normal section". In addition, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the "AT in progress state", the "specialization precursor state", or the "additional specialization state". However, the game state is maintained.

As described above, when the AT counter M60 is in the "AT in progress state" and the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery is not won, the "Resurrection possibility / non-recovery effect state" is set. If the revival lottery is won in the "resurrection possibility production state", it is possible to return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the "revival possibility production state", the process shifts to the "low probability state" and the "advantageous section" is changed to the "normal section".

When the BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "high probability state", the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" To move to. Also, when the "AT in progress state" is won with no setting difference BB (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C), the setting difference BB operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, " It shifts to "AT in progress". In addition, when the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) is won in the "Resurrection possibility production state", the setting difference BB operates, and the "Advantageous BB state" ends. Also shifts to "AT in progress" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the "state for effect of resurrection", the BB with a setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with a setting difference becomes independent. If the winning number is related to the BB role (winning number 20), it will be in a "low probability state" after the end of the BB (because the BB role with a setting difference will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with a setting difference will be rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB (because the rare role will be the trigger to win the revival lottery).

In addition, when the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) is won in the case of the "advantageous section" and the "high probability state", the BB with the setting difference operates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends. Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to AT that shifts after the end of the "advantageous BB state" is after the end of the BB that was won during AT ("AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state") (setting difference). (Both with BB and BB without setting difference) shifts to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and during non-AT ( After the end of the BB with no setting difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT in progress state". In addition, there is a setting difference in winning during non-AT (“high probability state”), and after the end of BB, the state shifts to “high probability state”.

The state related to AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or a "high probability state", and the AT lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift to the "precursor state" by winning the game, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. By winning, the AT lottery is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, it shifts to the "precursor state" and shifts to the "low probability state" or "high probability state" after 16 to 32 games have passed. It may be configured to do so. Further, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as the game section. For example, when the game property is such that the AT lottery is executed by winning the "cherry", BB If you win the "BB + cherry" where the cherry and the cherry overlap, and you win the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + cherry" wins is configured as the "waiting section". You may. In this way, by providing the "waiting section", the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and the BB is won and the AT is won in the "low probability state". Since the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combinations are complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up) in the case of winning the lottery, the AT lottery is won. It is possible to incite the player whether or not it is. Further, when the BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB. Execute an AT additional lottery different from the BB won in the "AT in progress state" as the BB won in the "additional specialization state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB won in the "AT in progress state") It may be configured so that the number of AT games is added and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, if the BB is elected in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB. The AT additional lottery may be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "additional specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section is a "normal section" which is relatively low profit for the player and relatively high for the player. It has two game sections, an "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to the state related to the current AT and the game section corresponding to the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has a counter value of 0 in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to AT (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialized precursor state" is described. Things will also be 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the "advantageous section" other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. This is the case when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "advantageous section" is completed and the "normal section" is set after the next game, the information related to AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) Since all the information related to) is cleared, the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. Information related to the AT to be cleared by the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the game remaining number counter YKc-1 in the advantageous section, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, this information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed, but depending on the RAM clear when the setting is changed, "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , "The number of stored sheets" and the like are also cleared, but depending on the process of step 3515 (process at the end of the advantageous section), "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" or "RT state". , Information related to "number of stored sheets" etc. is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range when the setting is changed and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed) are different. It should be noted that the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, so that the "conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state" may be held. In addition, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. By making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the range of the start address to be cleared and the range of the addresses to be cleared in the clearing process. When the "advantageous section" is completed, a command relating to the end of the "advantageous section" is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" and the information related to how many games the "AT in progress state" was executed is not deleted. ing. However, when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the sub-control board S side and information on how many games were executed in the "AT in progress state". Will also be erased.

When the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the game number counter YKc-1 remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, (1) when the current AT-related state is the "high probability state". In the next game, the state related to AT becomes "low probability state". (2) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal middle game", the state related to AT becomes "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game. "Normal BB internal game", (3) If the current state related to AT is "Advantageous BB state", the state related to AT will be "Normal BB state" in the next game, (4) Currently If the state related to AT is "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "recoverable / non-recoverable production state", the state related to AT is "low probability" in the next game. It is configured to be "state" (because the information related to AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” is completed, and proceeds to step 3528. It is configured to turn off the advantageous section indicator YH when the "advantageous section" ends and is set to the "normal section", but the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the “advantageous section” ends and becomes the “normal section”. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off before the start lever D50, which enables the start of the next game, is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is newly set to the "advantageous section" in the next game (it is decided to be set from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all the set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the game in the new "advantageous section" (newly "" If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to replay, set appropriately during the period (until the timing when the start lever operation becomes effective in the new "advantageous section" game). May be good.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power cutoff process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power failure detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of operation and the sensor detection state of these operating members are sampled at the interrupt interval T. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to control of the drive of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. In addition, even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, all the error flags are turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, and the door switch flag are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (an error currently occurring) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes as in the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (send the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), commands related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between the stop of all reels and the start of the next game), commands related to the state related to AT (sent between the stop and the start of the next game), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating cylinder drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be added that the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, in step 6102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after the execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, even if No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M executed all interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not the timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. Even if No in step 6112 or 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state (after executing the process of step 6116), and then the reel sensor is reeled (corresponding to the process of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel) is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if No in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M has elapsed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state in step 6124. Determine if it has been done. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has reached a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 steps can be rotated with 400 interrupt processes), and the reel rotation speed is constant. It is longer than the time for one rotation (one turn) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, which is the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, how far is the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance until the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel drive state becomes the constant speed state? However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel reacceleration process, and shifts to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. , The reel driving state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) is executed. Even if No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. The reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above, and the reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process are interrupt processes for each combination of exciting phases of the stepping motor and each combination of exciting phases. The number of times of execution may be different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop process according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M becomes the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, and for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is obtained by operating the stop button. It is determined whether or not the reel has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration standby state, and shifts to step 6134. On the other hand, even if No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and shifts to the process of step 6142. Even if No in step 6134 or step 6136, the process proceeds to step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing at which the reel deceleration process is executed ends) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1612). Even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotational operation of the reel M50 of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed). Then, when any of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor having four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor), the phase to be excited is switched, and the stepping motor is changed to 1-2. Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of exciting phases). In the figure, of Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is specified to be excited is shown in the column of “Phase to be excited” (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" in the upper part of the figure, the drive state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the drive pattern according to each drive state. The drive is controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis represents the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis represents time and the time elapses to the right. There is. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, and this is limited to the case where the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as pressing the reel by hand or causing step-out. It is not (the case where the reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stopped state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped, and when the "reel stopped state" is in the "reel stopped state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is in an unexcited state.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. .. Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 until the acceleration processing (reel acceleration processing) of the stepping motor is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time from the time when the reel driving state becomes the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is timed, and the start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If this is done, the "reel rotation start standby state" is set.

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from the state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is “reel constant speed” It is configured to update to "state"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends by executing one more timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start standby state" to the "reel acceleration state", and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times to drive the reel. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final in the "reel acceleration state". The combination of exciting phases "φ3, φ0" is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, which is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of exciting phases. (When the reel rotation abnormality does not occur). With this configuration, the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed can be stably executed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, an image of step motor excitation when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” and an image of the step motor excitation when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "exciting phase" is a combination of the exciting phases, and the "interrupt execution count" indicates the number of times the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the exciting phases is executed. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to excite 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupts the interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing 30 times at "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing 15 times at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" Interrupt processing 8 times at (KF) "φ2, φ3" → Interrupt processing 2 times at (KG) "φ3" → Interrupt at (KH) "φ3, φ0" The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times the interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times the interrupt processing is executed is gradually reduced by the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing the reel constant speed maintenance process), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) "φ0" → (TB) at "φ0, φ1". Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) Interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) Interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " Interrupt processing is executed once at "φ0" → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once for each interrupt processing. It is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). As described above, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the interrupt process is executed once with the combination of the exciting phases of 1.

Next, in a situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is the "reel deceleration standby state". Is updated to. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of exciting phases is switched for each interrupt process), and is a "reel deceleration standby state". "" Indicates a state from the operation of the stop button by the player to the start of the stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, the reel slides corresponding to the number of slip frames). .. The period of this drive state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time in order to stop the rotation of the reel. Performs 4-phase excitation to excite everything. Then, when the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

As described above, in the reeling game machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel reacceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing. Further, whether the reel has been accelerated normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is the process of step 6124 (the reel drive state is changed to the reel constant speed state). Judgment is made after a predetermined time has passed since the update), but the reel is not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index in the process of step 6124 (reel rotation failure). When it is determined that the reel acceleration process has occurred), the reel acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel rotation failure is subsequently performed. If the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be reached to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. By detecting the index by the reel sensor until a predetermined time elapses after being updated to, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the reacceleration process, and the player is executed by executing the reel reacceleration process. Can make it difficult for the game to proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). Further, by configuring so that the process of determining whether or not the reel acceleration is normally executed is not executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Since it is configured in this way, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process of the spinning machine according to this example, it acts as follows. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished execution → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of speed maintenance processing → Reel rotation failure is detected → Reel reacceleration processing is executed It is configured to be able to operate as described above.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), step-out occurs, and the reel accelerates. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, by configuring the reel reacceleration process to be executed even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed → Reel acceleration processing execution ends → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process It is configured to be able to operate as described above. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the game can proceed smoothly by configuring the reel re-acceleration process to be executed when the reel rotation failure is subsequently detected. Will be possible. Further, as described above, even if a reel acceleration process occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed and an interrupt similar to the case where the reel acceleration process does not occur is interrupted. When the reel acceleration processing is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration processing is terminated. With this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel reacceleration process. it can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Power off processing is executed during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovery from power off → Reel acceleration processing is continuously executed (not yet) Execute reel acceleration processing of processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue execution of reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of execution of reel acceleration processing → Reel drive The state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power off processing is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index within that time, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the power off processing is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. It is configured not to execute the reel reacceleration process when the sensor detects the index, and by such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated) due to the reel reacceleration process. Can be made less likely to occur. The power off processing may be referred to as a power off processing.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, the final reel (the reel rotating to the end, also referred to as the third reel) is stopped after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), and the winning combination is obtained. Although it is configured so that the payout of the game medal can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payout of the game medal may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power cut occurs → The third reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Detects power cut → Executes power cut processing → Power restore → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to stop display → execute the process related to the payout of the game medal so as to act as described above. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in the game such as the above-mentioned common bell, which wins a small winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button if it is won. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after a power outage in the amusement park, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of slip frames is the maximum), the power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured to complete the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Winning role in the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning combination, is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal processing) → The processing related to the payout of the game medal is executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and even when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , Accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out, and the player is less likely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the process related to the payout of the game medal, and as a result, the first reel rotation failure occurs. 3 It is applicable when the reel corresponding to the stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position (it can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure illustrated below). In the above action 2, the action in the game in which the winning combination is won is illustrated. That is, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (if the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions, the same action is obtained. May be good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) (Accepts the operation of) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → The process related to the payout of the game medal is executed. The winning combination in the above-mentioned or later-described action is the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game. Regardless, it may be a winning combination that can be won (for example, a common bell), or a winning combination that may or may not be won depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, etc.) It may be a cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is set to the predetermined game state. Even if the reel rotation failure occurs in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform a lamp effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to poor reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the scheduled stop position due to poor reel rotation (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs and the stable supply of power to the game machine stops → No. Operate the 3rd stop button as the 3 reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is a game Cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position from the perspective of the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal. (This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the reel role corresponds to the bell role, which is a winning combination from the player's point of view. The symbol combination to be played was not stopped and displayed, but when the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Execution of processing related to payout of game medals It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of detecting the power outage, the timing of stopping the power supply to the gaming machine due to the power outage, the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing of returning the power supply are , Not limited to the above timing, the timing to detect the power outage and the power to the gaming machine due to the power outage occur during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medal. It suffices if there is a timing at which the supply of the above is stopped, a timing at which the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269, and a timing at which the power is restored. Is applicable to all cases where the machine cannot stop at the planned stop position (the same applies to the action including the power off, which is illustrated below). With this configuration, the power was cut off immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button was accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination could not be stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. Even in this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal is paid out after the power is restored (the hopper is driven to pay out the game medal). It is possible to execute not only the payout from the reeling port but also the display (the number of credits) of the credit number display device), and it is configured so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be done. The timing at which the power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped may be referred to as the timing at which the power supply is cut off. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power failure does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect) in which the back lamp (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) blinks, the game state is set to the predetermined game state. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won, even if the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform the effect. Further, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is at the scheduled stop position due to the power failure. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the second stop, or when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the power failure (the same can be applied to other actions). Is). In this example, "the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" and "the stable supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is 0, but the power supply. The power supplied to the gaming machine may be less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is in operation due to a disconnection or the like, or the power supply to the gaming machine may be cut off.

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Reel wins from the player's point of view Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally completed, for example. , In the lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol corresponding to the loss is processed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the combination is stopped normally) → The game medal is not paid out. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. Note that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position by looking at it → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (stop). This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the button operation has been completed normally. For example, in a game that has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. , When the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → Power recovery → The game medal is not paid out It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game that has been lost as a result of the winning combination lottery, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game medal is displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to execute the payout, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. The above action 5 is not limited to loss, and for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), a reel rotation failure occurs. It should be added that it can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Further, in such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's point of view is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (non-recoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Bonus role to the reel from the player's point of view For example, the symbol combination corresponding to (BB combination) is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the player's stop button is displayed. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing of the game machine corresponding to the operation of) → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to act as follows. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to a bonus combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the bonus will be given even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, it can be a fair game machine, and it can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. The above action 6 is not limited to loss. For example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → The bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be illustrated that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is normal in the judgment process of step 1269. (When it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the game has been lost, the player As you can see, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel, but the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player is normally performed. (When executed)-> Power recovery-> The bonus does not start, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a bonus role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the game is played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured so that the bonus of the medal is not started, and it can be a fair game machine and can be a game machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the game field. The above action 6 is not limited to loss. For example, a game in which the bonus role has not been won (not inside the bonus) and the bonus role has not been won (the replay role has been won). It should be added that it can be applied even when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in a game, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In the above action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is illustrated. That is, when the power supply is not cut off, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and step 1269 In the judgment process, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → The bonus is not executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power is not cut off in the game in which the bonus combination is won or inside the bonus, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, and in the judgment process of step 1269 It can be illustrated that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus in which the freeze is executed and a bonus in which the freeze is not executed. , Whether or not the freeze is executed may be different depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the bonus starts, In addition, the freeze at the start of the bonus may be executed so as to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed as a stop. Also, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to poor reel rotation in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and the player can proceed with the game without discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game that won the bonus role → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view However, in the determination process of step 1269, it may be configured so that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the power is restored → the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed as described above. With this configuration, in the game executed in the situation where the bonus is won, or in the game where the bonus combination is won, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. , Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is accepted and the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Even so, it can be configured to start the bonus and perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is significant for players who would not start the bonus due to a power outage in situations where the bonus should start. It can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage, and the player can proceed with the game without discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → Operate the 1st reel stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accept operation) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed as stopped, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally). For example, in a game that has been lost, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the loss is dealt with by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the stop control for displaying the symbol combination is stopped normally) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up newly. It may be configured. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a replaying role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost due to the internal processing of the game machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. No automatic betting is performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the combination in which the RT state other than the re-game combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 10 is not limited to the loss, and is applied to, for example, in a game in which the re-game combination is not won, when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Supplement what you can do. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 does not light up anew.
In addition, the automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) because the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) bet in the game in which the re-game combination is won is displayed as stopped by the re-game combination. It is supposed to bet automatically even if there is no operation of or the game medal is inserted from the medal slot.
On the other hand, if the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the re-game combination is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as 2nd reel stop operation → 2nd reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of (accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is from the player It is not possible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position by looking at it → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( This is a case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a lost game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view. However, when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the game machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power recovery → stop display of the re-game combination The corresponding automatic betting is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed by the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost due to the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the stop button corresponding to is accepted and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. However, automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 is not newly lit. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, the gaming machine It becomes a loss in the internal processing, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. If the stop control for displaying the stop display is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (the symbol combination corresponding to the combination in which the RT state other than the re-game combination shifts is stopped and displayed. The same applies to cases). With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the gaming field. The above action 11 is not limited to the loss, and is applied, for example, in a game in which the re-game combination is not won, when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. I will add that you can do it. That is, when the power supply is not cut off, the following actions are obtained (applicable when the rotation failure and the power failure do not occur in other actions).
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as stopped from the player's point of view, and the symbol is displayed in the judgment process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal → automatic betting is not performed, and the reel game lamp D290 does not light up anew. On the other hand, if the power is not cut off in the game in which the replay role is won, the following actions are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel Stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel Update the drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, and the determination process in step 1269 Judges that the symbol combination is normal → Automatic betting is executed, and the re-game lamp D290 lights up anew (if the re-game combination was won in the previous game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up. To continue)
Such an action can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (3rd stop button (Accepts the operation of) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Replay on the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination is performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is set. It may be configured to act as described above for newly lighting. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is a replay, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is supported. Even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic betting is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 12, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won in the re-game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Execute power off processing → 3 reel is the player Cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel from the player's point of view, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal. → Power recovery → Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the re-game combination may be performed, and the re-game lamp D290 may be newly lit to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replay is played on the reel from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left) is at the timing when the re-game is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is normally executed, the re-game combination is used. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the re-game lamp D290 is newly turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is not stopped and displayed, the re-gaming is performed even if the reel is visually recognized. Even if it cannot be determined whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the game situation by visually recognizing whether or not the automatic betting is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 13, if the re-game combination in which the RT state shifts when the stop display is displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the role of shifting the RT state (sometimes called the RT transition role) → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts the stop button Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state shifts as described above. It may be configured to work. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , Right reel), and if the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. The RT state will shift even if is not displayed as stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. In addition, the RT transition combination is a combination of shifting to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping and displaying the symbol combination in the predetermined RT state, and the RT transition combination depending on the staying RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination, but in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be the RT transition combination, and in the RT state A, the predetermined combination A is the RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game that wins the role of shifting the RT state (sometimes called the RT transition role) → Updates the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Executes the constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts the stop button Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off occurs Then, the supply of power to the game machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation of the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the power failure is detected. → Execute power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is not displayed as stopped, but step 1269 In the judgment process of, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored).
It may be configured to work as described above. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle) is at the timing when the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the game machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. The operation of the stop button corresponding to (reel, right reel) is accepted, and when the stop control for displaying the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if the combination is not displayed as stopped, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → 3rd Operate the 3rd stop button as the reel stop operation (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel is the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) to → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → The RT state does not shift. It may be configured to act like this. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not won the RT state transition role (sometimes called RT transition role) → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button Reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Power off Power supply to the game machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power off Detects → Executes power off processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role from the player's point of view is stopped and displayed. In the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state does not shift. It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition role, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition role from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player during AT, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Despite this, even if the RT state shifts (falls) due to poor reel rotation and the symbol combination appears to be stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is unintended by the player. It can be a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state originally possessed by the gaming machine, so that the manager of the gaming field can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game From the perspective of the person, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel. → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stop display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Reel rotation failure occurs → 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel from the viewpoint of the person (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the 1st reel and the 2nd reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line) → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is stopped first. And stopped at the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position of this example, the tempai sound is not output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop at the stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Action 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels when viewed from the player ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second. It did not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The 2nd reel reaches the scheduled stop position as seen from the player Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view (when the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the first The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel.) → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols constituting the bonus symbol. If the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Bonus confirmation Tempai sound will not be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the combination lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed during the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and a bonus symbol is configured. The combination of symbols did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbol will be tempted. If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will experience reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect what you are doing. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the operation).

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view → Power supply Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel Operation → 1st reel stop display → Power supply cutoff occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Power cutoff is detected → Power cutoff processing is performed Execution → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels when viewed from the player ( When the 2nd reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Power recovery → Tempai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And on the effective line on the 2nd reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed → Tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st stop button as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel stops display → 2nd stop button is operated as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen by the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective line on the second reel. → The tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing of outputting the tempai sound from the speaker may be before the end of the execution of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first. Stopped as a stop and a second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel has an abnormality due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. Can be done. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, the power is cut off immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbols are the first stop and the second stop. Even if the bonus symbol did not stop, if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tempai sound would be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to be tempted. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power failure, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption due to the output from the speaker. it can. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the power off processing is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → 1st reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view Symbol combination is stopped display → Bonus confirmation Tempai sound is not output from the speaker Also
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to a power off → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Turn off the power Detect → Execute power off processing → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position from the player's point of view → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels from the player's point of view The symbol combination does not stop and display (when the 2nd reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the 1st and 2nd reels) → Bonus confirmed from the speaker The tempai sound may be output so as to act as described above. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
Reel rotation starts as a game inside the bonus or won the bonus → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line on the 1st reel and the 2nd reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Execute the constant speed state maintenance process → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → The first reel Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Display the stop of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation of the 2nd reel → Move (rotate) the 2nd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the person. → The bonus confirmation tempai sound is not output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. The bonus confirmation tempai sound is a tempai that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the effective line (tempai) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol is tempted, if it is stopped at the planned stop position of this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempted. Will not output the bonus confirmation tempai sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the power outage, the player will have an abnormality in the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, the power off processing occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The constituent symbol combinations did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol tempais when stopped at the planned stop position in this example. If it was planned, a bonus confirmation tempai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power outage, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to the power outage due to the output from the speaker. Can be detected as soon as possible. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the power off processing is executed immediately after the operation is performed.

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The 3rd reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player (rotation) No → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination may be configured to stop display → the max bet lamp lights up as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed again. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → The game when the power is cut off Power supply to the machine is stopped → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power off → Power off Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to do so. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel starts rotating as a game that wins the predetermined replay role → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped display → Max bet lamp does not light up Also
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and the player has not won the replay role → Reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → As the stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the 3rd stop button (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Move (rotate) the 3rd reel to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp lights up. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, in the game in which the re-game is won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed. In addition, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the max-bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max-bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game in which the re-game has not been won, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is stopped and displayed. By turning on the max bet lamp, the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is effective, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed.

<Action 25>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends, Freeze at end of bonus may be configured to work as described above. In addition, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the 3rd stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. In such a case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus, so that the player can promptly indicate that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

<Action 26>
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop the power supply to the game machine due to the power failure → 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (Accepts the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power off → Executes power off processing → Moves the 3rd reel to the planned stop position as seen by the player ( (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, as an action when the power supply is not cut off,
It is a game during the execution of the bonus, and the winning combination has been won, and the game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is given to the player, so that the end condition of the bonus is satisfied. Rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of stop button is enabled → 1st stop button is operated as stop operation of 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped Display → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Display the stop of the 2nd reel → Operate the 3rd stop button as the stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, the power off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if there is no such thing, the player will be notified that the bonus has ended normally by executing the freeze at the end of the bonus as well as the end of the bonus, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of discomfort to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration processing in the spinning machine according to this example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of reel acceleration processing until the rotation failure occurs when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process = B
Execution period of reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of rotation failure when the rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing = C
If
A = B + C
It is configured to be.
Also,
Number of interrupt processing executions for reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration processing = D
When a spinning reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure occurs = E
When a rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, the number of interrupt processing executions of the reel acceleration process after the rotation failure occurs = F
If
D = E + F
It is configured to be.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power off / off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 35. First, in step 1902, the CPUC100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processed flag (for example, updates the inside of the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculation) based on the calculated checksum. The lower 1 byte of the checksum, or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC100 of the main control board M prohibits the writing of the RAM, and the process proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for a reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a push order display of the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table showing the correspondence with. For example, the instruction number for notifying "middle-> right-> left" as the pressing order indicates that it is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “left → middle → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”). The image displayed in is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 is whether the number of medals paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "= 1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the left side is "=" and the right side is a number as the display of the push order display device D270. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an “advantageous section” is lit. At the same time, a display of "remaining 40 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT in progress") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, the right side in the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). There is. In addition, since the current game section is the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that, among the conditional devices in which the combination displayed as stopped depending on the reel stop order is different, the combination with the push order (the conditional device with the payout of medals, for example, the bell) and the replay combination with the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the condition devices having different stops and displays, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replay combination) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number to give an instruction. The credit number display device D200 may be provided with an advantageous section display YH at the lower right. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check if there are any medals left. Then, if there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the settlement button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the game from being accidentally stopped even though it is an "advantageous section" from the next game. be able to.

Further, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the interval indicator is provided). It may be configured (providing two), and in such a configuration, when the section indicator on the left side lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, it is on the right side. When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished according to the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, "green" in the "normal section" and "red" in the "advantageous section". Alternatively, it may be configured to be lit in the "normal section" and "blinking" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is changed depending on the "internal BB game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "AT in progress state", etc. in the "advantageous section". You may. Further, it may be configured so that the current game section is recognized as the "standby section" by distinguishing it from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section". However, the distinction between "normal section" and "advantageous section" is made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether or not the current game section is "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to do.

Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparing", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. It may be configured (notifying the disadvantage to the player that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is subtracted in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player). However, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to notify the player that the "advantageous section" is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S disables interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of the checksum, and the like.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off match. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that both checksum values match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later in step 2010. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power was cut off, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the command is completely restored, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and executes the command when a power failure occurs in step 2012. 1 Return the process to command processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, when it is determined in the determination process of step 2008 that the checksum values of both do not match, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the RAM in step 2014. To execute. After executing the process of step 2014, or when No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows the interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command reception process. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. This one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is returned to step 2102. The predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the process.

<Sub-side power off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power cutoff process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power off processing is a process started when the sub control board S detects a power off.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates the checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has passed, the power off processing is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of momentary interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer and returns to the process executed when the power is turned off. If it is determined in the determination process of step 2212 that the power supply has not been restored, the process is returned to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command process that is called and executed in the process of step 2250 of FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. To do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation time process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, in the case of the first reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the first cylinder stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2258 whether or not it is the second reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, in the case of the second reel stop reception reception timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the second cylinder stop reception reception processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2262 whether or not it is the third reel stop acceptance timing. .. In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls the subroutine of the third reel stop production related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the third body stop acceptance processing described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2266 whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, when it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stop display symbol time processing (not shown) in step 2268, and step 7100. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately shifts to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the standby screen display control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect-related determination process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is based on the high-secured failure counter value command received from the main control board M side, and the number of high-secured failure games remaining at the present time (high probability state). Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the battle effect execution feasibility determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-securing obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage transition lottery (lottery for whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed with reference to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Refer to), the stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT of the game is "AT in progress". In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect determination process during AT, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “recoverable / non-recoverable effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the resurrection possibility effect determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). The stay stage is mainly a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effect and notice effect will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution feasibility determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example) of winning the battle effect execution possibility lottery (whether or not to execute the battle effect (win)). Lottery) is executed. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the battle effect executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, if No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle production is a continuous production that is executed over a plurality of games, and the battle production is won, that is, the battle production (winning) is executed, and the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that the winning is definite. The configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and even if the AT lottery is not won, if the BB role is won (after the end of the BB, the state shifts to the "low probability state" or the "high probability state". ) May be configured to perform a battle effect (victory).

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are prize-C (cherry), prize-D (watermelon A), and prize-E (watermelon B), and the roles that can be won in duplicate with the BB role. It has become. That is, in the case of Yes in step 3064, where the player has the expectation that the rare combination is stopped and displayed at the same time as the BB combination, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set in step 3066. , A lottery for whether or not to execute the Gase battle effect (a lottery for whether or not to execute the battle effect (defeat)) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ) Is executed. Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the Gase Battle effect executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and shifts to the next process (process of step 3006). If No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured so that it can be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high-securing obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, 4 or more, continuous production such as a battle production can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-securing obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, the continuous effect such as the battle effect is not executed. Therefore, even though the continuous effect is being executed, the "low probability state" is entered. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off due to the transition of ("normal section" is set), and the battle effect is performed only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit until the battle effect is completed. By executing this, it is possible to make the game machine user-friendly without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

Also, when the role of rare is won, it is configured so that continuous production such as battle production (defeat) can be executed, so the execution frequency of battle production can be guaranteed and the game always proceeds with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an excerpt of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the "low probability state" and when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. It consists of three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the corresponding number is It is stipulated. In the case of "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stages are the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal medium game", and a "high probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 0. 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 250 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "high probability state" in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the skeleton game, and the number of placements is defined. Has been done. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 is assigned as the number. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the city stage, and 0 to 879 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 930 to 959 is assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is the city stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when the game shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the number of units. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the conference room stage to the cave stage in the game.

The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 is assigned as the number of positions when transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of units when transitioning from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as the number of placements.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "high probability state" and the number of high-securing obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the stay stage of the skeleton game are displayed. , The relationship with the number is specified. The current stay stage and the transition stage consist of four types of production stages: the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states related to the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 0 to 979 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 980-999 is the number of places to move from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 0 to 19 is the number of places to move from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", 20 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 to 0 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or the "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of units when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. Assigned.

If the current stay stage is the cave stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, 0 to 29 is the number of places to move from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and you want to move to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game" in the next game, the number of places to move from the cave stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number of placements when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", 100 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when the city stage is maintained in the game.

When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of units when shifting from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game shifts to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 is assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

Thus, in the "low probability state", two stages, a desert stage or a city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, in the "high probability state", four stages, a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage, can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, in the case of the "advantageous section", four stay stages can be selected, while in the "normal section", two stay stages can be selected, and can be selected in the "normal section". The stay stage of 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where you cannot expect to win the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", you will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when shifting from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state", that is, when the "advantageous section" changes to the "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the stage of the "advantageous section". By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to determine the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation.

A part of the production stage selected in the "normal section" overlaps with the production stage selected in the "advantageous section" (a production stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but is not selected in the "advantageous section". You may have).

In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-secured obstacle games is 4 or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-secured obstacle games is 3 or less are different, and the number of high-secured obstacle games is increased. When the number of games decreases (3 games or less), do not shift to a stay stage with a higher expectation, which is a "advantageous section" than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage). By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the "normal section" is reached with a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with higher expectations. The stay stages are in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with low expectations (difficult to select in "advantageous section"), which are "advantageous sections".

The composition of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is selected as the "advantageous section", the expectation, and the expectation of winning the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, the stay stage can be changed in the game in which the BB role or the rare role is won (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role. (Including and), the expectation of winning the AT lottery differs depending on the transitioned stay stage, and the expectation is configured in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order. It is also possible to configure so that the expectation of winning the BB role differs depending on the transitioned stay stage, and configure in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in ascending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an effect determination process during AT that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continuously incites the effect related to the game (success) (AT continues to set the initial value in the AT counter M60, in other words. Then, it is definite that the AT continues to set the initial value to the AT counter M60 (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game becomes the "AT in progress state") or the AT continuation fanning effect (failure). Instead, the state related to the AT of the next game is determined to be the "AT in progress state" or the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect effect state"), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (success) and the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) are determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game to be played, the revival effect (success) will be executed, and the player feels as if he / she has won the revival lottery (actually, he / she has won the continuous lottery, and the main control board M. As the control on the side, it is the same as when the AT continuous fanning effect (success) is executed). With this configuration, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "state for revival possibility production", but {win the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, but win the continuous production. By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even if the resurrection effect is executed, the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection effect. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT continuous fanning effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be the AT final stage effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Further, if No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the "state for effect of resurrection"). In this process, it is determined that the “AT in progress” state has continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, even if No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" or the like. ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as "AT in progress"), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection possibility effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. 42. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (the effect is the same as the effect executed in step 3116 described above. It is a production to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the "state for revival possibility production", and in the next game, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) of the effect related to the game. It is an effect of notifying the fact, and it is decided to shift to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the next process (process of step 2300) is started.

As mentioned above, the "recoverable / non-revivalable state" is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game in the "AT in progress") which is the "advantageous section". Even if it does not exist, the player confirms whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is configured to extend the "advantageous section" even in the next game "recoverable or not production state". It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the revival production is successful just by doing so, and the result of the revival production will be paid attention to. Further, as described above, the execution mode of the lottery regarding AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "revival possibility / non-recovery effect state". That is, the execution mode of the lottery related to AT is different between the next game that wins the continuous lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the game that wins the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next game in which the AT state is completed, the game shifts to the "resurrection possibility production state" of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the "revival possibility production state". By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on, the effect of the effect is produced. Although it was prevented that it could be determined whether or not the AT was terminated without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) The state related to AT is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, and the resurrection in the game before the game in which the resurrection lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode for AT is obtained.
(2) It is configured not to execute the revival lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT in progress state" ends depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the running set, etc.). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the final AT game. As an example of the production, "Pre-game of AT final game: AT continuation fanning (success)-> AT final game: Directing that the next set of AT will start", "Pre-game of AT final game: AT continuation fanning" Directing (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuous fanning production (success) "," Game before AT final game: AT continuous fanning production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success) "," AT The game before the final game: AT continuation fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure) "etc. may be executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT in progress state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and the effect on the sub control board S side is It may be configured to execute the AT continuous fanning effect or the revival effect.
(3) In a game in which a revival effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the revival effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the revival effect (success) is performed from the predetermined timing. That is, it may be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is
(1) This is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuous lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the first stop is turned on),
(4) Timing when the stop button, which is the first stop for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed and then the stop button is released (timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) Timing at which the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the second stop is turned on),
(6) Timing when the stop button is pressed and then the stop button is released (the timing when the second stop is turned on → off), which is the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed.
(7) Timing at which the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, is pressed (timing when the third stop is turned on),
(8) Timing when the stop button is pressed and then the stop button is released (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off), which is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed.
Etc.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
And so on. In addition, when it is configured to determine which of the various timings (1) to (10) above is to be set by lottery, after the timing when the stop button, which is the first stop, is pressed. , Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so that the player presses the stop button which is the third stop and then the stop button. It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the AT is released or the start lever operation timing related to the next game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a process at the time of starting lever operation that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is the AT-during state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to AT is the AT-in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT-in-AT process when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to AT is not in the AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT is a special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is the special precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. It is executed and moved to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the state related to AT "additional specialization state". It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is the "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the addition specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, when the state related to AT is not the "additional specialized state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the state related to AT to "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a "game". In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, when the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal intermediate game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a subroutine of advantageous BB internal intermediate processing when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is whether or not the RT state is "RT1". To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, when the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no push order navigation in the state related to AT (push order navigation is). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a "low probability state", a "normal BB internal game", a "normal BB state", or the like). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, when the state related to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. As described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command, so that the effect related to the push order navigation cannot be executed. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT addition lottery winning and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. In addition, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT counter value becomes 0 as the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress state", so that the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state". In that case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay is won, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven will be selected. It is configured to navigate the push order that is not in a straight line. Further, when the number of games elapses from the situation of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the situation shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", it is still an "advantageous section". In the game in which the push order bell is won, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game in which the push order replay is won, the push order navigation may not be generated.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in step 2308, No in step 2310, and No in step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316. (Processing in step 2110).

<Processing during AT when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and the instruction number in step 2356. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display of the push order replay game are displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number and the display color related to the number is the same. ) Can be applied when it is configured to be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 is configured to display an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and the push order bell is used. It may be configured to display different production images when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation is executed related to the push order replay game.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A1 which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → middle → right" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is circled. Display in the display mode.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push-order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364 or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode B (display mode described later). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is less conspicuous than A).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 is executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the numerical display mode group.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2380 or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in display mode A (the above-mentioned display mode). It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a display mode that is more conspicuous than B). Here, if there are four or more games, the display mode A is displayed, and if there are three games or less, the display mode B is displayed.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2388. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display in step 2392. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) in the case of No in step 2390 or when the process of step 2392 is executed. In this way, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a more conspicuous display mode than the display mode A, the forward push instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" Along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the white seven and black seven do not stop and display on the invalid line. It is configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B by displaying an arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (for example, a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed) is encouraged to continue. , Battle effect) is also configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect so as not to interfere with the visibility of the battle effect. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and it is displayed that the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" ends, the battle effect is in progress. If a forward push instruction command or a reverse push instruction command has been received, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message that the "AT in progress state" is terminated is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added to the game that won the AT additional lottery. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a subsequent timing, which enhances the fun of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a special precursor process at the time of start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2404, and the instruction number in step 2406. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has 6 selections of the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order of is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A2, which is the push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. Display in the display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in step 2412, and the condition device of the game is the push order replay. Is determined. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, it is information that corresponds the first stop button to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, if No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the forward push instruction command. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2418. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2422. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command has not been received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2424 whether or not the avoidance command has been received. .. Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, the background image during AT is produced and displayed in step 2428. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Special processing for adding when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2452, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2454, and the instruction number in step 2456. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the same display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the forward push instruction command. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display in step 2468. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, from left to right. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received the reverse push instruction command in step 2470. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to "right-> middle-> left" as the push order navigation display in step 2472. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an image of an arrow. That is, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are, in order, a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, from right to left. The push order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command is a general term for both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right". Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processes of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476, or when No in 2474, the background image during AT is produced and displayed in step 2480. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing an advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the information about the condition device related to the game in step 2702, confirms the winning / replay winning information related to the game in step 2704, and in step 2706, the instruction number. Check the command related to. In this way, in the state related to AT where the push order navigation such as "AT in progress state" can be executed, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and "low". When sending the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation such as "probability state" is not executed (also applicable when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send the command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number to the effect group number and the instruction number in the same manner as in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even if the state is related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, the push order bell (or push order replay) may be won, and the correct push order may be grasped.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal middle game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB internal medium game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the game. Condition device determines whether or not it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six-choice pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The push order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the prize-A4 push order bell, the number suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "right → left → middle" that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is surrounded by a star. It is displayed in the same display mode. In the first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above, the numerical values suggesting the push order may be displayed in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group is a number. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red and the like.

Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-D1 to D3.

In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, when the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order replay. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order has three choices, the information corresponds to the first stop button corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S received the command related to 7 replays. Judge whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display as the first number. The display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40 in step 2722. It is displayed, and in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed after shifting to the advantageous BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the effect display device S40. In, it is notified that the BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Processing at the time of the first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has an operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Judge whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed in the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is forward-pressed navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a general term for forward-pushed black 7-matched replays and reverse-pushed white 7-matched replays. In step 2508, in the case of Yes, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (continues to be darkened in the game), and moves to the next process (process of step 2110). Migrate.

If No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays in step 2512, and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2550 of FIG.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the second stop in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display related to the stop is erased, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately. , Move to the next process (process of step 2110).

<3rd production-related decision processing when the body is stopped>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the third effect-related determination process at the time of body stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a BB role. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the winning BB combination during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT, and AT of the game. Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, in the BB role that was won during AT (“AT in progress”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization preparation state”, or “recoverable / non-recoverable production state”). If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the state related to AT and the BB combination of the game, and then executes the next The process shifts to the process (process of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the effect based on the effect executed in the game. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown on the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of states related to AT: "normal BB internal medium game" and "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are three types of BB start production: normal production, high-expectation production, and premier production. It should be noted that, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB is configured to differ. → High expectation production → Premier production ”.

When the BB combination is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal game, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. .. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. Is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect will be the premier effect is 0/256. Is.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming is 77/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect becomes the premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is the normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. The probability of becoming 157/256 is. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect becomes the premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win the BB without setting difference (1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-C) or the BB with setting difference (1st class BB-B), the premiere production Is not selected, and it is stipulated that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high-expectation effect.

Even in an advantageous section, if a BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference is won, the premier production is not selected, and there is a possibility that the normal production is selected rather than the high expectation production. It is set to be high.

If it is an "advantageous section" and the BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is won, the premier production may be selected. With this configuration, by selecting the premier production, it is confirmed that by winning the setting difference BB, it will shift to the "AT in progress state" after the setting difference BB ends. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when the BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference is won because it is an "advantageous section", there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect will be selected rather than a normal effect. (It is less likely that a normal production will be selected). By doing so, the player can infer whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the setting differenceless BB that won in the "normal BB internal medium game" The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). In addition, it is not limited to this, and the distribution of the BB start production related to the BB (Type 1 BB-B) with the setting difference that won the prize in the "normal BB internal medium game" and the "normal BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in that way, the BB start related to BB with setting difference It can be configured so that the distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB roles: BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without a setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal medium game". There are two types of BB start effects, one that can be added and the other that cannot be added. The additional effect is an effect that suggests that the AT additional lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the non-addable effect is an effect that suggests that the AT additional lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. For the BB won during AT, there is no element of whether or not to win the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT addition lottery is executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed. Even in the BB, the game medal can be obtained and the BB to be executed is in the AT which is advantageous to the player after the end of the BB. Is configured to clearly inform whether or not is executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 /. It is 256, and the addable effect is not executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-B) with a setting difference and the state related to the AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start effect cannot be added is 256 /. It is 256, and the effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) with no setting difference and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming is 0/256, and the non-additional effect is not executed.

<Processing at the time of the 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the third processing at the time of receiving the body stop, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 of FIG.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is a push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine if there is an operation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces a successful pressing order effect. "GET!" Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the "GET" of the pressing order success effect. ! ”Is not displayed.

If No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not displayed, if No in step 2604, in other words, the condition device related to the game is not a push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610. In step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT-added games (command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of AT games added, and to display the number of AT games added.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the AT addition game on the effect display device S40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is added to the AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2616. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. Further, as a method of notifying the number of AT additional games, (1) all of the additional games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the additional games is notified by the game, and the remaining games are notified after the game. (3) The number of additional games is not notified in the game, and the games after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when the common bell is won (when the role that is not originally added), or a plurality of games are notified. After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 of the game in which the number of remaining games of the production display device S40 is "0" or the next game of the game in which the number of remaining games is "0" ) Can be notified.

In addition, when the common bell is won in the "addition specialization state", the number of AT addition games is not displayed even if the game is stopped according to the push order navigation (the AT addition lottery is performed in the common bell). Absent).

According to the rotating body type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the period that is advantageous for the player in the gaming machine configured so that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section". Can be appropriately notified. In addition, if the continuation effect is won by providing the "state for effect of resurrection" and the resurrection effect (success) is executed thereafter, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT in progress state", while the resurrection effect (failure) is executed even when the continuation effect is not won and the resurrection effect (failure) is executed thereafter. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on by setting the state related to the AT of the game to be played as the "recoverable / non-recoverable effect state" and the state related to the AT as the "advantageous section". With this configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the revival effect, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect succeeds or fails. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured so that a period that is advantageous to the player can be appropriately notified.

In this example, if the BB combination is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the game can be changed to the "AT in progress state". The configuration related to is not limited to that of this example, for example, if the AT lottery can be won by a rare role such as cherry (it can be won even if it is not the BB role) and the AT lottery is won. It may be configured to shift to the "AT precursor state" as the state related to AT, and to shift to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device S40 by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be used. As an example of the method of selecting and determining an item, operate the cross key SB2 (which has four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move the cursor to a desired item. By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (where the cursor is) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. In other words, they may be different. Even if there are differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
An example of the items that can be selected on the menu screen is listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be adjusted so that the player can adjust the volume. For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased, and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be adjusted so that the player can adjust the light intensity. For example, if the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment is displayed and then the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes stronger (brighter), and if the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) becomes weaker. It may be configured to be (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (hero character, push order navigation voice, battle character, character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. It may be configured, and after displaying the screen corresponding to the character customization, it is determined by moving the cursor to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2 and operating the sub input button SB.
(4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be configured so that the reel arrangement can be displayed on the screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Dividend table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting a replay or a winning combination by displaying a stop) may be displayed on the screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is executed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winning, game end processing, a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the command related to the end of the game, etc. (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on the stop display of the re-game, new start) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses while the lever is not operated, the reel does not start rotating newly, etc. (until then, the sub input button SB is operated. But the menu screen is not displayed). The betting operation includes both the case where the bet button D220 is operated and the case where the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is made (automatic betting based on the stop display of the re-game). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed during the execution of the game (the game medal is bet, the weight period until the start of reel rotation, and the reel is rotating).
(2-2) The menu screen may be displayed in a state in which the menu screen can be displayed during the execution of the game (such as when a game medal is bet).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect of notifying whether or not the bonus has been won, during the execution of the continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, the effect of notifying whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games , Etc.) may be configured so that the menu screen can be displayed.
(4) It may be configured so that the menu screen cannot be displayed while the re-game combination is stopped and displayed.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is displayed when the menu screen can be displayed. It may be configured to blink.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed, or the operation of displaying the menu screen may be configured to have a plurality of operations. .. In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (the timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the standby screen described later) to clear the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time for transitioning from the menu screen to the standby screen described later, and is an initial value at the timing when the menu screen is started to be displayed. Is set) to a predetermined time B (in this example, it is 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and the next process (process in step 7200). Move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example to be satisfied. May be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation start.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B in this example) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and deciding a predetermined item on the menu screen and executing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume to the desired level by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes called a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, when the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed and the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB, when the menu screen display ends, it will be displayed again. The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7122 whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross-shaped key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and shifts to the next process (process of step 7200). To do. In addition, even if No in step 7104, step 7106 or step 7122, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 7200). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Seconds) are reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the display of the standby screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the display of the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as the timer related to the display of the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited for. It may be configured to be set in a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on and off, the standby timer is set to the predetermined time A (180 seconds), and then the sub input button SB is operated under the condition that the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the menu screen is started to be displayed, the standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (300 seconds).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device S40 when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed). The moving image related to the story is repeatedly played back, the message "Power saving" is displayed, and the logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the condition for displaying the menu screen described above requires the operation by the player, while the condition for displaying the standby screen does not require the operation by the player.

In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing flag (the flag that is turned on when the standby timer, which will be described later, is timing) is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. The timer is started by setting a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above). Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processes of step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Therefore, it may be a condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is finished).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and proceeds to step 7224. In addition, even if No in step 7206, the process proceeds to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110). Even if No in step 7224 or 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

Further, in the case of No in step 7204, in other words, when the standby timer timekeeping flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timekeeping end condition is satisfied. To do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition for ending the standby timer timing and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the standby timer timing end condition is such that the rotation of the reel is newly started. If Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

If No in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 7240 whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen. In this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. Start, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. It should be noted that the standby screen may be configured to be able to shift to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the standby screen is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, in a situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the hero is executed again by executing the betting operation. Will be displayed on the screen walking in the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed because the sub-input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. After that, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without the operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (a predetermined time A and 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. As described above, in this example, a predetermined time B elapses after the menu screen is displayed, and a predetermined time A elapses after the game is finished (after the third stop button is turned on → off). It is configured so that the standby screen can be displayed in, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, the configurations related to the menu screen and the standby screen applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and there is no problem in appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations.

<Timekeeping start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to start timing by setting the initial value in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) The timekeeping starts from the timing when the button) is turned on and then turned off, (2) the timekeeping starts from the execution timing of the display judgment, (3) the timekeeping starts from the payout completion timing based on the winning, and (4) the game. As the end process, the time is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side. (5) The time is started from the timing when the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub control board S side. You may. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timekeeping start timing of menu standby timer>
As the timing to start timing by setting the initial value in the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed, the timing is configured to start from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB. You may. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub-input buttons>
It may be configured so that the initial value can be reset to the menu standby timer when the menu standby timer is timing. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Therefore, the menu standby timer may be configured to set a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds), which is an initial value. As an example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, 300 seconds is set in the menu standby timer to start timing, and 100 seconds later, the cross key SB2 is pressed under the condition that the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds. The menu standby timer may be configured to reset 300 seconds by the operation. In addition, the menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is being displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the display of the menu screen. By operating the cross key SB2 on the transition destination screen to which is transitioned to (the screen of the transition destination may also be the menu screen), the initial value may be reset to the menu standby timer, or the menu screen is being displayed (menu). By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross-shaped key SB2 after starting to display the screen, the screen of the transition destination to which the screen has transitioned may also be the menu screen) by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross-shaped key SB2. The menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset.

<Configuration related to stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is not executed. The stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) may be operated depending on the situation, or the standby timer may be configured not to reset the initial value. As an example, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. After that, when the bet operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not newly reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as is.

<Structure related to betting operation>
When the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation in the situation where the standby timer is timing, and then the bet operation is executed ( When betting is made by operating the bet button D220, or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and bet is made), the time counting of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. , If the other operations are not executed, the standby screen may not be displayed over time. In addition, in such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the passage of time from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed from the betting operation. May be configured to be 0 or smaller. With this configuration, the number of remaining game medals is less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with less than the specified number of game medals left in the credit (no bet is placed), the bet button is used when the clerk of the game hall cleans the game machine. Even if you operate and bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume. Further, even when the third stop button is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation and the bet operation is not executed thereafter, the timing of turning off the third stop button (may be the timing when the reel is stopped) is started. When the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed, the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced.

<Display conditions for standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer and the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen has changed from "1 to 0". With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or some abnormality occurs in the timer measurement, the timer value reaches "0" without going through "1" like "20 → 0". Even if this is done (when zero is cleared), the standby screen is not displayed, and it is possible to prevent the display of the standby screen unintentionally (after that, the timer value is reset and the value changes from 1 to 0). It may be configured to display a standby screen in case of a timer). A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided so that the standby screen is displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to payment button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement of credits is executed by operating the settlement button, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button, or the timing when the settlement of credits is completed (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch was turned off → on while the power was on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. In addition, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. The setting key switch may be turned off → on, and then the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the front door is closed.

Also, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off and then on when the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the setting key switch is turned on → off. In addition, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened when the power is turned on. When the setting key switch is turned off → on, the standby screen is displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the front door is closed after the setting key switch is turned on → off. It may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting the operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration when a predetermined error occurs>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error regarding the main control board M side (for example, the game medal is the medal selector DS). The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the predetermined error is cleared.

<Structure related to front door>
As the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened and the open state. It may be configured to continue the clocking of the standby timer even when the time is maintained. In addition, as the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end), and then the front door is opened. After that, even if the front door is closed, the standby timer may be configured to continue timing.

<Structure 1 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. While the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the set timing, the final stop operation is performed in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress state"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off. You may. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed even when a predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART. Also, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is supported as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the button is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, while AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"). In this situation, as the final stop operation in the game in which the push-order navigation was not executed, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time. The standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Structure 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button or the like in a situation during AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. The standby screen can be displayed by, and (2) the screen returns to the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) when the predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. You may.

<Structure 3 during AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation. A standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the set timing, and in a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is a "normal game state"). The menu screen is displayed, and the standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display. During AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT in progress"". ), The menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) ) May be configured. That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured so that "predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C". The time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other configurations 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2). ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) By operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed, while the sub If a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. Also, if you insert a game medal from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and bet, the menu screen will be displayed, and if you bet by operating the bet button while the standby screen is displayed, it will be displayed before the menu screen is displayed. A screen (a normal screen displayed during a game when a standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is three, which is the specified number. In the above situation, if you operate the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards with one operation) and bet, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the normal screen displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the bet button is displayed when the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three. (For example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation) may be operated to display a menu screen.

<Other configurations 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by inputting a password on the menu screen, it may be a predetermined condition that the game is inherited from the previous game history). If not, the moving image for introducing the story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the moving image for introducing the character may be displayed as the standby screen. .. Further, in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen, but whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the player has a first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize, and a second BB combination in which the second BB, which is less profitable for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning the prize. It may be configured, and further, it may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be won in duplicate (providing the combination of "first BB + second BB"). With such a configuration, when "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the highly profitable execution of the 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the first The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (the winning of the second BB is carried over even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in the situation where the closing time of the amusement park is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In that case, the low-profit second BB is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the high-profit first BB cannot be executed and the game must be ended. Can be prevented.

Immediately after the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be notified, or the winning of the second BB may be notified (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification). If this is the case, the probability of winning the re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when it is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive villa chance time !!"). .. In such a configuration, if the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definite that the effect is generated = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above. For example, "BB Renso Chance Time !!" is displayed on the production display device S40). Further, even when only the first BB is won and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. In addition, it may be configured to notify the winner of the first BB once after notifying the winner of the second BB (for example, the display of "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" → the display of "sorry" → the "first". 1BB is being won !! ”etc.). Further, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed due to the duplicate winning during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared (after the return, the effect is on the effect). (Reducing the number of remaining games, etc.), but the internal reduction of the number of remaining games, etc. may continue to be suspended. When the first BB and the second BB are won in duplicate, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are elected in duplicate, the first BB is prioritized for stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the small winning combination B is prioritized for stop control.
That is, a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control over the BB combination and a small winning combination that gives priority to the stop control of the BB combination may be provided.
(3) When the first BB and the small winning combination A are won in duplicate, when the small winning combination A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination A (for example, at the time of the first stop, the first 2 When stopped), a notification corresponding to the small winning combination A (notification so that the small winning combination A can win a prize) is performed.
That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to notify the first BB combination that normally gives priority to the stop control over the small combination A. Therefore, when the first BB combination cannot win a prize regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can win a prize), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. In addition, when the small winning combination A wins as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination A is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content notified by the effect display device S40 or the like and the actual content. It is possible to prevent the winning roles from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small winning combination B are elected in duplicate, the notification corresponding to the small winning combination B is performed during the rotation of all reels.

Further, it may be configured to have a display (7-segment or the like) for displaying the number of the stop-displayed symbol (or symbol combination) controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the stopped displayed symbol (or symbol combination). For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the effective line, an effect that is likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, lighting the lamp in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided and has the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by using the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, it is output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

Further, during the AT state or the BB execution, the effect sound may be output from the game machine even when the game is played using the earphone jack. Further, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is pulled out, the volume for when using the earphone jack may not be cleared (initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for when using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever. ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-game combination can be changed between after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is more than a specific number and after the end of BB when the number of acquisitions is less than a specific number at the time of BB execution. It may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states that shift when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after the end of "RT1", or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is changed when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made to have a one-to-one correspondence with the winning, and the transition is made with a certain probability regardless of the conditional device and the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) Equipped with 0 RT transitions, duplicate winning of 0-card combination, and duplicate winning of 0-card combination. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter where the stop operation is performed, a 0-card combination is provided, which is a combination in which one or more winning combinations are not won, and the RT state is changed by winning the 0-card winning combination. It may be configured to enable the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination and the 7-card combination or the duplicate winning of the 0-card combination A and the 0-card combination B. When the 0-card combination is won in duplicate, either the 0-card combination that shifts to RT or the 0-card combination that does not shift to RT may be won depending on the pushing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card combination and the BB combination in duplicate, and give priority to the 0-card combination to win the prize.

As in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", There are 6 choices of "right → left → middle" and "right → middle → left"), and the push order of the push order replay is 3 choices (the first stop is 3 choices of left, middle, and right). If this is the case, the push order display on the push order display device D270 differs between the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay, in other words, 6-choice push order navigation. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, as the push order display related to 6 choices, "= 1" in the case of "left → middle → right", "= 2" in the case of "left → right → middle", "middle → left →" "= 3" for "right", "= 4" for "middle → right → left", "= 5" for "right → left → middle", "right → middle → left" In the case of, it is displayed as "= 6", and as the push order display related to the three choices, "= 7" when the first stop is on the left and "= 8" when the first stop is in the middle. , When the first stop is on the right, it may be configured to be displayed as "= 9".

In this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the "AT in progress state", "specialized precursor state", or "additional specialized state", is configured to be displayable on the effect display device, and AT is configured. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from "AT in progress" to "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within a specific game and shifts to "AT in progress", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the "AT in progress state" is changed to the "normal game state" and then again within a specific game. If the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", the number of AT digestion games is not taken over from the previous number of AT digestion games, and the number of AT digestion games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40 (for example, "reel" If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts rotating in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is set to "ON → OFF → ON" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the rotation speed of the reel becomes a constant speed and before the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of.
(4) The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT are the states related to the AT in which the push order navigation occurs differently in the game in which the common bell is won, or the push order navigation can occur. The frequency of push-order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT, which is a state related to AT in which push-order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example), which has the highest probability of winning a re-game, the percentage of games in which push-order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push-order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the total winning rate of the Belle role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting bored during AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the feature points of the above-mentioned game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transition lottery to the "advantageous section" can be executed except during the internal winning of the BB and the execution of the BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) The command (signal) related to the condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the "standby state", it becomes an "advantageous section" from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device in which the profit margin of the player differs depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifting from a "high probability state" to a "AT in progress state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like can be executed.
(5) In the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) Advantageous section When the counter value of the remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically the "advantageous section" unless BB or push order navigation is executed once or more in the "advantageous section". However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and push order navigation will be performed once in the "advantageous section". Is configured so that the "advantageous section" can be terminated even if it is not executed.
(7) The measurement of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added for each game even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery set for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined as the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) When a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the "high probability state", and the setting 6 shifts to the "AT in progress state". Etc., it does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be "advantageous section" from the next game (setting to "advantageous section" by the BB role established in "normal section" If you win the lottery, you can set it as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change in the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" with reference to the set value is not executed (as a condition common to all set values, a predetermined number of games may have passed and a predetermined condition device may be established). ..
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the condition device is established. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(3) When the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(4) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Is not executed. The lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(5) During BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" during the BB execution. Can be executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example. Further, the following configurations may be applied individually, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) Although it is an "advantageous section", it is configured to have a "high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is more difficult to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state".
(2) The continuous effect is composed of at least the number of consecutive games of a predetermined G number or more.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous production, an effect for notifying that the AT lottery has been won is executed even during the continuous production (the continuous production is replaced).
(4) The more games remaining in the number of high-securing obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a high degree of expectation (expectation of bonus winning, AT lottery winning), and the remaining games of high-securing obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with low expectations.
(5) Highly secured The smaller the number of remaining games, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game completion production with a higher expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning).
(6) If the number of remaining games with a high number of obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that is lost is not executed, but the continuous production that is a hit (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) is Can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the number of high-securing obstacle games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the production of completing one game can be executed in both cases of loss and hit, but continuous production is a hit. Can only be executed if.
(7) When the number of ceiling Gs (1500 games) in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of the effect differs depending on whether the number of ceiling Gs in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined value or more than the predetermined value (frequency of continuous effect, expected degree of jackpot of predetermined effect, etc.).
(9) When a new shift to the "advantageous section" is made during the continuous production of loss in the "normal section" (for example, the production of defeat).
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the "advantageous section" transition game, "turning around and having a character, Stechen suggestion dialogue", etc.). The rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the effect is rewritten during the continuous effect (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the transition is made on the sub-control board S side in the game when shifting to the "advantageous section" during the execution of the continuous production, and the sub in the game when the continuous production is not executed. The ratio of notifying the shift on the control board S side is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) A player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section". For example, it can be selected by operating the sub input button.
(2) The lottery result of whether or not it will be the 1: "advantageous section" of the stay stage A group is announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an "advantageous section" will be announced later at the end of the game (or when the next game is bet (when the replay stop is displayed, when the start lever is operated)).
(3) When the "normal section" is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the stay stage A group, the stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group. When the stay stage is changed from the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the production group A to the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and the stay stage A group is off and the AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than the stay stage A group are different. For example, from the one with the lowest AT expectation, "advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and stay stage A group → advantageous section indicator is on and other than stay stage A group"
(5) The transition of the stay stage (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) is triggered by the production in the game that has changed from the "normal section" to the "advantageous section" (including the production of 1G completion and the continuous production). There is a difference between the rate of occurrence and the rate of transition of the stay stage triggered by the production in the game that changed from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games with high secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning the AT lottery, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting a stay stage, and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games with high secured obstacle games), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation that has won the AT lottery, and the bonus). There is a high probability of choosing a stay stage with a high degree of expectation.
(2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" are less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting the effect of shifting the stay stage.
(3) High expectations (expectations for winning the AT lottery, expectations for winning the bonus) High expectations If a production with high expectations is selected without staying at the stage, the expectations are high. Expectation (winning AT lottery) than when a production with high expectation is selected while staying in a high stay stage (expectation of winning AT lottery, expectation of winning bonus) The degree of expectation that you are doing, the degree of expectation that you are winning the bonus) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If you win the BB in the "Resurrection possibility production state",
(1-1) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-2) After the end of BB, it may or may not shift to the "AT in progress state".
(1-3) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed during the BB.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the "AT in progress state" after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "recoverable / non-revivalable production state".
(2) The AT addition lottery may or may not be executed in the "state for effect of resurrection". When the AT addition lottery is executed
(3) If you win the reverse push white 7 match replay or the forward push black 7 match replay in "Resurrection possibility production state", avoidance navigation will occur, and at the timing after executing the resurrection production (success) Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the "recovery possibility production state", the advantage section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the "revival possibility production state" If a role that can shift to the "advantageous section" is won in the next game when the revival lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator can be turned on at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of the specification that the AT addition lottery is not performed although it is an advantageous section in the "state for revival possibility production"
(5-1) Even if you win a role (for example, Watermelon A) that can execute an AT additional lottery in the "Resurrection possibility production state", the number of AT games will not be added, but 1G that executes the resurrection production (success) If a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can be added in (“AT in progress”) is won, the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus when "Battle production 3G + Resurrection production (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the production at the end of AT, and the bonus is won in the resurrection production execution game and the resurrection production (success) is executed. The number of AT games will not be added in the middle, but the number of AT games will be added in the bonus when the revival production (success) is executed by winning the bonus in the battle production execution game (any of 3G). Can be done. In addition, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When there are a game state A and a game state B as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section".
(1-1) The winning expectation of the AT addition lottery is "game state A> advantageous state B" (the number of AT games is relatively easier to be added in the game state A than in the game state B, or the AT addition game. a lot).
(1-2) The number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination X is won in the gaming state A and the number of additional additions that can be added when the winning combination Y is won in the gaming state A are different.
(1-3) The number of additional additions that can be added when the combination X is won in the game state B and the number of additional additions that can be added when the combination Y is won in the game state B are the same.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of "A <B <C" from the one that is inconspicuous to the player.
(2) In the case where the AT has ended from the "AT in progress state" and "RT1" state to the "low probability state" and "RT1", if the push order combination is won, the push order display device is used for pushing. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (displayed as "???").
(3) If a prize 18 (falling combination) is won in the third stop in a game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. ..
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is restored and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "Left!").
(5) Even in a state related to AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as the "additional specialization state", when the fall role is won, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if the faller wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained.
(7) When the falling combination is configured to be a pushing order combination (whether or not the stop display is displayed is determined by the pushing order), a pushing order combination (pushing order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and the pushing order is selected. When the navigation is executed and stopped in a push order different from the push order navigation, the display of the effect display device may be dimmed, while when the fallen role is won, the display is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In that case, the display of the effect display device is not dimmed (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect is not dimmed).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT ready state" after the end of BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to change example 1 from this embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a role that wins with a high probability in "RT3", the player wins the AT additional lottery (100% may be won, or may be won with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) The RT state that shifts after the end of BB differs depending on the type of BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination that executes the addition lottery, the addition) according to the combination that is likely to appear in any of the RT states. The lottery winning probability and the number of games added to AT) are different.
(1-3) Bonus A->RT1-> Promotion replay A-> RT3 (high probability of replay), Bonus B->RT2-> Promotion replay B-> RT3. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different.
(1-4) If bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2, and have promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is high for RT1 and RT2. It's different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference After the end of BB, the system shifts to the dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to the “additional specialized state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1st class BB-B1 and 1st class BB-B2, and shifts to "RT3" after the completion of 1st class BB-B1 and shifts to "RT4" after the completion of 1st class BB-B2. When configured as.
(1-1) The execution mode of the AT additional lottery (the combination of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, the number of AT additional games) is different between "RT3" and "RT4".
(1-2) The effect tendency is different between the BB start effect related to the first type BB-B1 and the BB start effect related to the first type BB-B2 (the selection rate of the highly expected BB start effect is different).
(2) When the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06 in the "AT ready state" and "RT3", the game shifts to "RT4" and the treasure chest loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", the replaying role promoted to "RT3" is elected. In addition, when "RT4" is changed to "RT3", even if the player wins the replay-E1 to E3 after that, the treasure box opening addition effect is not executed.
(3) It has multiple types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and after the end of BB depending on the type of BB. The RT state of the above is different, and the execution mode of the AT addition lottery when the promotion re-game combination is won differs depending on the RT state. When configured in this way, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect performed during BB differs depending on the type of BB (acquire gold treasure chest, acquire silver treasure chest, acquire copper treasure chest, etc.) The number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference won during AT There is a ratio that the same production mode is obtained between the BB start effect related to BB and the setting difference related to BB won during AT, and there is a setting difference won during non-AT. There is a difference between the BB start effect related to BB and the start effect related to BB with no setting difference won during non-AT, which have the same effect mode.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) There is a setting difference in the "advantageous section" The setting value is suggested when the BB without the setting difference is won in the "normal section" rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when the BB is won. The probability that the production will be selected is higher.
(2) The BB won during non-AT selects a different BB start effect according to the setting difference, but the BB won during AT selects the same BB start effect regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio that the BB start effect is the same between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the setting difference between BB and non-AT won during non-AT. The ratio of the BB start effect to the same effect mode is different between the winning BB and the BB with no setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) "No setting difference combination (a combination whose winning rate does not differ depending on the set value) + BB" When winning, select "Advantageous section indicator lighting + effect B" that can be executed when the "No setting difference combination" is won. The probability of selecting "advantageous section indicator off + effect A", which can be executed at the time of winning the "combination with setting difference (combination with different winning rate depending on the set value)", is higher than the probability of selecting {"rare". "Role + BB time" is a production that encourages the winning of BB (for example, a battle production) rather than a production that fuels the transition to a high-probability state (for example, a production that shifts to a stay stage that can stay in a high-probability state). Is easier to execute}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of high-securing obstacle games is "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%". → 50G ”, and if 3G is selected, the battle will be defeated, and in other cases, the battle will be won. In addition, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly accurate games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of inciting continuation is performed at the 20th Gth with high accuracy (an effect of inciting whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is confirmed that the game is 50 games). ..

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section".
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. It should be added that it may be done.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a part of the configuration of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) "setting value data": area for data related to the number that manages the setting stage, (2) "external signal system data": external signal output. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM check sum data": Data used in the check sum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and calculated from the data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off. Area for storing the stored data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, (4) "Control command buffer": Sub Area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side, (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is turned off and restored, and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is turned off. Area for storing existing data and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off and on, (6) "Unused area": Area for storing areas not used for the game, (7) "Saved data" 1-Saved data 8 ": Areas are used in the order of RAM in which saved data may be written to the maximum in design by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer will point to the address of. In that case, there is a possibility that the saved data will be stored beyond the area of "backed data 1 to saved data 8" reserved as the area of the data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, data that does not affect the progress of the game (less influence) on the address (address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may indicate when the unexpected problem occurs. It is preferable to configure it to store data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address that is at least one address free from "save data 1 to save data 8" secured as an area of data to be saved in advance, the game is played. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not give a disadvantage not only to the person but also to the game hall. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used in the situation where the game is in progress after the power is turned off and restored, and (4) "control command buffer". Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be sent to the sub-control board S side, and (3) "RAM check sum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off and restored. Since the data is not generated and (2) the "external signal system data" is the data to be transmitted to the hall computer, the data has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is data related to the set value that affects the result of the game, so that, for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, the player will be significantly disadvantaged. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the set value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the amusement park. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, the addresses between (1) "set value data" and (7) "save data 1 to save data 8" are (2) "external signal system data" and (3) "RAM check sum data". , (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "Unused area" are stored. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. In addition, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM check sum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses that store the five data is changed. For example, even if the upper addresses are stored in the order of "(3)->(2)->(4)->(5)->(6)". Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)->(5)->(3)->(2)->(4)" from the upper address. Further, (6) may be configured so as not to provide an "unused area". The data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert game medals even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medals). The data is such that an error that makes it impossible to input the data does not occur.

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game medals that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type rotating game machine that does not use actual game medals (total score data). When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, it may be configured to have 2 bytes as the area (1) in FIG. 59).
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time of one time (counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (the minimum game time of one time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Counter for the number of acquired cards when the BB is operated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the BB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
(D) Counter for the number of acquired cards when the MB is activated: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending the MB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player with the game value). Subtract the value)
It should be noted that the above (A) to (D) and the "set value data" may be configured to be able to be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. In addition, when a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored (provide an area for storing) at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59. It is preferable to configure it so as to. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (unexpected power failure, etc.) occurred. In some cases, the stack pointer may indicate an address higher than "7FF8H", but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the amusement park.

<< Actions related to replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action of the replay game applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example in the winning game will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp is set as an automatic betting operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed (when the re-game is stopped and displayed, a bet is placed without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as the automatic betting operation related to the re-game that is stopped and displayed. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned on (the turnable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light at substantially the same timing. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medal, he / she recognizes that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turnable lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially at the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and the wrong game medal It is possible to prevent turning on and operation of the start lever D50.

<Structure 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be promoted. It can be smoothed.

<Structure 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on so that the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game winning. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing prior to the lighting of the onset lamp D300. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and then, by turning on the insertable lamp D300, it is announced that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Structure 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 7>
Regarding the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit after the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit (What are the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213? Does not light up at about the same time). With such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by winning the re-game has been performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 8>
The timing of turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game is stopped is substantially the same. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. Therefore, by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 almost at the same time, the player You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Structure 9>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the re-game stop display is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-game stop display. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 10>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the re-game stop display is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game stop display. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified first that the re-game has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed. , Since it is possible to announce that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Other Actions 1 >>
Here, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below as another action 1.

<Structure 12>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 may be configured to be always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed to the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the re-game, and it is possible to notify that the re-game has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be achieved. Can be smoothed.

<Structure 13>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game status, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the light earlier than that.

<Structure 14>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially at the same time. I want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the game state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and further, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert the game medal by turning on the light earlier than that.

<Structure 15>
If the re-game is won in a certain game and the re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 lights up based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. Therefore, the re-game lamp D290 may be configured to continue to light until the end of the game one after another of the certain game. By continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290 in this way, the player can be notified of the winning of the re-game as soon as possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as the re-game lamp D290, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 1-bet lamp D211, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300, triggered by the third stop operation (or the re-game symbol stop display). Control may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Structure 17>
The lighting timings of the re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game.

<Structure 18>
Based on the display that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off. It may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three.

<Structure 19>
Based on the display that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost at the same time, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off again. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to light up substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three, and it is clear that the lamp is lit based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified to.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, further, an action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the winning game of the replay game applicable to the revolving gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as another action 2 using FIGS. 61 to 63. Describe.

<Action diagram 2 when replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the operation applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At about the same time, the re-game lamp D290 lights up, and at about the same time, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 go out. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are turned on. The possible lamp D300 lights up almost at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 3 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 4 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 and The turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 5 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on at substantially the same time. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time.

<Action diagram 6 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 lights up almost at the same time as the 2-bet lamp. The D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 7 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is displayed. The start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up at substantially the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action diagram 8 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are displayed. Turns off at about the same time. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 And lights up almost at the same time.

<Action diagram 9 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on at the timing (5) in the figure. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Action diagram 10 when the replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was lost), two reels were stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) was rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. .. After that, the stop button is released (on → off) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 lights up at the timing (3) in the figure. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 light up substantially at the same time. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

Of the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configuration as the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19 can produce the same effects as those of the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 19.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned stop display timing of the re-game symbol, operation timing of the stop button, on / off timing of the re-game lamp D290, on / off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, on / off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212, 1 It should be added that there is no problem in combining the lighting / extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the turnable lamp D300.

In the above, a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the re-game stop display is displayed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the onset lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped and displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous means as long as it can be recognized that they are apparently simultaneous when the player visually recognizes the interrupt processing. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to bet button lamps >>
The configuration of the bet button lamp S50 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of enabling the bet button D220 from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M sends a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The board M may be configured to transmit a command to the effect that the bet button D220 is enabled on the sub-control board S side), and then the sub-control board S receives the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. The process for lighting the bet button lamp S50 may be executed by receiving the command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be lit reliably, and even if the player visually recognizes the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is effective, the main control board M side It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to stop button lamp >>
The configuration of the stop button lamp S60 in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example may be as follows.

The process of disabling the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 (stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the process for enabling the above is executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button on the sub control board S side. It may be configured to transmit a command indicating that D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is enabled}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. By receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 may be executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective depending on the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 and the stop button D40 (any of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not is effective, it can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration related to reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning machine according to this example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) rotatably via the reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. The details will be described later, but each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to the reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top RU 20 and a bottom RU 30 with an opening RU 10 interposed therebetween. By placing the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed at the front end of the bottom RU 30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. There is. The three through holes RU40 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< Pedestal BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The end of the pedestal portion BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side side surface, the back surface, etc. of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal portion BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend horizontally. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the pedestal BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU 10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed so as to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The number and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may be arranged in the horizontal direction so as to correspond to each other, and the reel unit RU may be stably mounted on the pedestal portion BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the pedestal BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU 10 through the through hole RU 40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position on the pedestal portion BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit is attached by a screw member such as a screw or a bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached by using a detachable rivet, for example, a member such as a push rivet. It suffices if the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In this example, the configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a through hole RU40 is provided in the upper part of the reel unit RU and inside the housing by a screw BS. It may be configured to be fixed (fixed so as to hang), or through holes RU40 may be provided on both side surface portions of the reel unit RU and fixed to the inside of the housing by a screw BS. Further, even in such a configuration, the configuration relating to the position of the screw BS and the drop position of the screw BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration relating to the screw BS arranged at the position closest to the position where the front door DU opens and closes). ) Is applicable.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the right side of the back surface of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the left side of the back surface of the hopper H40. Note that FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to go around, and the opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. To. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-mentioned medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 via the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as a hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, and the like.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right side inclined portion H54, and a left side inclined portion H56. The right-side inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced on the right side of the hopper H40 is guided toward the hopper bottom portion H52, which will be described later, by its own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides the medal introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover above substantially the left half of the disc H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being connected to each other on the hopper bottom portion H52 and being unable to fall, and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, all the game medals introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom portion H52. As described above, the right side inclined portion H54, the left side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medal inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged on the bottom H52 of the hopper. The disc H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational operation of the disc H50. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be ejected one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide unit H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed so as to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from the left side to the right side).

The discharge guide unit H62 guides the game medals at the upper part of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40 and the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. It is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide unit H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging the game medal to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right-side inclined portion H54, the left-side inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as storage inclined portions for storing the game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide portion H62 holds the game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

Further, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have an inclined downward to the right. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 projecting upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is erected in the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the bottom of the hopper H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially square columnar shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the upper portion, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Dropping of the screw BS of the reel unit RU >>
A front door DU is attached to the revolving gaming machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (left side when viewed from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side when viewed from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagates to the back box. Since the impact is generated on the right side of the revolving pachinko machine, the impact on the right side of the revolving pachinko machine is the largest, and the impact tends to be gradually weakened on the left side of the revolving pachinko machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three locations on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right side screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the right side receives the largest impact. Therefore, the right side screw BS screwed into the right side screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right side screw BS falls off and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subject to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the screw hole BU10 on the left side is expected to have a small impact to some extent, but it is naturally possible that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right side screw BS among the three screw BSs described above.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right side screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and by the weight of the right side screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right side screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS prevents the dropped screw BS from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to prevent the disk H50 from being hindered from rotating or damaging the disk H50, and to allow the hopper H40 to operate stably.

In the above-mentioned example, only the right side screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 is located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 so that all three left side screw BS, center screw BS, and right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, a screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU is prone to impact due to contact with the back box or collision. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side when viewed from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when it falls off.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screw BSs described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same configuration as in FIG. 64 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the right side screw BS falls off due to an impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and due to the weight of the central screw BS, it rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

Prevents the dropped right-side screw BS and central screw BS from entering the hopper H40, and prevents the dropped screw BS from hindering the rotational operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

In the above-mentioned example, the right side screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted, but the left side screw BS also positions the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU so as to be located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. May be good. Even if any of the screw BSs is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and is placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the bottom of the hopper H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls on the inclined surface H64. It is possible to prevent the screw BS from falling onto the bottom H52 of the hopper and prevent the screw BS from interfering with or causing a failure of the operation of the disk H50.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not invade the hopper H40 and assists the medal. By configuring the tank HS to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the amusement park can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall surface H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The dropped right side screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by storing the dropped right side screw BS in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, the hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to enter the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this way, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< Extension RU50 >>
In the above-mentioned example, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the lower medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 65, the extension portion EN may be provided at the lower part of the reel unit RU or the pedestal portion BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but once guided by the extension portion EN, it can be dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension portion EN makes it possible to match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS is formed with at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes on the back surface. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided in the lower part of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to project forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DE pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 and project toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As the medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. Note that FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line connecting the contours of the game medals located in the uppermost portion UL of the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, an envelope line). (For convenience, the top UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct with each other through the plurality of medals, between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electric circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the two fullness detection electrodes DE are conducting. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the positions of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one is provided. It can be configured so that a medal full error can be detected by conducting the fullness detection electrode and any one of the two fullness detection electrodes described above, and by making such a configuration, the medal assist Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored unevenly to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the medal full error can be detected.

<< Material of bis BS and material of medal >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetically conductive and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Further, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and is conductive. For example, it is made of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE >>
The left side screw BS, the center screw BS and the right side screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the pedestal portion BU. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) is used (of the screw BS). Overall length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right side screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE, so two screw BSs alone are used. It does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not get caught in the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Further, FIG. 69A is a plan view of a back portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the fullness detection electrode DE protrudes inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the seating surface length HR of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69 (b)) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)) (in the radial direction of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <Diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be hooked on one of the full detection electrodes DE, and the screw will not be caught. Even when the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately detached, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE, the full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69 (c)) is already stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily come into contact with each other. Even if such a case occurs, the bis BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the bis BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

As an example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels has been described, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS It is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the reel, and the possibility that the screw BS will come off also arises. Therefore, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The reel band MO has a long thin plate-like shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotating cylinder backlight.

It has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so as to face each other and attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are formed of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged so that they are parallel to each other and their centers are located on the same axis of rotation. Further, the distance between the two frames is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer circumference of the two frames.

<Overlapping part M58 and cut M59>
The reel band MO is formed so that the length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (overlapping portion M58) where a part of the reel band MO overlaps is generated near the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end portion M57, and the cut M59 is formed by the first end portion M55. When attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of the M50, the reel band MO is attached from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along the circumference of the reel frame MW, and finally, the first The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the end portion M57 of 2, and the pasting is completed up to the first end portion M55. When the reel band MO is attached in such an order, the first end portion M55 ends to be attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end is attached on the reel band MO. The parts M55 are overlapped.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel band MO is attached to the first end. Along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, and finally, the reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the first end M55 and pasted up to the second end M57. It's over. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end portion M57 ends to be pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end portion M57 is pasted on the reel band MO. M57 is in an overlapping state.

Here, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end portion M55, and then the second end portion M57 is attached to the reel M50 in the same direction as the rotation direction, and the reel band MO is placed on the reel band MO. In the case where the ends M57 of 2 are overlapped, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). , Air easily enters between the second end portion M57 and the reel band MO on the lower side thereof, and the reel band MO in the vicinity of the second end portion M57 is gradually peeled off.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is attached. In the case where the first end M55 is overlapped on top, when the game is executed and the reel M50 is rotated, the second end M57 is overlapped on the reel band MO described above. Compared with, it is difficult for air to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and it is difficult for air to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

From the above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached to the reel M50 in the opposite direction to the rotation direction. It is preferable that the sticking is completed in the direction and the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M55 or the second end portion M58 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any end of the end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, it may be deformed and an error may occur. Further, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO can be attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( The outer circumference) may be installed in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, "white seven") is configured to be located on the lower reel band MO of the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired due to these various errors. It is also assumed that the upper reel band MO of the superposed portion M58 overlaps the large symbol when the position is deviated from the above position, so that the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO.

In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button depending on the game state, and when the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol and press the button. , When the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may also be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above occur, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the deviation of the position of the symbol are visually recognized by the player. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy because it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player. If you visually recognize the deviation of the position of, there is a possibility that the joy of stopping and displaying the symbol combination that is the bonus symbol will decrease.

<For bonus symbols>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at the position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is longer than LL. A short symbol (longitudinal length SL) is placed closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the symbols having a short length in the longitudinal direction at the positions closest to the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and it is possible to prevent the symbol from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-mentioned various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59, the deviation of the position of the symbol, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can form the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) are defined. Although it is shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are different. There is no problem. Further, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols. For example, a replay symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to the replay). Or watermelon symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. Further, in this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the longitudinal length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the lateral direction.

In the above-mentioned example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (bonus symbol, etc.) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was decided by the comparison of, but the length in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the length in the lateral direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the lateral direction are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward along the lateral direction.

<In the case of a small role pattern>
Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols that do not stop and display on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they are won, in other words, are arranged at a distance of more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol that has at least one place (sometimes referred to as a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol to be pressed, and a symbol that the player wants to see. Is. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, the winning of the rare role may not be notified before the stop button is operated, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so it is the rarest. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is easy to obtain a role (which is most profitable for the player). In addition, there are some gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations, such as one that is paid out when a prize is won, and in such a case, the operation timing (operation) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player. The stop button is often operated in the mode). It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player, may be referred to as an optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, the middle reel upper stage, the right reel upper stage (upper stage straight line), the left reel middle stage, the middle reel middle stage, and the right reel middle stage (middle stage straight line). Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (right down straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right up straight) ) And 5 lines, and the specified number is 3 sheets. In addition, it has a watermelon role and a cherry role as rare roles, and when the watermelon role wins, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops and displays in a straight line on the effective line, and when the cherry role wins. Is configured so that "cherry, any, any" (any indicates that any symbol may be used) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the effective line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol play a rare role, the symbol has at least one location separated by the maximum number of slip frames or more.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is located in. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and it is easy to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-mentioned optimum game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row. By operating the button, you can win a prize regardless of whether you win the role of watermelon or the role of cherry. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper row of the cherry symbol to the lower row of the watermelon symbol is the range in which the stop display can be performed, which is shown in the figure. As described above, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the symbol placed two frames below the cherry), and the deviation of the cut M59. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the position of the pattern or the symbol.

As shown in the figure, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare combination is likely to be won is displayed in the vicinity of the first end M55 and the second end M57. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 can be configured not to be positioned at the position where the stop is frequently displayed on the reel. Even when the reels are misaligned, it can be configured so that the misalignment of the cut M59 and the misalignment of the symbol position are less likely to be visually recognized by the player.

The number of steps for one round of the reel in this example is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there are 16 17-step frames (designs) and 4 16-step frames (designs) as the distribution of 20 frames (designs). The reel is configured. Further, since it is preferable that the cut M59 is configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible, the frame (design) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps with a relatively small number of steps. Is preferable.

As the configuration of the revolving pachinko machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medals used in the general revolving pachinko machine, and a pseudo game medium converted into data is used. It may be configured so that the game can proceed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the revolving pachinko machine can be improved by the amount that it is not necessary to insert and pay out the actual game medal (for example, the insertion opening of the game medal). It does not have a payout opening, the front door and the back box are integrated, etc. to block the gap where foreign matter is inserted), reduce the risk of illegal game medals being used, etc. It can be configured to improve the security against such fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an enclosed type rotating game machine). It should be added that the configuration of the enclosed type rotating gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) may be combined into one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control may be used. The total score may be increased / decreased or displayed on the board H (also referred to as a game value control board or game value control means) or another board.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantive game medal used in a general revolving pachinko machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed revolving pachinko machine. It may be configured. In addition, "score" may be referred to as "score information", "points", "point information", "game value", and "game value information". Physically existing and substantive game medals can be directly picked up and handled by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed type rotating game machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a real game medal, but a pseudo game medium that is converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. Further, the "credit" is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bet-able state or a settlement-capable state, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" is all the scores that can be input to the enclosed type rotating gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general rotating game machine that uses a substantive game medal. When the configuration of the enclosed type rotating gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a "game medal" in the present specification is referred to as "score", "score information", and "score information". There is no problem in treating it as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc., and "score", "score information", "points", "point information" as appropriate. , There is no problem in calling it as "game value" or "game value information". It is not necessary to have "credit". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured to have an AT in-progress state or the like as a state related to the AT that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT in-progress state (so-called AT), the push order navigation is executed, so that the player is in an advantageous state. However, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the rotating drum type gaming machine capable of executing an AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be set as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the above-mentioned conditional device number management process in step 1450, step 4100 (first). In 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, in step 1750, after executing the above-mentioned AT state start control process, in step 4200 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the stop freeze execution determination process described later, and in step 3500. Transition. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, the reel freezes when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel is stopped (when the final reel is stopped and when the third reel is stopped). (The reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and the betting operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined time) is configured to occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" from the game. Here, "newly in the AT state" is the case where the state related to the AT becomes the "AT in progress state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as the first AT hit). As an example, (1) Win a BB in the "high probability state" → shift to the "advantageous BB internal medium state" → the BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the "advantageous BB state" → BB After finishing, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", (2) If the cherry is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, the precursor state { It is a state related to AT to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not he has won the AT lottery, and even if he does not win the AT lottery related to the winning of the cherry, it is the same as the "precursor state". In the case of a configuration that shifts to the effect mode (background effect, etc.) that may be configured to have a "precursor state"}, the cherry is won in the "high probability state" and is based on the winning of the cherry. Since the AT lottery was won, the game state transitions to the "precursor state" → The game state transition such as the transition to the "AT in progress state" is newly performed because the predetermined number of games that are the end conditions of the "precursor state" have been executed. It corresponds to "AT in progress". On the other hand, as an example of the case where it does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT in progress state" → "AT continuous battle state" because the AT counter value became 0 { Shift to "AT in progress" again (state that may be in a row)} → Shift to "AT in progress" again, (2) Win BB in "AT in progress" → " Transition to "Advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, transition to "Advantageous BB state" → BB ends, transitions to "AT in progress" again, etc. It does not correspond to "AT in progress".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M has an AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that freezes at the start of reel rotation when turned on). ) Is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side (The AT start effect will be executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550). The freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution time).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the AT start freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 1568 (second), in step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, which is a freeze execution time executed when a new “AT in progress” state is reached, and “AT”. In the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when the "medium state" ends, the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, 5 seconds, and the "AT in progress state" is newly set. The execution time of the freeze executed in the case) is set, the timer is started, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If Yes in step 1574 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT in progress" elapses. Even if No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the freeze (sometimes referred to as the freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the "AT in progress state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, during the freeze execution, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the freeze execution time at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem even if the execution time is changed, and it is preferable to set it according to the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. Has been done. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. It can be a high-priced gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) of FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" is a case where the AT counter value has changed from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value such as "AT in progress" is being subtracted. The case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state related to AT is "normal game state", is not included.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, if No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is newly set to 0 in the game. "The counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is newly set to 0" means that the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is subtracted in a situation such as "AT in progress". It is not included when the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is always 0, such as the case where “1 → 0” is set and the state related to AT is the “normal game state”. If Yes in step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, and the freeze execution time and the “AT in progress” that are executed when a new “AT in progress” is reached are set. The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, 3 seconds, which is 3 seconds, and the freeze executed when the "AT in progress" ends, is set to the timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed at the end. Execution time) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side The AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0. If Yes in step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT in progress" elapses. If No in step 4204, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start effect execution in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case where the power cutoff does not occur during the execution of the AT start effect and a case where the power supply cutoff occurs will be described in detail.

First, in (a) of the figure, the case where the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and the freeze execution time are 5 seconds. After that, one second elapses from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START !!" is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 as an effect mode of the AT start effect. After that, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START !!" on the effect display device S40 is deleted, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. It will be switched to a possible background production. In addition, when the push order navigation described above is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends when 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating and is produced. The push order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating → Reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state and the effect display device S40 You may configure it to display the push order navigation. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to freeze execution, the player mistakenly operates the stop button corresponding to the push order different from the correct push order. It is possible to prevent the situation where it ends up.

Next, in (b) of the figure, the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the state related to AT is newly changed to the "AT in progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Will be done. Further, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, "Warp execution!" Is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is always executed). .. In this example, the AT start effect and freeze execution time is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). After that, one second elapses from the start of the freeze, and the display "Warp execution!" Is erased on the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of freeze execution, the power is cut off (for example, the amusement park is cut off). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of freeze execution except when the power is off is 5 seconds, the freeze execution ends, the AT start effect execution ends, and the reel rotation starts. It will be. As described above, in this example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect) and then the power is restored, the freeze execution time is from the state before the power off. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze is executed. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, the freeze will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

Further, the execution time of the AT start effect is also the same as the execution time of the freeze. If the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored, the execution time of the AT start effect is the power off. It will continue to be executed from the state before it occurred. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect differs between the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power supply is not cut off. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect. If the power is not cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have passed from the start of execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. When the power is cut off, "AT50G START !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 after the power is turned off, regardless of the timing of the power off. The display of "AT50G START !!" may be referred to as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. Further, in the figure, as the display of the number of games at the start of AT, it is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games at the start of AT, but the display mode is The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is enabled to be executed in the "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before the transition to the AT in-progress state, the AT in the "advantageous BB state" Addition of the number of games The number of remaining AT games obtained by winning the lottery is added to the 50 games which is the initial number of AT games, and the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. May be good. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games of 30 games is acquired by the lottery for adding the number of AT games in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START !!" is displayed as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. You may. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but similarly, the effect mode of the AT end effect is the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and the case where the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the case where there is no AT end effect (for example, when the power supply is not cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect. On the other hand, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" is displayed after returning from the power cut, regardless of the timing of the power cut.). Further, if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, the effect is displayed immediately after the power is turned off. If this is the case, the display is not limited to the number of games displayed at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as the display allows the game to proceed smoothly by being visible to the player.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed in the case of newly shifting to the AT in-state state and in the case of ending the AT in-progress state. , The AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly shifted to the AT state, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state ends. In the case of such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, it is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect after the power cut is restored. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after the power is turned off and restored, even if an unintended power off (for example, a power failure in the amusement park) occurs during the execution of the freeze, the game such as the number of remaining AT games can be played. By configuring the player to immediately display the information necessary for grasping the game situation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed depending on the case where the state is newly changed to the AT state and the case where the AT state is terminated, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , It may be configured so that it can be executed at the start of BB, the end of BB, etc., or it may be configured so that it can be executed based on the winning condition device and the game state in which the player is staying.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the rotating body type gaming machine according to the above-mentioned example,
Freeze execution period when the power is not cut off during freeze execution = A
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period until the power outage occurs = B
If a power outage occurs during freeze execution, the freeze execution period after the power outage occurs = C
If
A = B + C
It is configured to be.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, one configuration detailed below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. It should be added that it may be done.

<<< Lamp unit configuration >>>
First, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit (collective term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail.

The LED of the lamp unit in this example is a full-color LED (which can be lit with a plurality of lighting colors), and is configured so that the lighting color can be set for each LED by lighting control by the sub-control board S. Further, the lamp unit is configured to light up based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) of the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED, or a plurality of LEDs may be set to 1. It may be set for the one group as one group.

Further, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used for lighting control of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC transmits a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to a plurality of slave ICs, and each slave IC returns an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when data is received. Since each slave IC is connected to each other, data (lighting pattern) is transmitted in order starting from the master IC, and each slave IC acquires the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. With this configuration, high-speed communication can be executed.

FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration. In the figure, the configuration relating to the lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the item shown in the column of element 1 is not limited to only eight items of "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, 8 of "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", "no color" It has a kind of lighting color as element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it means that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue". In the case of "", out of the N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). .. In addition, the combination of the order of the LED that lights up in red and the LED that lights up in blue may be only one or a plurality of ways (when a plurality of ways are provided, the lighting color is ". Multiple lighting colors such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2" may be provided). Further, "no color" indicates that the light is off (non-lighting), and is the lighting color that is selected when the light is always off. As described above, the number of items constituting the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and in the element 1, three or more colors such as "red + blue + green" are used. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lighting". It has seven types of lighting times as element 2. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always on, and "no lighting" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 has a turn-off time of "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "no lights off". It has seven types of extinguishing times as element 3. Note that "always" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always off, and "no lights" is the lighting time selected when the lights are always on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 has a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is composed of a combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the extinguishing time of the element 3, and "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second". "Off", "0.1 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "0.2 seconds on → 0.3 seconds off", "1 second on → 0.1 seconds off", "3 seconds on → 0. It has seven types of lighting time patterns as element 4, which are "3 seconds off", "always on", and "always on". As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", the lighting time of the element 2 "0.1 second" and the extinguishing of the element 3 "0.1 second" It is composed in combination with time. In addition, "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and the extinguishing time of "no extinguishing" which is element 3. Has been done. Further, "always off" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lights are always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "no lighting" which is element 2 and the lighting time of "always" which is element 3. Has been done.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color which is the element 1 and the lighting time pattern which is the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is composed of a combination of the lighting color which is the element 1, the lighting time which is the element 2, and the extinguishing time which is the element 3. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting element is shown as the lighting element content, and the identification element assigned to each lighting element content is shown as the lighting element type. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: "0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type b: "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off"
Lighting element type c: "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: "0.2 seconds blue + green lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type g: "White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 second"
Lighting element type h: "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type i: "Green lighting for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "3 seconds blue + green lights → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type k: "Always red lighting"
Lighting element type l: "Always blue lighting"
Lighting element type m: "Always green lighting"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "Always red + green lighting"
Lighting element type p: "Always blue + green lighting"
Lighting element type q: "Always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "Always off (no color)"
It has 18 kinds of lighting elements as element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing", element 1 "red" and element 4 "0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second extinguishing" It is configured by combining a lighting time pattern (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the extinguishing time). Further, the "always red + green lighting" is configured by combining the element 1 "red + green" and the element 4 "always lighting". Further, the "always off (no color)" is configured by combining the "no color" which is the element 1 and the "always off" which is the element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by one or a plurality of lighting elements which are the elements 5. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern type. As a lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: "a->a->a->a"
Pattern 2: "b → b → b → b"
Pattern 3: "a → b → a → b"
Pattern 4: "a->a->g->g"
Pattern 5: "g → f → j"
Pattern 6: "i → h → b"
Pattern 7: "g → f → b"
Pattern 8: "i → j → g"
Pattern 9: "g → g → g"
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: "r"
It has 17 kinds of lighting patterns as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second extinguished” is configured to be repeated four times. Further, in the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, after executing the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”, the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0”. It is configured to execute ". Turn off for 3 seconds" and execute lighting element type g: "light on white for 1 second → turn off for 0.1 seconds". The lamp unit may be lit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 by further combining lighting patterns, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → ... "Pattern 1-> Pattern 4" may be repeatedly lit until the lighting end condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when the game situation such as cancellation of a predetermined error changes, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of the element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of the element 5. The lighting element of is composed of a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is composed of a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. Has been done.

The configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, or elements 1 to 6 The contents of may be changed (for example, element 1 may be set to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as the lamp unit lighting pattern) and the lighting mode of the rotating cylinder backlight S30 (also referred to as the back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. There is), and an example of the configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (which may also be referred to as the sound of the speaker) will be described in detail. Each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the type of BB (conditions related to BB). The lighting pattern may be different depending on the type of device) and the gaming state in which the BB is won, or in one BB, the lighting mode (lighting cycle) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are combined is repeatedly executed until the BB ends. It should be added that it may be configured to do so. As for the error, the medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, the normal game is in progress (an error has not occurred, the power has not been turned on, the standby screen has not been displayed, the setting confirmation mode has not been performed, and the setting change mode has not occurred. The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed is any of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. It is configured to be one or a combination of two or more. Since it is configured to have various gaming states such as a low probability state and an AT in-probability state during a normal game, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected may be different depending on the gaming state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. It should be noted that the time when the power is turned on is a state from the time when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses (immediately after the power is turned on).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small amount of light (light amount smaller than the normal amount of light) Speaker sound: Until the error is cleared During a medal empty error A dedicated sound is looped (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a dedicated sound for a specified time when the power is turned on <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated 3 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. It should be noted that the effect executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the effect executed before the power off occurs and the gaming state before the power off occurs.

As in the configuration 1, only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the error occurrence such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting colors constituting the lighting pattern. , Red is used when a medal empty error occurs, while red is not used during normal games (configured so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs) so that the player or administrator can use it. , It is possible to easily distinguish between the case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and proceed with the game. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily distinguish between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game. It is possible to smooth the sales of the amusement park and the progress of the game. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without misidentifying that an error has occurred even during the normal game, and the administrator can clearly determine the game machine in which the error has occurred. It becomes. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during the standby screen display and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily distinguish between the standby screen display and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. Further, while the standby screen is being displayed, it is possible to suppress power consumption due to the use of a flashy lighting pattern even though the player is not proceeding with the game. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, quickly determine the unintended setting confirmation mode, and detect if the setting key switch is forgotten to be turned off. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select a different lighting pattern as the lighting pattern between the setting change mode and the normal game, the player or the administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and the business of the amusement park and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In addition, the administrator can immediately determine the unintended setting change mode, and can quickly determine the unintended setting change mode. Further, by configuring so that different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting patterns of the lamp unit during BB execution and normal game (state in which BB is not being executed), the player or administrator can perform BB execution and normal game. It is possible to easily determine the inside (the state in which the BB is not being executed), and the player or the manager can clearly determine the situation of the game.

As described above, the difference between when an error occurs related to the lamp unit and during normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, the difference between displaying the standby screen and during normal game, and setting. The difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game are the lighting colors (elements) that are not used during the normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during the normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during the normal game. , It may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during a normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed.
Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off" is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds Turn off "→" Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → Turn off for 0.1 seconds ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds Turn off "→" Turn on blue for 0.1 seconds → Turn off for 0.1 seconds ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("3 seconds green on → 0.3 seconds off" → "1 second blue + white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue on → 0.1 seconds off" )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above. The warning sound output from the speaker while the medal empty error is occurring and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error occurs separately from the warning sound. The sound "A medal empty error is occurring" is output from the speaker, "Setting confirmation mode is in progress" is output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "Setting change mode is in progress" during the setting change mode. It may be configured to output from the speaker. Similarly, for an error different from the medal empty error, the warning sound and the voice of "○○ error is in progress" may be output from the speaker.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: On → off (lights when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 ("0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off" is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: Medal empty until error is cleared Looping dedicated sound (repeated playback)
<When the power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds red on → 0.1 seconds off" → "1 second white on → 0.1 seconds off" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB is running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light volume Speaker sound: Loops (repeated playback) of dedicated sound during BB execution
It is configured as above.

In the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configurations are merely examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation. May be combined from each configuration, or may be changed in any way. Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, regarding the lamp unit, the difference between when an error occurs and during normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, and between the display of the standby screen and during normal game. The above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 are described as differences, differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and differences between the BB execution and the normal game. It is preferable to configure any of (see FIG. 77) so that the one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

Further, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the error is not limited to this, and the display judgment error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit when an error occurs and during a normal game. Differences, differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal game, differences between the standby screen display and normal game, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal game, setting change mode and normal game As a difference from the inside and a difference between the execution of the BB and the normal game, any one of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected so that the one that is not selected during the normal game is selected. It may be configured, or depending on the type of error occurring, such as making any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit different between the medal empty error and the display determination error. Any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different.

Further, when the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified that the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed depending on the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the game state of, the lamp unit is configured to light up when the re-game combination is won and the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the re-game combination is stopped and displayed without winning the re-game combination. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he / she has won the re-game combination.

<<< Configuration of front door opening and payout >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the configuration relating to the payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, "normal" shown in the figure means, for example, that the winning-B (common bell) is won in the "low probability state", and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. The case where 11 game medals are paid out is shown. Also, for "payment occurs before the door is opened" and "payout occurs after the door is opened", when the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, prize 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. In the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in Configuration 1 is performed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed to not being pressed due to the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the payout sound, the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound starts to be output when the front door DU is opened, and is then output even if the front door DU remains open. The output is configured to end when a specific time elapses from the opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to check the settings or change the settings, the front door opening notification sound will continue to be output until the setting confirmation or setting change is completed. It is possible to check the settings and change the settings without stress without preventing them. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound ends at the same time as the output of the payout sound ends, but the output is not limited to this, and the output end timing of the payout sound and the output of the front door opening sound are not limited to this. There is no problem even if the timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. The door. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 is used. The payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of output of the payout sound, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 1, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with the game medal. Even if the door is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. Further, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output at the same time, the status of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above configuration 1, it is preferable to set the output mode (tone color, pitch, tempo, etc.) so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound can be easily distinguished.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In the case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is pressed when the third stop button is pressed). (Sometimes referred to as turning on), winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is not pressed (the third stop button is being pressed to not being pressed due to the player releasing the finger from the third stop button, etc.), and the third stop button is being pressed. The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above). The sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button is turned from on to off, the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is open from the speaker S20 (in the figure). The output of the payout sound ends at the same time as the sound A) is output. After that, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. The predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) for notifying that the front door DU is open is output from the speaker S20. The door. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. After that, under the situation where the payout of the game medal is being executed, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound ends, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time elapses from the start of paying out the game medals corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

By configuring the game medal to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with the game medal. Even if the door is closed (not closed tightly), the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured so as not to cause a disadvantage. In addition, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the situation where it is difficult to judge the situation of the gaming machine due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, the payout sound is output even during the output of the front door open notification sound, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (volume 0 is also). It may be configured to include).

<< Other configurations >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even while the front door DU is open, the game medal is inserted, the max bet button (in this example, the bet button D220) is operated, and the bet button lamp S50 (also the max bet lamp) is applied. It may be configured so that the lighting of the insertable lamp and the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp) is effective. That is, if a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credit increases, or the game medal is displayed). It may be configured to be bet). In such a configuration, the bet sound (or the medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even when is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and the insertion of the game medal or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) is supported. It may be configured not to output the bet sound.

<<< Configuration related to power off and payout >>>
The operation when the power is turned off while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies the case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect of blinking the rotating cylinder backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → The power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. (Power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Power is restored while pressing the 3rd stop button → Power is restored and the game medal corresponding to the small winning combination is paid out. You may.

In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the power is restored while pressing the third stop button as in the above-described configuration 1, and the payout of the game medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is executed. In this case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the power is turned off and on, so that the player is not surprised.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off when the player presses the third stop and the power is immediately restored, the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Even if any of the predetermined operation members (for example, the start lever, all the stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M side is operated, the other predetermined operation member is operated. If the operating member of the above is not operated, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be feasible. For example, when returning from a power failure, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the game medal is not paid out based on the winning prize. May be good. Further, in such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or the start lever (the operating member controlled by the main control board M side is 1). It may be configured to execute the payout of the game medal based on the winning (by only one), or (2) after that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (main control board M side). (By turning off all the operating members to be controlled), the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed.

To exemplify the situation where the power supply is cut off, the power switch is turned on and off, the power supply cable is broken, a power failure occurs in the amusement park, the power supply cable is disconnected from the insertion port, Etc., and in any case, it can be applied to the above-described configuration.

<Structure 2>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error) and power failure occurs (power switch is turned off, etc.) → Power is restored while pressing the 3rd stop button (power switch is turned on) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in the specified direction) → The door opening error is cleared , The game medal corresponding to the small winning combination may be paid out so as to have the above-mentioned action.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. Moreover, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination can be output, the door opening error is canceled while pressing the third stop button as in the above configuration 2, and the paying medal based on the winning of the small winning combination is paid out. When is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the door opening error is released, so that the player is not surprised.

<Structure 3>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → The power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed. (A power outage occurs in the game hall, etc.) → Release the finger from the 3rd stop button (turn the 3rd stop button from on to off) → Return the power → Return the power and pay out the game medal corresponding to the small role May be configured as described above.

In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination can be executed. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of a small winning combination can be output, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released, as in the configuration 3 described above. Therefore, when the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination is not output. Good. With this configuration, the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound are suddenly executed after the power is turned off and on, so that the player is not surprised.

In the case of the above configuration 1, configuration 2 or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is on) as a process after the power is turned off and restored. Before executing the process (process executed in the game progress control process), the game medal payout process (process executed in the game progress control process) based on the winning may be executed. In addition, as described above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed in the situation where the symbol combination in which the small winning combination is a prize is stopped and displayed, and then the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed. After that, by releasing the third stop button, the payout of the game medal based on the winning may be executed. In such a configuration, the output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the back lamp effect May not be executed (when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is executed without power off, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<< Configuration for setting confirmation mode and payout >>>
The operation when the setting key switch is turned on while pressing the third stop at the time of winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, is illustrated below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies the case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, in the configuration described in detail below, the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side of the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned from off to on when the various operating members controlled by are not operated (not on), the setting confirmation mode can be entered. The case where it is done is illustrated. In the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to notify.

<Structure 1>
In a game in which a small role (for example, a common bell of winning 04) is won, press (turn on) the 3rd stop button to win a small role → open the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. (Opening the front door DU causes a door open error) and turns on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. Canceling the door opening error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction) → The setting confirmation mode is not entered even if the third stop button is released. The configuration as described above may be used.

In addition, in such a configuration, betting is possible after that with the setting key switch on, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever in the betting situation, and the stop button. It may be configured so that the reel can be stopped by operating (the game can proceed). After that, if the setting key switch remains on, betting may not be possible (game medals cannot be inserted), or betting is possible but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. It should be added that, in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-game symbol is not stopped and displayed while the setting key switch remains on (after the operation as in configuration 1 above), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. It may be configured to obtain, or it may be configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in the situation where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to indicate that the setting confirmation mode is in effect.

<<< Configuration related to lighting of Max Bet lamp >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the operation related to the lighting of the max bet lamp (also referred to as the bet button lamp S50) applicable to the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even while the stop display of the re-game is displayed. The max bet lamp is controlled on the sub control board S side or the main control board M side, which is provided inside or near the max bet button and notifies that the operation of the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, the fact that the max bet lamp is lit (or blinking) is turned on, the max bet lamp is turned off, the one bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the one bet is turned on. Turn off when the lamp D211 is off, turn on when the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, and turn on when the 3-bet lamp D213 is on. It is shown that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, the start lamp D180 is on (or blinking) is ON, and the start lamp D180 is off. Further, in the figure, when the game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s are detected. (When the sensor detects one game medal at a time), but as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button capable of betting two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided, and when such a configuration is provided, one medal slot D170 may be provided. Even if the same action as the game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button, there is a problem. Absent.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, the max bet lamp is configured to "turn off → turn on" each time one game medal is inserted, so that the period during which the game medal is guided to the inside of the game machine from the medal insertion slot D170 is max. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. In addition, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of the game medal is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted during the invalid period and the game medal is not inserted normally, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

Further, as in configuration 1, when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit by configuring the 3-bet lamp D213 to light after the third game medal is inserted and the max-bet lamp is turned off. Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that a specified number of three game medals have been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 2, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the bed or a player feels distrust in the performance or behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on at almost the same time, so that the next game can be played. It is possible to promptly notify the player that it is possible to start, the progress of the game can be smoothed, the player inserts an extra game medal, and the performance of the game machine due to the slow operation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior is distrustful.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the max bet lamp lights up and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up and the start lamp D180 lights up.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is blinking, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp goes out before the timing of turning on → off (in the middle of lighting). In addition, in the figure, since the case where the third game medal is inserted in the lighting situation in the blinking in which the max bet lamp is repeatedly turned on and off is illustrated, three medals are used. The max bet lamp is lit → off at the timing when the eye game medal is inserted, but when the third game medal is inserted in the situation where the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. The max bet lamp remains off after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit in a non-bet situation as in the configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (first piece, By differentiating the combination of turning on / off the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third sheets), the player can change the current game situation (how many game medals). Is bet).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is turned on at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (the timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2). The 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp goes out.

As in configuration 6, a third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off after the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, the player presses the max bet button on the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the lamps to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the player can be extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the bed or a player feels distrust in the performance or behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. The max bet lamp is lit, the 1-bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is off under the condition that the game medal is not bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is valid. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in configuration 6, after inserting the third game medal, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on almost at the same time. In other words, the player maxes the 3-bet lamp D213. By configuring the bet button to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly turned on according to the operation of the player, the progress of the game can be smoothed, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent a person from inserting an extra game medal or feeling distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to slow operation.

In the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but the lighting mode is such that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. As in the case of the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on = the max bet lamp may be blinking. Further, also in the configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be turned on = the max bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, with respect to the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but the lighting mode may be such that the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. , The start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 may be blinking, as in the configuration 7. Further, also in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on = the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled by the sub control board S side or may be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side.

<<< Configuration related to operation of checkout button >>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration illustrates a case where three game medals are bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, it is ON that the Max Bet lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF that the Max Bet lamp is off, ON that the operation of the settlement button is newly detected, and the settlement button. The operation of the checkout button is not detected, the operation of the checkout button is turned off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned on, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Turn on that the 2-bet lamp D212 is on, turn off that the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is on, and turn on that the 3-bet lamp D213 is off. OFF, ON that the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF that the start lamp D180 is off, ON that the start lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), ON, the lamp that can be turned on It is shown that turning off the D300 is OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 is deducted by 1 from OFF → ON → OFF. Further, in the figure, a case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated, but as a bet button, one is performed by one operation (off → on), which is different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button that allows betting of game medals or a 2-bet button that allows betting of two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem even if the same action as inserting one game medal into the D170 is applied to one pressing of the 1-bet button. The configuration illustrated below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even while the re-game stop display is displayed, or the game medals are stored in the gaming machine while the re-game stop display is displayed. It may be configured so that the game medals that are being played cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the bet game medal from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has been turned "on → off". It may be "on", it may be "on for 0.5 seconds or more", or it may be turned on.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on. Along with turning off the lights, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then with the credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200. Four game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. In the figure, an example is shown in which the settlement process can be executed by turning the settlement button D60 from off to on in a situation where the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during the valid period). The execution mode is not limited to this. For example, in a situation where the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during the valid period), the settlement button D60 is turned from off to on, and the on is continued for a predetermined time or longer (payment button D60). (When is pressed and held for a long time), the settlement process may be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

By configuring the bet game medal to be settled (paid out) before the credit as in the configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit becomes 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if you leave your seat immediately, you can prevent forgetting to settle the bet game medal. In particular, when the game is ended in a situation where the number of credits is small, such as one or two, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will not be able to obtain sufficient game medals and the game will be ended. The person's attention may also be distracted. Even in such a case, in order not to cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, the bet game medal is settled (paid out) before the credit, and as such. Therefore, in the configuration 1, in the configuration 1, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are set before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted. , And the turnable lamp D300 is configured to turn off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the max bet lamp lights up at the timing when the settlement process starts, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 ( Payout will start). After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off and the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. In configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

When it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once as in the configuration 2, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the settlement button D60 is operated. By configuring the max bet lamp to turn on before the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, the player mistakenly turns on the settlement button. If you operate, only the bet game medal will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits, so it is quick to know that the max bet button can be operated. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game can be smoothed.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and the start lamp D180 and the turnable lamp D300 are turned off at the timing when the settlement process is started. Three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. Further, at the timing when the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three bet game medals are discharged. It is paid out from D240 (payment starts). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in the configuration 4, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the max bet lamp is turned on at a timing after the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. If the player wishes to change to a one-card bet after betting three, the settlement button D60 is operated once to settle the three game medals bet, and then one game medal is placed. Since the betting or the 1-bet button is operated, in such a case, the progress of the game can be smoothed by turning on the insertable lamp D300 before the max-bet lamp.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on. Along with turning off the lights, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started). After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the turnable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 is turned off. Three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started), and then four credits stored in the game machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. The game medal will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing at which the settlement button D60 is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. Further, after the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal in which the display of the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the rotating game machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the insertable lamp D300 is lit. After that, when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 goes out. After that, the insertable lamp D300 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payment is started). After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 goes out. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out. After that, the turnable lamp D300 lights up. The max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<< Difference in operation due to power failure timing >>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S depending on the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing the first aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the timing chart of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. It is a timing chart which shows 2 aspects.

The first aspect is an aspect in which a power failure occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started. On the other hand, the second aspect is an aspect in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program of the main control board and the subprogram of the sub-control board is started.

In this example, a power failure is a state in which power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, a state in which the power cable is disconnected, or a power failure. It may be. This includes cases where power supply is unintentionally stopped at the amusement park. The timing when the power supply is cut off is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. It is the timing when the power failure occurred. Further, in this example, "occurrence of power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detection of power outage" means that the gaming machine causes power outage. To detect.

In FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 is obtained from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power failure occurs. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time from the timing when the power supply is cut off to the supply voltage to the main control board M. It is the time until the low level is reached, ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated, and ΔT5 is the time until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is activated. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the relationship of ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, ΔT4 <ΔT5 is established.

<<< First aspect >>>
<< Changes in power supply status >>
The power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, the power supply is cut off at time t3, and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Note that the figure illustrates a case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board is not limited to this. The time from the start of power supply to the time when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (randomly). Further, the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply to the sub control board is started. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) of the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the minimum value (minimum time) of the start of power supply to the sub control board. It is preferable to configure the voltage so that it is longer than the maximum value (maximum time) of the time required for the power supply voltage to reach the supply level.

After that, the power is cut off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is omitted from the time t4 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E has a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (Maintenance level) can be output (power cutoff processing will be executed when the maintenance level voltage is being supplied). In this example, the time to maintain the maintenance level (time from time t4 to time t5) from the start of execution of power off processing (detection of power off) is the time required to execute timer interrupt processing at least 20 times. It is configured to guarantee (time during which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times). In the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is defined as the time for executing the timer interrupt processing at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, to the gaming machine. The time from when the power supply is cut off (power cutoff occurs) until the power cutoff process cannot be executed may be configured to be at least 20 times for the timer interrupt process to be executed.

After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5 and becomes an off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed on the main control board is started from the time ta when the power supply voltage becomes constant from the time t2 to ΔT5. By executing this main program, the process of the main control board START (power on) shown in FIG. 13 described above is executed.

As described above, when the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed, and the process of step 1040 causes a timer interrupt. Is started.

Further, in the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, when the setting key switch is turned on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. .. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined cycle T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power failure>
When a power failure occurs and the voltage drops to a certain level, a power failure detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port into which a power failure detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when the power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when the power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects a power failure in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power failure has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times in the two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

As described above, in this example, the occurrence of power failure is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when a power failure occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power failure can be detected. On the other hand, if the power failure occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, it may not be possible to detect the occurrence of the power failure.

In this way, when the power supply is cut off after the execution of the main program is started and the power supply is cut off after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. , It is possible to detect that a power failure has occurred due to interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power outage has occurred, the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<< Operation of sub-control board >>
<Starting a subprogram>
The subprogram executed on the sub-control board S is started from the time tb when ΔT4 elapses from the time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the main control board M and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting the power supply to the sub control board S. Is shown at the same time tb, but the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage after the start of power supply to the sub control board S It may be configured so that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the main program of the main control board M is started. It is preferable that the time is set to be longer than the time from the start of supplying power to the sub control board S to the start of the subprogram of the sub control board S, and the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is set to longer. The time from when the supply level is reached until the main program of the main control board M is started is from when the power supply voltage on the sub control board S side reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure it for a longer time than for an hour.

<<< Second aspect >>>
FIG. 88B is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of supplying power to the gaming machine and turning off the power. The second aspect is an aspect in which the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, the power supply is cut off before the time t2 to ΔT5 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

As described above, in the second aspect, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated), so that the power is cut off by the main program. This cannot be detected, and the gaming machine stops due to the power failure (the supply voltage reaches a low level) without executing the power off processing shown in FIG. 36.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

After that, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is omitted from the time t14 at the maintenance level. It becomes constant. After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes an off level at time t16. For convenience of explanation, the maintenance level is set to be substantially constant, but in reality, the voltage level continues to decrease gradually from the occurrence of the power failure, and falls below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operation guaranteed voltage level), and then. The voltage level becomes 0. That is, in reality, it is designed so that 20 interrupts or more occur from the detection of power failure to the time when the voltage level falls below the guaranteed operation voltage level. It should be noted that it may be designed so that the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the time when the voltage level falls below the guaranteed operation voltage level is 20 interrupts or more.

As described above, in the second aspect, the execution of the main program is started after the power supply is cut off, but the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 and the process of step 1104 of FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be off-level before this. If the power is cut off at the timing immediately before the main program starts (for example, the timing when the main program starts when the time for one timer interrupt process elapses), the timer interrupt process can be started and the power is turned off. The process can be executed without any problem.

In the figure, the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated, but the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is as an example.
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time has elapsed from the start of power supply to the main control board M to execute the timer interrupt process once), the power supply is cut off. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level before the start (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M is the supply level). The power supply is cut off after the time elapses after the timer interrupt processing is executed once after reaching. → The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started. Become a level (the execution of the main program will not start)
It may be configured as described above.

<<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state >>>
FIG. 89A is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch in the first aspect, the power supply state, and the situation, and FIG. 89B is a state of the setting key switch in the second aspect. It is a table showing the relationship between the power supply state and the situation.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first aspect >>
<State 1>
First, in the state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is “off”. The "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In the state 2, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in the state 4, the "power supply state" is switched to "on" by supplying power while the setting key switch is "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is cut off after the execution of the main program is started, and the main mode of FIG. 13 is before the power supply cutoff occurs (next state 5). The control board START (power on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, the setting key switch is determined to be on, the process of steps 1028 to 1034 is executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , Shifts from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. This makes it possible to change the set value. Further, by the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub-control board S, so that it is possible to notify that the sub-control board S is in the setting change mode.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, if the power is cut off while the setting change device control process is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off". When the power is cut off, the power off processing in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the processing to be executed next in the setting change device control processing (setting change mode) by the processing in step 1902 is the return address. Is stored in the storage area as.

<State 6>
In the state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, power is supplied in the state where the setting key switch is “off”, and the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “off”, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5, and the execution is started from the process of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the process of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Will be done. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the setting change mode is entered by turning on the setting key switch and turning on the power supply in the situation where the power supply is off. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on. Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to be in the setting change mode. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode (for example, the game hall is out of power), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage occurred, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It is possible to make it difficult for such an operation to occur.

<< Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second aspect >>
<State 1>
In the state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), similarly to the first aspect, the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the game is being executed or a state in which the game can be executed, and the setting key switch is ". It is "off" and the "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In the second state as well, as in the first aspect, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains “off”, and the “power supply state” becomes “off”. At this time, the power off processing of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the processing to be executed next in the normal state is saved in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In the state 4, power is supplied while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In the state 5, the power is cut off while the setting key switch is "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second aspect, the power supply is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second aspect, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to the state 4 is "on" (for example, timer interrupt processing is performed). After the lapse of time for one execution), the "power supply state" switches to "off". In other words, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off-level before the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is activated). (State 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address saved in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in the state 6, the setting key switch is operated while the "power supply state" remains "off", and the setting key switch is switched to "off".

<State 7>
In the state 7, power is supplied in the state where the setting key switch is “off”, and the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is "on" and the "power supply state" is "on", before the main program of the main control board M is executed. When the power supply is turned "off", even if the setting key switch is turned "off" and then the power supply is turned "on", the mode is not changed to the setting change mode. .. By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode is changed to the setting change mode, there is a possibility that an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. , Even if the setting key switch is on, it can be configured not to shift to the setting change mode, and a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems can be configured.

<<< Control of medal grant and output control of payout sound >>
As described above, when a small winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed), the player is given the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

<< Processing of medal award >>
The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding the number of credits and awarding them, and a process of actually paying out the game medals to the outside of the gaming machine and awarding them.

<Addition processing of credits>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum number of stored credits (for example, less than 50), the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. The credit number addition process is executed by the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M awards medals by driving the hopper H40 and paying out medals from the medal payout device H. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Mode of medal award >>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be granted, the process shifts from the credit number addition process only, the game medal payout process only, and the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process ( There are three types of modes (execution of both credit number addition processing and medal payout processing).

<Aspect of credit addition processing only>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. If the maximum number of stored cards is not reached even after adding the number of payouts, the process of granting medals is completed only by adding the number of credits.

<Aspects for shifting from credit number addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the processing of adding the number of credits to the processing of paying out game medals. The CPUC100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the number of payouts from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspects only for paying out game medals>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of stored cards, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out the game medals for the number of medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a player is given a medal with 5 payouts, the CPUC100 of the main control board M first sets the number of credits to 1. Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first sheet (time t1)) → 49 (second sheet (time t2)) → 50 (third sheet (time t2)). It changes with t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored cards (50 cards) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any more.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 credits from the 5 payouts. 2 cards are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. ..

<< Various times >>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPUC100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase the number of credits from m to the number of credits m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2-time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first card) to 49 (second card), and the number of credits is 49 (second card). It takes time t3-time t2 = a to increase the number of credits from 50 (third card). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

Further, in the process of paying out the game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n + 1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t6-time t4 = c from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of the (first sheet) addition process from 47 to 48 (time t1) and the timing of the (second sheet) addition process from 48 to 49 (time t2). Or, it is the difference between the timing (time t2) of the (second) addition process from 48 to 49 and the timing (time t3) of the (third sheet) addition process from 49 to 50.

Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the start timing of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the processing of the fifth sheet (time t6) and the start timing of the addition processing of the fourth sheet (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be specified so as to have a constant cycle. In all of the following provisions and the configuration shown in FIG. 90, the game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal payout device H, and the game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disc D50. The case of paying out a game medal is illustrated.

The timing of starting the payout process such as t4 and t6 is
(1) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off. To be the timing
(2) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on. To be the timing
(3) The timing at which the second payout sensor H2 is turned on and off by paying out the fourth game medal with t4, and the second payout sensor H2 is turned on and off by paying out the fifth game medal with t6. To be the timing
(4) When t4 is paid out of the fourth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned off → on, and when t6 is paid out of the fifth game medal, the first payout sensor H1 is turned off → on. To be the timing
(5) When a part of the game medal for which t4 is paid out is paid out to the outside of the disc H50, and a part of the game medal for which t5 is paid out for the fifth piece is paid out to the outside of the disc H50. It will be the timing when it was issued,
(6) When all the game medals for which t4 is paid out for the fourth piece are paid out to the outside of the disc H50, all the game medals for which t5 is paid out for the fifth piece are paid out to the outside of the disc H50. The timing
(7) In the case where the payout process is executed for each payout of one game medal, t4 is set as the start timing of the fourth payout process, and t6 is set as the start timing of the fifth payout process.
It may be configured as described above. The details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings described above are just design values, some blurring may occur in the situation where the gaming machine is actually operating, and even in such a case, this example It should be added that the comparison of time values and the comparison of timings described in detail in the above are comparisons of design values. In addition, it should be added that regardless of which of the above configurations is adopted, the time value comparison described later can be established.

<Switching time from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing e>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored cards, and if all the number of payouts is not given, the process is switched to the game medal payout process. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<< Comparison of time >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. It consists of both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required to drive the medal payout device H. By doing so, the payout process can be expedited.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and smoothly switch from the arithmetic process of the CPUC100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. ..

Further, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. , The consumption of game medals can be increased, the profit of the game hall can be increased, and the operating efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a fixed cycle, and the game medal starts to be paid out to the medal tray. Expectations can be given to the game.

The switching time e can be made to match the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to match the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed cycle, and the same medals are given in both the credit number addition process and the game medal payout process. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that.

<< Output of game medium addition sound >>
The CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when the credit addition process is started (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub-control board S when the payout of the game medals is completed (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPUC100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all of the payout number of game medals corresponding to the winning small wins are given to the player. Judge whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small wins have been awarded, the CPUC100 of the main control board M ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S and emits the payout end command from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium addition sound is finished. When the game medium-added sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) with a sound having a fixed cycle, the game medium-added sound is immediately transmitted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be terminated, or the output of the game medium-added sound may be terminated at the timing when the cycle of the game medium-added sound that is output at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium-added sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit-assigned sound data at least once. The unit-assigned sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub-control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time for one time of the unit-assigned sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the unit-assigned sound data from the RAM and receives the payout start command and then the payout end command. The game medium-added sound is output from the speaker S20 by repeatedly playing back the unit-assigned sound data a plurality of times until the data is received.

<First aspect>
The first aspect of the game medium-assigned sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit-assigned sound data is repeatedly reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this way, the game medium-added sound is output at regular intervals. As described above, even when switching from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the game medium granting sound is output at regular intervals, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the payout and the credits are paid. It is possible to give a sense of security by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process give the same value.

<Second aspect>
Further, in the second aspect of the game medium giving sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit giving sound data is played every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f is completed after the credit number addition process is completed. This is an embodiment in which the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced, and then, at time t4, the game medal payout process is started and the unit-assigned sound data is reproduced again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium granting sound is output at a timing different from a certain cycle, so that the game can be given an uplifting feeling and a sense of expectation that the game medal starts to be paid out to the medal tray. ..

If the game medals of the hopper H40 are exhausted and a hopper error occurs while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H (for example, if it is determined to be Yes in the process of step 1279), the sub The control board S stops the output of the game medium addition sound, and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medal is supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout is possible, the main control board M again transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound. .. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium-added sound will be continuously output, but the volume of the game medium-added sound will be the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. Output at a volume lower than the volume (volume = 0 may be set), and by canceling the hopper error, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound added to the game medium is used. It may be configured to restore the volume.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuits on the board >>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped and rectangular printed circuit board MP. A CPUC100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed circuit board MP. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) is composed of two longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and along the longitudinal direction, and two minor end portions MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and along the lateral direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is mounted so as to stand upright in the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is erected and attached, the longitudinal end portions ML1 and ML2 are arranged along the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are arranged along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end ML1 is located on the upper side and the longitudinal end ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

Hereinafter, the longitudinal end ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the longitudinal end ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the lateral direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body portion. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC100 in an appropriate orientation so that the CPUC100 can perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC 100, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 is formed.

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is arranged so as to be aligned with the direction of the IC described later. When attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is possible to reduce mistakes in attaching the CPUC100 in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized while the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 can be arranged in an direction in which the printed model number, the manufacturer name, and the like can be easily visually recognized.

When the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC100 increase in order counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the lateral direction is ISL. Like the CPUC100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed so as to project from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, a plurality of pins form an electrical connection, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation so that the IC can perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the direction of the IC is formed on the main body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. By arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side in this way, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the work of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP At this time, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a maker name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name of the IC can be easily visually recognized while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also.

When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. ..

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form an electrical connection with other electronic components. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the lateral direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and an electrical connection is formed with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub control board S or the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC100 and IC>
As shown by the broken line in FIG. 91, only the resistor is arranged inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and the IC is not arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL in the lateral direction of the CPUC 100. Various currents (such as a time-varying current, for example, a high-frequency signal) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is generated. , It is possible not to affect the operation of the CPUC100.

Further, the predetermined length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. Therefore, by not arranging the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, length RLL) and emitted from the resistor. The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between the height of CPUC100, the height of IC, and the height of other parts>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC100 is the highest, then the height IHT of the IC is the highest, and the height RHT of the resistance is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

In the work of attaching the CPUC100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attachment tool (not shown) is used. The mounting tool is a tool for mounting the CPUC100 by sandwiching the CPUC100 at the tip of the mounting tool and bringing it close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is sandwiched by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is sandwiched. Therefore, when mounting the CPUC100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the mounting tool is provided so that the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only the parts having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or less are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even if the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other parts. Region CSR2 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer peripheral COR is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor.

Only the parts having a height of less than the height CHT of the CPUC100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP in the printed circuit board MP. Outside, components having a height of CHT or higher of CPUC100 may be attached, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be configured to be components having a height of CHT of CPUC100 or less.

In this way, by arranging only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip of the mounting tool can be approached. Even if the mounting tool is used, the CPUC100 can be mounted on the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above-mentioned example, the main control board M has been described as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPU and IC are mounted, such as the sub control board S, the door board D, the rotating cylinder board K, and the power supply board E. Can be applied to.

<<< Structure related to AT lottery >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be added that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the above-mentioned configurations when the configuration is configured to have an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to AT is a state in which AT lottery is possible. In the figure, there are no plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state. For example, one gaming state such as the high probability state in the present embodiment is not provided. It is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only in. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of the BB.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type provided for reducing the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery to identify the winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device having no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the figure, the condition devices having no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replays, or some replays), It is a push order bell, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. In addition, although there is a setting difference in the lottery probability of the loss and the common bell (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so as not to determine whether or not the loss or the common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number described above. With such a configuration, an area for storing the winning number and an effect group, which is an area in which the information on the condition device having a setting difference in the winning probability and the information on the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability are stored separately. An area for storing numbers and an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area in which information about a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information about a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. Can be configured not to be confused.

In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and sets the AT lottery type in the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). (The same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area) is temporarily stored (overwritten), and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when the condition device with no setting difference is won in the situation where the AT lottery can be executed, when the watermelon B is won, "0" is selected as the AT lottery type, and when the cherry is won. Is "0" as the AT lottery type, "1" as the AT lottery type when the watermelon A is won, "2" as the AT lottery type when the replay is won, and "2" when the push order bell is won. It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18 / when the AT lottery type is "1". It is 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and it is "0 → 1 → 2" in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the number of AT initial games in the AT counter. In this modification, unlike the present embodiment, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the number of AT initial games is set in the AT state start control process. It is configured not to (the number of AT games may be added if the number of AT games is added). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state related to AT after the next game to "AT in progress state", and shifts to the next process (process in step 1430). Even if No in step 1401-1 or 1401-6, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1430).

In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to a winning combination and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to a winning combination) are performed. When configured to have, it was necessary to execute the AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, in the figure, The process of step 1401-2 is supported) and the lottery process executed when the condition device having no setting difference is won (in the figure, the process of step 1401-4 is supported). Can be executed in one lottery process (in the figure, the process of steps 1401-6 corresponds to).

In the above, the configuration of a rotating cylinder type gaming machine has been illustrated as a gaming machine, but the above configuration is applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, arrange balls, game machines, and casino machines. it can.

Of the above configurations, the configuration related to the setting of the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, the setting / reset button, etc. (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) is also applicable to the pachinko gaming machine having the set value. Applicable.

<<< Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example >>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the execution mode of the push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

Further, regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as a push order navigation.
(1) The display of the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "= 3", it is possible to instruct the pressing order of "middle->left->right". Further, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction and instruction display, and a game for executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) Displaying the operation mode (an image suggesting) of the stop button advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "123", it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of "left → middle → right".
(3) Outputting a voice suggesting an operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button by outputting "left" when the start lever is operated.
(4) When the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button which is advantageous to the player, it is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button lights up, instructing (suggestion) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible.
(5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S is a player. Lighting (blinking) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button, which is advantageous to the user, is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, so that it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

In the following, the push order navigation is displayed for the game in which the push order combination (the combination in which the number of payouts and the transition mode of the RT state may differ depending on the push order such as the push order bell and the push order replay combination) is determined as the winning combination. The timing at which is started and the timing at which push order navigation ends will be described. By determining the push order combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute the push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous stop button operation mode (reel stop order and stop button operation timing). It is configured as.

<< Configuration related to the start of display of push order navigation >>
<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>
First, if there is no weight, in other words, the push order when the game is executed by operating the start lever when the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0). The execution mode of the navigation will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating (executed in step 1260 of FIG. 18). In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after executing the rotating cylinder rotation process, "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
"= 1": Indicate the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right""=2": Indicate the pressing order of "Left → Right → Middle""=3": Indicate the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" Instruction "= 4": Instruct the pressing order of "Middle->Right->Left""=5": Instruct the pressing order of "Right->Left->Middle""=6": Instruct the pressing order of "Right->Middle->Left" Is configured as instructed.

The display mode when the push order navigation is executed by the push order display device D270 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode. For example, the right digit (lower digit) without displaying "=". A number may be displayed only on the right digit, or a display mode other than the number corresponding to the stop button (or reel) may be displayed only on the right digit (lower digit). In addition, the right digit (lower digit) is configured to correspond to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (upper digit) is configured to indicate the push order of the entire game. May be good. In such a configuration, the display mode of the right digit (lower digit) may change for each stop operation of the stop button, while the left digit (upper digit) is the same regardless of the stop operation of the stop button. It becomes a display mode.

After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of push order navigation in the effect display device S40,
"123": Instruct the pressing order of "left → middle → right""132": Instruct the pressing order of "left → right → middle""213": instruct the pressing order of "middle → left → right""312"": Instruct the pressing order of"middle->right-> left "" 231 ": Instruct the pressing order of"right->left-> middle "" 321 ": Instruct the pressing order of"right->middle-> left " Has been done.

The display mode when the push order navigation is executed by the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode, and may be a display mode other than the arithmetic number, for example, a Chinese numeral. , An image of a character that is not a number, an image of a symbol, or the like may be used. In addition to the display mode corresponding to all the stop buttons, for example, "1--" (press order navigation for notifying that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) for instructing only the first stop). You may execute the push order navigation like this.

The "display" may mean that all the elements to be displayed have been displayed, or that the elements to be displayed have started to be displayed. For example, displaying "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all the "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40, or the display of "123" is started on the effect display device S40 (). It may be that an effect at the start of display has occurred). Similarly, "end of display" may mean that all the elements whose display should be terminated are not displayed, or that a display transition for hiding the elements whose display should be terminated may be started. For example, when the display of "123" is finished on the effect display device S40, all "123" may not be displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be assumed that the part has begun to be erased (an effect at the end of the display has occurred, etc.). Similarly, "clearing the display" may mean that all the elements for which the display should be erased are not displayed, or may mean that a display transition for hiding the elements for which the display should be erased is started. .. For example, erasing the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be assumed that the part has begun to be erased (an effect when the display is erased has occurred, etc.). Similarly, to erase the display of "1" on the effect display device S40, the effect display device is operated after the left stop button is operated in a situation where all "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40. It may be that "1" is not displayed in S40, or a part of the display of "1" has begun to be erased by the effect display device S40 (an effect at the time of display erasure has occurred, etc.).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes effective. After the reel rotation starts, the reel driving state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, so that the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40, rather than enabling the stop button as shown in the figure. By making it possible to display the push order navigation in front, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation in which the push order is mistaken).

Further, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed (display starts) before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When "Winning-A3" is determined as a winning combination, the CPUC100 of the main control board M issues a command related to winning / replay winning information as a control command in step 1622 as a timer interrupt processing on the sub-control board. Send to the S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning / replay winning information received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M (as the command processing, push order navigation such as step 2360 is performed). Execute push order navigation display processing for display).

Here, the processing when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, the command data is saved, the command analysis process is performed, and the sub-main board (in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the effect control board (the board in the sub control board S) is sequentially performed, and the push order navigation is displayed from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information. It takes about 16 ms to transmit the command according to the aspect. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. As an example, the command transmitted by the main control board M to the sub control board S side is a command related to winning / replay winning information, but this is just an example and can be used as another command such as a command related to the production group number. It may be appropriately designed according to the execution timing of the desired effect.

Further, when the push order navigation is displayed by the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, the push order display device D270 is configured to be lit by dynamic lighting, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed. Assuming that the cycle is 2 ms, since the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, it takes a maximum of about 10 ms to complete the lighting. Since it is configured in this way, the push order navigation is displayed after the trigger for displaying the push order navigation (for example, the operation of the start lever) occurs on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side. An opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side rather than the time until completion (for example, reception of a command related to winning / replay winning information from the main control board M side). ) Is generated and the push order navigation display is completed for a longer period of time.

Here, the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M will be described in detail as the period during which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPUC100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to advance the game. The process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M in this example will be described only for specific steps in order to simplify the description, but it should be added that this is not the case. For example, if the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines in the determination process of step 1251 that the start lever D50 has been operated, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether or not the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel rotation starts. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the weight period until the start of reel rotation. For example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition. It is a period that occurs because the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured by the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not satisfied, and may also be referred to as the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPUC100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process of making is executed. In this example, any timing within the period during which the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any time from the time when the start lever operation is executed to the time when the stop button operation becomes effective. It suffices if it is configured so that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing of.

As described above, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated to the time when the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been described according to the process executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M. However, in this example, the main control board M has been described. According to the process executed by the CPUC100, the start lever operation → the minimum game time has elapsed → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid (also called the operation of the reel stop button is valid). The period will be specified separately. For example, FIG. 94 illustrates a case where the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is executed at the timing immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed during the reel acceleration state. There is.

In FIG. 94, the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board. It means that S executes the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state, and the configuration related to the display of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side is configured as follows. May be good.
(1) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Update reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M pushes order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed by dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command related to the winning / replay winning information → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the command, and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → The main control board M executes the rotating cylinder rotation start process to start the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to the acceleration state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation with the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting → main control Board M sends a command related to winning / re-game winning information to the sub-control board S side → Sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / re-game winning information → Main control board M is specified to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the predetermined command as an opportunity, and the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation → the reel drive state is displayed. Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Update reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M The push order display device D270 displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side wins / replay winning information Receive the command related to → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the command and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum Game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation cylinder rotation start processing and starts reel rotation → Updates reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M dynamically lights push order navigation on push order display device D270 Displayed with → Main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → Main control board M receives a command related to winning / replay winning information Send a predetermined command to the board S side → Sub-control The board S side receives the predetermined command → Update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → Sub-control triggered by the predetermined command The board S side may execute the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. That is, the time value from when the sub-control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to when the drawing process is executed is designed, and the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is determined. Alternatively, the timing at which the main control board M side transmits a predetermined command to the sub control board S side may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, "= 3" is dynamically displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is at the timing after executing the rotation start processing, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. Will be executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel). By determining the rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, the push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably prevent the situation where the player cannot recognize the push order navigation regardless of which display device is viewed due to a delay in the timing of the reeling, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player. Can be done.

<Effect 2>
Further, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be reduced.

<Structure 3>
In the AT state, when a push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the effect display device S40 but also, for example, FIG. 97 , The pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter, referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (intermediate decoration panel) as shown in FIG. 98, or a voice output from the speaker S20. Configuration is also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instruction game is executed, the reel window frame lamp D310 can execute the push order navigation. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (near the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and is composed of, for example, an LED or the like like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S in the same manner as the effect display device S40. That is, when the push order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S steps based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the effect display device S40. By executing command processing (here, referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in 2108 and step 2250, push order navigation can be executed. Since the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position where the player can easily see it, for example, the upper side or the lower side of the reel window D160 (a reel on which the reel can be visually recognized from the player's point of view). It is preferable to provide a space above or below the window D160 so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, "= 3" is displayed (display start) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting. After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts lighting) as the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. .. After that, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device", and the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing is later than that of the push order display device D270 and earlier than that of the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is performed in sequence, and then the push order navigation is performed from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and the process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the lighting process if there is no problem in the content of the command (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning / replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command as an opportunity to display the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. When the push order navigation is executed by, the push order navigation display (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, and may be a command related to the effect group number.

In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display the push order navigation (lighting display) before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed faster, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken).

The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be "push order display device-> effect display device-> reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub-main board may send a command related to push-order navigation to the lamp board. Then, a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310. May be a different command.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which the display is started) is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), "reel window frame lamp-> push order display device-> effect display device", "effect display device-> push order display device-> reel window frame lamp", It may be configured as "reel window frame lamp-> effect display device-> push order display device" and "effect display device-> reel window frame lamp-> push order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically performs push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start display) when it is lit, or a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310. May be different from the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting display) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting.
(1) The push order navigation by the dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first (3) The push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state). → By determining the period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp ( In this example, a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc., and is unlikely to cause the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation (advantageous operation mode of the stop button). Can be provided.

<Structure 4>
Next, as the configuration 4, a configuration for executing the notification of the push order navigation by the voice output from the speaker S20 will be described. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the push order by voice in the instruction game. For example, dialogues such as "left", "middle", and "right" are output as voice from the speaker, and the stop is performed. Execute push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 98. The state related to AT is the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed. The process is executed and the reel starts rotating. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, immediately after the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, "= 3" is displayed (display start) as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 by dynamic lighting. After "= 3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation that outputs the sound by the speaker S20 is "middle" (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation). A voice suggesting that) is output. After that, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device", and the timing at which the push order navigation notification by voice output is started is the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is slower than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is performed in sequence, and then the push order navigation is performed from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). The process of transmitting the command related to the display mode and the process of transmitting the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. Further, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes a drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the voice output process if there is no problem in the command content (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the command related to the winning / replay winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command as an opportunity for the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20. When the push order navigation is executed, the push order navigation output (audio output) by the speaker S20 is executed before the push order navigation is displayed by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replay winning information, and may be a command related to the effect group number.

In this way, by configuring the push order navigation output (voice output) by the speaker S20 to be executed before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification can be executed to the player faster. At the same time, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice even if he / she is not looking at the effect display device S40, and operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (wrong pressing order). It is possible to prevent the situation).

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The order in which they are done is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), it may be configured as "push order display device-> effect display device-> voice". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board, and then the sub-main board may send a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. It is good, and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation in the voice from the speaker S20 are displayed from the main control board M side. The command may be different from the command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) is "voice-> push order display device-> effect display device", "voice-> effect display device-> push order display device", "effect display device->voice->press". It is also possible to configure "sequential display device", "effect display device-> push order display device->voice", and the like. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the voice control board and the effect control board, the main control board M performs push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start display) by dynamic lighting, or the command from the main control board M side and the push order in the voice from the speaker S20, which triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M side, which triggers the navigation to be displayed, may be a different command. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting display) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting.
(1) The push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) The push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is executed first (3) The push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), such as executing the navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has passed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button. By determining the period until the operation becomes effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is voiced (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using (output voice) or the like, and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation.

<< Execution mode of push order navigation when there is weight >>
First, if there is a weight, in other words, the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is greater than 0), and then the game is executed. The execution mode of the push order navigation in the case of being performed will be described below.

<Structure 1>
First, configuration 1 of FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

First, the start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 by timer interrupt processing, so that the push order display device D270 is "=". Execute the process of displaying (starting display) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting. After that, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display starts) as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above). Execute the process). After that, the minimum game time elapses, the reel starts rotating by executing the rotation cylinder rotation start process, and the main control board M is in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes effective), the push order display device D270 executes a process of displaying (starting display) dynamic lighting of "= 3" as a push order navigation. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Here, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40 based on the reception of the command related to the effect group number. , The command that triggers the execution of the process of displaying (starting the display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and at the timing of displaying (starting the display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The command to be transmitted from the main control board M, which serves as an opportunity, may be determined accordingly.

<Structure 3>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (drawing described above). Execute the process). After that, the main control board M dynamically sets "= 3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum game time elapses, the rotation cylinder rotation start process is executed, and the reel starts to rotate. Executes the process of displaying (starting display) when it is lit. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processes) or more until the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device. The push order navigation of S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, when the start lever is operated in a situation where less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for five timer interrupt processes) remains before the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in the situation where the time has passed, as described above, an opportunity to display the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever). The opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, the main control board M) rather than the time from the occurrence of the operation) to the completion of the display of the push order navigation. Since the time from the occurrence of the winning / re-game winning information command reception from the side) to the completion of the push order navigation display is configured to be longer, the push order display device D270 The push order navigation of is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been described, but the push order navigation is displayed (display start). The timing is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) in FIG. 99, the effect display device S40 is used before the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses. During the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), and the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 simultaneously display (display start) the push order navigation. Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses, and the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40 after the minimum game time elapses. The push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum game time elapses, and the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270 after the minimum game time elapses. May be configured to divide the display (display start) timing of the push order navigation before and after the elapse of the minimum game time, such as displaying (display start).

<Effect>
In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration. State → Reel constant speed state → Period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective). With this configuration, it is possible to make the timing of displaying (display start) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting display) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40,
(1) When the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 The start lever is operated, and the main control board M wins the winning combination (here, the push order). Since the timer interrupt process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the effect group number is determined based on the determination of the bell role, the push order display device D270 can be configured to display (display start) the push order navigation. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly notifies the player of information related to push order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40 Since the information related to the current game state or the winning combination is often configured to be suggested on the effect display device S40, the player advances the game while visually recognizing the effect display device S40. Will go. The size (display area) is larger than that of the push order display device D270, and the effect display device S40, which is easy for the player to see, is configured to promptly notify the player of information related to the push order navigation. Even if the push order navigation is newly executed while the device S40 is visually recognized, the push order navigation can be confirmed while visually recognizing the effect display device S40, so that another push order navigation is displayed each time the push order navigation is displayed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the gaming burden on the player without paying attention to the display device.
In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the push order navigation is not recognized by the player regardless of which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

Further, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, the two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can avoid the situation in which the player does not have to play and can reduce the player's game burden by being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on individual display devices at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. ..

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 102 will be described. In the configuration 4, the reel window frame lamp D310 is provided. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the process to be performed. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is the timing before the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is a push order navigation. This is because it can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum game time elapses, the rotation start process is executed, the reel starts rotating, and then, before the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push order display device D270 displays the push order navigation as " = 3 ”is displayed (display starts) with dynamic lighting. In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp-> effect display device-> push order display device", and the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310. The timing to be performed is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration as illustrated in FIG. 102, the start lever is operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (for example, the start lever is operated (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> reel window frame lamp-> effect display device" or. There is a case where "reel window frame lamp-> push order display device-> effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 is displayed. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) when the minimum game time elapses (about 10 ms remaining), the push order display device. The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) after the push order navigation is displayed by the D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Further, also in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (main control board M When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (display starts) after the push order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270.
As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is as follows: start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be set as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display the push order navigation (lighting display) before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. It can be executed faster, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken).

Further, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by lighting the lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that is unlikely to cause the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 103 will be described. In the configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated when the state related to AT is the AT in-progress state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed. The sub-control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, and then outputs the sound from the speaker S20 as "middle!" (The first stop operation is the middle stop button. The process of outputting the voice with the voice suggesting the operation) is executed. After that, the effect display device S40 executes a process of displaying (starting display) "213" as a push order navigation. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the voice from the speaker S20 is started is the timing before the effect display device S40. This is a process in which when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the audio output process from the speaker S20 draws the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. This is because it is executed faster than. After that, after the minimum game time elapses, the reel starts to rotate, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant on the main control board M, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Previously, the push order display device D270 executes a process of displaying (starting display) dynamic lighting of "= 3" as a push order navigation. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “voice → effect display device → push order display device”, and the timing at which the push order navigation notification by voice output is started is the push order display. The timing is ahead of the device D270 and ahead of the effect display device S40.

Even in the case of the configuration as illustrated in FIG. 103, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (for example, the remaining game time is about 10 ms). When the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "push order display device-> voice-> effect display device" or "voice->". In some cases, the push order display device → the effect display device. Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 is displayed. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it is just before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) when the minimum game time elapses (about 10 ms remaining), the push order display device. The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display started) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the push order navigation is notified by voice.

Further, also in the speaker S20, the start lever was operated immediately before the end of the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M is the sub control board). When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. The push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 may be notified after the display of the push order navigation by D270.

As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation display is started on the push order display device D270 is as follows: start lever operation → period during which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be set as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → By determining the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective), for example, even if the gaming machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40. The push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of voice (voice output from the speaker S20 in this example), and in a situation where the reel or the stop button is focused and the effect display device S40 is not viewed. Even when the push order navigation is executed, the player can recognize the push order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button, so that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which things are unlikely to occur.

An example of the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 has been described for the case where there is a weight and the case where there is no weight. The timing for displaying the push order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. If it is the period from the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above to the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button is valid, the pressing order is appropriate. You can set the timing to display the navigation. Further, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) from the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receiving a predetermined command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M to displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Is. Further, the larger the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40, the more time is required. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from the determination of the winning combination to the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 as described above, As an example, the timing at which the push order navigation display is started on the effect display device S40 is the period during which the minimum game time has not elapsed (when there is a weight) → the reel rotation starts (when there is no weight) → the reel acceleration. State → Reel constant speed state → It is preferable to set the period until the operation of the stop button becomes effective. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is started and the period until the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is started are different. Can be done. During these periods, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started on each display device.

For example, in the period until the start lever operation → the minimum game time elapses → the reel rotation start → the reel acceleration state → the reel constant speed state → the operation of the stop button becomes effective, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, the voice, and the reel To describe an example of the order in which the push order navigation on the window frame lamp D310 is notified,
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Voice (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → voice → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Production display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Voice (12 ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order Display device → effect display device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → voice → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → voice (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → voice → push order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device → effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → start lever operation → minimum game time elapses → reel rotation start → In the period from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state to the operation of the stop button, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start).

Further, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). It is also possible to add a push-order navigation that lights (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player by the stop button lamp S60. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S lights (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button on which the first stop operation should be performed. Execute the process to make it. An example of the order in which the push-order navigation with the stop button D40 is added to the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) is described.
(25) Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Effect display device (26) Push order display device → Voice → Stop button lamp (1st stop) Button only lit (blinking)) → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (27) Press order display device → voice → stop button lamp (only the first stop button lit (blinking)) and reel window frame lamp are almost simultaneous → effect It can be configured like a display device, but the order here is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are turned on (blinking) at the same time, but it is also possible to configure the speaker S20 to output sound at the same time. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing (push order display device D270) related to display (display start) of push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel) The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined depending on the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the stop button D40). When performing push-button navigation by the stop button lamp S60, instead of lighting (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels, only the stop button lamps corresponding to the reels on which the stop operation should be performed are displayed. It is preferable to control the lighting (blinking). When executing the push-order navigation of, for example, "213": "middle->left->right" by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp (lit) corresponding to the middle stop button D42 → the middle stop button D42 is operated → the middle stop. Stop button lamp corresponding to button D42 (off) → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (lit) → Operate left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp corresponding to left stop button D41 (off) → Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit) → Operate right stop button D43 → Stop button lamp corresponding to reel lights based on the progress of the game like stop button lamp corresponding to right stop button D43 (off) (Blinking), configured to turn off.

Further, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is executed by the sub-control board S has been described above. The control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push-button navigation under the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described.

When controlling the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M, the start lever is operated, and a timer interrupt is performed after the effect group number is determined based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the pressing order bell combination). The process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is executed by the process (for example, in the first cycle from the determination of the effect group number, the time required for the stop button lamp S60 to turn on is about 2 ms). It becomes possible to do. To describe an example of the order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) in the configuration in which the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added by the configuration in this way.
(28) Press order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) → Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinks)) and push order display device are almost simultaneous → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Production It can be configured like a display device, but the order here is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 controlled by the main control board M side is the sound from the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20 controlled by the sub control board S side. , It is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, but on the main control board M side, the timing to execute the timer interrupt process for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is changed. After starting the push-order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310), the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 may be started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of push-order navigation on the main control board M side (push-order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub-control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order in which the push-order navigation is displayed (display starts) may be determined depending on the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push-order navigation of the lamp D310 and the speaker S20.

<< Configuration related to the end of display of push order navigation >>
Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. The timing at which the push order navigation ends can be freely designed to some extent according to the period during which the player ends the game, similar to the timing at which the push order navigation starts. An example of the period during which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a prize is won, the game ends when the payout of the game medal based on the prize is completed.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation is the period of "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> not pressing the 3rd stop button-> winning judgment-> payout based on winning" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. It is possible to specify either timing. In this example, the end timing of the push order navigation is configured to be different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is the push order bell or the push order replay combination.

In the configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed and the effect display device. It should be added that the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button of S40 has also been completed.

<Structure 1>
First, configuration 1 of FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends, and the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start). Will be done. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

Here, the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, in the situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, the right stop button is operated, and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button is turned from off to on. Is detected by the interrupt process on the main control board M side, so that the command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. Then, by executing the process of erasing the display of "3", the push-order navigation disappearance effect that is erased after the display of "3" becomes transparent is displayed.

After that, in the situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is finished, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is finished (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is finished). Here, as the end trigger of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40, both "press the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). It is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), but in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 precedes the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display is completely erased. This is the same as when the push order navigation starts, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S draws a plurality of frames. It can be said that this is because the end of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed by the amount of processing for displaying.

To elaborate on the end of the push order navigation, in the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 is turned on → off start → off is completed, so that the push order navigation ends, and in the effect display device S40, the push order is pushed. The push order navigation ends when the display of the forward navigation → the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect starts → the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (erasing is completed). In this example, the timing at which the push-order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as the push-order display device turns off, and the display start of the push-order navigation disappearance effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push-order navigation disappearance effect. The push-order display device extinguishing may be replaced with the timing at which the push-order display device D270 completes turning off, or the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect may be replaced with the timing at which the display of the push-order navigation extinction effect ends. The timing of turning off the push order display device and displaying the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start) may be set to the push order display device turn off → display of the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start), or display of the push order disappearance effect. (Display start) → The push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearance effect may be displayed (display start) at the same time.

Further, the configuration in which the push-button navigation display ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, but the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected) is the same as when the third stop button is operated. It is the timing when it is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side that the sensor for this is turned on from off. In the following, it may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is pressed") and the third stop. After the button is pressed, the third stop button is released (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side). , It is the timing when it is detected that it has changed from on to off, and in the following, it may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It can also be configured to specify the timing. For example, in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is described in more detail.
(When the push order navigation ends not at the same time)
(1) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(2) Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device turns off → the interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned on from off → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub The control board S side receives the command → Display of push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(3) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push-order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(4) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to the detection of the stop button → The sub control board S side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (5) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side 3 Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button has turned from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board S The side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Push order display device goes off (6) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Sub control board from the main control board M side Send a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button to the S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (end of push order navigation at the same time) If)
(7) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to the detection of the stop button → The sub control board S side receives the command → The push order disappearance effect is displayed (display starts) and the push order display device is turned off (8) By the interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has turned from on to off → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board It is possible for the S side to specify that the push order display device is turned off at the same time as the reception of the command → the display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect.

Further, the display mode of the push order navigation when the first stop button is pressed and when the second stop button is pressed, not when the third stop button is pressed, will be described as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on (or from on to off) by the interrupt process on the main control board M side after the lighting is started. The lighted state continues until it is detected and the light is turned off. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the first stop button is pressed (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on (or from on to off) by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side). (Detection) The command related to the detection of the first stop button is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the push order corresponding to the first stop button disappears. Start changing the display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation (for example, "2" display) corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (hereinafter, "display mode of the second reel push order navigation"). It is also configured to "start change"). The order in which these are executed is
(9) Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (10) Start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation → No. 1 Display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the stop button (display start)
It may be configured as either of. Similarly, when the second stop button is operated, the same applies.
(11) Display of push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the 2nd stop button (display start) → Start of change of display mode of 3rd reel push order navigation (12) 3rd reel push order Start changing the display mode of the navigation → Display the push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button (display start)
It can be configured as follows.

<Structure 2>
Next, the configuration 2 of FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Structure 3>
Next, configuration 3 of FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is set to “3” instead of “= 3”. That is, the numerical value is displayed as the push order navigation in the right digit of the push order display device D270, and the left digit is hidden. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation display and the display of the number of acquired sheets.

The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) Will be done. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle-> left-> right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the symbol combination related to the push order bell (the symbol combination for paying out 11 sheets) is stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when the right stop button is released, the payout related to the symbol combination displayed as stopped is started, and the push order display device D270 is displayed with "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11". The number of acquired cards is displayed. After "11" is displayed on the push order display device D270 (after displaying the acquired number of sheets), the display of the push order display device D270 is terminated (hidden). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the acquired number of sheets display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is a numerical value only in the lower digit of the push order display device D270. In the mode of displaying, when the symbol combination for which the game medal is paid out is stopped and displayed in the instruction game, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the acquired number display. There is a risk that a person may misidentify the push order navigation or the number of acquired medals. Therefore, by ending the display of the push order navigation and configuring to display "0" while starting the display of the acquired number of sheets, regardless of the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1). Whether the number is 11 or 11), the player can recognize that the display of the acquired number is started. The numerical value of "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as the push order navigation.

In addition, the end timing of the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is changed from "the third stop button is not pressed (after separation)", that is, "3" is displayed (the function of the push order display device) to "0". (Function of the payout number display device) is set, but for example, it may be the timing of "payout completion based on winning" when the display of the push order display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 precedes the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. You can see that it will end.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", "33" instead of "= 3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" are associated with the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the positions of the reels on which the stop operation should be performed. (For example, "1" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The digit "3" on the right side corresponds to the pressing order "middle-> left-> right" (corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the effect display device S40 as in the conventional configuration. It is a thing. With this configuration, the push order navigation is displayed in the order of "23"-> "13"-> "33", and the stop button is operated according to the push order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation on the next reel should be performed is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation (“33” in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, so that the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning judgment → winning). The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the number of problems.

Further, when the end of the push order navigation display (push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) on the push order display device D270 is triggered by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on. If it is specified to be turned off (release the stop button), it will stop even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with a sense of expectation for the result of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned from on to off. Here, if the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned from off to on, the expectation that the result of the game may not be advantageous to the player is reduced. Since there is a possibility that the event will come off, the result of the game is not a favorable result for the player by configuring so that the push order navigation does not end until the stop button is turned from on to off. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce the expectation of the heel.

<Structure 4>
Next, the configuration 4 of FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. In the game, the player has won the predetermined push order re-game, and the player is most advantageous by stopping the game in the order of "middle->left->right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability). (For example, when the middle first stop is the most profitable three-choice push-order re-game, "re-game-D2" is won).

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. Is stopped and displayed, so that automatic betting is executed and the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up (when automatic betting is executed, for example, 1-bet lamp D211 → 2-bet lamp D212 → 3-bet lamp D213). Will light up).

<Structure 5>
Next, the configuration 5 of FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), and the first stop button and the second stop button are operated. In a situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from off to on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → sub-control from the main control board M side. Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → Display the push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) ). In the game, the player has won the predetermined push order re-game, and the player is most advantageous by stopping the game in the order of "middle->left->right" (RT state with high re-game winning probability). (For example, when the middle first stop is the most profitable three-choice push-order re-game, "re-game-D2" is won).

After that, while pressing the right stop button, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side), the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. Is stopped and displayed, so that automatic betting is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the push-order navigation in the push-order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, when the configuration 1 of FIG. 104 and the configuration 5 of FIG. 108 are provided, it is possible to distinguish between the push order bell combination and the push order replay combination in the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that enables even a player who does not have a mark to determine which small winning combination has won a prize due to the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the end timing of the push order navigation in the case of the push order bell as the push order combination or the push order replay combination has been described. In the effect display device S40, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, only the case of "when the third stop button is pressed" has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the period for ending the game, if any of the third stop button operation (pressing) → the third stop button not pressing → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning, the timing to end the push order navigation is arbitrarily determined. Is possible. Further, in the push order display device D270, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, the period during which the push order navigation ends differs depending on whether the winning combination is the push order bell or the push order replay combination. ing. As an example of the case where the winning combination is the push order replay combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is set to "when the 1-bet lamp is lit", and the push order is displayed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 changes significantly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is the start of the next game, it is the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell. The timing is later than "Stop button not pressed-> Winning judgment-> Completion of payout based on winning", "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> No third stop button pressed-> Winning judgment-> Completion of payout based on winning-> 1 bet lamp If the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is not pressing the 3rd stop button, then "3rd stop button operation (pressing)-> 3rd stop button not pressed-> 1-bet lamp lighting-> winning. Judgment → Completion of payout based on winning ", and the winning combination will be included within the end period of the push order navigation at the time of the push order bell.

Similar to the timing when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends is also based on the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button not pressed → winning judgment → winning. An example of the order in which the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the voice, and the reel window frame lamp D310 is completed during the payout completion period will be described.
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (2) push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Voice (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → voice → effect display device (7) effect display device → push order display device → voice → reel window frame lamp (8) effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → sound (9) effect display device → Voice → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Production display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Voice (12 ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order Display device → effect display device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → voice → effect display device (21) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device → voice (22) reel window frame lamp → effect display device → voice → push order display device (23) reel Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device → effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → voice → effect display device → push order display device In this way, the third stop button operation (press) → the third stop button is not In the period of pressing → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the pushing order navigation ends.

Further, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). An example of the order in which the push-order navigation with the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 to be completed is completed will be described. As the process until the end of the push-button navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned from on to off → the main control board M. Sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → The sub-control board S receives the command → Stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turns off (starts turning off). Further, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has been turned from on to off. → The main control board M stops the first stop on the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. Send a command related to button operation → The sub-control board S receives the command → Turn off the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button (start turning off) and provide it inside the second stop button. Turns on (starts lighting) the stop button lamp S60.
(25) Push-order display device-> effect display device->voice-> reel window frame lamp-> stop button (third stop button lamp goes off)
(26) Push-order display device-> effect display device-> reel window frame lamp->sound-> stop button (third stop button lamp goes off)
It is possible to configure such as. The timing of the end of the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, voice, reel, like the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push order navigation by turning on or off the lamp. It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. Further, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game proceeds based on << configuration related to the display start of the push order navigation >> and << configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >>. .. A concrete example of the flow of one game from the display (start of display) of the push order navigation to the end of the push order navigation is described.
1. 1. Push order navigation display (display start)
Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (display start) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation 2-1. Production display device S40
Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of 1st stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of 1st stop button → Change of display mode of 2nd reel push order navigation → Display of push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the 2nd stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the 2nd stop button → 3rd reel Change of display mode of push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The push order display device D270 is in a lit state.
3. 3. 3rd stop button operation-end of push-order navigation display 3rd stop button operation-> push-order display device off-> display of push-order navigation disappearance effect corresponding to 3rd stop button operation (display start)-> 3rd stop button End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game proceeds. The example described above is only one example, for example, 1. The push order navigation display (display start) may include the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20, and the push order navigation display (display start) timing and push order may be included. The order in which the navigation is displayed (display starts) is not limited to this. In addition, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays the push order disappearing effect corresponding to each stop button (display start), and changes the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order of doing this is not limited to this. Also, 3. In the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the order of the end of the display of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is more detailed. It may be specified (it can be further classified by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different. It is possible to avoid the situation where the display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of the player being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → no third stop button pressed → winning judgment → completion of payout based on winning. By specifying the period), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, which is user-friendly. A game machine can be provided.

<Display mode when the push order is incorrect>
Here, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, an example of the configuration of the display mode of the push order navigation when the game is executed in a push order (or a different operation timing) different from the push order navigation is described in detail. Describe. Here, an example is illustrated in which a game in which the push order bell is won and the correct push order is “left → middle → right” is executed.

In the situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "= 1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is displayed as the first stop operation. (The correct pressing order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned from off to on as interrupt processing on the main control board M side → main control The command related to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the sub control board S side displays all “123” on the effect display device S40. Execute the process to erase.
It may be configured as described above. As described above, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, when a stop button that is not the correct push order is operated, all reels (or stop buttons) are operated on the sub-control board S side. The push order navigation corresponding to the above is deleted, while the display of the push order navigation is maintained on the main control board M side. The push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side during the third stop operation. It is configured to be erased when it detects that the sensor has turned from on to off).

<< Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>
Next, the configuration related to the reel stop control and the display control of the push order navigation (effect display device S40) will be described. In the game, if the player has won the predetermined push order bell and the stop operation is performed in the order of "middle->left->right", it is most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of payouts is large). (When winning "Prize-A3") is illustrated.

<Structure 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, the instruction game related to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the 11th replay symbol is located in the middle of the middle reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" of the middle reel changes to the push order navigation disappearance effect. The middle reel stop button is still being pressed. Further, the middle reel is controlled so as to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination that is the maximum number of 11 cards to be paid out by the stop operation of the middle reel, which is the correct push order. In this example, the 15th bell is configured to stop at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is slipped from the 11th replay A, and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. Control is performed to make it.

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor from the stop operation to the stop of the reel will be described with reference to FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the state transitions from the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation is performed and the position of the symbol constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) is calculated. By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game is configured. Continue the rotation so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game reach the winning line, the reel deceleration state of (6) is transitioned, and the reel stop state of (7) is controlled. To do.

After that, as shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 109, in the effect display device S40, the push order navigation disappearance effect of the middle reel is erased (display ends), and the middle reel stops and displays the 15th bell on the winning line. The slip control is continued in order to make it. The middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be stopped (significantly changing the number, moving the number, making the number shine, etc.). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues the sliding control in order to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. The middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display ends) or in the push order. It may be after the navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end).

After that, after the middle stop button has been pressed for a predetermined time, the 15th bell on the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is a time (for example, during 190 ms) in which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. As described above, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation is performed before the reel on which the stop operation is performed is displayed as a stop (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured so that the push order navigation corresponding to the reel in which the above is performed can be deleted, and the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next can be changed.

Here, as an example that can be carried out in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of frames slips occurs has been described. For example, the symbols constituting the push order combination can be stopped at 0 frame slides. When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Even if the number of frames is 0, the display mode highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed before the timing when the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is configured to change. With this configuration, even if the number of frames is 0, the stop button will be operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player will mistakenly perform the stop operation in the pressing order. Can be prevented. In addition, it is more preferable that the timing for changing the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to which the next stop operation should be performed to the display mode for highlighting is earlier, and even in the case of 0 frame slip, the timing should be as early as possible. Is preferable.

Further, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but it can be applied not only to the push order bell but also to all the condition devices that generate the push order navigation. Further, as the effect means for notifying the pressing order, lighting by the reel window frame lamp D310 or the sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when the push order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed before the effect display device S40 is changed. Execute push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (if the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is turned on, and if it is voice, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as voice). It is possible to configure.

Further, as the configuration related to << Reel control and push order navigation >> in this example, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 has been described as an example of the effect means for executing the push order navigation. For example, even if the reel window frame lamp D310, the voice, and the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) are configured to include the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside. Good. Push-order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and push-order navigation by voice is "left", "right", and "middle" from the speaker S20. Is executed by outputting, and the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is the left stop button corresponding to the reel. It is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off D41.

For example, in the configuration related to << reel control and push-order navigation >> in this example, reel window frame lamp D310, voice, stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). ) Is included
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (2) Voice (2-1) Next Audio output corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed (3-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (display end)
(4-2) Change in display mode for highlighting push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed Next, the configuration related to push order navigation for each effect means can be specified. The order in which these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) are executed may be determined in any way. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each effect means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → effect display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. Alternatively, (for example, processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next), or a combination of these may be configured.

Further, in this example, as << configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>, the description was given with reference to FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation was performed was described as an example. The configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to the first stop operation. For example, when the second stop operation is performed, it is applicable even when the third stop operation is performed. At the time of the third stop operation, the process corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed next (for example, the change to the "display mode for highlighting the push order navigation" in the effect display device S40, the reel window frame lamp The process of "lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel to which the stop operation should be performed next") in D310 is not executed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even when the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control accompanied by the sliding of the maximum number of frames, the effect display device S40. End of push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from start to end of display of extinction effect), and change of display mode of push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button to be stopped next (start of highlighting) Can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so that it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing the stop button to be stopped next. ..

<<<<<< Third embodiment medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and the predetermined passing conditions (the passing game medals satisfy the standard). If the condition (such as not being determined to be an error) is satisfied, the game medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without causing an error. A first input sensor D20s and a second input sensor D30s are provided further behind the input reception sensor D10s, and a game medal that satisfies the dimensional standard and is accepted receives the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When passing, if it is determined that the inserted game medal is normally inserted, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal, and credit addition can be performed. When the game medal passes, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s detect the insertion of the game medal, and the signal (information on the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s is sent. Information on the time from when it is turned on to when it is turned off, information on when the second input sensor D30s is turned on, information on the time when the second input sensor D30s is turned on and when it is turned off, etc.) It is supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined by the on / off status of each of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s.

<<< Timing chart for detecting game medals by the input sensor >>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 2 in the figure. The time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. Subsequently, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the game medal (on → off) at the timing of 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from the detection of the game medal by the first input sensor D20s to the end of the detection of the game medal is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4 ms ≦ A <183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. Further, the time B from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of the detection by the first insertion sensor D20s is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2ms ≦ B <. If it is 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s finishes the detection of the game medal (on → off) at the timing of 4 in the figure. The time C from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the end of detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4ms ≦ C <183ms). If so, it is determined that the passage of the game medal is normally detected. In this way, it is determined whether the game medal has normally passed through the medal selector DS at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, and further, the first insertion sensor The game medals inserted at any timing when the D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off are detected as bet medals, and credits are added.

<<< Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 1 >>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and the credit addition is performed will be described in detail. 11 to 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing according to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. In the flowchart of FIG. 111, the description of the same content as that of FIG. 17 will be omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and steps 1232 and later). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226-1 (4th), in step 1226-2 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the first input sensor D20s on and the second input sensor D30s off. (Image by middle and upper part of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-3 (fourth), whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the first input sensor D20s on and the second input sensor D30s on. Judgment (image diagram by the upper right corner of FIG. 113, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off → on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), in step 1226-6 (fourth), whether or not the CPUC100 of the main control board M is the first input sensor D20s off and the second input sensor D30s on. Judgment (image diagram by the lower left of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-6 (4th), in step 1226-8 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted, and the credit addition process is performed. Will be done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off (image diagram game according to the middle and lower stages of FIG. 113). The second insertion sensor D30s is turned on and off when the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-9 (4th), it is determined that the insertion of one normal game medal is completed, and for example, when the number of bets satisfies the specified number, the operation of the start lever D50 is valid. Processing such as setting is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, the credit addition process is executed at the timing when "the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on → the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is off". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. If this happens, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and an execution process for performing a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is performed. It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the position closer to the medal insertion slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s. It is also possible to prevent a goto action (for example, Clemangoto) by the first input sensor D20s provided in the above, to provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Subroutine due to input sensor error in the third embodiment >>>
If No in Step 1226-3 (4th), Step 1226-6 (4th), and Step 1226-9 (4th), Step 1226-4 (4th), Step 1226-7 (4th). In step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition for generating a predetermined medal insertion error is satisfied. The medal insertion error here includes, for example, an insertion medal backflow error, an insertion number error, an insertion medal retention error, and the on / off status (including time) of sensors such as the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor. Based on, it is determined whether or not any error has occurred (occurrence conditions differ depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on the on / off detection of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If Yes in any of Step 1226-4 (4th), Step 1226-7 (4th), and Step 1226-10 (4th), the medal insertion error processing is executed in Step 1226-5 (4th). Will be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command (to the sub side). (For example, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (fourth). In 1226-13 (fourth), information related to an error corresponding to the error flag that is turned on (an error that is currently occurring) is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process. Error processing will be executed according to the type of error that has occurred, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from the state where no error has occurred. , Even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the state in which the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, the payout medal retention error). Good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently occurring error has been cleared. When it is determined that the error has been cleared, the error flag currently occurring in step 1226-15 is turned off, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described. In the error detection, for example, the medal insertion slot D170 in the medal selector DS has been described. It is also possible to detect an error based on the detection of the game medal of the insertion reception sensor D10s provided in the vicinity, and an example of error detection based on the detection of the game medal of the insertion reception sensor D10s will be described below. ..

<<< Error detection based on the input monitoring counter in the third embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
The insertion reception sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions, and it is determined that the insertion reception sensor D10s does not conform to this function. The medal (or other foreign matter) is configured to be refunded to the outlet D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that the matching game medal has passed, the input reception sensor D10s is changed from off to on, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives the signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 by a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an insertion monitoring counter) that counts the passage of game medals. Then, the main control board M monitors the insertion at the timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off (corresponding to the timing of 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs with respect to the insertion of game medals in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. .. For example, when the second insertion sensor D30s does not turn from on to off, the insertion monitoring counter is not subtracted, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to be added, the insertion medal retention error can be detected. Further, when the second closing sensor D30s is turned from on to off before the closing reception sensor D10s and the closing monitoring counter is subtracted first, the closing monitoring counter becomes negative. Inserted medal backflow error can be detected.

<Effect>
In this way, the error determination can be performed based on the detection of the game medal by the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion reception sensor D10s, thereby relating to the insertion of the game medal. It is possible to reliably detect various errors, provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and eventually provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Output of medal insertion sound in the third embodiment >>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after detecting the inserted game medal as a bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. However, the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D20s is on. An error may occur when the sensor D30s is on (for example, an insertion medal retention error due to an abnormally long turn-on time of the second insertion sensor D30s). In the third embodiment, the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. Therefore, for example, it is assumed that an error occurs after the credit addition process is executed. To. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition processing and the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described.

<< Configuration 3 >>
First, as the timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. More specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit of B, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit of the period of C, gives 68 ms. That is, in this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "sets the command related to the medal insertion reception → the medal insertion reception → sends the command to the sub control board side → sets the error detection command (if there is an error)". By executing the process as described above, the medal insertion sound can be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<< Configuration 4 >>
As a modification of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M processes "set a command related to medal insertion reception-> execute credit addition processing-> send a command to the sub-control board side-> set an error detection command (if there is an error)". May be done.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the medal insertion reception is accepted at the timing when "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on". This process is executed, and the subsequent timer interrupt process sends a command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. .. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "first insertion sensor D20s is off and second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, the insertion medal is inserted after the medal insertion sound has already been output. Since it is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. It is possible to confirm the medal insertion sound before, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is worried that the game medal may not be inserted normally due to the insertion medal retention error and the loss may have occurred.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, as the timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time when the credit addition process is performed until the error is detected by the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally determines. , The command related to the medal insertion reception is configured not to be transmitted to the sub-control board side. After that, an error detection command based on error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is set, and then a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M "executes credit addition processing-> detects error flag-> sets error detection command-> sends error detection command to sub-control board side-> sets command related to medal insertion reception-> sub-control The medal insertion sound is made after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s by configuring the process to execute the process such as "send the command related to the medal insertion reception to the board side". It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable that the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub side by a timer interrupt processing different from that when the error detection command is transmitted.

<< Configuration 6 >>
As a modification of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "detects an error flag-> sets an error detection command-> sends an error detection command to the sub-control board side-> sets a command related to medal insertion reception-> executes a credit addition process-> sub-control A process of "sending a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the board side" may be performed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the first throw-in sensor D20s is on and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on-> the first throw-in sensor D20s is off and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is issued from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error is output. After that, after the process related to the medal insertion reception is executed, the command related to the medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. If the situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. In order to determine that the medal has been inserted (because the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), the player has an error related to the insertion medal retention error before the output of the medal insertion sound. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can immediately detect that the game medal has not been inserted normally.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, as the timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and is output after the error is cleared. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time when the credit addition process is performed until the error is detected by the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPUC100 of the main control board M intentionally determines. , It is the same as the second timing that the command related to the medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub control board side, but after the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226-15. It is configured to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M "executes credit addition processing-> detects an error flag-> sets an error detection command-> sends an error detection command to the sub-control board side-> ... (error cancellation processing during this period).・ ・ → Set the error undetected command → Send the error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set the command related to the medal insertion reception → Send the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board side ” By configuring to execute, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound after canceling the error.

<< Configuration 8 >>
As a modification of the timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be different. That is, the CPUC100 of the main control board M "detects the error flag-> sets the error detection command-> sends the error detection command to the sub-control board side-> ... (error release processing during this period) ...-> error not detected. Set the command → Send the error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set the command related to the medal insertion reception → Execute the credit addition process → Send the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board side ” May be good.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the first throw-in sensor D20s is on and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on-> the first throw-in sensor D20s is off and the second throw-in sensor D30s is on. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is issued from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is transmitted, and an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error undetected command is sent to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is terminated. Then, after the process related to the medal insertion reception is executed, the command related to the medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. If the situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an insertion medal retention error occurs, an insertion medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. (Because the situation where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the error is further resolved and the output of the error sound is terminated. Since the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error can be confirmed before the output of the medal insertion sound and the medal insertion sound can be confirmed after the error is resolved, the player can normally confirm the medal insertion sound after the error is resolved. It is possible to recognize that a game medal has been inserted.

<<< Third Embodiment Medal error detection by shoot sensor >>>
Next, as a third embodiment, error detection using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows a medal flow path member (referred to as a chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS. It is a figure. In FIG. 114, a shoot sensor D40s is provided below the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s is a normal medal insertion like the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. However, in particular, in the third embodiment, it is configured to be able to detect an error (for example, a inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.) after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

Error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, consider a case where game medals are retained further downstream of the shoot sensor D40s in the shoot body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the path of the game medals in the shoot body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the path of the game medals in the shoot body, the game medals that pass through the path after that are one after another. And it will be in the state of the inserted medal retention error. In the third embodiment, the positions of three game medals are detected by the shoot sensor D40s from the position where the game medals are retained, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

Similar to the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is detected by the shoot sensor D40s when the game medal passes, and the signal (shoot sensor D40s) is detected. Information on the timing at which is turned on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s is turned on to when it is turned off, etc.) is supplied to the main control board M. On the main control board M, game medals are normally inserted based on the information related to the signal detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the information related to the signal detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Is determined. Specifically, the period from the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s starts to detect the game medal to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts to detect the game medal on the main control board M, and in advance. Compare with the specified period (the time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s or less, also referred to as the theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. Is compared with the theoretical period until it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and when the difference between the periods exceeds the range not detected as an error, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment) (Stay error) will be detected. The timing when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal, the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s starts the detection of the game medal, or the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s finishes the detection of the game medal, the second insertion sensor Any of the timings at which the D30s finishes detecting the game medal may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<< Third Embodiment Timing chart for detecting game medals by shoot sensor >>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 2 in the figure. The time information and the like related to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signals. After that, it is assumed that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passage (off → on) of the game medal at the timing of 3 in the figure. The period D from the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s to the start of detection by the shoot sensor D40s, and the period from the detection of the game medal by the second insertion sensor D30s to the start of detection by the shoot sensor D40s. E is calculated by the main control board M, and with these periods as theoretical periods, it is determined whether or not the game medal based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s normally passes through the shoot body. Further, an error that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has normally passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s can be detected by including the shoot sensor D40s.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, some error related to the passage of the game medal near the shoot sensor D40s (shoot sensor medal retention error) is detected, and the player is notified that an error has occurred. Is possible. Further, since the normal passage of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is determined based on the information related to the timing at which the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s is started, the first insertion is performed. Although the passage of the game medal is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, when the passage of the game medal is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, that is, an error related to the backflow of the insertion medal can be reliably detected. It becomes possible to provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud, and by extension, a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<<< 4th Embodiment Medal Return Member >>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 through which the game medal passes when the game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230 will be described. ..

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for explaining the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment in detail will be described. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of a game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341 (described later), and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117.

<<< Front view of medal return member >>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, a game medal (blocker is off) in which the bet or credit addition process is not executed by the medal selector DS that detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs simple authentication. When returning the game medal that reached the blocker to the medal tray D230, the game medal passes through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path) and is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medal is configured to pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as a second flow path) and finally pay out the game medal to the medal tray D230.

The medal return member D340 passes through the first flow path through which an inappropriate game medal detected by the medal selector DS is returned to the medal tray D230, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. It is configured to have at least a second flow path, and the game medals that pass through the two flow paths pass through the medal return member D340 and join when flowing down toward the medal tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 is at least a medal receiving port D341 for receiving the game medals paid out from the hopper H40 and a medal falling surface D342 on which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. Is configured to have. Further, a medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite to the medal drop surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving port, and a medal drop surface D342 on which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is configured to have a space surrounded by and, and a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes through this space.

The medal receiving port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving entrance D341 is open, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can surely pass through the medal receiving entrance D341. Further, in particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge portion (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral portion in the shape of the opening of the medal receiving entrance D341 is referred to as an edge portion). ). In the regulation of the length and distance related to the medal receiving entrance D341, the starting point is any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving entrance D341.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal falling surface D342 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape, and the medal non-dropping surface D343 located opposite to the medal falling surface D342 is also formed in a substantially quadrangular shape. However, the shapes of the medal falling surface D342 and the medal non-dropping surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving entrance D341 is provided so as to be inclined in the downward-sloping direction, and the game medal that collides with the collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 falls. It is configured to be inclined substantially parallel to the medal falling surface D342. With this configuration, the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped on the medal falling surface D342 slides down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medal is surely guided to the medal tray D230. It becomes possible to do. The direction in which the medal receiving entrance D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving entrance D341 and the medal falling surface D342 may not be inclined together. The improper medal detected by the medal selector DS is configured to fall in the direction of the medal tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in the direction perpendicular to the inclination direction of the medal receiving entrance D341. ..

<<< Side view of the medal return member according to the fourth embodiment Trajectory view (perspective view) of the flow of the game medal >>>
Next, the dimensional definition in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 is provided. First, in the game medal, the thickness and the diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness of the game medal, a, is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter of the game medal, b, is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. is there.

Next, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 on which the game medal falls after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving entrance D341 is c, which is perpendicular to the medal non-dropping surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D343 to the edge of the medal reception in the direction is d, and at the edge of the opening of the medal reception D341, at least one direction (for example, the first) in the bottom or height direction. 4 In the embodiment, the length (in the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving port D341), which has a substantially rectangular shape, is e, and the maximum of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341. The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided in the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions.
c ≧ a ... Equation (1)
b> d ... Equation (2)
f ≧ 2b ・ ・ Equation (3)
b> e ... Equation (4)
In the fourth embodiment, the game medal can be applied to either the 25Φ size or the 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying the equations (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. The distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving entrance 341 is larger than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H is transferred from the medal receiving entrance D341 to the collision portion. Since it has a sufficient distance before it collides, it falls freely under the weight of the game medal, and when the game medal that collides with the collision part falls on the medal falling surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping). In the state), the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which the game medal passes, so that the collision can be prevented.

Next, the first game medal (whether the game medal is sleeping or standing) paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 by satisfying the formula (4), and then It is possible to configure so that the second game medal paid out to the player does not collide with the second game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving entrance D341. Is.

Next, by satisfying the equation (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and one piece that collides with the collision portion. It is possible to prevent the game medal of the eye from bouncing back to the medal entrance D341.

By defining the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as in formulas (1) to (4), the smooth hopper H40 can pay out the game medals from the medal payout device H, and the smooth game medals can be paid out. It is possible to guide the saucer D230. FIG. 118 is a locus diagram of a game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of defining the dimensions of the formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out after that. It is possible to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with medals and that the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving entrance D341.

As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, a protruding edge is provided on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving port D341 on the outer side of the medal return member D340, but the inner side of the medal return member D340. A protruding edge may be provided on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving port D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more unlikely that the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H collides with the collision portion and then flows back to the medal receiving port D341.

<<< Fourth Embodiment: Trajectory view (side view) of game medal flow >>>
In FIG. 118, the trajectory of the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving entrance D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left figure, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving entrance D341. Next, as shown in the upper right figure, the second game medal is released from the medal entrance D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal is prepared in the front view direction of FIG. 116. It collides with a colliding part (not shown). The interval from the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving entrance D341 to the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotation speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. The rotation speed can be arbitrarily determined, but as shown in the upper right figure of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is a medal. It will be paid out from the payout device H, but the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) substantially at the same time as the timing when the first game medal collides with the collision portion, ( 2) The timing may be before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part, and (3) the timing may be after the first game medal collides with the collision part. The distance of f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted according to the timing at which the game medals of the eyes are paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding (2) above, after the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H and passed through the medal receiving entrance D341, the first game medal proceeded horizontally by the diameter of the game medal (b) or more (above b). It is preferable to set the timing after (launched). Further, the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing at which the time has elapsed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the eye game medal and the second game medal collide with each other. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the interval between the game medal payout times becomes too long, and the tempo for paying out the game medal becomes too long. It gets worse. Further, since the internal size (depth) of the housing of the gaming machine is limited, the f (the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to secure more than the distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision portion. It is desirable to configure the game medals to be paid out from the third and subsequent medals so that the game medals do not collide with each other, and at least the maximum number of medals to be paid out (for example, 15 medals) in the design of the game machine is paid out. It is preferable to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with each other. The medals do not collide with each other in the first and second payouts, but even if the medals collide with each other in the second and third payouts, the medals are paid out in the return member D340. It is possible to create the effect that game medals are less likely to be clogged. This means that in a gaming machine, paying out two cards occurs more frequently than paying out three cards. Further, the collision portion may be configured to be protected by, for example, metal in order to enhance the durability of the medal return member D340 due to the collision of the game medal.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, after the first game medal collides with the collision portion, the medal falls on the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads for the collision portion in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other because the structure is as shown in the equation (1). Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has fallen on the medal falling surface D342 is inclined in the inclined direction of the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal tray D230. Is induced. After colliding with the collision portion, the second game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the inclination direction of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal collide with each other, and further. It is possible to prevent backflow in which medals that collide with the collision portion and bounce off enter the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<< Effect 1 >>
The second game medal is discharged from the medal receiving entrance D341 toward the collision portion, and the first game medal falls on the medal drop surface D342 after colliding with the collision portion. At this time, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving entrance 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal, which is configured to satisfy the equations (1) and (3). In addition, since the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H has a sufficient distance from the medal receiving entrance D341 until it collides with the collision portion, the medal is freely dropped by the weight of the game medal. , When the game medal that collided with the collision part falls on the medal drop surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping), the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which the game medal passes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a collision.

<< Effect 2 >>
For example, a gaming machine that is configured as equations (2) and (4) to prevent backflow in which medals that collide with a collision portion and bounce off enter the opening of the medal receiving port D341. Can be provided.

<< Effect 3 >>
For example, by being configured as in the equation (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the medal collides with the collision portion1. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the first gaming medal bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<< Effect 4 >>
The first game medal that has fallen on the medal falling surface D342 falls from the medal falling surface D342 and flows down toward the medal tray D230, and the second game medal is in the lower left diagram of FIG. 119. As described above, the first game medal falls on the medal falling surface D342 at substantially the same position as the dropped position. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 from being paid out to the medal tray D230 due to the retention near the medal receiving entrance D341. A game machine can be provided.

<< Effect 5 >>
Provided is a game machine capable of preventing damage or deterioration of the medal return member D340 because it has a cushioning material that cushions the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H with speed collide. can do.

<< Effect 6 >>
The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the initial momentum of payout, so that the game medals collide with each other (the game medal returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40 A collision with a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H, or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, etc.) occurs, and the game medal flows down to the non-rhythmic medal tray D230. It is possible to prevent such a situation and provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

The collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide may be a part of the front door DU, a part of the medal return member D340, or only the collision portion is separated. As a body member, it may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340.

Further, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide has a flat shape substantially perpendicular to the medal drop surface D342, but is paid out from the medal payout device H. It suffices if the game medals collide and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal tray D230. For example, the medal falling surface D342 has a curved shape and plays the same role as the collision portion. It may be configured to carry, or any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision portion. Further, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<< Drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>>>>
<<< Timing chart of drive control of medal payout device >>>
Next, as a fifth embodiment, the drive control of the medal payout device H will be described. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. The details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later, but for convenience of explanation, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 → the second payout sensor H2, and the second payout in FIG. Sensor H20s → 1st payout sensor H1. At the initial position where the game medal is not paid out (initial position when the disc is not rotating), the 1st payout sensor H1: is on and the 2nd payout sensor H2: is off. It has become. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 drives the disc H50 to rotate around the disc rotation shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are released by the release urging means H70. Is displaced and flows down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240, so that the game medal is paid out. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 are detected to be on or off based on, for example, the displacement of the release urging means H70. Specifically, at the timing 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on in a state where the release urging means H70 is not displaced to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating the state of is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the displacement starts to the position where the release urging means H70 pays out the game medal, and the release urging means H70 starts moving from the initial position to mainly control the signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the off state. It is transmitted to the board M (the first payout sensor H1 is turned on → off). A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the ON state by displacing the release urging means H70 to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment) at the timing of 2 in the figure. Is transmitted to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 is turned off → on). Then, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medal is completed, and the release urging means H70 starts the displacement to the initial position again, so that the signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the off state is mainly controlled. It is transmitted to the board M (the second payout sensor H2 is turned on → off). Then, at the timing of 4, the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again, so that a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M (first payout sensor). H1 turns off → on). In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from the timing 1 to the timing 2 is the predetermined range A (A <26 ms), and the period from the timing 2 to the timing 3 is the predetermined range B (9 ms ≦). B <60 ms), and by detecting that the period from the timing of 3 to the timing of 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms ≦ C <60), the medal payout device H is functioning normally and is normal. It is judged that various game medals will be paid out.

<<< 5th Embodiment Medal payout of the medal payout device-Stop of the medal payout device >>>
<< Configuration >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a series of flow from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described. First, although it is FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to briefly explain a series of flow from the payout of the game medal to the stop of the medal payout device H, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment are described. The configuration related to the payout device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of the disc H50 which is rotationally driven when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disc H50 has a plurality of circular cavities that are larger in size than the game medal, and the disc H50 is configured to cover the game medal, and the game medal is formed by rotating the disc H50 under the disc H50. By moving, the game medal is paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left figure, the hopper motor H80 is in the state before being driven, and the first payout sensor H1 is in the on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is set as the initial position in the release urging means H70, and for the sake of clarification of the explanation, the initial position (disk H50) before the rotation of the disk H50 is provided on the outer circumference of the disk H50. To do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of the disc H50 each time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and the description will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper view of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven by constant speed rotation, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that at the initial position (disc H50), the third game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal is paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by an angle A until the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position. Further, the disk H50 does not rotate until the release urging means H70 is displaced from the discharge position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left stage of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven by constant speed rotation, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after the fourth game medal is paid out, the release urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position, but during this time, the disc H50 is not rotating, so the fourth game medal It can be seen that the player is rotated by an angle A from the position where the fourth game medal is paid out, as in the case of paying out.

Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the game medal payout is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disc H50 is stopped, but the initial position (disc H50) is a position deviated from the position where the fifth game medal is paid out by an angle B in the rotation direction. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that, in particular, when paying out the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not enter the constant speed state immediately after the start of driving, and it takes a predetermined time to reach the constant speed state. It takes. That is, when the first piece (the hopper motor H80 is in the acceleration state to the constant speed state) is paid out and the release urging means H70 is in the initial position, the second and subsequent pieces (the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state). Compared to the case where the game medal is paid out, the hopper motor H80 is delayed by the amount of the acceleration state.

Here, a detailed description will be given from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 goes from a stopped state to a constant speed state via an acceleration state. Here, the rotation speed in the constant speed state is A (m / t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to constant speed A, and the average rotation speed in the period from speed 0 to constant speed state (acceleration state period) is B (m / t). ), B <A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m / t) from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is B <C <A.

Next, the period from the payment of the first game medal to the payment of the second game medal will be described in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, it is in a constant speed state from the time when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Will remain. Therefore, the average rotation speed from the time when the first game medal is paid out to the time when the second game medal is paid out is A.

As described above, the second game after the first game medal is paid out than the average rotation speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotation speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out and the first game If the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the medal is paid out to the time the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the first game from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped. The time required for the medals to be paid out is longer than the time required for the second game medal to be paid out after the first game medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the final game medal (fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out as the game medal payout process, the disc H50 is set at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, the engine is stopped by shifting in the rotation direction by the angle B) (the rotation distance becomes longer). With this configuration, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is set to two after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates before the eye game medal is paid out (the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the time the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out is the same distance, etc. ), And the time required from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is the time required for the second game after the first game medal is paid out. The time required for the medals to be paid out can be approached (approximate), and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort.

The width (angle B) of the deviation in the rotation direction when the disk H50 is stopped after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80. In this period, the disc H50 is released after the hopper motor H80 is driven by considering the difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state. It will be determined how much to shift in the rotation direction from the initial position to stop. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state corresponds to the discharge position of the release urging means H70 from the position corresponding to the initial position of the release urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position where the rotation is performed. It should be noted that even if the angle B is deviated in the rotation direction, the detection of the game medal by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the timing chart of FIG. 120 shows. Based on this, the game medal is detected.

<< Effect >>
With this configuration, when a player who receives a game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals, he / she can receive the game medal payout from the first card to the predetermined number of medals at substantially regular intervals. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) medal clogging due to collision between game medals does not occur. It can be configured and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, after the final game medal is paid out, the disc H50 is configured to be displaced by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotation direction to stop, so that the illegal device can be removed from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is illegally obtained by invading.

<<<<< 6th Embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is not possible >>>>>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible will be described. As a case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side cannot be transmitted. There is. In the game progress control process of FIG. 16, for example, in the game progress control process of FIG. 16, various commands related to the game are transmitted to the sub control board side based on the progress of the game, and as in step 1622 of FIG. In addition, as a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side with a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) as a cycle. Is configured to send. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute an effect based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, but the main control board side. It is configured so that it is not possible to send commands to. The game machine has a program related to execution processing on the main control board M and the sub control board S, respectively (a program possessed by the main control board M is referred to as a main side program, and a program possessed by the sub control board S is referred to as a sub side program). For example, the sub-control board S is configured with a sub-side program so as to execute an effect triggered by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M. That is, in a situation where the command cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub-control board S cannot execute the process configured in the sub-side program. When a situation may occur in which the sub-control board S cannot receive a command from the main control board M, for example, a member due to poor contact of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub-control board S may occur. There may be a problem. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible, it is possible to execute the main side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game. The game itself related to the main program can be executed even when communication with the sub control board S becomes impossible. Further, when communication is restored between the main control board M and the sub control board S from the situation where the main control board M and the sub control board S cannot communicate with each other, the progress of the program on the main side is changed. Based on this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S is a command related to processing after communication received from the main control board M is restored. Performs processing based on. In the following, when communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible while executing various commands on the main control board M using FIGS. 122 to 126, the main control board M and the sub An embodiment of the process performed on the control board S will be described as the sixth embodiment.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>>
FIG. 122 shows the flow of processing in chronological order as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during the execution of the processing related to the settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, starting from the N game, and processing is performed over the N + 1 games. Then, in the sixth embodiment, a command based on the progress of the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S as a process performed by the main control board M, and a command is received from the main control board M as a process performed by the sub-control board S. Executing the effect based on the command is one set of processing (in the sixth embodiment, the order is one). The sub-control board S does not execute the effect based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may or may not execute the effect based on the received command. is there. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub-control board S executes an effect for each command transmitted by the main control board M as an example, but when the effect is executed based on the reception of each command. It is supplemented that there are cases where the production is not performed. When the settlement button is operated to execute the settlement of the credit in the situation where one or more credits exist, the sound during the settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medal is output from the speaker S20 from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound being settled is a channel corresponding only to the sound being settled. For example, the sub-control board S executes the effect based on the command received from the main control board M. In particular, when executing the process of outputting the sound from the speaker S20, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M. The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. The command and the audio channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to the start of settlement and a plurality of commands related to a predetermined error detection) may be associated with one voice channel. With this configuration, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the audio output without increasing the number of channels.

<< Configuration 1 >>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>, the sound that outputs the sound during the settlement is output. It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of settlement, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound being settled, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, electricity between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a poor connection of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where the communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payment of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By making a judgment, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, so that the output of the sound during settlement is output. Execute the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the end of settlement to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is settled. The command related to the end of the above cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is disconnected, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement has been completed, and is the Nth game. Set the command related to the next process.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the N game is started and the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed, and the player can perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel in which the player first performs the stop operation among the plurality of reels) has been accepted, the main control board M is set to the first reel. The command related to the stop operation reception is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M is settled. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 7, it is determined that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is the reel in which the player performs the second stop operation among the plurality of reels) is accepted, and the main control board M Sends a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 8, it is determined that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is the reel in which the player performs the third stop operation among the plurality of reels) is accepted, and the main control board M Sends a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output audio based on a command from the control board M, the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the N game is determined, and the reel stop operation is performed. Send a command related to the case where the symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed based on (in the sixth embodiment, it is referred to as a "command related to winning") (as a command for the next processing of the N game). It is also possible to configure in.

By determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed in the order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. Based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs the sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a period from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 10 and order 11. As the order 10, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of settlement to the sub control board S as in the order 1 in the N game. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. At this time, the sound being settled output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound being settled output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command from the main control board M to the sub control board S based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the N + 1 game, the sub control board S setstles the N + 1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the output of the sound being settled is started, while the output of the sound is ended during the settlement related to the N game (as the process of the sub-control board S, the sound being settled for the N game is being settled. Sound output → Receives a command related to the start of settlement related to the N + 1 game → Ends the output of the sound being settled for the N game → Starts the output of the sound being settled for the N + 1 game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, and issues a command related to the end of the settlement. It is transmitted to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of ending the output of the sound being settled for the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<<< When the processing command and channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the sixth embodiment >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of settlement to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the sound being settled from the speaker S20 based on the received command. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>, the sound that outputs the sound during the settlement It is assumed that the channel supports not only commands based on the detection of the operation of the checkout button but also other commands (here, "error detection command by detecting the door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound being settled, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payment of the game medals for the number of credits is completed. By making a judgment, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, so that the output of the sound during settlement is output. Execute the process to end.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the end of settlement to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is settled. The command related to the end of the above cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of the game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the board S is disconnected, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. .. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement has been completed, and is the Nth game. Set the command related to the next process.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the N game is started and the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, and receives a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be done, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed, and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the main control board M is settled. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being scrutinized is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 7, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S is settled from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command to be set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command for outputting voice based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the N game).

By determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed in the order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S. Based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs the sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the end of settlement. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without ending the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a command related to the end of settlement, and is a period from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the sound being settled without ending the output of the sound being settled.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 10. It is assumed that a predetermined error occurs in the order 10. As an error at this time, a door opening error will be described as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as an input error error, a payout error error, an input reception sensor retention error, etc. Good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred due to the opening of the front door DU in particular, it transmits an error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S performs processing so as to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag. Here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives an error detection command by detecting the door open error flag in the N + 1 game while the output of the sound being settled is being continued from the N game, so that the sub control board S receives the error detection command in the N game. It is configured to end the sound output during the settlement and start the output of the door opening error notification sound in the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, when an error occurs, by associating the voice channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as commands related to error detection, the error notification sound is surely output and an error occurs in the player. To provide a user-friendly game machine that can reliably notify that an error has occurred and that the communication between the two parties can be restored so that the sound output can be terminated while the game is being advanced. Can be done.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed >>>
<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during the period in which the minimum gaming time from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of rotation of the reel has not elapsed. The flow of processing in the case of the above will be described. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter referred to as a weight sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M. In << 6th embodiment, when the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed >>, a weight sound is output. As for the audio channel, only the command related to the start lever operation is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the weight sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, electricity between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a poor connection of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where the communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the weight sound, the main control board M is started in a state in which it is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the start lever operation (here, the reel rotation start standby state). By determining that (referred to as start), a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, thereby weighting. It is configured to perform the process of ending the sound output.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in a disconnected state. M cannot transmit a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, the output of the weight sound is continued without ending the output of the weight sound. While the main control board M is executing the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state. However, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

After the main control board M completes the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. And set the command related to the next processing of the N game.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the sub-control board M is related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N game.

As the order 4, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As a command to be set at this time, the stop operation of all reels is performed, and the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop is taken as an example. It is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning as a command for outputting voice based on a command from the control board M (as a command for the next processing of the N game).

In order 7, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operations of all the reels have been performed. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while the main control board M issues a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Since it cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbol has been completed, and ends the process related to the N game. In the N game, the communication between the two is temporarily disconnected, so that the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, and is from the insertion of the game medal of the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels. It is configured to continue the output of the weight sound without ending the output of the weight sound during the period.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 8 and order 9. In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M starts the reel rotation of the N game. Since the command related to the start of the standby state cannot be received, the weight sound output is continued without ending the weight sound output. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a weight sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. At this time, the weight sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the weight sound output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the reel rotation of the N + 1 game from the main control board M. The output of the weight sound related to the N game is started based on the command related to the start of the start standby state, while the output of the weight sound related to the N game ends (as a process of the sub-control board S, the output of the weight sound related to the N game is output). → Receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state related to the N + 1 game → Ends the output of the weight sound related to the N game → Starts the output of the weight sound related to the N + 1 game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<<< When the processing command and channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>>
<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, a processing flow will be described when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible in a state where game medals are paid out from the hopper H40. First, as the processing order 1, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the start of medal payout from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter referred to as a medal payout sound) related to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are not one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 but also other commands are supported (here, it is referred to as "command related to start lever operation"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and the number of game medals to be paid out by the prize is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the medals have been paid out, the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of paying out medals from the hopper H40. It is configured to execute the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In order 2, a command relating to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the end of medal payout from is not able to be transmitted to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the prize, and while the determination that the game medals are to be paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and after it is determined that the number of game medals paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board M and the sub-control The communication with the board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to the end of medal payout from the main control board M, but the main control board M is paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out by the winning. Since it is determined that the game has been processed, the processing of the N game is completed, and the command related to the N + 1 game is set.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 3 and order 4. In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub-control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, while the main control board M finishes paying out the medals for the N game. Since the command related to the above cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a weight sound based on the reception of the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. As described above, here, the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1 game while the output of the medal payout sound is being continued from the N game, thereby paying out the medal in the N game. It is configured to end the sound output and start the weight sound output in the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with a plurality of commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, the communication between the two can be restored, and the user-friendly game can end the audio output while the game is in progress. Machines can be provided.

<<< 6th Embodiment When the processing command and channel are 1: 1 when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>>
<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, from the state in which the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 to a predetermined period (here, from the start of reel rotation (acceleration processing is performed)), the main control board M and the sub control board S The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be described. First, as the processing order 1, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the Nth game wins and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is the hopper H40. The command related to the start of medal payout from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In << 6th Embodiment, when the processing command and the channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the payout process >>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the start of medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the prize, and the number of game medals to be paid out by the prize is paid out from the hopper H40. When it is determined that the medals have been paid out, the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of paying out the game medals from the hopper H40. Is configured to execute the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In order 2, a command relating to the end of payout of the game medal from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M The command relating to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the prize, and while the determination that the game medals are to be paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the prize is completed, the main control board controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds in order 3 to 10. In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S by determining that the game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, but the main control board M and the sub control board M Since the communication with S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot transmit the command related to the medal insertion reception to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but does not end the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output the medal payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the acceptance of medal insertion. Therefore, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, but communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S. Is in a disconnected state, so that the main control board M cannot transmit a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, but the medal is not output without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S can be used for commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to medal insertion reception, and start lever operation. Since the command cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in a disconnected state. M cannot transmit a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it cannot output the weight sound, but the medal payout sound is not finished without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the sub control board S relates to a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal insertion reception, and a start lever operation. Since the command and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state of outputting only the medal payout sound continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to the acceptance of medal insertion, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Although not completed, the main control board M determines that the reel is ready to start rotating based on the start lever operation, and sets a command related to the next processing of the N + 1 game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started by operating the start lever. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while the main control board M ends the medal payout from the hopper H40. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

As the order 7, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reel is completed and the player can perform the reel stop operation. Upon determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the stop operation of the first reel to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 is output from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets the command related to the next process of the N game. As the next process of the N + 1 game, a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 is used for a brief explanation, but during this period, the main control board M sends a command to the sub control board S as a command. For example, it is possible to configure the command to send a command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, a command related to winning a prize, or the like.

As the order 10, when the winning combination (for example, the push order bell combination) in which the game medal is paid out in the N + 1 game is determined and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is from the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs the medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the N game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the hopper of the N + 1 game from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the N game ends (as a process of the sub-control board S, the medal payout sound is related to the N game). Output of medal payout sound → Receive command related to start of medal payout from hopper H40 related to N + 1 game → End output of medal payout sound related to N game → Start output of medal payout sound related to N + 1 game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is configured so that the game can proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game as an error, both players do not have to temporarily shut down the game machine due to an error response or the like. By returning the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of ending the audio output while advancing the game.

<< Configuration related to the number of units applicable to this example >>
Here, the configuration regarding the number of internal lottery that can be applied to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that the following configuration is applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

First, with reference to FIG. 127, the configuration regarding the number of applications applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not operating>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has a type 1 BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and a type 2 BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and has a role related to the type 1 BB (one type after being elected). The combination of symbols in which the BB operates is a combination that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as a type 1 BB combination): "Type 1 BB alone" (a condition device in which the type 1 BB combination is independently elected) and "1. It has "seed BB + cherry" (a condition device in which a type 1 BB role and a cherry are elected in duplicate). In addition, as a role related to the type 2 BB (a combination of symbols in which the type 2 BB operates after being elected is a role that can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as a type 2 BB role), "type 2 BB alone" (type 2) It has a "conditional device in which the BB combination is independently won) and a "two-kind BB + cherry" (a conditional device in which the two-kind BB combination and the cherry are won in duplicate).

In addition, there are four types of winning roles (roles that have a combination of symbols for which game medals are paid out by stopping and displaying), bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and the number of winnings is the largest. (Winning at 10400/65536) may be referred to as the main small role.

“When BB is not operating” shown at the top of the figure is a table relating to the number of placements in a state where the type 1 BB and the type 2 BB are not operating (sometimes referred to as a normal game state or the like). The "number of inputs" is the number of inputs when it is assumed that the game is executed by betting three cards in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is specified during the operation of the first type BB and the operation of the second type BB. The number is 2, but the "number of inputs" is 3. In addition, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals to be paid out when the "number of inputs" is 3, for example, in a game when the type 1 BB is activated, 15 cards are paid out by betting two cards. Only will be won, but since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3/2 = 22.5".

The “number of units” is a number of units determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. Further, the "probability" is the probability that the condition device is determined by the internal lottery.

The "number of games" is the number of games required when calculating various expected values described later. For "1st class BB alone", "1st class BB + cherry", "2nd class BB alone", and "2nd class BB + cherry", 1st class BB or 2nd class BB in the game that won the 1st class BB or 2nd class BB. The "number of games" is 1 because the case where the symbol combination according to the above is stopped and displayed is illustrated. In addition, in "1st class total", after winning "1st class BB alone" or "1st class BB + cherry", the 1st class BB is executed after the symbol combination in which the 1st class BB is to be activated is stopped and displayed (1st class BB). The "number of games" is 24 because the case of (digestion) is illustrated. In addition, "2 types total" executes 2 types BB after winning "2 types BB alone" or "2 types BB + cherry" and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination in which the 2 types BB will operate (2 types BB). The "number of games" is 8 because the case of (digestion) is illustrated.

The "expected value of the number of inputs" is an expected value of the number of inputs per game considering the probability determined by the internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "the number of inputs x the probability x the number of games". The "expected value of the number of payouts" is an expected value of the number of payouts per game considering the probability determined by the internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

The configuration in the figure may be applied when the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
A game medal is paid out in a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, which is a game method in which the game is executed by a game method that is most profitable for the player and is not a push order role such as a push order bell. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (a stop button operation mode, a stop button pressing order, a stop button operation timing, etc.) in which a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning). In addition, in a game in which a push order combination such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order combination) is won, the stop operation mode is the largest number of payouts. And run the game.

<Game method 2>
In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, which is not a push order role such as a push order bell, a stop operation mode (stop button operation mode) for stopping and displaying (winning) a symbol combination with a payout of a game medal. The game is executed in the order of pressing the stop button, the operation timing of the stop button, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a push order role such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order role) is won, random regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in various stop operation modes (the order in which the stop buttons are pressed and the timing of the stop button operations are random). Random means, for example, that all six types of pressing orders are selected at an equal ratio for the pressing order of the stop button, and all 20 frames of stopping operation timing are selected at an equal ratio for the stopping timing. It is to be.

"Inside" is a game after winning any of "1st class BB alone", "1st class BB + cherry", "2nd class BB alone", and "2nd class BB + cherry", and 1st class BB. Or, a game in which the symbol combination in which the 2nd class BB is activated and the symbol combination related to the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay are not stopped and displayed (in the situation where the winning of the 1st class BB or the 2nd class BB is carried over). It is a game that did not win a small role or a replay). In the figure, at 290/65536, a game in which the winning of the 1st class BB or the 2nd class BB is carried over and the small role or the replay is not won is executed, and the "expected value of the number of inputs" is about 0. It is .013275146, and the "expected value of the number of payouts" is 0.

<Type 1 BB is in operation>
“During type 1 BB operation” shown in the second row from the upper part of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where type 1 BB is operating. During the operation of Type 1 BB, the specified number is two, and it is configured to win any of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry without winning the loss. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 for all of the bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, making it the easiest to win (easily determine) the bell. In addition, one or more (or all) of the "numbers" that will win the watermelon, the symbol, and the cherry may be configured to be the same as "when the BB is not operating". As described above, in the game in which the type 1 BB is operating, 15 cards are paid out by betting 2 cards in all games, so the expected value of the number of payouts when the specified number of 3 cards is 3 ("When BB is not operating"). The "number of payouts") of "1 type total" in "" is 22.5.

<Type 2 BB is in operation>
“During type 2 BB operation” shown at the bottom of the figure is a table relating to the number of units in the state where type 2 BB is operating. While the 2nd class BB is operating, the specified number is 2, and when the game is executed in the predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pressing order of "left → middle → right"). , Only the symbol combination related to the bell is configured to stop and display. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the games in which the two types of BB are operating, 15 cards are paid out by betting 2 cards in all games, so the expected value of the number of payouts when the specified number of 3 cards is 3 ("When BB is not operating"). The "number of payouts") of "total of two types" in "" is 22.5.

<BB is not operating>
Again, "when BB is not operating" will be described in detail. "No replay" indicates four types of winning roles of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and "including replay" means five types of roles of bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay. Shown. The "winning OUT" in "no replay" is the sum of the expected number of payouts of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, which is about 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning payout rate" in "no replay" is the "total value of the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" and the "total value of the expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". It is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the payout rate including the winning combinations, which is about 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" in the "replay included" is the sum of the expected number of payouts of the bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and replay, which is about 1.649246216. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the game medal is not actually paid out, but when the game is executed by betting three cards and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Since the automatic betting for 3 cards is executed, the "number of payouts" related to the re-game is 3. In addition, the "winning payout rate" in "including replay" is the sum of the "expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" and the "expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays". It is a value obtained by dividing the value by "value" and multiplying it by 100, that is, the total payout rate of the winning combination and the replay, which is about 170.5%.

The "1 type total calculation ball rate" is a value obtained by dividing the expected payout number of the "1 type total" by the expected input number value and multiplying by 100, which is 750.0%. Further, the "two-kind calculation ball rate" is a value obtained by dividing the expected payout number of the "two-kind sum" by the expected number of inputs and multiplying by 100, which is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the above-mentioned values are compared, the relationship is as follows.
(1) "Expected payout number" of "2 types total"<Expected payout number of "No replay" (Winning OUT)
(2) "Expected number of payouts" of "2 types total"<Expected value of payouts of "including replay" (winning OUT)
(3) Expected number of payouts for "total of 2 types"<Expected number of payouts for main small role
(4) "Expected value of input number" of "Internal medium"<Expected value of input number of main small role
(5) "Expected value of input number" of "Internal"<"Expected value of input number" of "Replay"

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (1) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the total of "no replay", the type 2 BB is in operation. The "expected value of the number of payouts" of the small role can be made higher than that, and even when the type 2 BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and makes it possible for the player to play the game without being aware that the player is in a special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (2) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the total of "including replay", the type 2 BB is in operation. The "expected value of the number of payouts" of the small role can be made higher than that, and even when the type 2 BB is operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). This makes it easier for the player to feel, and makes it possible for the player to play the game without being aware that the player is in a special state.

In addition, when the 2nd class BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st class BB is activated, and the 1st class BB is not won during the 2nd class BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will be diminished. Therefore, as described in (3) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the "total of the two types" <the "expected value of the number of payouts" of the main small role, the main size is smaller than that during the operation of the type 2 BB. The "expected value of the number of payouts" of the role can be increased, and even when the two types of BB are operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating). It becomes easier for the player to feel, and the player can play the game without being aware that he / she is in a special state.

As a gaming machine having one or more configurations of the above (1) to (3), the specified number is set to 2 and the average number of payouts per game is set to 2 while the 2 types of BB are in operation. It may be configured to lower the ball ejection rate (the ball output rate calculated for the two types) during the operation of the type 2 BB. With such a configuration, the effect of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above will be further enhanced.

In addition, when a player with low skill such as a player who cannot push the ball plays in "inside", the symbol combination related to the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill There is concern that low players will be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, as described in (4) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the "internal medium" <the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the main small winning combination, the main small winning combination can also be achieved in the "internal medium". It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which Bell wins, and it is possible to make a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause any disadvantage even when a player with low skill plays a game.

In addition, when a player with low skill such as a player who cannot push the ball plays in "inside", the symbol combination related to the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill There is concern that low players will be significantly disadvantaged. Therefore, as described in (5) above, by designing so that the "expected value of the number of inputs" of "inside the inside" <the "expected value of the number of inputs" of the "replay", the replay game is also performed in the "inside inside". The ratio of winning games can be increased, and even when a player with low skill plays a game, the gaming machine can be made so that no disadvantage is likely to occur.

<<< Gate Technology of the 7th Embodiment >>>
Next, as a seventh embodiment, a gate mechanism included in the main board case M40 for storing the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (housing) will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entrance portion through which the resin material (plastic) flows when the main substrate case M40 is molded is referred to as a gate.

<< Molding of main board case >>
As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured by using a resin material (plastic) as a material. The main substrate case M40 is formed by injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) for forming a specific predetermined shape, and then performing a cooling / solidifying process. It is generally molded by an injection molding method for obtaining a product. The molding method of the main substrate case M40 is not limited to the injection molding method. For example, a tubular plastic hollow body is sandwiched between molds, and air is blown into the mold to bring it into close contact with the wall surface of the mold to cool and solidify it. Any molding method may be used as long as it is molded by pouring a resin material (plastic) from a gate, such as a blow molding method for obtaining a molded product. After the resin material (plastic) is injected and injected, the gate is cut and the cut portion will have some dents as compared to a flat surface without a gate.

<< Gate method >>
When injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate by an injection molding method, various restrictions are imposed on the gate. Here, examples of the restrictions include the inflow rate of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), the size and shape of the gate portion M80, and the like. That is, by determining the optimum conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size / shape) according to the size of the main substrate case M40 to be molded, and performing a molding process according to the conditions, high-quality molding is performed. You can get the goods.

The methods for injecting resin material (plastic) can be broadly divided into restricted gates that limit the inflow of resin material (plastic) by making the size of the gate as small as possible, and resin material (plastic) directly without going through the gate. There is an unrestricted gate for pouring plastic). For various case members used in gaming machines, the size of the gate can be reduced to some extent from the viewpoint of size, etc., and a restricted gate may be used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of the finished product. However, in the seventh embodiment, if the main substrate case M40 has a gate, there is no problem with the method for injection-injecting the resin material (plastic).

<< Gate type >>
When a resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate by a limiting gate, there are types of gates having various characteristics. As an example, a side gate type in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected from a gate arranged on the side surface of a molded product, a pin gate type in which a plurality of molded products are molded from one mold, and a tunnel-shaped arrangement in a mold. There is a submarine gate type in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected from the gate. The main substrate case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be molded by using any of these gate types.

As described above, the main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<< Configuration of main board case M40 >>
First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main substrate case M40 is molded from a resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that can be visually recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall when the front door DU is opened) is, for example, a sticker on which the model information of the gaming machine is described. In addition to model stickers, which are members, sticker members (not shown) that have information related to gaming machines, such as caulking recording paper that records security measures taken at production factories, etc., are affixed. Further, it has a gate portion M80 including a gate mark (a state after the gate is cut) in which a resin material (plastic) is injected and injected. The shape of the surface of the main substrate case M40 in FIG. 128 is an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, it may have a square shape, a rectangular shape, or a trapezoidal shape.

<< Accommodation diagram of main control board M >>
Next, FIG. 129 is a front view when the main control board M is housed in the main board case M40. When the main control board M is housed in the main board case M40, the main control board M is housed so as to be sandwiched between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and further, the main board case M40 and other cases. It is common that the case member and the case member are integrally formed by fitting screws (screws) so that the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40.

The main control board M includes a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC05 not having a CPU function, resistors R1 to R6, capacitors C01 to C02, and a connector CN01. ~ CN04 is implemented. Further, on the main control board M, a setting display LED M90 capable of displaying a set value, a performance display device SH formed by arranging four-digit segments described later in a horizontal row, and the like are arranged. Other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may be mounted on the main control board M, but they are not shown.

<< Gate arrangement of main board case M40 >>
The main board case M40 is arranged so as to cover the main control board M (the dotted line in FIG. 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and since the main board case M40 is made of plastic as a raw material, the main board case M40 is used. It is configured so that the parts and the like mounted on the main control board M can be visually recognized through the main control board M.

As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have the gate portion M80 on the surface. It is particularly preferable that these gate portions M80 are arranged at positions that do not impair the visibility of the members arranged on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the model seal, the performance display device SH, the setting display LED M90, etc., which are confirmed by the manager of the amusement park or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40, are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the visibility. The pattern is given as an example. More specifically, the model seal, the performance display device SH, and the setting display LED M90 are configured so as not to be arranged at the position projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M. Has been done.

<Effect>
By arranging the gate portion M80 in this way, the gate portion M80 hinders visibility when the manager of the game hall confirms information related to the game machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LED M90. It is possible to prevent it. Further, by configuring the gate portion M80 so as not to be arranged at a position overlapping with various seal members such as a model seal, the seal member can be made difficult to peel off.

Further, it is preferable not to arrange the gate portion M80 at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M (the gate portion M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). is there. Details will be described later, but in the main board case M40, since the gate portion M80 is a fragile portion, a so-called goto action is performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 via the gate portion M80. There is a possibility that it will be damaged. Therefore, in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M, the CPUMC is configured so that the gate portion M80 is not arranged at the position projected on the main board case M40 (the gate portion M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). As a result, the main control chip C that controls the operation of the gaming machine and the built-in ROMC110 that stores the program related to the operation control of the gaming machine are provided, and the gate portion M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC that affects the result of the game. It is possible to prevent so-called goto acts such as program tampering through the gate portion M80.

Further, when a current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed in the vicinity of the CPUMC, the noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC to a considerable extent. Therefore, the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) and the like are the CPUMC. It is preferable not to place it in the vicinity of.

In the seventh embodiment, the IC element is not arranged in the vicinity of the CPU MC on the main control board M. Specifically, in any IC element, W1 (dotted line in FIG. 129) is the length of the short side of the upper surface of the package body, which is rectangular, from the outer circumference of the package body of the CPUMC in the vicinity region of the CPUMC. It is arranged at a position separated by more than the virtual boundary line of the above. W1 has a length equal to or longer than the length (length at the time of mounting) of one of the resistors (R1 to R6).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are all arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPU MC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise adversely affects the operation of the CPU MC.

<< Structure of gate M80 >>
Next, the structure of the gate portion M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main board case M40 according to the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 as viewed from the direction of the side surface A. As described with reference to FIG. 128, the main board case M40 has a gate portion M80 on the surface (for example, a surface that can be visually recognized by a player or a game hall manager when the front door DU is opened). , The gate portion M80 has some dents on the surface as compared with the portions other than the gate portion M80.

In the side view of the main board case M40 of FIG. 130, the main board case A surface (the surface described above) has a gate portion M80, and the main board case B surface does not have a gate portion. Here, the A side of the main board case will be described in detail. The surface A of the main board case is, for example, a surface close to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main board case M40 of FIG. It is a surface close to the main control board M direction. In other words, it can be said that the main board case A side is the side closer to the front door DU, and similarly, the main board case B side is the side closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the B surface side of the main board case from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows the details of the structure of the gate portion M80. The detailed structure of the gate portion M80 included in the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<< Structural pattern 1 of gate M80 >>
First, as the structural pattern of the first gate portion M80, the main substrate case B surface is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the gate portion M80 is composed of one convex portion and two concave portions, and is formed by extending the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the distance A is away from the tip of the convex portion and the distance B is away from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, in the relationship between A and B, it is preferable that the relationship A <B is established. It should be added that the one convex portion constituting the gate portion M80 is a gate mark as a state after the gate is cut. Further, it may be designed so that A = 0.

<Effect 1>
When the convex portion of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface of the main board case A by a distance A, for example, when the main board case M40 is removed from the gaming machine, when the confirmer holds the portion related to the gate portion M80. It is possible to prevent accidents such as the hand slipping and dropping the main board case M40.

<Effect 2>
Further, since the recess of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface of the main substrate case A by a distance B, it is possible to smoothly flow in the resin molding (plastic) when molding the main substrate case M40.

<Effect 3>
Further, since the main board case B surface directly below the gate portion M80 on the main board case A surface is flat, the surface related to the gate portion M80 when the main control board M is visually recognized through the main board case M40. It is possible to visually recognize the main control board M without lowering the visibility due to the refraction of light even when visually recognizing from the above.

<< Structural pattern 2 of gate M80 >>
Next, as a structural pattern of the second gate portion M80, the main board case B is recessed (bulges outward from the main board case M40). The gate portion M80 in the lower part of the figure is formed by one convex portion and two concave portions on the A surface side of the main board case, and is a surface obtained by extending the main board case A surface (a portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is the same as the first pattern that the distance A from the tip of the convex portion and the distance B from the tip of the concave portion are separated from the main substrate case A surface (flat surface).

Further, the main board case B surface is recessed, and the distance from the deepest portion (the portion bulging to the outermost side) of the recess to the convex portion on the main board case A surface side is C, and the main board is also The distance from the tip of the recess on the case B surface to the surface extending the main board case B surface (the part other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction is D, and in the relationship between C and D, D <C. It is preferable that the relationship is established. Further, in the seventh embodiment, from the surface where the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is extended in the horizontal direction to the surface where the main board case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is extended in the horizontal direction. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the main board case A surface (the part other than the gate portion M80) is extended in the horizontal direction to the main board case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80). ) May be C', C <C', C> C', or C≈C'.

<Effect>
In this way, the tip of the recess on the B surface of the main board case is separated from the surface extending the B surface of the main board case (the portion other than the gate portion M80) in the horizontal direction by a distance D, for example, the A surface of the main board case. It is possible to compensate for the decrease in the strength of the member related to the gate portion M80. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed as compared with the flat surface, and when a force for breaking the main board case M40 is applied, the recessed distance (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1) is thinned. Therefore, it is configured to prevent the main board case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) from being easily destroyed as compared with the horizontally extended surface. In this way, even from the surface related to the gate portion M80, the main board case B surface is recessed by a predetermined distance, so that the material strength equivalent to that of the portion other than the gate portion M80 of the main substrate case A surface can be obtained. It becomes possible to keep.

The arrangement and configuration of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 have been described in detail above in the seventh embodiment, but this configuration is a case in which the other case members (main board case M40 and the main control board M are sandwiched) described above. It can also be applied to the member), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<<< Power Off and Sensor Detection >>>>>
Next, as an eighth embodiment, sensors related to detection of game medals installed inside the game machine (for example, insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, shoot sensor D40s, first payout). The sensor is off before the sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 detect the passage of the game medal, or the sensor is off → on after detecting the passage of the game medal, and further, the game. When the medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is turned off in any of the on → off states, the power off processing and the processing related to the detection of the passage of the game medal (8th embodiment). Then, the credit addition processing of the game medal related to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the counting processing of the insertion monitoring counter related to the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, the second The relationship with the payout sensor H2 (count processing of the number of game medals paid out) will be described.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>>
First, the game medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s (off → on → off) in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medal, and the game medal is awarded without an error. It flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the selector DS.

The timing at which the credits of the game medals are added is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description in step S1226-8, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off, and the second insertion sensor D30s is When it is turned off → on, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and can be added to the credit, but it is not limited to this, and the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on / off or The game medal inserted at the timing when any of the on / off of the second insertion sensor D30s is switched may be detected as a bet medal and may be added to the credit. The timing at which the credit addition of the game medal in the eighth embodiment described in detail below is performed is added to the credit when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on → off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off → on. It is configured to be possible. As described above, in this example, "occurrence of power failure" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detection of power failure" means that the gaming machine is powered off. It is to detect the occurrence.

The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and as a comparison of time values, even if an event that deviates from the illustrated range occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, such as the time for the game medal to flow down and the time for the disk D50 of the medal payout device H. Applicable to the configuration.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, the time from the occurrence of the power-off to the detection of the power-off is T1, the power-on reception sensor D10s off → on to the second power-on sensor. The time from D30s on to off is T2, and the time from the first closing sensor D20s off to on to the second closing sensor D30s on to on is T3. The relationships of T1, T2, and T3 applicable to this example will be described in detail below. The details will be described later, but it should be added that the starting point of T2 is just an example.

<< Action pattern 1 of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
FIG. 133 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion included in this configuration are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the game medal by these sensors is shown in the figure. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (a1) to (a8), and as time elapses, they change from (a1) to (a8).

Under the situation where the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (a1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a3). Next, at the timing of (a4), the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on.

Next, at the timing of (a5), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on (the first closing sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (a6), the first input sensor D20s is turned on → off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (a7), the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage process. That is, in the figure, even when the power is cut off after the game medal has passed through the insertion reception sensor D10s and the insertion reception sensor D10s is turned on and off, the second insertion sensor D30s is at the timing of (a7). After the game is turned on and off, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing, so that the credit addition processing can be normally executed. In the eighth embodiment, the interrupt processing for detecting the power failure is configured to execute the power interruption processing by the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption detection and the power interruption processing Execution can also be processed by separate interrupts.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3 <T1 <T2. By setting T3 <T1, the power off processing can be executed after the credit addition processing is executed. Further, it can be said that the relationship of T1 <T2 and T3 <T2 is a clear relationship based on the flow process of the game medal.

<Effect>
In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing through the input reception sensor D10s), the power is turned off after the credit addition process of the game medal is executed. By configuring the time processing, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and even though the game medals are inserted (not returned) inside the game machine because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added.

It should be noted that the configuration regarding the on sensor and the power off may be as follows (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3).
(1-1) A power failure occurs after the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(1-2) Before the first closing sensor D20s is turned off → on, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133).
(1-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, the game medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process.
(2-1) A power failure occurs after the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(2-2) Before the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133).
(2-3) By turning the blocker on and off, the game medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process.

<< Operation pattern 2 of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
FIG. 134 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion included in this configuration are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the game medal by these sensors is shown in the figure. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (b1) to (b8), and as time elapses, they change from (b1) to (b8).

Under the situation where the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (b1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (b2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (b3), the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a4).

Next, at the timing of (b5), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on (the first closing sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (b6), the first input sensor D20s is turned on → off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (b7), the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage process. That is, in the figure, even when the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s and the power is cut off after the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on, the second insertion is performed at the timing of (b7). After the sensor D30s is turned on and off, the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing, so that the credit addition process can be normally executed.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T1, T2, and T3 described above is T3 <T1 <T2. It should be noted that T1 <T3 <T2 may be configured to hold. In either configuration, as shown in the figure, the credit addition process is completed even when the power is cut off after the first input sensor D20s is turned off → on at the timing of (b3). The power off processing can be executed later.

<Effect>
In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off → on), the game medal credit addition process is executed. By configuring to perform power off processing after the power is turned off, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and the game medals are inserted inside the game machine because the blocker is on (returned). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added in spite of the fact that the credit is not added.

<< Action pattern modification of power off processing and game medal credit addition processing >>
Further, as a modification of the action patterns of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, for example, the timing of the power off is such that the first on sensor D20s is on and the second on sensor D30s is on. In this case, the power off processing is executed after the first on sensor D20s is turned off and the second on sensor D30s is turned off, that is, the power off processing is executed after the credit addition processing is executed. It may be configured.

<Effect>
Even if the power is cut off during the insertion of the game medals, the inserted game medals can be reliably added to the credits by performing the power off processing after the credit addition processing of the game medals is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added even though the game medal is inserted inside the game machine.

Further, as a modified example of the action patterns of the power off time processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal, it is possible to configure the timing of detecting the power off. For example, the timing at which the power off occurs is the same as << the action pattern 1 of the power off processing and the credit addition processing of the game medal >>, and the game medal passes the input reception sensor D10s at the timing of detecting the power off. In addition, when the timing is set before reaching the first input sensor D20s, power is supplied to the gaming machine as a processing flow based on the occurrence timing of various events based on the pattern 1, and the blocker is turned on. Under a certain situation, the input reception sensor D10s is turned off → on at the timing of (a1). Further, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are turned off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned on → off. Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (a3). Next, at the timing of (a4), the gaming machine detects the power outage, the power outage processing is executed, and then the blocker is turned off. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately after the inserted game medal has passed the insertion reception sensor D10s, the power off processing is performed before the inserted game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s. Since it can be executed, the credit addition process is not executed, and the blocker is turned off, so that the game medal is returned from the return port, and it is possible to prevent the event that the player is disadvantaged.

<Effect>
In this way, if the power-off processing is executed before the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, and the credit addition processing related to the inserted game medal is not executed due to the occurrence of the power-off, the credit addition process is not executed. It can be configured to return the game medal to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added even though the game medal is inserted inside the game machine. ..

In the eighth embodiment, "the time from the insertion reception sensor D10s off → on to the second insertion sensor D30s on → off" is set to T2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot". The time from the timing when the game medal is no longer visible to the player to the second insertion sensor D30s on → off may be set as T2, or "half of the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot can be visually recognized by the player." The time from the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on to off may be set as T2, or the second insertion sensor may be set from the timing when a part of the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot cannot be seen by the player. The time from D30s on to off may be set to T2.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>>
Next, the relationship with the timing related to the counting process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal will be described as the timing in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure. With reference to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS, the medal flow path member after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s (referred to as a chute main body in the third embodiment). ). In FIG. 135, a shoot sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s includes the above-mentioned input reception sensor D10s, the first input sensor D20s, and the second input sensor D30s. Similar to the above, it is a sensor related to detecting whether normal medal insertion is being performed, and in particular, it can detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed (for example, insertion medal retention error, insertion medal backflow error, etc.). It is configured as.

The timing at which the counting process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal is performed is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, the main control board M is inserted at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off. The monitoring counter performs addition processing from 0 to 1. Then, the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS, and for example, when the shoot sensor D40s is turned from off to on, the insertion monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. The timing of adding (subtracting) game medals by the input monitoring counter is not limited to this. As described later, for example, when the first closing sensor is turned from off to on, the closing monitoring counter performs an addition process from 0 to 1, and when the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to monitor whether or not the game medal has passed normally, such as by configuring the input monitoring counter to perform subtraction processing from 1 to 0. Further, the counting process of the game medals by the input monitoring counter may be performed in the order of subtraction → addition (after 0 → -1, then -1 → 0) instead of performing the counting process of the game medal in the order of addition → subtraction. As a configuration for determining that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter, for example, an error occurs when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C <-3 or C <3". It may be configured to determine that it is present.

In order to define the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter, the time from the occurrence of the power-off to the detection of the power-off is set from T4, the second power-on sensor D30s on → off. The time from off to on of the shoot sensor D40s is defined as T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 will be described in detail below. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, such as the time for the game medal to flow down and the time for the disk D50 of the medal payout device H. Applicable to the configuration.

<< Operation pattern 1 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 136 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to the insertion shown in the figure are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). Further, the input monitoring counter is configured to perform addition / subtraction processing at a specified timing (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, and the shoot sensor is used. The subtraction process is performed at the timing when D40s is turned from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set to (c1) to (c6), and as a processing flow, power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, and (c1). ), The power supply is cut off (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first closing sensor D20s is on, the second closing sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (c2), the second input sensor D30s is turned off → on. Next, at the timing of (c3), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at the timing of (c4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on, the game medal subtraction process is executed by the throwing monitoring counter, and the counter value of the throwing monitoring counter is changed from 1 to 0.

Next, at the timing of (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned on → off. Next, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing of (c6), and the power outage processing is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing. Further, in the figure, the subtraction process of the counter value of the closing monitoring counter is executed at the timing of (c4), but the closing monitoring counter is executed at the timing of (C5) (the timing when the shoot sensor is turned on → off). It may be configured to execute the counter value subtraction process.

As described above, in the figure, even if the power is cut off at the timing before the game medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, after the shoot sensor D40s is turned on → off at the timing of (c5). Since the gaming machine detects the power off and executes the power off processing, the credit addition processing and the counter value addition / subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter can be normally executed.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T4 and T5 described above is T4> T5. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off immediately before the addition process of the input monitoring counter is executed (the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off), the input monitoring of the game medal is performed. It can be configured to execute the power-off processing after the addition processing and the subtraction processing by the counter are completed.

<Effect>
By performing the power off processing after the counting process (0 → 1 → 0) by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the game medal counting process by the insertion monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors is normally executed. This makes it possible to normally detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

<< Operation pattern 2 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 137 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power cutoff processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power failure is different from that of the action pattern 1. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). Further, in the input monitoring counter, addition / subtraction processing is performed at a specified timing (in this operation pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, and the shoot sensor D40s is turned on from off. Subtraction processing is performed at the timing when becomes). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set as (d1) to (d5), and the power supply is cut off at the timing of (d1) as the processing flow (as the timing of various sensors at this time). The first closing sensor D20s is on, the second closing sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (d2), the second closing sensor D30s is turned off → on. Next, at the timing of (d3), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, (d4) the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. Next, at the timing of (d5), the game medal reaches the shoot sensor D40s, but since the power off processing is executed, the game medal is not detected by the shoot sensor D40s. In the example of the figure, the case where the game medal passes through the blocker before the blocker is turned off is illustrated.

In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the figure, even if the power cut occurs at the timing before the game medal reaches the second input sensor D30s, the game machine detects the power cut at the timing of (d4) and turns off the power. Since the time processing is executed, the subtraction processing of the power-on monitoring counter cannot be executed before the execution of the power-off processing, but the credit addition processing can be executed before the execution of the power-off processing. Further, the insertion monitoring counter is configured so that, for example, an error occurs when the counter value reaches 5, (even if the counter value shifts due to the insertion of one game medal, the error is not detected immediately). Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the operation of the amusement park, such as a power outage, a single power outage does not determine an error related to the on monitoring counter, so credit addition processing is performed. Is configured to ensure the continuation of a normal game if it can be executed normally.

<< Operation pattern 3 of power off processing and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>
FIG. 138 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power cutoff processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing for detecting the power off is different from << action pattern 1 of the power off processing and the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>, and the timing of performing the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. Is configured to be the same as << operation pattern 1 of the power off processing and the counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter >>. Further, in this action pattern, addition processing is performed by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, and subtraction processing is performed at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on. The sensors here are the second input sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game medal (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are set to (e1) to (e6), and the second input sensor D30s is turned off → on at the timing of (e1) as the processing flow. Next, at the timing of (e2), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → off, the game medal addition process is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is changed from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first input sensor D20s is turned on and off at the timing between (e2) and (e3). Next, the power is cut off at the timing of (e3). Next, at the timing of (e4), the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on, the game medal subtraction process is executed by the throwing monitoring counter, and the counter value of the throwing monitoring counter is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of (e5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (e6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed.

In the eighth embodiment, the process of detecting the power failure and the process of detecting the power failure are configured to be executed within the same interrupt process, but the process is not limited to this, and the process of detecting the power failure , It is also possible to execute the power cutoff processing by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the figure, even if the game medal has passed the second insertion sensor D30s and the power is cut off after the credit addition process is executed, the game machine is turned off at the timing of (e6). Is detected and the power-off processing is executed. Therefore, it is possible to configure the power-off processing to be executed after the addition processing and the subtraction processing of the ON monitoring counter are executed.

Further, in the figure, it is preferable that the relationship of T4> T5 is satisfied during the above-mentioned periods T4 and T5. Since the detection of power failure is performed after the shoot sensor D40s is turned on and off, the period T4 from the occurrence of power failure to the detection of power failure is the counting process of game medals (addition and subtraction) by the input monitoring counter. It is preferably configured to be longer than the period during which subtraction) is performed (eg, the period from (e2) to (e4)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off processing can be performed after the game medal counting processing by the input monitoring counter is surely executed.

With this configuration, after the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the power off processing is performed, and the game medal counting process by the insertion monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors is normally performed. It becomes possible to execute, and it becomes possible to reliably detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

In FIGS. 136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on → off, the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the shoot sensor D40s is turned off → on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be as follows, and there is no problem in any combination of the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing.
(A1) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s off → on (A2) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s on → off (A3) Addition processing of the input monitoring counter Timing: 2nd input sensor D30s off → on (A4) Timing of addition processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s on → off (B1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s off → on (B2) ) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s on → off

Although the configuration of the input monitoring counter for the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s has been described in detail in FIGS. 136 to 138, the configuration of the input monitoring counter may be applied to the gaming machine having the input reception sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of the addition processing / subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in any combination of the timing of the addition processing and the timing of the subtraction processing.
(C1) Timing of addition processing of input reception counter: Input reception sensor D10s off → on (C2) Timing of addition processing of input reception counter: Input reception sensor D10s on → off (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s off → on (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s on → off (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s off → on (D4) ) Timing of subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s on → off Also, when the game medal passes through the input reception sensor D10s, 1 is added to the counter value of the input monitoring counter, and then the blocker is off. Therefore, when the game medal is returned, the counter value of the input monitoring counter remains incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to this example is configured to correct the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter to 0 by turning the blocker from off to on after that, so that it is executed during the insertion of the game medal. It can be configured so that the input monitoring counter determination process does not become abnormal.

Further, in this example, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is added by 1 and then subtracted by 1, but the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 and then added by 1 (counter value is "0 → -1 → 0". , And any of the above-mentioned configurations can be applied to the configuration.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and game medal payout count processing >>>
Next, as a timing in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure, the timing related to the payout number counting process of the gaming medals will be described with reference to FIG. 139. In the process of counting the number of medals to be paid out, for example, it is performed at the timing of 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number counting process is performed at the timing when the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M. It is configured to be done. As the payout number counting process, for example, it is common to use an addition process for adding normally paid out game medals such as 0 → 1 → 2 .... The payout count process is a process of counting 1 (may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that the gaming machine has executed the payout of one game medal.

The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, such as the time for the game medal to flow down and the time for the disk D50 of the medal payout device H. Applicable to the configuration.

In addition, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 120, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the second payout sensor H2, the second payout sensor H20s in FIG. 4 is referred to as the first payout sensor H1, and the release urging means H70 is in the initial position. In the case of, the first payout sensor H1 = on and the second payout sensor H2 = off. That is, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = On / 2nd payout sensor H2 = Off (initial position)
It becomes the sensor state.

<< Operation pattern of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
FIG. 139 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off time processing and the game medal payout number counting processing are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. In this action pattern, the timing at which the power supply is cut off is determined.
Action pattern A: The first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off Action pattern B: The first payout sensor H1 is on → off and the second payout sensor H2 is off. The relationship between the processing and the processing for counting the number of payouts of game medals will be described.

<< Action pattern A of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
First, as a processing flow of the action pattern A, first, a power failure occurs after the release urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position (the timing of the various sensors at this time is the first payout sensor. H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off.) After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = On / 2nd payout sensor H2 = Off (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. In the eighth embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply cutoff detection and the execution of the power supply cutoff process are executed. Can also be processed by separate interrupts.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unreasonable profit, such as the number of medals being paid out is not counted even though the game medals are paid out.

<< Action pattern B of power off processing and game medal payout number counting processing >>
First, as a flow of processing of the action pattern B, first, the displacement is started from the state where the release urging means H70 is in the initial position.
1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
The power is cut off after the first payout sensor H1 = off and the second payout sensor H2 = off. After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. In the eighth embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power supply cutoff detection and the power cutoff processing execution are executed. Can also be processed at different interrupt processing execution timings.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the discharge urging means H70 starts displacement from the initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unreasonable profit, such as the number of medals being paid out is not counted even though the game medals are paid out.

The execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure.
(1) Timing when the first payout sensor H1 = off, the second payout sensor H2 = off → the first payout sensor H1 = off, the second payout sensor H2 = on, (2) the first payout sensor H1 = off, The timing may be set such that the second payout sensor H2 = on → the first payout sensor H1 = off, and the second payout sensor H2 = off.

<Relationship between power off processing and sensor detection processing Applicable to pachinko gaming machines>
In the eighth embodiment, the sensors are off before the various sensors installed inside the spinning machine detect the passage of the game medal, or the sensors are off after the notification of the game medal is detected. For processing when the power is turned off and detecting the passage of the game medal when the power is turned off in either the on state, or when the game medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is in either the on → off state. The relationship with such processing has been described in detail, but regarding the relationship between the processing when the power is turned off and the processing related to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball), not only the rotating game machine but also the pachinko game machine, for example, It can also be applied to ball game machines, gaming machines, and the like. Therefore, the case where the above-described configuration is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described in detail below. The various sensors installed inside the pachinko gaming machine correspond to, for example, the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later, and the game ball. The process related to the detection of passage corresponds to, for example, the counting process of the total discharge game balls related to the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, which will be described later.

First, the meaning of each term in the pachinko gaming machine applicable to this example will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is the main control board. The identification information is displayed and controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by a computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning opening can be opened, and a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Transition to special game state Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the transition to special game (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, variable to the start port) When the member is attached, the opening period of the variable member is long, the probability of winning the opening of the variable member is high, the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member is short), etc. is there. The "game area" is an area in which the game ball can roll, and is not limited to the front side of the game board D35 (as seen by the player), for example, the back side of the game board D35 (as seen by the player). It may be an area in which the game ball including both the front side of the game board D35 and the front side (as seen from the player's point of view) can roll. The “left-handed” is to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side (left-handed route ML10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. “Right-handed” means launching the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side (right-handed route MR10) of the game area D30, which will be described later. Further, the "left-handed area" is an area on the left side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. The "right-handed area" is an area on the right side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is used as a reference. The "expected average execution time of the easy-to-enter ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is constantly changed (for example, a situation in which a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In the case, it means the ratio of the opening period to the unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example. , When a variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called opening extension function operating state / non-operating state), and the winning of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member. High or low probability (so-called high-probability lottery state / low-probability lottery state), length of fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called normal figure fluctuation shortening function non-operating state / operating state) ), Etc. are realized by any one or a plurality of combinations. The "average value of the variable display period of the identification information" is not limited to the meaning that the variable display period is actually measured for each variable display of the identification information and the average value based on the measured value is taken. More specifically, when it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , The expected value based on the multiple types of variable display periods (sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of candidate for the variable display period to be selected, that one type It becomes the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept is limited to the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability. It should be added that the concept may be limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variable display period of the identification information". As a realization method for making the "average value" different, the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are different, or even if the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as different period values, but the method is not limited to one of them). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "Having at least a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, the state transition from "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" is performed according to the number of fluctuation display times of the identification information. Including those that can be obtained. In this case, if the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured to be "first variation period state" <"second variation period state" <"third variation period state", It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed. In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state + electric chew specific game state that continues until the next big hit (despite the situation where the next big hit is definite, the next big hit cannot be obtained. As the situation continues, the speed of the game progresses, so it may be possible to dispel the fatigue at the time of so-called hamari)}. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first variable period state", the difference between the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit is ". In the "third variable period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variable period state", the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit are In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information, especially at the time of loss, tends to be relatively long compared to the "first fluctuation period state" ( That is, fluctuations suggesting hits and reach or reach fluctuations are likely to occur), and in the "second fluctuation period state", the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively longer than in other states. Easy {that is, the fluctuation display period of the short fluctuation loss where the loss is deterministic and the fluctuation display period of the medium fluctuation loss which suggests the hit are not selected (or difficult to be selected), but the fluctuation display of the reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that it is selected (or easily selected) only for a period. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game" may be the period immediately after the execution of the special game ends until the symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times, or the special game may be changed. It may be a period from the time when the symbol is changed one or more times after the execution of the special game is completed to the time when the symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed). If it is within the specified range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range. Therefore, the above-mentioned "first variable period state"-> "second variable period state"-> "third variable period state" When the state transition with and can be taken, the specific period can mean the period of stay in the "first variable period state" and / or the "second variable period state"). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold" means that, for example, a special game (so-called big hit game) is likely to occur at the time of the hold digestion, but the special game may occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (win / fail lottery random number)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability fluctuation game) after the special game may be used as a judgment criterion, or the event content derived from these random number values (win / fail judgment result). , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of the stop symbol, the possibility of shifting to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. In the case of suggesting, "suggesting or notifying the existence of a hold" is, for example, an effect at the time of hold digestion until the hold is reached (the pattern variation mode of the decorative symbol and its interlocking performance). The execution mode of (background effect, etc.) can be changed, and when the notification is given, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator lamp (which may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the occurrence of the hold. (In that case, change the display color, change the display shape, etc.), change the sound of the hold generation sound and the sound such as BGM at the time of the hold occurrence, and the lamp for production at the time of the hold occurrence. The lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.) is changed, or the execution mode of other effects (design variation mode of decorative symbols, background effect performed in conjunction with it, etc.) performed at the time of the pending occurrence. Can be mentioned.

The ninth embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step related to various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. , The mode is not limited to the following. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described.

The ninth embodiment is a model (a first-class first-class multifunction device) in which two conventional first-class pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. The ninth embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step related to various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. , The mode is not limited to the following. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the ninth embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the term "table" in this example is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is an associated aspect. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the conditions of the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, and the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with the time reduction game, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not deviate significantly from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate. The step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example are different from the step numbers and codes in the embodiment of the rotating drum type game machine according to this example, and the same step numbers or codes are used. It should be added that even if they are used, they are not the same (process, function, member, etc.).

<9th embodiment>
Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like (for example, step 2102 in the ninth embodiment is a process that functions independently because it is step 2102 in another embodiment).

First, with reference to FIG. 140, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball to the lower ball plate D22, and the like. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects according to the game state and the like are output.

The game board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) on the front surface of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so as to be parallel to each other while maintaining a distance of more than 13 mm and not more than 25 mm (19 mm in this example). Has been done. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism so as not to be easily shaken.

Further, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not obstruct the view of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed so that there is no unevenness. It is formed.

In the ball plate (for example, upper ball plate D20, lower ball plate D22), the game balls on the ball plate are visible to the player (the number of game balls can be roughly confirmed), and the game received by the player in the saucer. It has a shape that does not hinder the taking out of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be taken out freely).

Next, in the game board D35, a game area D30 divided by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed, and a game ball that flows down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. You can check the position of. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left-handed area DL10 and a right-handed area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a left-handed route ML10, a right-handed route MR10, a first main game starting port A10, and a second main game Starting port B10, auxiliary game starting port H10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device S40, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB, and an out opening D36 are installed. In the ninth embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first flow-down route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second flow-down route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (left-handed area DL10) is provided. While it is easy to be guided to the first main game start port A10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (right-handed area DR10) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and It may be arranged so as to be separated from the second main game start opening B10.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and is easily guided to the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). It is configured so that the game ball flowing down is less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

Next, the left general winning opening P10 includes a left general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The left general winning opening ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and generates left general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. A predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the left general winning opening P10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is on the left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when left-handed (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left-handed area DL10 (left-handed route ML10) on the left side of the game area D30). It is configured so that it is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10.

Next, the right general winning opening P20 includes a right general winning opening ball detection device P21s. The right general winning opening ball detection device P21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20, and generates right general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of the auxiliary game starting opening for acquiring the auxiliary game random number and the role of the general winning opening for paying out the prize ball. There is. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game starting opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls will be paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the right general winning opening P20. The game ball (for example, 2 balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general winning opening P20 by the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 is determined by the entry of the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. , It is configured to be less than the game balls (for example, 3 balls) paid out as prize balls from the left general winning opening P10. In the ninth embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right can enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when right-handed (to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right-handed area DR10 (right-handed route MR10) on the right side of the game area D30) is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the right general winning opening P20.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, as the entry openings that can be entered when the right-handed hit is executed, in order from the upstream, "auxiliary game start opening H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second major winning opening C20". → 1st prize opening C10 → 2nd main game start opening B10 → out opening D36 ”. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 will further flow down on the game area, and the ball entry port located downstream (the above-mentioned right). It will be possible to enter the general winning opening P20, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board surface, and will not subsequently enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20 (execute right-handed strike). Then, the game ball that did not enter the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20).

When the left-handed player is executed in the non-time-reduced game state (the game proceeds by left-handed player in the non-time-reduced game state), the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). Since it is difficult to open the second main game start port, the electric accessory B11d is difficult to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the first main game start port A10 as the start port on the main game side. When right-handed is executed in the time-reduced game state (the game proceeds by right-handed in the time-reduced game state), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20). 2 Main game start port The electric accessory B11d is easy to open, and the game proceeds mainly by entering the second main game start port B10 as the start port on the main game side. In addition, the game ball is launched by right-handed in the time-reduced game state, rather than the ease of entering the first main game start port A10 when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time-reduced game state. It is easier to enter the second main game start port B10 when the game is continued, in other words, the first main game starts when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handed in the non-time shortened game state. The first main game start port A10 or the second main game start when the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed in a time-shortening game state rather than the ease of entering the mouth A10 or the second main game start port B10. The ease of entering the ball into the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of prize balls (3 balls in this example) when the ball is entered into the left general winning opening P10, which is easier to enter when the left-handed hit is executed, is right-handed. Non-time reduction game state by designing more than the number of prize balls (2 balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter at the time of execution than at the time of left-handed execution. The difference between the average number of prize balls paid out by entering the winning opening, that is, the base, between the case where the game is played with a left-handed hit and the case where the game is played with a right-handed hit in a time-saving game state. It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out with respect to the 100 game balls fired in the situation where the special game is not won) becomes too large.

Further, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, or the like, and is configured to be lit when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. .. Further, although the details will be described later, it may be suggested whether to shift to the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game depending on the difference in the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. It is configured. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left-handed area DL10 or the right-handed area DR10 on the game area D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows down to the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20, and the like. It will be.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right side of the out opening D36, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is , It is configured so that it can easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d {and a first large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C13} is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 Grand prize opening Electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the opening D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d {and a second large winning opening. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C23} is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second big winning opening C20 in the normal state where the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win in the second big winning opening C20 and in the open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening may be closed or opened (so-called sliding attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol holding display unit A21h (second main game symbol holding display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and a maximum of four holding numbers can be displayed (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Blinking at low speed, Number of Holds 3: Blinking at medium speed, Number of Holds 4: Blinking at high speed).

Since the main game symbol does not necessarily have to have a directing role, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous degree in the ninth embodiment. However, when a method is adopted in which the main game symbol itself has a directing role and the decorative symbol is not displayed, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device S40 described later. It may be configured as.

Next, the effect display device S40 is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device S40 includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations imitating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display unit SG12 for displaying main game hold information, and the like. It has a second hold display unit SG13. Although the effect display device S40 is configured by a liquid crystal display in the ninth embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13 are each composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed). In the ninth embodiment, there are two entrances, an auxiliary game start opening H10 and a right general winning opening P20, as entrances from which the auxiliary game random numbers can be obtained. Regardless of which ball is entered, the display regarding the acquired auxiliary game random number will be displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device S40, and has functions such as a flow path for the game ball, protection of the effect display device S40, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 and / or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device S40, and plays a role of driving and enlivening the game when the effect is executed due to the symbol change. It is preferable that the device is moved in the vertical direction, driven by rotation, or lit so that the drive is conspicuous, and the drive is easy to drive due to a symbol variation with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S, and by operating (pressing), an effect based on the operation is executed. The operation modes of the sub-input button SB include a single press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed only once for a short time), repeated hits (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press. (Operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period), and may be configured to have. Further, the operation member electrically connected to the sub-control board S and for which the effect based on the operation is executed by operating (pressing) is not limited to the sub-input button SB, and the upper and lower parts are not limited to the sub-input button SB. It has four operation units, left and right, and a cross key that allows you to select the effect (notice effect, etc.) to be executed by operating the operation unit, and the effect (movable) by pulling it toward you. It may be configured to have a lever, etc. on which the body accessory operates, etc.).

Next, the out port D36 is an entry port provided below the game area D30, and the game ball that has flowed down without entering any winning opening provided in the game area D30 enters the ball. When a game ball enters the out port D36, which is a ball opening, various lottery based on random numbers and prize balls based on the entry ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Become. In this embodiment, the out port D36 for entering the game ball that did not win the winning opening is provided only at the bottom of the game board, but the out opening is provided at a predetermined position on the upper part of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable not to be confused with the winning opening, such as by using a sticker to display "OUT".

Although not shown, the size of the game board D35 (game area D30) is set to include a circle having a diameter of 300 mm and not exceeding a square frame having a side of 500 mm.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, when the accessory does not operate (when the variable winning opening such as the large winning opening C10 is closed), the winning opening (the one capable of winning the game ball, in other words Then, it is not impossible to win a prize even if the launched game ball has a physically possible trajectory. For example, the number of the first main game start opening A10 (the number of entrances of the winning opening) is five. (The first main game start opening A10 is one, the left general winning opening P10 is three, and the right general winning opening P20 is one). The number of winning openings can be set as appropriate, but it is desirable that the number is in the range of 5 to 15 from the viewpoint of the winning ratio and the suppression of complication of the game. Here, the entrance of the winning opening is a passing surface of a game ball composed of the winning opening and a game nail or the like connected to the winning opening (a game nail or the like which is continuously arranged so that the game ball cannot pass between them). Of these, it refers to the part farthest from the winning opening. The size of the entrance of the winning opening when the accessory does not operate (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 among the entrances of the winning opening, and when it is set by the game nail, the nail and the nail It is desirable to configure the method so that it does not exceed 13 mm, and the size of the entrance of the winning opening of the variable winning device (electric accessory or non-electric accessory) other than the large winning opening (as described above). It is desirable that it does not exceed 55 mm. In addition, it is desirable that the size of the entrance of the large winning opening (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board) exceeds 55 mm and does not exceed 135 mm in order to distinguish it from other accessories.

Further, the size of the gate (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) that normally triggers the operation of the symbol display device (the gate and the game nails connected to the gate (for example, the game balls are continuously arranged so that the game ball cannot pass between them). The maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 at the position farthest from the gate, that is, the actual entrance of the gate) does not exceed 13 mm among the passing surfaces of the game balls composed of the game nails, etc. It is desirable to do so.

In the ninth embodiment, two large winning openings (two, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) are provided, but the number should not exceed two from the viewpoint of gambling. It is desirable to configure in. Further, as in the ninth embodiment, it is desirable to have a structure in which the two large winning openings are clearly physically separated regardless of whether they are open or not. Further, it is desirable that the game ball can pass between the two large winning openings without the two large winning openings being horizontally adjacent to each other as in the ninth embodiment. Further, in the ninth embodiment, two starting ports, a first main game starting port A10 and a second main game starting port B10, are provided, but the number of general winning openings (general winning openings in the ninth embodiment). It is desirable that the number does not exceed 3 in consideration of the balance with (4 is provided).

A movable object may be provided in the starting port, and the movement of the game ball that has already won a prize in the starting port may be changed by the movable object. In this case, it is desirable that the movable object has a structure in which a constant operation is constantly continued (including a device that repeats a series of operations) and the operation cannot be adjusted.

Further, as described above, a large number of game nails and the like are arranged in the game area D30, and although this arrangement causes the falling of the game ball to be irregular within a certain range, it should not be extremely irregular. Is desirable. Specifically, when the game ball collides with an electric or other power source (a windmill or other device for changing the direction of the game ball's fall, the game ball moves in a direction different from the direction of the fall. Devices that raise the game ball by (excluding changes) (excluding those that raise the game ball only slightly and that clearly do not make the direction of the game ball fall significantly irregular), etc. were fired. Since the order of the game balls and the order of entering the winning or out opening may be significantly different, it is desirable not to provide such a device. The game nails and the windmill are driven into the game board approximately vertically (about ± 5 degrees). Needless to say, the game nails and other structures provided on the game board are durable enough that the shape and the like do not change due to the collision of the game balls (for example, the Vickers hardness of the game nail of this example is 150 Hv to 230 Hv). Made of brass.) Is secured.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 141. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). Mainly the main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the sub-main control unit SM that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device S40 that gives interest to the game content. The sub-sub control unit SS that executes the effect display, the error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize ball according to the winning of each winning opening. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 or the like for paying out game balls supplied from the tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, an error release switch KH3a for clearing a predetermined error, and a prize ball payout. The prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout operation by the unit KE10, the error display KH3 that displays the occurrence status of the error related to the payout (for example, 7-segment display), and the prize ball that controls the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. The payout control board KH, the launching device D42 that launches the game balls (storage balls) of the upper ball plate D20 one by one to the game area D30, the launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and the pachinko gaming machine. A power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine, a power switch Ea for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

Further, on the main control board M, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10, the left general winning opening P10, the right general winning opening P20, the first major winning opening C10, and the second major winning opening A ball entry status display device J10 capable of displaying the entry status of a game ball into a winning opening such as C20 is provided, and four-digit 8-segment indicators are arranged and attached in a horizontal row. The ball entry status display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key possessed by the game hall side to unlock the door unit. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the boards. As an example of the ball entry status displayed on the ball entry status display device J10, the section information based on the total number of outs and the base ratio (value calculated by "(low probability payout number / low probability out number) x 100"). ) Etc. can be mentioned. The ROM / RAM area for executing the process of step 1550-10 and the ROM / RAM area for executing the process of steps 1000-1 to 3500 are configured to be different areas (addresses do not overlap with each other). You may.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 142, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and the prize ball signal is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, a game ball lending device such as the card unit R requests the prize ball payout control board KH to lend the ball. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 143, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m causes the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) to rotate, and the game ball is moved. One ball is paid out one by one. Further, the paid-out game balls are detected by the payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be added that the cross sections CC are shown along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see) as shown in the figure.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by transmitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged so as to sandwich the rotation confirmation member KE10p3. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the state in the lower part of FIG. 142).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 144. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment pays out game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the display device S40 such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH and the main control board M, and the sound from the speaker D24. , The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board of the above. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device S40 such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device S40. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information in the event of a power failure. ing.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M includes a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s described above, a second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, an auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, and the first 1 large prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning opening winning ball detection device P11s}, drive solenoid (described above, 1st large winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13, 1st 2 major winning openings Electric accessory solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), and other game peripherals (first main game peripherals A, No. 1 in the figure) that are input / output devices essential for the progress of the game. 2 Main game peripheral device B, 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) are electrically connected, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. .. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 144, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub The main control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (sometimes referred to as a card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the ninth embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 are provided. It is also connected to (launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the ninth embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used. Lending control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Here, when it is detected (touch detection) that the player directly operates the launch handle D44, the launch device D42 determines the launch intensity (launch position) based on the amount of operation of the launch handle, and the game area D30. It is configured so that the game balls can be fired one by one toward any position of, and even if the game balls are fired continuously, the counter and timer are prevented so that the game balls cannot be fired more than 100 pieces per minute. The game balls are configured to be fired at regular intervals (for example, 599.9 ms / piece). In other words, the game balls are always fired at regular intervals (the rate of fire does not differ) regardless of the game state such as the probability fluctuation game state or the game state such as whether or not a special game is executed. As a result, the player's rate of fire is appropriately reflected regardless of the state of the game. More specifically, when the player desires a right-handed strike, the right-handed strike can be executed by operating the firing handle D44 at a position corresponding to the firing strength at which the right-handed strike can be performed, and the player can perform the right-handed strike. If you want, you can perform left-handed strike by operating the launch handle D44 at a position corresponding to the launch strength that allows left-handed strike, and whether or not a special game is being executed is a game. Regardless of the state of, the game ball can be launched with the firing intensity based on the operation of the constant firing handle D44.

The launch handle D44 is provided with a launch stop switch (not shown) so that the player can stop the launch of the game ball at an arbitrary timing (the launch can be performed in units of one ball). ing. Specifically, even when the player is operating the launch handle D44 (it is detected that the launch handle D44 is directly operated (touch detection)), the launch stop switch is operated to operate the launch ball. It is possible to stop the launch. Here, the "direct operation" means that a part of the player's body is used to come into contact with the gaming machine to play the game. Further, in this example, from the viewpoint of gambling, the launch motor and the launch handle (strength adjustment) so that the performance of the launch device D42 does not change over a predetermined period or due to external noise and the durability is ensured. Function), the control circuit of the launcher is designed respectively. Further, it is desirable that the launch handle D44 is not provided with a function of vibrating the launch handle D44 so as not to hinder the player from adjusting the launch position.

Further, the portion of the launching device D42, which is the entire device related to the launching of the game ball, that gives kinetic energy to the game ball is composed of one launch motor. Further, the firing intensity of the firing handle D44 returns to 0 when the player is not directly operating it (so that it is urged in the reference position direction by a spring or the like and returns to the reference position when the hand is released from the firing handle D44). The strength adjustment skill of the player can be reflected in the game result.

In this example, the game ball used is a ball having a diameter of 11 mm and a mass of 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device S40 for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effect (not shown, but so-called effect). It is connected to the motor / solenoid of the movable body accessory. Further, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), the start or end of the measurement of the base value, the execution of the predetermined effect, the start of the display of the maintenance mode, etc. can be executed by the sub input button SB. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, it can be determined that the sub-input button SB has been operated by the detection by the sub-input button detection device SBs. In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect. (Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device S40 are performed, and the sub-sub control unit SS controls the display (substantial display control) on the effect display device S40. It is configured to be done. In the ninth embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (as a separate board). It may be configured, but by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball provided for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, the gaming balls launched into the gaming area D30 are each entry port {1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, 1st grand prize opening C10, The ball enters any of the second major winning opening C20, the general winning opening P10, and the out opening C80}, passes through the entry sensor corresponding to each entry opening, and is guided into the gaming machine (inside the gaming machine frame D). To. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the gaming balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming ball entry {each entry port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning opening C10, first It is a switch through which a game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20 (general winning opening) passes, and has one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting the entry into each entry opening}. It is assumed that

Next, FIG. 145 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process shown in FIG. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial settings are performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the manager of the amusement park or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned off is not stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, information indicating that the power was normally turned off is stored in the RAM, or No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPU MC of the main control board M acquires various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are input to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the main control may be performed in step 1014-1. The CPUMC of the board M is set to return the solenoid {the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). In order to return the open or closed state of the above to the state before the power was cut off, it is judged whether or not the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the big prize opening, and the movable piece, and then turned on. In that case, store the solenoid operation flag at the corresponding address (in order to determine that the 2nd main game start port / big winning opening / movable piece is open and open it again before the power is turned off). The process proceeds to step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally in the RAM, and proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the input process described later in step 1000-1. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value update type random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game start port B10), which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the winning monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. When a game ball wins in each winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out is 4 for the 1st main game starting port A10, 1 for the 2nd main game starting port B10, 1 ball for the 1st major winning opening C10, and 2nd. The large winning opening C20 has 13 balls, the left general winning opening (sometimes also called the general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. The number of these prize balls paid out is an example, and the number of prize balls paid out is different between the case where the ball is entered into the first main game start port A10 and the case where the ball is entered into the second main game start port B10. Alternatively, the number of prize balls paid out may be different between the case where the ball is entered in the first prize opening C10 and the case where the ball is entered in the second prize opening C20. When a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a winning / losing lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. In addition, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (2 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of prize balls in all the winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various gaming states. , The result of the direct game is summarized in "whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. It is difficult to do so, and if there is an obstacle due to a sudden matter such as a power outage during the payout for winning one game ball, it may not be possible to obtain an accurate number of prize balls. Therefore, in this example, the retry function at the time of abnormality in which the game ball is paid out again for the prize (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game start port A10 and one game ball is paid out). It has a function of executing the payout of the remaining three game balls after the power is turned off and then the power is restored. Of course, by adding a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize an accurate number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. In this case, retry at the time of abnormality is possible. It is not necessary to provide a function.

Next, in step 2000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the large winning opening validity period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the out port monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the LED output process. Next, in step 1900, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the emission control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the test signal output process. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the solenoid output process. Next, in step 1999, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry state control process. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to allow the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is attached to the game board surface. Switches (for example, the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, the first major winning opening winning detection device C11s, Second major winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), out ball count switch that detects entry into the out port D36, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) Etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal and magnetic detection signal 2 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2) are monitored. .. In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

Note that the various random number update processes are processes in which the random numbers used in the lottery, which has an extremely low effect on the payout, are updated relatively simply (for example, a constant is added). (For example, the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, the variation mode lottery random number) are updated.

The initial value update type random number update process is a process for updating a random number used in a lottery that affects the number of balls to a certain extent (a process different from the above-mentioned various random number update processes), and in this example, , Ordinary symbol per random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol described later, etc. It is a process for updating.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery in which the above-mentioned influence on the payout occurs to some extent. As an example of the random number to be updated in this example, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, an initial value random number of the ordinary symbol symbol, an initial value random number of the special symbol symbol, a soft initial value random number per the special symbol, and the like can be exemplified. The initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol symbol initial value random number are random numbers updated by the initial value random number update process when a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are configured.

The timer subtraction process includes a 2-byte timer (for example, a timer MP11t-C for managing fluctuations in the first and second main game symbols, a timer MP22t-B for opening the electric accessory of the second main game start port, and a timer MP34t for special games. , Open time timer, etc.) is updated.

Further, the start port 2 validity period setting process is a winning opening that facilitates winning by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d). (For example, it is a process of setting the validity period of the second main game start port B10).

The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the pass counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting the transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

Further, the large winning opening valid period setting process is a process of saving the result of determining the valid period of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). When the specific area C22 is configured to be included in the large winning opening as in the tenth embodiment described later, the result of the valid period determination of the specific area C22 is saved by the large winning opening valid period setting process. You may.

The abnormality detection process is a process of monitoring magnetism, monitoring disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitoring radio waves, monitoring the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board D35, monitoring impact, and the like. ..

Further, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality when the game ball enters various entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10), so that each switch level is used. It is a process of monitoring the continuous on-time of the ball (continuous on-time of the ball entry sensor).

Further, the game status display process is displayed on the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the jackpot), the error status, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20). The current number of auxiliary game hold balls) and the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol display device (current number of main game hold balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). This is a process for making a display request.

Further, the handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44).

Further, the out port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out port (for example, the out port D36) in order to create a security output request.

Further, the LED output processing is a display on the special symbol display device (for example, a display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, a display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20). , Display of the number of operation-holding balls on the first main game side in the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of operation-holding balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), normal symbol display device (Display of auxiliary symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation-holding balls on the auxiliary game side on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), error status display, game status display, and separate display (for example). , Display that the situation should be right-handed, the situation that should be left-handed) and the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (display the number of rounds in the big hit), so the display is initialized. This is a process for sequentially controlling the LED output controlled on the main control board M side such as the output of display data.

Further, the launch control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of the game ball, and the details will be described later.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting it to a corresponding output port.

Further, the solenoid output processing is a solenoid of an ordinary electric accessory (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) and a large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) solenoid. This is a process for outputting output data. When a shielding member (upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25) is provided in the large winning opening as in the fourth embodiment described later, the output data of the movable piece solenoid is output by the solenoid output processing. To execute.

Further, in the ball entry state control process, the calculation of the base value for displaying on the ball entry state display device J10, the storage of the calculation result, the display control of the calculation result, and the like are executed. At this time, when the setting changing means described later is provided, the normal prize ball counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. are stored for each set value. , It is also possible to configure the ball entry status display device to display the ball. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current setting (for example, the jackpot winning probability and the number of winning balls of each winning opening) is read, and the storage area corresponding to the current setting (for example). , Normal time prize ball counter value, normal time out number counter value, total out number counter value, storage area for storing the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc.) is set. Then, the receipt state information is generated and displayed based on the value stored in each storage area. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the ball entry state information (for example, the base value) for each setting. Further, the ball entry status information to be displayed on the ball entry status display device is configured to be switched by operating the dedicated ball entry status display switching button or by operating the setting change button (for example,). When the current setting is 1, when the ball entry status display switching button is operated once, the ball entry status information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated once more, the ball entry status information of setting 3 is displayed. By displaying), the latest information for each setting may be confirmed. Here, when using the setting change button, a configuration using the above-mentioned setting key (for example, turning the power on and turning the setting key counterclockwise) so that the setting is not changed by operating the setting change button. It is preferable that the display contents are switched by operating the setting change button in the state of being present). When the display of the ball entry status information is switched by the ball entry status display switching button or the setting change button, the display may be returned to the current setting display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, FIG. 147 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing shown in FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer is interrupted. In the case of Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the information indicating that the power is cut off abnormally in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally cut off in the RAM, and in step 1020, of the main control board M. The CPUMC sets the power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing. Although an example of executing the power interruption process (FIG. 147) by inputting the power interruption signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption signal is input to a specific input port. It may be set and the power failure may be determined and the power failure process may be performed by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main process (FIG. 145) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 146).

Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 149 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 146. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M then determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is inappropriate for paying out the prize ball. , Ball out error, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M is issued a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 151). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (counter-payment control board reception control process in step 3200). To do. In addition, even when No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 150. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the ninth embodiment includes specific information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout-related information (prize ball payout-related information or payout abnormality-related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the error is concerned. Means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 is related to the completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that the prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that the prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 151 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. 146. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M has error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error to send the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side to the main control board M side. But manage (centralized management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout), and the next process (step 3500). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 152 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 of the above (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the process of step 1110. On the other hand, if No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the right general winning opening ball entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the right general winning opening P20, to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Even if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of being set in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of hold, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 1200). In addition, even if No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Here, in the ninth embodiment, it is configured so that a random number on the auxiliary game side can be acquired when the ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game start port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface, and the auxiliary game start. While it is possible to enter a ball entering a ball opening (right general winning opening P20, etc.) downstream of the opening H10, a game ball entering the right general winning opening P20 flows down to the back of the game board surface, and thereafter other It is configured not to enter the ball entrance. Although the details will be described later, even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), the prize ball is not paid out, but the right general prize opening P20 It is configured so that the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the ball.

Next, FIG. 153 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. 146. First, in step 2150, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the ball entry determination means executes the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the general winning opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the out-port / in-ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2152, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game start port H10 is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

On the other hand, if No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s for the detection end time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device). When the H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 155 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s for the entry detection time (the time or more, the first main game start entry When the ball detection device A11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball detection device A11s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10). In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2212-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. The non-time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is off, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be off (when the open extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is on, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is activated). In the case of Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2222.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the ball entry counter MJ10c for the detection time (the first main game start port entry detection device A11s inputs for that time or longer). If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start port input ball detection device A11s). Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first main game start port, and proceeds to step 2222. In addition, even if No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s as the ball entry detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening B10 is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the second main game start opening B10). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag.

Next, in step 2231-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and proceeds to step 2240. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition). When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the device operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the start port entry number counter MJ12c. It is configured as.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start port B10 is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the third in step 2232. 2 It is determined that there is an illegal ball entry in the main game start port B10, an illegal ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side) of the second main game start port is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. In addition, even if No in step 2231-1, step 2231-2 or step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, if No in step 2222, in step 2233, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s for the detection time (the time or more, the second main game start port entry). When the ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). In the case of Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the illegal detection time (detected as a normal ball entry) by the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s (second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). It is a time that exceeds the time to be performed, and it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time for determining that fraud is being performed). In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, even if No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 156 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the winning ball detection time (the time). As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the ball entry port). In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2360, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the large winning opening in step 2361. It is determined that there was a good ball entry, the first (second) large winning opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the detection time {the time. As described above, when the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C11s). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for a time} or more when it is considered that the passage of the detection device C21s) is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first (second) grand prize opening, and proceeds to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the illegal detection time {the time or more, the first large When the winning opening winning detection device C11s (second major winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, it is considered that an illegal entry into the first major winning opening C10 (second major winning opening C20) has been detected. } Determine whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 153. The general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening P10) pays out the winning ball when the game ball enters. , General winning opening ball entry detection device P11s (9th embodiment), which is a ball entry port that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. In the general winning opening ball detection device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and a general winning sensor, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning mouth-entry ball detection devices P11s with the mouth-entry ball detection device P11s).

First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the entry detection time (the general winning opening ball detection device detects the input for that time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered the general winning opening. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening ball detecting device inputs. If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening ball entry detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2 or step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition). When a game ball enters the general winning opening P10 when the device operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening ball detection device is an illegal detection time {when the general winning opening ball detecting device detects the input for that time or longer, the general winning opening is won. It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the mouth is detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the emission confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered). If Yes in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M did not detect the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s during the detection end time (the total emission confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for that time or longer). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s is the input ball detection time (the output is detected by the out-port entry ball detection device C80s for that time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the out port C80). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the process of step 2620.

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the out-port in-ball detection device C80s for the detection end time (the out-port in-ball detection device C80s inputs the input for that time or longer). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / in-ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s is an illegal detection time (when the out-port entry ball detection device C80s has detected the input for that time or longer). , It is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10, and steps 2712. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10, and steps 2722. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (13 in this example). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M pays out the prize balls related to the first prize opening C10 (second prize opening C20) (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and next processing (step 1100) Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and sets the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol. Refer to it and determine the stop symbol based on the acquired game status of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is compared with the case where it is off. Then, the winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.8 seconds → opening for 2.0 seconds, closing) (maximum opening). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol variation time to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M, and assists. After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit” (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens for 1 second → closes for 1 second in the opening mode (for example, in the case of the hit symbol “D1”, based on the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side. → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Closed, in the case of the hit symbol “D2”, open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds,) Is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In the ninth embodiment, when the main game time reduction flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for continuing to open the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is the longest. It is configured.

Next, in step 1242, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory with reference to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, turns off the electric accessory opening flag, and performs the next process. (Processing in step 1300).

If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms has elapsed (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and an auxiliary game symbol. Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers and the like for determining the variation time of the above may be provided.

Although not shown, in the one-time opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game), the game is played at the second main game starting port B10. Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered, the opening operation of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is terminated, that is, the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on). ), If the opening (longest opening) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is executed, "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → The opening time of "opening → closing for 4 seconds" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are placed in the second main game starting port B10. The opening (opening period) of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by the achievement of the earlier of the two cases. In addition, when the second main game start port electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol "D2" is opened (maximum open) in the non-time shortened game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off), " The opening time of "opening for 0.2 seconds-> closing for 0.8 seconds-> opening for 2.0 seconds-> closing" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, The opening (opening period) of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is configured to be completed by achieving the earlier of the cases where the game ball (10 balls) enters the second main game starting port B10. ing. In addition, the total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time-reduced game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 4.2 seconds, which is non-existent. The total time during which the normal electric accessory is open at the maximum opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag off) is 2.2 seconds, and any game Even in the state, it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and each game state (time shortening game state) so that the maximum number of winnings during operation does not exceed approximately 10. (Whether it is a non-time reduction game state).

Further, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the operation of the normal electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in the hit mode, it is immediately (for example, for example). It is configured to operate (within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol fluctuation time in the gaming machine), and it is possible to clearly correspond to which trigger the ordinary electric accessory is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (during the operation of opening → closing) of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the ordinary electric accessory The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (second main game start port electric accessory B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary and the ball is ejected. It is designed so that it does not differ significantly from the design.

Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1302, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the first main game start port entry information from the first main game start port entry detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the first main game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10, to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

The winning / failing lottery random number may be composed of one random number or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. As random numbers generated by two or more random numbers, a CPU built-in random number updated based on the CPU clock or an external clock and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) updated by timer interrupt processing are provided, both of which are provided. You may use the result of calculation (for example, addition) of.

Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entry information from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (particularly the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the ninth embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning / failing lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random numbers in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (hold generation command) to the effect that the second main game random number has been acquired to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). If No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {processes of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). Process}.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if the hold comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that draws in parallel).

Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 163. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the current symbol variation ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining hold information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and refers to the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table (second main game winning / failing lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and the main game symbol winning / failing result and the first A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 165 (main game symbol 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the ninth embodiment, when a big hit is won, among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, and 10R for 7A, 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May}.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and refers to the main game symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are determined in the RAM area of the main control board M. Temporarily store in, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 165 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this figure, in the ninth embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value can be determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. It is configured. For example, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit for a certain random number value, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction). In the game state), it is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short can be easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side. When is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game side to hold the game by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 164. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In addition, even if No in step 1506, step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). As described above, in this example, the remaining time reduction number (the remaining symbol variation number in which the time shortening game state ends depending on the symbol variation end number after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, the set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes a plurality of times) is set in step 1614. Next, in step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make the first large winning opening. The winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, the second winning opening C20) is inserted into the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (10 balls). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and determines the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening. ) Has passed or not. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). 1st big winning opening C10 (or 2nd big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

In this example, the maximum number of winnings of the game balls set on the program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached. Controls to close the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) immediately, and prevents the winning of the game ball exceeding the maximum number of winnings, while the ball is squeezed (large). Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to unforeseen circumstances such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening, the specified conditions (within the specified period after closing) Only in the case, the prizes exceeding the maximum number of prizes are treated as valid prizes.

More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, and when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is won in the first big winning opening C10 in the first round, the first The first round will be completed, but in the situation where 9 game balls have entered the 1st prize opening C10 in the 1st round, the 10th ball and 11 will enter the 1st prize opening C10. Even if the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) at which the first round ends due to the occurrence of the balls entering the ball substantially at the same time enters the first large winning opening C10. It is configured to pay out the prize balls with the winning as valid. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the large winning opening are closed and the large winning opening is executed in real time so as to prevent excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum number of winnings). Is closed, and structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less throughout one unit game, and is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the large winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately, and after the maximum opening time elapses, the winning of the game ball is blocked, while the ball Even if a prize is won after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to an unforeseen situation such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the large winning opening), the specified conditions (after closing) Only within a predetermined period), the prize is treated as a valid prize.

More specifically, as an opening mode of the big winning opening when executing one round in the big hit, "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → depending on the type of big hit and the number of unit games (number of execution rounds)". One of multiple operation patterns such as "14.5 seconds open → close", "29.5 seconds open → close", etc. is set, but the big prize opening is set regardless of the operation pattern. It is configured so that the total opening time is 30 seconds or less, the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the big winning opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing process of the big winning opening. Even if the ball is entered, the prize ball is paid out with the winning valid within the valid period (about 1000 ms after the closing process of the large winning opening). On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) of the big prize opening are closed by executing the closing process and closing the big prize opening in real time so as to suppress the winning after the lapse of the maximum opening time. However, structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured so as not to be disadvantageous to the player while suppressing the game performance from being different from the ball ejection design value.

Next, FIG. 168 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 167. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, and in this example, " 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B ") is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, if No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability variable jackpot symbol, which is the jackpot symbol that shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the special game, is the stop symbol, in this example, "4A". (In the case of "4B"), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Further, in this example, the electric support game state (time for opening the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory, time until opening, the number of times of opening, etc., and the ordinary electric accessory are activated only based on the end of the big hit. It is a state in which the probability that the combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed is changed so as to facilitate winning, and it may be referred to as a time-shortened game state or an auxiliary game time-shortened game state). The state is until the main game symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (predetermined time of the main game symbol), except during the probability fluctuation of the special symbol (when the probability variation game state). Limited to (until the end of the fluctuation). Furthermore, the number of game balls acquired in combination with the winning of other winning openings is approximately the same as the number of fired game balls (the ball output rate does not exceed 1) or less. The ball ejection design in the state (arrangement of each winning opening, the operation content of the ordinary electric accessory, the hit probability of the auxiliary game symbol, etc. is designed), and the ball ejection performance in the electric support game state is the ball ejection performance of the big hit game. It is designed not to be higher than the performance. With this configuration, the game related to the main game symbol and the game related to the auxiliary game symbol become a master-slave relationship in the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time saving flag, auxiliary game time saving flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 170 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. The same applies when the term "consecutively specified number of times" is used). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). .. Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 171 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and the error type information (control command in step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error canceling condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the information that the error has been cleared (control command transmission process in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). In addition, even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000).

Next, FIG. 172 is a flowchart of the emission control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. 146. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply error (BIT1). Get the error flag. As for BIT0 indicating the communication state, if it is "0000000000B", it indicates normality, and if it is "00000001B", it indicates an abnormality. In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, "0000000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates an abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the emission permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a launch permission signal, and if it is "00000000000B", it indicates an error (abnormality), and if it is "001000000B", it indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-8). Here, the output port is, for example, BIT0 is digit 1 bit data, BIT1 is digit 2 bit data, BIT2 is digit 3 bit data, BIT3 is digit 4 bit data, BIT4 is digit 5 bit data, and BIT5 is launch permission signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as a production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

Next, FIG. 173 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 146. First, in step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, connects to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal plate G according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Game state information output terminal for outputting information related to specific game state, special game state, etc., error information for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the ninth embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start port is won, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the door is running, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. ing. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal. The plate G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. I'm not. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and a pair of light emitting units are used. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, the light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC, so that the external relay terminal board G It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for a special symbol fixed number of times). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal plate according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures at the time of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed as long as the concept of this example is not significantly deviated. Keep it.

First, there are other signals; the preliminary signal that outputs that it is always off; from any timing after the power is turned on {for example, (a) main control board side main process execution start in FIG. 145}. It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. It should be noted that the signal is a signal that is used or not depending on the developed model (complexity of game playability).

Next, it is a signal of the IN / OUT section; the number of game balls that have entered all the entry ports (including the out ports) arranged on the game area D30 (≈ the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area D30). ) Is output; the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation counter MJ11c-C90, but may be the value of the ball entry counter MJ10c). Is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds each time it reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, the signal in charge of IN / OUT; the signal for outputting the number of game balls paid out by the game machine; every time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor KE10s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10). A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the glass door of the game machine (a frame body with a transparent plate attached, for example, the glass door D18) is being opened; is the door unit open detection. When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door opening flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, it is on. → After turning off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the front frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the gaming board is mounted, for example, the front frame unit D14) is open; is the front frame unit. When the open detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame opening flag is turned on in step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, it is turned on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame opening flag is on), it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, After changing from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Next, the signal of the unit monitoring system; the signal that outputs that the saucer frame of the gaming machine (the frame body on which the ball saucer is attached and the ball plate unit D17) is open; is the ball plate unit open detection sensor. When D20s changes from off to on {* However, after changing from off to on, the continuous on for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) may be the output timing}; the detection sensor is on. During the period, it is a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, after changing from on to off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

Here, the signals of the above three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal depending on the configuration between the units. In that case, the ON signal may be continuously output while any of the open detection sensors is ON. Further, the openness detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH side (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH). Because bidirectional communication is possible).

Next, the signal of the symbol fluctuation system; the signal that outputs the number of symbol fluctuations for all the symbol fluctuations that trigger the opening of the big winning opening (attacker); the first main game symbol or the second main When the variable display of the game symbol ends (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424) {* When the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends after the variable display ends (for example) Alternatively, when it is started, when it is in the period), it may be set as the output timing}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured so that the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period. Further, the signal may be output during a period during which the fluctuation fixed time of the main game symbol is set.

Next, it is a signal of the symbol fluctuation system; a part of the symbol fluctuation that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker) (for example, the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side) is targeted, and the number of symbol fluctuations is output. The signal to be output is; when the variation display of the second main game symbol is completed (for example, when the changing flag is turned on → off in step 1424 in the second main game symbol display process) {* Note that the variation display The output timing may be when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed ends (or starts, or is in the period) after the end of}; a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.5 seconds. Is. It is preferable that the output period is configured so that the variable display period of the second main game symbol is shorter than the shortest possible period.

Next, the signal of the big hit system; the signal that outputs that the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory); when the special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on, but in step 1432, the condition device operation flag may be turned off → on.) {* Before the start demo period starts, The output timing may be during the period and after the end}; During the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is on), the on signal is always output. This is the signal to be output.

Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; during the period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the continuous operation of the accessory), and the symbol change that triggers the opening of the big winning opening (attacker). The signal that outputs that the time reduction game is in progress (the fluctuation time reduction function is in operation) is: When the special game is started (for example, in step 1606, when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned off → on). Or, when the condition device operation flag is turned off → on in step 1432, and when the time reduction game is started (for example, when the main game time reduction flag is turned off → on in step 1708), and / or In step 1710, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off → on); during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the accessory continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation flag is on). , And, during the period during which the time reduction game is being executed (for example, during the period during which the main game time reduction flag and / or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), the signal always outputs an on signal.

Next, other signals; output information for uniquely identifying the game machine {* game machine manufacturer identification code (2 bytes), game machine model name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU The unique information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) of the above is output in order} The signal is; at any timing after the power is turned on {for example, (a) main control board side main process execution start in FIG. 145} (for example, power supply). (Approximately 10 seconds after input); The unique information is divided into 1 frame (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit), and the serial transmission method (step synchronization, step synchronization, It is a signal to be output until all are output at 200 bps). It is preferable that the signal type (rated voltage, rated current) is different from that of other signal types.

Next, the IN / OUT signal; the signal that outputs the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the game machine; When detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out is totaled, and each time the total number of prize balls (for example, the value of the prize ball counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); in 0.1 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds after outputting an on signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after the elapse of a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and the output is waiting for the next output. May be configured to start output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period described above has not elapsed).

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine; the power is turned on with the RAM initialization operation (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002). It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds from an arbitrary timing after {after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) elapses after the power is turned on}. The output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system or the winning detection system.

Next, it is a security signal; a period other than the period during which the large winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the operation of the special electric accessory to the lapse of a predetermined period after the operation is completed) {for example, the first (second) ) Outputs that a ball has been detected in the big winning opening (attacker, for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) during the period when the flag is off during the valid period of the big winning opening}. The signal to be output is large except during the execution period of each round (including the discharge waiting period and the inter-round period) during the special game {for example, the period during which the flag is off during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening}. When the entry sensor of the winning opening detects the entry of a game ball (for example, when it is determined as No in step 2305); after outputting the on signal for 0.2 seconds, for 0.2 seconds. It is a signal that outputs an off signal. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires.

Next, there is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there was a magnet sensor error (the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism); when the signal from the magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, when the illegal magnetometer detection flag is turned off → on in step 1914) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is satisfied. None}; A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave); when the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on (for example, When the illegal radio wave detection flag is turned off → on in step 1904) {* However, if it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied} A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods are configured so that they cannot overlap.

Next, it is a security signal; a signal that outputs that there is a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH). When the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control board side is turned on (for example, when the information related to the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control board KH is confirmed in step 3215) {* However If it is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after it is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied}; It is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap. Further, a command indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH) side to the main control board (for example, the main control board M) side. The main control board that has received the command may be configured to output a signal.

Next, it is a security signal; illegal entry into each winning opening to be paid out (for example, more than a predetermined number of entries within a predetermined time, the entry detection sensor keeps ON for a predetermined time or longer). , The number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the special game is equal to or greater than the predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, and the number of balls entered exceeds the design value during a certain period of validity of the entry, etc.) The signal that outputs this is; 1. After detecting one ball with the switch for detecting the ball entering each winning opening, the event of detecting one ball again within the period specified for each winning opening is determined in total. If it occurs more than once, and 2. 2. When the switch for detecting the entry into each winning opening continues to detect the entry for a predetermined period, and 3. When the number of balls entered by the ball entry sensor to the big winning opening exceeds the specified number (for example, 160) during the execution of a special game (for example, 16 round jackpot). When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied; it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, in the case of 3 above, it is preferable to make the specified number different according to the execution content of the special game (Example 1: When the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, the specified number = 100. Example 2: If the big winning opening is only short-opened, the above 3 does not apply).

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, illegal winning ... Grand prize opening (attacker) During a period other than the period during which the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), a predetermined number (5) or more of balls have been detected in the large winning opening (attacker), or the normal electric accessory cannot be released. During the period, the number of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory was detected in a predetermined number (5) or more. Radio wave sensor error: A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error: The proximity sensor provided on the game board detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: The signal that outputs that the sensor that detects the approach of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, or the sensor is not connected, etc.} is; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the fraudulent activity (illegal winning 1, radio wave sensor error) is detected, and 3. When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied when the fraudulent activity (board switch error, magnet sensor error) is detected; in the case of 1 above, an on signal is output for the first period (30 seconds). In the case of 2 above, an on-signal is output over a second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, an on-signal is output over a third period (during detection of each fraudulent activity). It is a signal. When the output periods overlap, all the output periods are overlapped, and the on-signal output is maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2.

Next, it is a security signal; that the RAM initialization operation was performed on the gaming machine, and the fraudulent activity that can be detected by the gaming machine {for example, an abnormal winning error ... a big winning opening (attacker) During the period other than the period when the special electric accessory can be opened (when the special electric accessory is activated), the ball is detected in the large winning opening (attacker), and the normal electric accessory cannot be opened (predetermined immediately after closing). In (excluding the period), the entry into the ordinary electric accessory was detected, etc. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Discharge error: The number of balls entered by the switch for detecting the entry of balls into each entry port for which the prize ball is to be paid out, and the switch for confirming entry of balls downstream from the switch (especially in the figure). Although not shown, it is a switch through which a game ball that has entered each entry port passes, and is detected by one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting entry into each entry port). The signal that outputs that the difference from the number of incoming balls exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc.} is performed; 1. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and 2. When the above fraudulent activity (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error) is detected, and 3. When the fraudulent activity (emission error) is detected; in the cases 1 and 2, the on signal is output for 0.2 seconds, and then the off signal is output for 0.2 seconds. In this case, it is a signal that outputs an on signal until the next time 1 is satisfied. If the output periods overlap (other than 3 above), the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, even during the output period according to the above 1 and 2, the output of the on signal is maintained at the time when the output timing according to the above 3 is reached, and the output according to the above 1 and 2 is maintained during the output period according to the above 3. It is configured to maintain the on-signal output even when the timing comes.

Next, the signal of the winning detection system; the signal that outputs the number of times the ball has been entered into each starting port for all the starting ports related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large winning opening (attacker); 1 When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the entry into the main game start port, and the second main game start port (one equipped with an electric accessory, an electric accessory) When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering (one is not equipped with) (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned off → on in step 2206) Alternatively, in step 2226, when the second main game start flag is set from off to on); it is a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output is waited until the output period of one signal output this time expires. Further, when an illegal entry into the second main game start port (the one on which the electric accessory is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry.

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 186.

First, FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process, which will be described later, with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error processing described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the game machine according to the ninth embodiment transmits / receives commands / information to / from the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission / reception control means 3100 that controls control, an error control means 3200 that controls errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of games that receive prize ball payout commands and ball lending commands. It has a payout control means 3300 that executes a payout process of balls. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and information to the main control board M and the card unit R. It has a transmission control means 3120 that controls control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 detected an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of the error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality that controls the error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detecting a payout abnormality that controls the error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected. Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection that controls control, error control means 3260 at the time of payout motor abnormality detection that controls error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. An error control means 3270 for detecting a payout stop abnormality that controls the error control when the error is made, a ball bite error generation timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, and a ball bite error generation timer 3200t. It also has a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times that the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of the excess prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval related to the prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310 temporarily stores the payout-related state (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress or whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred), and the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. The payout counter 3312, in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set during the payout process, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. When this is performed, the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator and the predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting counter 3315 for measuring the time (time / motor pause time), and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the ninth embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment type. It is also possible to configure using the timer of. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 176 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. 175. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes the payout abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 177 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds the threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that is turned on when this is done (delivery motor operation error). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 (increments) the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). To do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 4120 (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 178 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold value. Turn on the flag that indicates that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and when an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310, and transfers the excess payout number to the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excess payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout error detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process (step 4140). Move to error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, (1) an abnormality occurs in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out). Or, if an abnormality has occurred in which the number of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 is small (ball shortage) has occurred, and if an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, , Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag to be turned on when a situation is detected in which the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number to be paid out under the situation where it is determined that the payout is made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for generating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for generating the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example in which a ball out abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are used. An example may be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of the presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality occurs. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the condition for resolving the abnormal ball breakage or the shortage of the ball is not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the above-mentioned condition for generating the abnormal ball shortage or the shortage of the ball is unsatisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 continuously excites a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms during normal operation) and balls. The passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low as compared with the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing the payout operation for one ball at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited for. An example may be given in which a time is provided and the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 1 in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for passing the ball to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 180 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball biting. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in the standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the motor error described later and providing a waiting time for resolving the motor error within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the number of predetermined steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example may be mentioned in which the number is set to the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is switched between an excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example,). 6ms) is set. Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 181 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. 176. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of the error and to continue the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process are communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s and an abnormality of the saucer (upper plate) being full. First, in step 4191-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality sets the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t with an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) and starts the error control means. The process proceeds to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality requiring payout stop sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and starts it. The process proceeds to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality detects a flag related to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a as an error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, even if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when a payout stop abnormality is detected has a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer. It is determined whether or not (yes, etc.) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4196- Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198. Move to -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error, the payout motor operation error, the game ball detection when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error, and the switch non-passing error) are turned off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the saucer are full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, the payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is paused, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then the next step. (Processing in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 182 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information reception process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. 175. Here, the first half of the flow is the information reception process from the main control board M (and the set processing of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), and the second half of the flow is the information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the set process of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is the payout state flag temporary storage means. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, and the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when (if it is inside). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize balls. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. In addition, even if No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" means that when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. Is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the effect that the prize ball payout is completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start).・ At the start of motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive)}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is a process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of the motor drive and the like are determined in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 182) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of pieces are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step Move to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the number of payouts scheduled in the unit payout operation (that is, the number of payouts scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the exciting stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between an excitation method for normal operation (for example, a well-known 2-2-phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation executing flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / prize). (At the end of ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag is a case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time elapses ( It is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). If Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all the planned payouts by the current unit payout operation have been paid out). Whether or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor and the like is executed again without triggering the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that not all of the planned number of pieces to be paid out by the unit payout operation this time has been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error will be detected.

Next, FIG. 184 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is an end process when the drive termination of all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed, or all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, the game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain from the motor drive termination process, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 183. It is determined whether or not all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the dormant state of the stepping motor (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, it is continuously excited to the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and shifts to step 4420. In addition, even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, to explain the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. In addition, even if No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an incoming ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the incoming ball of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of balls entered may be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection processing.

Next, to explain the prize ball payout end process, first, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the sensor detects as many game balls as the number of game balls related to the payout even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432. The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when the payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, even if No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

Next, in step 4435 and step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the prize ball payout flag and turn on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and the number of overpayments is based on the count value (for example, if the counter value is “-3”, the number of overpayments is “3”). Is temporarily stored in the payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (when the motor drive is executed) in step 4500}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500] (When driving the motor)}. In this example, excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the motor for payout is finished. When a predetermined time (for example, a detection waiting time sufficient for the game ball paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed, the overpayment is detected (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0). It may be configured to be able to execute (determination of whether or not) (that is, overpayment is an unforeseen situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out is paid out. This unforeseen situation, which means that it has occurred and is extremely unlikely to occur in terms of design, means that one of the payout mechanisms has a problem, or that fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. It means that it is likely to have been done).

On the other hand, if No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, it is predetermined after the payout operation is completed). If the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected even after the waiting time for passing the ball has passed, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. Without limitation, it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor drive as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in step 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. Turn on and move to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 2400 (when the motor is driven)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s in step 4470. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Next, FIG. 185 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor drive is executed) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. 175. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 183), and corresponds to the predetermined number of step counters. A flag that turns off when all excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence / absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error processing in step 4600). In addition, even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (processing at the time of motor error in step 4600), and if No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process when a motor error occurs in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 186 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. 175. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the hibernate state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 185, after detecting whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotation position, step-out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the hibernate state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 184). See 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in step 4100).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 193. First, FIG. 187 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the game machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes the initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → When the RAM on the sub control board S side is initialized and various information commands are received → The effect-related information at the time of power failure is reset to the RAM on the sub control board S side). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (f) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the instruction image display control process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative processing routine. To do.

As described above, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3E is a process at the time of interruption of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal (this) of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM. In the example, it is the processing flow (e) when it is connected to the NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt process. Returns to the processing that was being executed in.

Next, FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the instruction image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2104, the process proceeds to step 2108. On the other hand, if No in step 2102 or step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S measures the ball entering the left-handed instruction counter HSc (the ball is easily entered into the ball-entry port when right-handed is executed). When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the left-handed strike is not executed in the situation where the game should be advanced by the left-handed strike, and the left-handed strike instruction image is displayed.) The counter value of is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2112, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the left-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2115, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc to zero, and proceeds to the process of step 2116. On the other hand, even if No in step 2108 or step 2112, the process proceeds to step 2116. Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the uppermost row is an image diagram of the left-handed instruction image. The left-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 that prompts the player to execute the left-handed player, and is a situation of the game in which the left-handed player should be executed. The special game is not executed and the non-time is shortened. It is configured to display a left-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (5 seconds) when it is determined that right-handed hitting is being executed in the game state (when three balls are entered into the auxiliary game starting port H10). When the ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10, 1 is added to the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc, but when the ball enters the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the left-handed instruction counter HSc increases or decreases. It is configured not to.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2116, the process proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, if No in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a right-handed instruction counter MSc (a counter that measures the entry into the ball entry port, which is easy to enter when the left-handed hit is executed. When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the right-handed hit is not executed in the situation where the game should be advanced by the right-handed hit, and the right-handed hit instruction image is displayed.) Clear the counter value to zero. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first main game start port entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2122, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc. Next, in step 2126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2126, in step 2128, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the right-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2129, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2122 and step 2126, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the second row is an image diagram of the right-handed instruction image. The right-handed instruction image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 that prompts the player to execute the right-handed hit, and is in the state of the game in which the right-handed hit should be executed, during the execution of the special game or in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the left-handed hit is being executed (when three balls are entered into the first main game start opening A10), the right-handed hit instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). The bottom row is an image diagram of a time-saving medium-right-handed image, and since the game proceeds by right-handed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving medium-right-handed image will continue to be displayed in the time-saving game state. (It will continue to be displayed even during the special game). The display area on the effect display device S40 of the time-saving medium-right-handed image and the right-handed instruction image is configured so as not to overlap, and the size of the display area is larger than that of the time-saving medium-right-handed image. (Left-handed and right-handed images are displayed in a relatively large display area for the purpose of warning).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the game ball is hitting right in the non-time reduction game state, when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10, the sub-control board S The CPUSC is configured to count the number of passes and display a left-handed instruction image (for example, "left-handed") when the number of passes reaches a predetermined value (3 balls in this example). There is. Further, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the player is hitting right in the non-time shortened game state, when the game ball passes through the right general winning opening P20, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of passes. Instead, it is configured not to display a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed"). Further, for example, in the case of a left-handed hit during a special game or in a time-reduced game state, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S counts the number of times the ball is entered. When the number of hits reaches a predetermined value (3 balls in this example), a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed") is displayed. In the ninth embodiment, a left-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "left-handed") or a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image called "right-handed") may be referred to as a firing instruction effect. With this configuration, in the situation of the game in which the left-handed hit should be executed (the special game is not being executed and the non-time shortened game state), the player mistakenly executes the right-handed hit. When the game ball that has passed through the game start port H10 enters the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc increases by 2 due to the launch of one game ball, and even unintentional right-handed hits are made. Regardless of this, it is possible to prevent the display related to the alerting from being performed at an unintended frequency such that the left-handed instruction image is frequently displayed. In this example, a left-handed instruction image can be displayed every time the left-handed counter value reaches a multiple of a predetermined value (3 in this example) {the right-handed counter value is a predetermined value (3 in this example). The right-handed instruction image can be displayed each time it reaches a multiple of)}, but it is not limited to this, and left-handed when the left-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example). Display the instruction image {display the right-handed instruction image when the right-handed counter value reaches the predetermined value (3 in this example)}, which is twice or three times the predetermined value (3 in this example). When the counter value is reached, the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) may not be newly displayed. Further, the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) is configured to be erased within a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) from the start of display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed instruction image (right-handed instruction image) is not limited to this. ) Is displayed, and then it is determined that the left-handed (right-handed) is executed (for example, when it is determined that the left-handed is executed, when the game ball enters the first main game starting port A10). Etc., when it is determined that the right-handed hit has been executed, the left-handed hitting instruction image (right-handed hitting instruction) when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10, etc.) or when the game state shifts. The image) may be configured to be erased.

Here, in a situation where the "left-handed instruction image" should be displayed, it is also possible that the hit ball is distributed and fired in both the right side area and the left side area, and the game ball accidentally passes through the auxiliary game start port H10. Be done. Therefore, if the first main game start opening A10 or the left general winning opening P10 arranged on the left side of the game area is won within the predetermined period, in other words, the game is executed by left-handed within the predetermined period. When it can be determined that, the predetermined value is changed (subtracted) or initialized to extend the period until the left-handed instruction image is notified, or the notification method (notification mode) is changed (for example). , Voice notification is not performed, and the warning is changed to a small display). The same process may be executed when displaying the "right-handed instruction image", but in a gaming state in which the "right-handed instruction image" can be displayed, it is extremely unsuitable for the player to perform left-handed hitting. In some cases, it is a specification that gives a profit, and in the case of such a specification, when displaying a "right-handed instruction image", a process of extending the period until notification or changing the notification method (notification mode). It is desirable not to do.

Next, FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2402, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter value (in this example, the maximum number is 4 for the first main game and the maximum number is 4 for the second main game). Add "1". Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the hold information (random value, etc.) transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and proceeds to step 2418. ..

On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter value. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the hold information (random value, etc.) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418. In addition, even if No in step 2410, the process proceeds to step 2418.

Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M lights and displays the same number of hold display images as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700). To do.

Next, FIG. 190 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2704. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is decorated with reference to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table for determining the content of the variation of the design. Stop symbol of the symbol {For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, doublet such as "7, 7, 7", if it is a lost symbol, "1, 3, 5" , Etc.} and the variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2800). Even if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2800).

Next, FIG. 191 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2804. Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2809, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to step 2810.

Next, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2811, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the map variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (sub-sub control in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). It is transmitted to the unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, if No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a decorative symbol based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (display command transmission control in step 2999). In the process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832.

On the other hand, if No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a preview image or a notice image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S and the recording variation time management timer SM21t. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2824, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the image display related to the notice image and the reach image on the effect display device S40 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832. Even if No in step 2824, the process proceeds to step 2832.

Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, receives information from the main control board M side that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). (Determine whether or not it was done). In the case of Yes in step 2832, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmation display command) for the decorative symbol on the effect display device S40 (sub-sub in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). It is transmitted to the control unit SS side). Next, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). Even if No in step 2810 or step 2832, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Next, FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. 187. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag in step 2912. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a jackpot start display on the effect display device S40 (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and proceeds to step 2920. Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to step 2920.

Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds, the number of winnings, and the number of prize balls on the effect display device S40 based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. (It may be executed as needed based on the playability, the type of jackpot, etc.) Set the command. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special in-game effect display control process described later. Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the jackpot end on the effect display device S40 (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2929, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the number of balls entered counter NKc (counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the right general winning opening P20 during the special game) to zero. Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game in-game flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

Next, FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the special in-game effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. 192. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right general winning opening ball entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the right general winning opening ball entry effect (when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the execution of the special game, the effect display device. This is an effect displayed in S40. For example, a command is set to display "+2 GET!") And to add a predetermined number (2 balls in this example) to the number of prize balls to display. Here, in the ninth embodiment, since the right general winning opening P20 is arranged upstream of the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20, the first large winning opening is being executed during the special game. The game ball fired toward C10 and the second big prize opening C20 (the game ball fired by right-handed) is the right general winning opening P20 before entering the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20. It will be possible to enter the ball. With this configuration, in addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game, the right general winning opening P20 is entered. As a result, more game balls can be acquired, and the number of game balls that can be acquired by executing a special game can be increased.

Next, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the ball entry counter NKc, and proceeds to the process of step 3058. Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to step 3058. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the ball entry counter NKc has reached a predetermined value (5 balls in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the lighting mode based on the stopped jackpot symbol with reference to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table (see FIG. 194). Then, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is turned on in the determined lighting mode, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2926). Even if No in step 3058, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2926). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, the right general winning opening entry effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, "" +2 GET! ”), And when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 by a predetermined value (5 balls in this example), the right general winning opening is lit based on the stopped jackpot symbol. It is configured to light the lamp LP10. The right general winning opening ball entry effect, which is executed when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, is not only displayed on the effect display device S40, but also "GET!" By the sound from the speaker D24. It may be configured to output "+2 GET!" On the screen and at the same time output "GET!" By voice. Further, the volume of the sound from the speaker D24 may be provided in a plurality of stages so that the loudness of the volume can indicate the degree of expectation of transition to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game (when the volume is high). If the expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation game state is higher than when the volume is low, or the sound "GET!" That should be output is not output (the output itself is not performed / the sound is output). Expectations for transition to a probability-variable gaming state are relatively high, etc.).

Next, FIG. 194 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table. In the figure, the probabilistic jackpot symbol stop time table referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (5A, 7A, 5B, 7B in this example) that shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state. It is composed of a non-probability change jackpot symbol (4A, 4B in this example) that is referred to when the stopped jackpot symbol shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state. To. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 has five display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and the probability after the big hit is completed. The order from the one with the lowest expectation of transition to the variable game state is "white → blue → green → red → rainbow color". Since "rainbow color" is not selected as the lighting mode when shifting to the non-probability variable gaming state after the big hit ends, when the right general winning opening lamp LP10 lights up in rainbow color, after the big hit ends, It is almost definite to shift to the probability fluctuation game state. The lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is just an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or the distribution of the number is changed. Further, when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during the big hit, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be turned on at the end timing of the big hit, or once. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be lit multiple times during the big hit. Furthermore, even in the same lighting mode, the degree of expectation of transition to the stochastic gaming state differs depending on the transition timing of the lighting mode. Specifically, even in the same "red" mode, the mode changes to the "red" mode at a later timing. It may be set so that the expectation of transition to the probability-variable gaming state is higher than the case where the change is made in the "red" mode at the earlier timing (for example, the distribution of the number is set as such). With this configuration, even if the mode does not change at first and remains "white", if it changes to "red" later, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first change mode is "red". Therefore, it is possible to continuously give a feeling of expectation. Of course, on the contrary, it is possible to set the reliability to be higher when the change is made at an earlier timing, and in this case, it is possible to expect a larger change at an earlier timing.

<10th Embodiment>
As a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine applicable to this example, a configuration having a specific area in the large winning opening will be described in detail below as a tenth embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 195, the structures of the second special winning opening C20 and the first large winning opening C10 in the tenth embodiment will be described in detail. First, inside the second large winning opening C20, roughly, the distribution winning detection device 2221, the specific area C22, the shielding member 2224a, the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 and the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 are provided. Inside the first large winning opening C10, a normal winning detection device 2121 is roughly provided. Hereinafter, the structure of these large winning openings will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 195, the second major winning opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which has a horizontally rectangular shape and is located above the first large winning opening C10 (as viewed from the player). As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 has a distribution winning detection device 2221 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a distribution electric accessory 2222, a specific area C22, and a specific area C22. A shielding member 2224a that shields the entry of the game ball, a specific area entry detection device 2224-1 for detecting the entry of the game ball into a specific area, and a discharge ball detection device 2224 for detecting the ejection ball. -2 and. Here, the distribution winning detection device 2221 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and generates distribution large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. .. The distribution electric accessory 2222 changes the second large winning opening C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. The specific area C22 is a determinant of the game state after the end of the special game depending on the presence or absence of the game ball entering, and when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), the game ball enters the specific area C22. It is possible (or easy), and when the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advanced state), it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. Further, the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. Further, since the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 is configured to pass through either the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. The specific area entry detection device 2224-1 also serves as a sensor for detecting the ejection ball (at the time of entry, the ejection ball entry information is also generated). The discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is a sensor that detects a game ball that has been ejected without entering the specific area C22 after entering the second major winning opening C20, and the ejection ball insertion indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. Generate sphere information. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (tilted attacker). ), But it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located below the two major winning openings C20 (as seen from the player). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a normal winning detection device 2121 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a normal electric accessory 2122. Here, the normal winning detection device 2121 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and generates normal large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The normal electric accessory 2122 changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. In the ninth embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed between a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (tilted attacker). ), But it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

The flow path direction of the game ball of the distribution winning detection device 2221, the distribution flow path 132, the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, the discharge ball detection device 2224-2, the normal prize detection device 2121 and the normal flow path 134. It is desirable that one game ball can smoothly pass through the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the cross section, but two game balls cannot (or are difficult) to pass through. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where a plurality of game balls are clogged in the flow path (distribution flow path 132, normal flow path 134) and cannot flow down.

In addition, since the two major winning openings are approximately close to each other, the player can enter the same location even if either the second major winning opening C20 or the first major winning opening C10 is in an easy-to-enter state during a special game. Therefore, it is possible to play the game without changing the launch strength of the game ball. In this case, since it is easy for the player to visually recognize which of the major winning openings is in the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to execute the game with less discomfort and less burden on the player.

Further, as will be described later, the game ball is sandwiched between the first large winning opening C10 by placing the second large winning opening C20 on the first large winning opening C10, where the possibility of entering the ball is greatly related to the profit of the player. Even if it is not closed due to an accident such as (when blocking the flow of the game ball below the first prize opening C10), if the second prize opening C20 is opened, the game ball can be entered. Become. Further, in this example, since the specific area C22 and the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 (exhaust ball detection device 2224-2) are provided below the distribution winning detection device 2221, the second large winning opening C20 It is more space-saving to provide the above the first prize opening C10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the flow mode of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20 and first large winning opening C10) according to the ninth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening C20 passes through the distribution winning detection device 2221, flows down the distribution flow path 132, and is provided in the specific area C22. It will pass through either 1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. When the shielding member 2224a is in the closed state (advanced state), the flowing game balls cannot pass through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, and all pass through the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. It will be. On the other hand, when the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), the flowing game ball passes through the specific region entry detection device 2224-1 due to the shape of the distribution flow path 132. When the shielding member 2224a is in the open state (evacuated state), it is desirable that all the game balls that have flowed down pass through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 (because the interests of the player are not impaired). .. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the shape of the distribution flow path 132 (particularly, the shape of the right side surface of the distribution flow path) so that the flowing game ball can easily pass through the specific region entry detection device 2224-1. As will be described later, in the ninth embodiment, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 and the distribution winning detection device 2221 have passed. Whether or not the ejection ball is abnormal is determined by whether or not the number of game balls is equal.

On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening C10 passes through the normal winning detection device 2121 and flows down the normal flow path 134 and is discharged. A device for detecting an ejected ball is not provided in the first prize opening C10.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a specific region C22 in which the gaming ball can enter inside the second special winning opening C20. In addition, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has a configuration in which a gaming ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, so that the gaming machine shifts to the probability-variable gaming center state after the completion of the special game (so-called ball accuracy). Machine).

Next, FIG. 196 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 146 in the tenth embodiment. After determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number / winning / failing lottery result. Determine the variation mode of the symbol.

Here, FIG. 197 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. Among the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols that facilitate the entry of the game ball into the specific area are "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", and the specific area C22. The main game symbol on which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter is "2A".

Next, FIG. 198 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the tenth embodiment. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in step 1611 (second). It is determined whether or not the currently executed round is the distribution game execution round (2nd R, 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612.

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long open symbol for the stopped main game symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot symbol that opens the time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M specifies a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds, which is specified as an opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the ball enters the region C22 is deterministic), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a short open pattern as an open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -N (for example, an opening pattern designed to open the specific region C22 for 0.1 seconds and to make the non-ball entering the specific region C22 deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the tenth embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main game The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more than the big hit on the first main game side. The big hit is configured so that the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round, that is, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of the big hit.

Next, in step 1860, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second large winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation transition reservation flag and proceeds to step 1878. If No is set in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 198 in the tenth embodiment. At the time of executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1652 and step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability variation number counter MP51c to a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M tells the time reduction counter MP52c a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times, but this is Is not limited. A value of A or less is preferable for a predetermined number of times), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the tenth embodiment, regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, the game is configured to shift to the time-shortened game state after the end of the special game. Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-shortened game state after the special game is the same as the number of fluctuations in the probability-variable game state A. (80 times in this example), and if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in which the time is shortened after the special game is different from the predetermined number of times A (small). ) The predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). As a result, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22 during the special game that facilitates entry into the specific area C22, a certain degree of advantageous period can be provided, and if the ball does not pass through the specific area C22. It can be expected to deter the decline in interest. Further, as for the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time-reduced game state, the three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times A. It is configured to refer to the main game table 3-2 in the time-reduced game state of a predetermined number of times B, and to refer to a table having a different effect content. It should be noted that the configuration is applied regardless of whether the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the special game is executed. The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22, etc.). Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). If the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the jackpot symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 201 is an example of the effect content determination table in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability-variable game state, but the non-probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state ( 50 fluctuations). In that case, the production content will be decided by referring to the table. Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the number of fluctuations, the content of the effect, the mode of variation, the configuration of the table, and the like.

As described above, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the tenth embodiment (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-changing gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-changing gaming state without entering a ball By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. Can be done. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is long open, entry into the specific area C22). It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device S40 or the effect display device S40 is used at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for effect, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the effect display device S40). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, a movable object for production is displaced from an initial position to a position where production is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}. In addition, when executing the effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, when a special game is won in a specific game state (for example, a probability fluctuation game state) or a specific special symbol (big hit symbol). ) Is won, and in a special game in which an open pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 is executed is executed, the image drawn with "V" is displayed conservatively (for example). In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game may be performed in which the opening pattern designed so that the entry into the specific area C22 is almost definite, such as (displayed small), is performed (entry into the specific area C22 in the special game). (In a situation where the ball ease is unknown), then when an opening pattern designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 substantially deterministic is executed, the ball is entered into the specific area C22. It is also preferable to execute an effect different from the effect of notifying the effect, whereby the effect can be executed with a priority as required.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for the first time (preferably less than or less than one firing interval of the game ball), and a predetermined after opening for the first time. It has a second unit game, which can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time, after the time is closed. By configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable in this way, the probability is high even after the opening operation of the first time, which has a low expectation for the transition to the probability fluctuation, is completed. It is possible to have the possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which has a high expectation for the fluctuation transition, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or more than one firing interval of the game ball or more than one firing interval in order to secure the ball entering the specific area (half of the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game). It is more preferable that the ball is at least one shot interval) or more, and it is particularly preferable that it is at least (the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

As described above, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game according to the tenth embodiment (specific area). In a gaming machine (so-called ball-probability type gaming machine) that shifts to the probability-changing gaming state with a ball entering and does not shift to the probability-changing gaming state without entering a ball By making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability-variable gaming state, an appropriate effect is executed according to the profit aspect of the player. Can be done. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the distribution game, a special effect (an effect that encourages whether or not the second large winning opening C20 is long open, entry into the specific area C22). It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the ball is made, an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, etc.) {The execution mode is not particularly limited, but for example. In the case of an effect of notifying that the ball has entered the specific area C22, the effect display device S40 or the effect display device S40 is used at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable body accessory for effect, a light guide plate, etc.) is configured to execute the notification (for example, on the effect display device S40). An image drawn as "V" is displayed, a movable object for production is displaced from an initial position to a position where production is possible, or an image is displayed on the light guide plate by irradiating the light guide plate with light. Make it emerge, etc.)}.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit that can be opened for the first time (preferably, an opening time in which one or more game balls can enter but is relatively short). It has a game and a second unit game that can be opened (or opened / closed) again for a second time longer than the first time after being closed for a predetermined time after being opened for the first time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time when the expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation game state is low is completed. , It is possible to have a possibility that the opening operation of the second time, which is highly expected to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state, is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is configured so that a plurality of game balls can easily enter the second large winning opening C20 in order to secure the entry into the specific area C22. It is more preferable that it is more than or equal to (half the maximum number of winnings in a round) x (one firing interval of a game ball) or more, and more than or more than (the maximum number of winnings in a round) x (one firing interval of a game ball) It is particularly preferable to have.

In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called ball pachinko machine) that can shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, ( 1) Only one large winning opening is provided, and the normal round (a round in which entry into the specific area C22 is invalid) and the distribution game execution round (entry into the specific area C22) are provided at the one large winning opening. (2) A large winning opening A and a large winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the large winning opening A, and the large winning opening B is executed. (3) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top). A normal round is executed at the large winning opening A, a distribution game execution round is executed at the large winning opening B, and the entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. , (4) The large winning opening A and the large winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to overlap each other (the large winning opening B is on the top), and the large winning opening A is used for a normal round. Is executed, the distribution game execution round is executed at the large winning opening B, and the game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and the shielding member is provided. When the member is in the open state, it becomes easy to enter the specific area C22, and when the shielding member is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Example 1 of change from the 10th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, a configuration of a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game has been illustrated. The configuration is not limited to 10 embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from the tenth embodiment will be referred to as a modification 1 from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment will be described in detail below.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like.

First, FIG. 202 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The number of prize balls in the first main game start port A10 is three, the number of prize balls in the second main game start port B10 is one, and the number of prize balls in the first large prize opening C10 is fifteen. The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening C20 is 13, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening is 10. As described above, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second large winning opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first large winning opening C10.

Next, FIG. 203 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 163 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1) and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1411. When the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

Further, after turning on the condition device operation flag in step 1440, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol with a limit frequency jackpot symbol (time reduction after the jackpot ends). It is a jackpot symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the game state ends, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Set and proceed to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 204 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 203 in the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol ( The fluctuation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). On the other hand, if No in step 1451-1, in step 1451-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (G = 21). To do. When the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol. (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413). If No in step 1451-4, the process proceeds to step 1451-2, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3. As described above, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, in the final variation of the time shortening gaming state, when the variation mode is determined depending on the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state. The table referenced in is different. In other words, the final symbol of the time-shortened game state after the end of the jackpot varies depending on whether the game ball is entered in the specific area C22 or not during the execution of the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B". It is configured so that the table referred to when determining the variation mode is different. If No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M relates to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413). Further, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot related to the above-mentioned limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, and the time reduction counter MP52c Is set to 80 times. Because of this configuration, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time shortened gaming state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. In such a state, by configuring to determine the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the "design" is displayed. The transition is made in the order of "time reduction game state for 80 fluctuations → limited frequency state for 20 symbol fluctuations (non-time reduction game state)". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is "limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited" in the period of 80 symbol fluctuations. (Transition to frequency table A3)), and after the time-reduced gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is the "limited frequency" during the period of 20 symbol fluctuations. (Only table B1), that is, the limited frequency state may be configured so as not to straddle different gaming states. If the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, 80 times is set in the time reduction counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B". This is done, and 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, that is, the game is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the time saving game state. If a big hit is made when the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the consecutive villas, and the above-mentioned consecutive villa count counter value may be added (time reduction game state). Even if it is finished, if you win the jackpot in a limited frequency state, you can consider it as a jackpot of the consecutive villas). Not limited to this, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to the "7B", the time reduction counter MP52c is displayed. 80 times are set and 100 times are set in the limited frequency counter, while 50 times are set in the time reduction counter MP52c and 70 times are set in the limited frequency counter when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined with reference to the limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final variation. The content of the limited frequency table 3 does not depend on the number of holds, and may be configured so that a uniform fluctuation time of 7 seconds is determined in both cases of hit and loss. In addition, when the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game when the ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B". Limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation When the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the "7B", the limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a configuration, the effect content and the effect tendency in the final variation in the time-saving game state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 205 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are that the combination of the main game symbols that are big hits is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbol in which the special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the specific area is executed is "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B" and is specified. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area is executed is "4A". In addition, when the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is completed, the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state of 80 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). When the 80-time symbol change is completed, the process shifts to the limited frequency state of the 20-time symbol change (the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the case of the limited frequency state with reference to the limited frequency table 2, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the result of the winning or losing lottery. In addition, the final change in the time-shortening game state (80th change after the end of the big hit) that shifts when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" ends is specified during the execution of the "7B". When there is a ball entering the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, while when there is no ball entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the "7B", it is mainly. It is configured to determine the variation mode with reference to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the minimum variation time in the loss of the main game table 3). .. The limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced game state, but the final variation in the time-reduced game state is the probability-variable game state and the non-probability-variable game. Even if the effect content in the final variation is different from that in the state, that is, the effect content in the final variation is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Good. For example, when the limited frequency table 1 in which the symbol changes for a relatively long time is referred to, it is possible to incite whether the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state end or become a big hit due to the symbol change. You may perform the production.

Next, FIG. 206 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 146 in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the changes from the tenth embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), that is, sub in step 1608. After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed. It is determined whether or not the round to be played is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

Further, in the case of the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the end demo execution permission flag (when it is turned on, the special game end demo). Turn on the flag that will start the time) and move to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). In addition, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 206 in the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. First, the change from the tenth embodiment is step 1803 (second variation 1), that is, if the end demo running flag is off in step 1802, in step 1803 (second variation 1). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the specific area C22 in the special game. In step 1803 (second variation 1), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1806, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1808. As described above, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the special game end demo time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a sphere. The conditions under which the special game end demo time differs are not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of a big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is in the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state, and (2) it differs depending on whether it is in the time-shortening gaming state or the non-time-shortening gaming state. 3) Probability fluctuating game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, (4) Probability-variable game state and time-shortening game state, probability-variable game state and non-time-shortening game state, non-probability-variable game state and time-saving game state, and non-probability-variable game state and It may be configured so that it differs from the non-time reduction gaming state in some combinations.

Further, in this example, regarding the special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) a special game in which the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) The special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) The special game end demonstration time when the special game is won in the time shortened game state and the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game is the second period ( 1 second), (4) When the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and the ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the third period (3 seconds). As described above, it may be configured such that "second period <third period <first period". It should be noted that such a configuration is preferably applied to the special game won in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state or the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. As a specific example of the effect executed during the special game end demo time, in the first period, the effect of notifying the transition to the probability-variable game state and forgetting to remove the IC card used for lending the game ball. In the third period, the game will shift to a non-probability variable game state and a time-saving game state. An effect of notifying and an effect of calling attention to forgetting to remove the IC card are executed, and in the second period, an effect of notifying that the probability fluctuation game state (consecutive villa state) will continue is executed. In this way, the effect to be executed may be different depending on the length of the special game end demo time. In addition, comparing the length of the special game end demo time for each situation, the special game end demo time when the non-probability variable game state is before the start of the special game and the probability variable game state is after the end of the special game (first hit). Is 10 seconds, the special game end demo time is 3 seconds when the game is in the non-probability variable game state and the time is shortened after the special game ends, the probability fluctuates game state before the special game starts, and the probability fluctuates after the special game ends. It may be configured so that the special game end demo time is 1 second in the case of a game state (continuation of consecutive villas).

Next, FIG. 208 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process in the first modification from the tenth embodiment. After turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a long release command for the special game end command (end demo time information set in step 1810). It is a command related to, and it is determined whether or not it is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is 10 seconds, which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second change 1), in step 2482 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the continuous villa continuation image (transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game). For example, set a command to display "Congratulations! Still more!" For a long time (10 seconds in this example), and move to the next process (process in step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second change 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short release command, in step 2484 (second change 1), the consecutive villa end image (probability after the end of the special game). It is an effect to notify that the game does not shift to the variable game state. For example, a command for displaying "See you again!" For a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next process (step 2900) is performed. Process). It should be noted that the special game end demo time is configured to be different depending on whether the special game end demo time is a long time (10 seconds) or a short time (3 seconds). Shortening the time after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds) The effect mode (effect tendency) in the game state and the special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) Time reduction after the end of the game It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (effect tendency) in the game state.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, a special game end demo time is provided after the final round in the special game is completed, and the special game is specified by the running special game. By configuring the special game end demo time period to differ depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly profitable for the player to enter the specific area C22. While performing an effect that congratulates the player of the time, if the ball is not entered in the specific area C22, it is not highly profitable for the player, so the effect is performed for a short time and then the normal game is returned. It can be a game machine with more intonation.

In addition, in the change example 1 from the tenth embodiment, the special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demo time, since it is not determined whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game, the special game start demo time depends on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22. The period of will not be different. However, the special game start demo time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won. For example, when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state, 10 seconds (right to the player). (Relatively long time to execute the effect that prompts the player to execute the hit), 3 seconds if the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state (relative because the effect that encourages the player to execute the right hit is not executed) It may be configured to be for a short time). In addition, when a special game is performed in which an opening pattern designed so that the ball enters the specific area C22 is substantially definite, the special game is actually started like "SUPER Lucky!" In addition, the intonation may be enhanced by performing an effect that suggests that the game will be in a probability-variable game state after the special game is completed.

(Example 2 of change from the 10th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment and the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game is configured. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the tenth embodiment and the configuration of the modified example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from the tenth embodiment and the first modification from the tenth embodiment is referred to as the second modification from the tenth embodiment, and only the changes from the tenth embodiment are described below. Describe.

The step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in other embodiments, but these are the step numbers, codes, means names, etc. in their respective embodiments. It indicates that it is a code, a means name, or the like.

First, FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 146 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the difference from the tenth embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub side is issued. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo execution permission flag and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the start demo time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 209 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, the differences from the tenth embodiment are step 1851-1 (second variation 2), step 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step. In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is off during the distribution demo time. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1852, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1854. Further, after setting the long opening pattern in step 1856 or setting the short opening pattern in step 1858, in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in change 2). In this example, 10 seconds} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second change 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2). ), The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer in a short time {step 1899-2 (second variation 2). In this example, 3 Seconds} is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to the determined distribution start demo time information (a command to the sub side, and the distribution of the special game being executed. Set the command) related to the time value of the minute demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demo time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demo time when it is turned on), and steps. Move to 1899-6 (2nd variation 2). Even if No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), in step 1899-7 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demo time and proceeds to step 1860. .. If No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634). As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the distribution start demo time, which is the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, is the second when the first main game side is a big hit. It takes longer than the case of a big hit on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 211 is a configuration diagram of an example of an opening pattern of the large winning opening. The jackpot symbols in the tenth embodiment are three types of the first main game jackpot symbol "4A, 5A, 7A" and three types of the second main game jackpot symbol "4B, 5B, 7B", for a total of six types of jackpots. It has a symbol, and there are only two types of open patterns in one round: "short open = 500 ms open → closed" and "long open = 30000 ms open → closed". The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening C10 or second large winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased, such as opening multiple times in one round. An open pattern (for example, "10000 ms open-> 10000 ms closed-> 10000 ms open-> closed") may be used. Here, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, only the second main game chief opening jackpot "5B / 7B" has a long opening pattern of the big winning opening in all rounds (10R). .. In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and the first big winning opening is opened in the other rounds. In addition, the number of rounds executed in all jackpots is 4 or more, and the distribution game execution round is configured to be executed without fail. In this way, the first main game chief open jackpot "5A / 7A" has a round with a short opening (2nd R), while the second main game chief open jackpot "5B / 7B" has a round. There is no round that becomes a short opening, that is, the number of rounds that become a short opening is configured so that the number of rounds that become a short opening is larger than that of the second main game chief opening jackpot.

Next, FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) of FIG. 209 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demo executing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demo time timer. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the second main game jackpot symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second long release command (the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. The command related to the above is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the first main game length open jackpot symbol (5A and 7A in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first long open command (the second big winning opening of the first main game jackpot symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command relating to the start of a special game in which C20 is open for a long time) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3110, in other words, the stopped jackpot symbol is not the first main game length open jackpot symbol, that is, the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example). In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first short opening command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game big hit symbol is short opening as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of the special game) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demo time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demo executing flag and proceeds to step 3120. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo running flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, even if No in step 3120, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 213 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. The changes from the tenth embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, the special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the special game start demo time by turning on the start demo in progress flag. Determines if the flag) is off. If Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demo display timer and sets the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the start demo in-progress flag. Next, in step 2350 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start demo effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2). In addition, even if No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. In the case of Yes in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), in step 2403-5 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the start demo in-progress flag and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

Further, after setting the command related to the jackpot start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second variation 2). Determine if it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a long distribution start demo time (10 seconds in this example). ). In the second modification from the tenth embodiment, there are two types of time values of the distribution start demo time, that is, the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, long time and short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball during the long distribution start demo time. A notification effect (a production that does not definitively notify the player whether or not the second big winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the step 2403-10 (second variation 2) is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-9 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demo time, which is short. Execute an easy notification effect (a production that deterministically notifies the player that the second large winning opening C20 will be open for a long time in the distribution game execution round), and shifts to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). To do. Even if No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the ball entry easy unnotified effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, it is configured to execute an easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and which of the easy-to-enter ball notification effect and the easy-to-enter ball notification effect may be executed may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (5A / 7A) on the first main game side, which is won in the non-time reduction game state and the non-probability fluctuation game state, the ball entry easy unannounced effect is executed. In the distribution game execution round related to the long open jackpot (3B, 5B, 7B) on the second main game side, which is won in the time shortening game state and the probability fluctuation game state, it is configured to execute the ball entry easy notification effect. May be good. In addition, it is configured to enable the player to be notified that there is a hold that is a big hit among the holds that exist during the execution of the special game, and the hold inner consecutive villa effect is executed. Even in the case where the ball is easily entered, the unnotified effect of easy entry and the easy notification effect of entry may be displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game chief open jackpot symbol (2nd variation 2). The second main game chief open jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B, and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of winnings (short release). In the case of a big hit in which there is a round to be, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the tenth embodiment, the second main game chief open jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is long open in all rounds. In the jackpot related to, the round being executed is notified at the time of each round (notifying how many rounds are currently being executed), while the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning is notified in any of the rounds. In the big hit where the mouth C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning mouth C10 has a short-opened round), the round being executed is not notified at the time of executing each round. If the running round is not notified, an object image (for example, a treasure chest, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed on the first large winning opening C10 or the second instead of the display notifying the round. The large winning opening C20 may be additionally displayed each time a round in which the opening is long is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect that guarantees that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open is executed. You may. It should be noted that the effect may not be executed or may be executed at the time of executing the special game in which all rounds are long open, but if it is not executed, the number of rounds currently being executed is displayed. Is desirable. In any round, in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is short-opened (or in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 has a short opening), The first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the long opening is performed (for example, "1st R = long opening, 2nd R = short opening, 3R = long opening". If it becomes "open", it will be notified in the 3rd round that it is the second round, etc.). The effect to be executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this. For example, a big hit is held in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the special game execution. If there is a hold that becomes, it may be configured to be able to execute the hold in-house consecutive villa effect that notifies that it is certain that the jackpot will be a big hit. In the case of such a configuration, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22) when the hold inner consecutive villa production is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round. Since it has not been decided whether or not to enter the ball), there is a possibility that the symbol change related to the hold that was the subject of the notification will be lost even though it has been notified that it will be a big hit. It is preferable that the execution timing of the villa effect is after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round is completed. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured to be the distribution game execution round (it can also be applied when there is one big winning opening). However, even if there is no game ball to hit (for example, if all the game balls are cut off during the winning symbol change), the second round so that additional game balls can be rented. It is desirable to do it after that.

Next, FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the start demo effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) of FIG. 160 in the second modification from the tenth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long release command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the first long release command from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the final effect execution lottery (the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the special game being executed) that is won by 1/5. Execute a lottery to see if or not. Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the final effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process proceeds to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a long-opening confirmation notification effect (an effect of notifying that the second large winning opening C20 is long-opened in the special game being executed) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)}. If No in step 2354 (when the first short release command is received from the main side) or No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has no long open as a start demo effect. The notification effect (the effect of not notifying whether the second big winning opening C20 is long-opened or short-opened in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)} Move to. In addition, even in the special game start demo time in which the start demo effect is executed, the jackpot on the first main game side (higher percentage) is 10 seconds, and the second main game is the same as in the distribution start demo time. The jackpot on the side (higher percentage) may be configured to be 3 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the change example 2 from the tenth embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second big winning opening in the distribution game execution round in all the special games. In the special game in which the C20 opens for a long time and is related to the first main game side, a special game in which the second large winning opening C20 opens for a long time and a special game for which the second major winning opening C20 opens for a long time are provided in the distribution game execution round. In the special game on the 2nd main game side, it is notified that the 2nd big prize opening C20 will be open for a long time at the start demo time of the special game, while in the special game on the 1st main game side, the 2nd big prize is won. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case where the second big winning mouth C20 is notified to be long open and a case where it is not notified at the start demo time of the special game, and during the special game. In the special game on the side of the second main game in which it is certain that the ball will enter the specific area C22, the player is notified that the second large winning opening C20 will be opened for a long time, while the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game, which is not definite, the player is basically given an effect of inciting whether or not the second big winning opening C20 is open for a long time, but there is also a case where the player is definitely notified. By configuring it as such, it is possible to obtain a highly entertaining gaming machine capable of performing an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22.

In addition, in the change example 2 from the tenth embodiment, the ball entry easy notification effect and the ball entry easy non-notification effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demo time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during the execution of the round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during the execution of the distribution game execution round.

<<<<< 11th Embodiment Power Off and Sensor Detection >>>>>
Next, as the eleventh embodiment, the relationship with various sensors (sometimes referred to as a detection device, a ball entry detection device, etc.) installed inside the gaming machine will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 shown in FIG. 195 are provided. That is, the specific region C22 is provided inside the second prize opening C20. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1, a discharge ball detection device 2224-2, a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and the like are provided as sensors.

<<< Relationship between power off processing and total discharge game ball counting processing >>>
Next, the timing related to the counting process of the total discharged game balls will be described as a timing in which power may not be supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power failure. The total discharge game ball count process is based on, for example, the flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 153. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Determines if is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90. In this way, the counting process of the total discharged game balls is performed.

The time from the occurrence of the power outage to the detection of the power outage can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine. For example, in the flowchart of timer interrupt processing in FIG. 146, the power is cut off depending on the period of the predetermined time of the interrupt interval T, and the power off processing is executed at a short interrupt interval or the power is turned off at a long interrupt interval. It is possible to determine whether to execute the process. The design value of the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. Hereinafter, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It will not be. Further, the same applies to the time other than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure, such as the time for the game medal to flow down and the time for the disk D50 of the medal payout device H. Applicable to the configuration.

<< Operation pattern 1 related to power off processing and sensor >>
FIG. 215 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off state processing and the counter count processing related to the discharge ball abnormality are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the distribution winning detection device 2221 and the specific area entry detection device 2224-1, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game ball (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (g1) to (g6), and the time changes from (g1) to (g6) as time elapses. In the eleventh embodiment, the power supply cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff process is executed at the same interrupt interval, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power failure detection and the execution of the power supply cutoff process are executed. Can also be done with separate interrupts.

Under the situation where the game ball is flowing into the second prize opening C20, the power supply is cut off at the timing of (g1). Next, at the timing of (g2), the distribution winning detection device 2221 detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, executes the addition processing of the counter value related to the ejection ball abnormality. Next, at the timing of (g3), the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (g4), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, executes the subtraction process of the counter value related to the ejection ball abnormality. As described above, the game ball that has flowed into the second large winning opening C20 passes through the distribution winning detection device 2221, and then the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 and the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. It is configured to pass through either of them, and when the distribution winning detection device 2221 detects a game ball, it executes a counter value addition process related to the ejection ball abnormality, and executes a specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or an ejection ball detection device. When 2224-2 detects a game ball, it is configured to execute a counter value subtraction process related to an abnormality in the ejected ball. Therefore, the game ball enters the 1st ball 2nd prize opening C20 and then flows down normally. In that case, the counter value changes as "0-> 1-> 0". In the figure, the case where the game ball flowing into the second large winning opening C20 passes through the specific area winning ball detecting device 2224-1 after passing through the distribution winning winning detection device 2221 is illustrated.

After that, at the timing of (g5), the specific region entry detection device 2224-1 is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (g6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. In this way, even when the power is cut off when the game ball flows into the second large winning opening C20, the game ball passes through the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2. Since it is configured to execute the power-off processing later, it can be configured to execute the power-off processing after the addition / subtraction processing of the counter value related to the discharge ball abnormality is normally executed. When the power is turned off while only the counter value addition process related to is executed, the game progresses while the counter value related to the discharge ball abnormality is not normal (while it is not 0), in other words, the power is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the discharge ball due to the execution timing of the time processing.

The execution timing of the counter value addition / subtraction process related to the discharge ball abnormality is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the figure, and any of the following may be adopted.
(1) Execution timing of counter value addition processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Timing when the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned off → on, execution timing of counter value subtraction processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Specific area entry detection device Timing when 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off → on (2) Timing of execution of counter value addition processing related to discharge ball abnormality: Timing when distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned off → on, Execution timing of counter value subtraction processing related to discharge ball abnormality: Timing when the specific area entry detection device 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off (3) Counter value addition processing related to discharge ball abnormality Execution timing: Timing when the distribution winning detection device 2221 is turned on → off, execution timing of the counter value subtraction processing related to the ejection ball abnormality: Specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or ejection ball detection device 2224-2 Timing of turning off → on (4) Timing of execution of counter value addition processing related to ejection ball abnormality: Timing of turning on / off of distribution winning detection device 2221, execution timing of subtraction processing of counter value related to ejection ball abnormality : Timing when the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off << Operation pattern 2 related to power off processing and sensor >>
FIG. 216 is an example in which the operation patterns of the power off time processing and the counting processing of the total emission confirmation number counter are reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of the game ball (on or off). .. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (h1) to (h6), and as time elapses, they change from (h1) to (h6). In the eleventh embodiment, the power failure is detected and the power failure processing is executed by the same interrupt processing. Can also be performed by separate interrupt processing.

Under the situation where the game ball is flowing into the first main game start port A10, the power is cut off at the timing of (h1). Next, at the timing of (h2), the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s detects the game ball and turns off → on. Next, at the timing of (h3), the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (h4), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball and turns off → on, and at the same time, the counter value addition processing of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed. As described above, the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a counter for outputting information on the total emission number (which may be the total number of fired game balls) to the outside of the gaming machine. After that, at the timing of (h5), the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is turned on → off. Next, at the timing of (h6), the gaming machine detects the power outage, and the power outage processing is executed. In this way, even if a power failure occurs when the game ball flows into the first main game start port A10, the power cutoff process is executed after the game ball passes through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. Therefore, it is possible to configure the counter value addition processing of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 to be executed normally and then the power cutoff processing to be executed, and the game ball is placed at the first main game start port A10. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the addition process of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is not executed even though the ball has been entered.

In the figure, the configuration in which the addition process of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is executed when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball is illustrated, but it is as shown in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 215. , 1st main game start port When the ball entry sensors of various entry ports such as the ball entry detection device A11s detect a game ball, the addition process to a predetermined counter value is executed, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s plays the game. By executing the subtraction process to the predetermined counter value when the ball is detected, it may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged match.

In addition, also in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, the time value can be compared in the same manner as the configuration of the eighth embodiment described above. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure by the gaming machine may be T1 and T2 may be any of the following.

In FIG. 125,
(1) After all the game balls have flowed into the inside of the distribution electric accessory 2222 (from the player to the back side), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off. Time until (2) After all the game balls have flowed into the inside of the distribution electric accessory 2222 (from the player to the back side), the specific area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off. Time until it is turned on (3) Distribution Ball entry detection device 2224-1 or discharge ball detection after half of the game ball (volume) has flowed into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the distribution electric accessory 2222. Time until device 2224-2 is turned on → off (4) Distribution ball after half of the game ball (volume) has flowed into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the electric accessory 2222, the specific area entry detection device Time until 2224-1 or discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off (5) Specified after a part of the game ball has flowed into the inside (from the player to the back side) of the distribution electric accessory 2222. Time until the area entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned on → off (6) A part of the game ball is inside the distribution electric accessory 2222 (from the player to the back side). The time from when half of the inflow to when the specific region entry ball detection device 2224-1 or the discharge ball detection device 2224-2 is turned off → on may be set as T2.

In FIG. 126,
(1) Time from the timing when the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 is turned on → off (2) Flow into the first main game start port A10 Time from the timing when the game ball is no longer visible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 is turned off → on (3) Half of the game ball (volume) that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 is the player. Time from the timing when the total discharge counter C90 is turned on to off from the timing when it becomes invisible from (4) The timing when half (of the volume) of the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player. Time until the total discharge counter C90 turns off → on (5) The total discharge counter C90 turns on → off from the timing when a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player. (6) The time from when a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first main game start port A10 becomes invisible to the player until the total discharge counter C90 turns off → on can be set as T2. Good.

As described above, when T1 and T2 are set, T1 <T2 is configured to hold in the eleventh embodiment as in the eighth embodiment.

<<< 12th Embodiment Stop button operation and reel stop control >>>
Next, a configuration related to a stop button and reel control applicable to the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

In the twelfth embodiment, the reel stop control in the operation of the reel stop button (here, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are applicable) will be described. The operation control of the stepping motor related to the reel stop control is as described above, but the reel rotation is stopped after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state" which is the reel drive state shown in FIG. 35 (6). The reel can be stopped by exciting all the phases of the stepping motor (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) (four-phase excitation). In the twelfth embodiment, the treatment in which all the phases (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) is referred to as “four-phase excitation treatment”. is there.

In the reel-type gaming machine, the stop button sensor built into each stop button is turned off → on according to the operation of the stop button (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Or, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the control for stopping the rotating reel by the information that it is turned on → off. The operation of the stop button in the twelfth embodiment indicates a physical operation, and refers to, for example, pressing the left stop button D41 or moving away from the state in which the left stop button D41 is pressed. .. Further, the state in which the stop button is not operated may be referred to as, for example, the state in which the stop button is not pressed. In addition, turning the stop button sensor from off to on when the stop button is valid may be referred to as the operation of the stop button being accepted.

In the twelfth embodiment, the operation of the stop button for mainly stopping the rotating reel and the stop control of the reel will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reel,
Pattern 1: The 4-phase excitation process is executed after the stop button sensor is turned on → off. Pattern 2: The 4-phase excitation process is executed before the stop button sensor is turned on → off. .. In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that these two patterns are possessed with respect to the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reel. As described above, the four-phase excitation process is the control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes the reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop button (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor is turned off → on and on → off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and is turned off by pressing the stop button by a predetermined distance from the initial position (the position corresponding to the non-operation state) (at the initial position). The main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel rotation stop processing related to the flow of FIG. 34 by turning the stop button sensor from off to on. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition that the stop button sensor is turned off → on can be appropriately changed. As an example, the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed may be set, or the distance may be half the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed.

<< Pattern in which 4-phase excitation processing ends after the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 217 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 217, the operation from the stop button operation to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated. It should be noted that the operation of the left stop button is accepted when rotating the maximum distance in the design (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state and then left. When the maximum value of the sliding time according to the rule is 190 ms, the time value until the reel stops (sometimes called the sliding time) has some margin so as not to exceed the maximum value according to the rule. As an example in this example, the maximum value of the slip time in the design is 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to the 185 ms is the maximum distance in the design.

(A1) to (f1) of FIG. 217 will be described in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. Here, the distance at which the left stop button D41 is pushed from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured to be able to be pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position, and it is assumed that the relation of 0 <x <d is established as the relation of the pushed distance. At the timing of (b1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation). In addition, when the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped regardless of the operation status of the stop button (time until it is pushed, etc.). Is executed, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped after moving the maximum design distance from the timing of (b1).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is in a state of being pressed by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c1). In (c1), the left stop button sensor is maintained in the on state, and the reel driving state of the left reel M51 is maintained in the reel deceleration standby state. The time values from (b1) to (c1) vary depending on how the player operates the left stop button D41. In this example, the player performs a stop operation on the left stop button D41. The case where the stop operation is executed for the left stop button D41 in a short time (for example, 5 ms), which is a general time value required for the execution, is illustrated.

After that, immediately after the state of (c1) is reached, the left stop button D41 is separated and slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and the distance x from the initial position (to be exact, The left button sensor is turned on and off in the state of returning to (d1) when the timing becomes less than x). In both (b1) and (d1), the state in which the left stop button is located at a distance of x from the initial position is shown, but the distance of x from the initial position is the on / off of the stop button sensor. Since it indicates off, more accurately, the stop button sensor is on at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and the stop button sensor is off at a distance of less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and when the stop button is in the initial position, the stop button sensor is on, and when the stop button is not in the initial position (when pressed even a little), the stop button sensor is on. It may be configured to be. The time from the position where the left stop button D41 is pushed by the maximum distance d to the return to the initial position changes according to the spring constant of the spring of the left stop button D41.

Further, in (d1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and in the state where the left stop button returns to the initial position (e1), the left stop button sensor remains off and the left. The reel drive state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes 4-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example in the figure, and may be a timing before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position. Timing may be acceptable. Further, the four-phase excitation of the step motor will be described in detail. When the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the scheduled stop symbol and the passing symbol match), the counter of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter. Since 4-phase excitation is turned on after setting 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms) as a value, more accurately, about 0 after the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state. After 5 ms, 4-phase excitation is turned on. After that, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 0. It is configured to turn off 4-phase excitation.

After that, while the left stop button is stopped at the initial position, the step motor is decelerated by 4-phase excitation with respect to the left reel, and the left reel is stopped at the position rotated by the maximum distance in the design described above, and then stopped in the middle. The operation of the button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes valid (the reception of the stop operation is valid).

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. Further, even in such a configuration, when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the vehicle is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the vehicle is separated immediately), the stop button is released from the separation. The design value of the shortest time required for the sensor to turn on → off can be shorter than the design value of the time from when the stop button is turned off → on until the 4-phase excitation of the step motor is completed. .. That is, even when the stop operation of the stop button of 1 is executed and the reel is separated immediately, before the reel rotates by the maximum design distance and stops, in other words, before the stop operation of the other stop button becomes effective. Since the stop button of the above 1 is configured to be able to return to the initial position, the player can stop the stop button corresponding to the other reel immediately after the reel that has performed the other stop operation is stopped. Is configured to be able to do.

In addition, when the stop operation of the stop button of 1 is executed and the sensor is separated immediately, the time value of the shortest time required from the separation to the stop button sensor turning on → off and the stop button off → on are obtained. The time value from to the end of 4-phase excitation of the step motor varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value including these factors. In rare cases, an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, but under a basic environment, 90% or more is within the range of the design value. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it deviates as a design value. It means that you have not done so.

In the figure, the configuration in which the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum design distance and stops by pushing in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separating from the reel is excited. It is not limited to this, and it satisfies that the stop button sensor is turned on → off before the reel rotates the maximum distance by design and stops by pushing in the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separating. It may be configured as follows.

<< Pattern 1 in which the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 218 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 218, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into the frames (a2) to (f2) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated.

(A2) to (f2) of FIG. 218 will be described in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b2), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. At the timing of (b2), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is in a state of being pressed by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (c2). In (c2), the left stop button sensor is maintained in the ON state, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes 4-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example in the figure, and may be a timing before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position. The timing may be sufficient, as long as the reel is rotating in (c2).

After that, the left stop button D41 is released immediately after the state of (c2) is reached, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At (d2), the left reel stops at a position rotated by the maximum design distance (also referred to as maximum slip) after the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. The distance y may be y <d and may be y = x.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e2), the left stop button sensor is turned on → off. .. After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position at (f2), and the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 is effective. It becomes. The timing at which the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 is turned on → off (and the left reel is stopped). May be.

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. In addition, in such a configuration, the reel is the maximum in design even when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the reel is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the reel is immediately separated). Since the stop button of 1 is configured to return to the initial position after rotating a distance and stopping, the player can perform a stop operation of another stop button if the stop button returns to the initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<< Pattern 2 in which the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off >>
FIG. 219 is an example of an image diagram in which the operation for stopping the rotating reel is drawn in chronological order. In FIG. 219, the operation from the stop button operation to the reel stop in the twelfth embodiment is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focus event. In the twelfth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first is the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is the left stop button D41 among the reels that are rotating. Not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be added that the configuration is not applicable only to the reel and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop for all push orders.

Further, in the figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor is turned off → on), the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then until the left reel stops. The case where the reel stops after rotating the maximum design distance (also referred to as the maximum slip) is illustrated.

(A3) to (f3) of FIG. 219 will be described in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 is not stopped (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in a state where the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance of x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor is turned off → on. Become. At the timing of (b3), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed, and the left stop button D41 is pressed by a distance y from the initial position (c3). By the time (c3) is reached, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and in (c3), the left reel M51 is stopped. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. The distance y may be y <d.

After that, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed by the maximum distance d from the initial position (d3). In (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns on → off. .. After that, it slides toward the initial position by the urging force of the left stop button D41, the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position at (f3), and the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 is effective. It becomes. The timing at which the stop operation of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 becomes effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 is turned on → off (and the left reel is stopped). May be.

In the figure, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button of 1 stops (stop control ends), the stop buttons other than the stop button of 1 are used. The operation is configured so that it is not valid (it does not accept stop operations).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the stop button of 1, the other stop buttons are not effective until the reel corresponding to the stop button of the 1 is stopped, so that the operation of the plurality of reels is driven at the timing of 1. Control can be performed to prevent a situation in which the step motor is overloaded. Further, even in such a configuration, the reel is designed to be separated even when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and the reel is immediately separated (when the maximum distance d is pushed from the initial position and the reel is immediately separated). Since the stop button of 1 is configured to return to the initial position after rotating the maximum distance of and stopping, the player can perform a stop operation of another stop button if the stop button returns to the initial position. It can be done, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<<<<<< Performance Display Device SH >>>>>
The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the accessory ratio. It will be described in detail.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated. The performance display device SH is formed by arranging four-digit segments in a horizontal row, the upper two digits (two digits on the left side) are the identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (two digits on the right side) are the ratio segment SH20. It has become. The identification seg SH10 is configured to display information that can identify the currently displayed item, and the ratio seg SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. Further, a dot point SH30 is provided at the lower right of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification seg SH10, and is configured so that the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 can be easily distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the dot point SH30. ing. There is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<< Installation position >>
The installation position of the performance display device SH may be configured to be directly attached to the main control board M, and in such a configuration, visibility is improved by a sticker or the like attached to the main board case M40 covering the main control board M. It is desirable to install it in an unobstructed position.

<<< Display items >>
The following items are given as an example of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH.
(A) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio The "cumulative advantageous section ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section to the total number of games (cumulative number of games), and is "in the advantageous section". It can be calculated by "cumulative number of games divided by total number of games x 100 (%)". As an example, when the game progresses in the order of "start of operation of gaming machine-> normal section A-> advantageous section A-> normal section B-> advantageous section B", "(number of games in advantageous section A + game in advantageous section B" The number of times) ÷ (the number of games in the normal section A + the number of games in the advantageous section A + the number of games in the normal section B + the number of games in the advantageous section B) × 100 (%) ”.

The "cumulative" is the latest performance display device SH from the predetermined measurement start timing from the start of operation of the gaming machine to the calculation of the item to be displayed on the latest performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of the measurement for displaying on the performance display device SH to the calculation of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as until the calculation of the item to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed.

(B) = Continuous bonus ratio between 6000 games The "continuous bonus ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts paid out when the Type 1 special bonus is activated to the total number of payouts, and is "6000 games". The "continuous bonus ratio between games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts during the operation of the first-class special bonuses between 6000 games / the total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of game medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special accessory during 6000 games: 6000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers: 8000, "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100 ≒ It is calculated as "42.9 (%)". In addition, "between 6000 games" indicates the interval between 6000 games before the timing when the ratio of continuous characters was calculated most recently.

(C) = Character ratio between 6000 games The "character ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts paid out by special and ordinary characters to the total number of payouts, and is "between 6000 games". The "feature ratio" is "(the number of payouts when the first-class special bonus is activated between 6000 games + the number of payouts when the second-class special bonus is activated between 6000 games + the payout when the normal bonus is activated between 6000 games". Number of sheets) ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%) ”can be calculated. As an example, the number of game medals paid out when the first-class special character is activated between 6000 games: 5000, and the number of game medals paid out when the second-class special character is operated between 6000 games: 3000, between 6000 games. If the number of medals to be paid out is 8000, it is calculated as "(5000 + 3000) ÷ (5000 + 3000 + 8000) x 100 = 50 (%)". In addition, "between 6000 games" indicates the interval between 6000 games before the timing when the accessory ratio was calculated most recently.

(D) = Cumulative continuous bonus ratio The "cumulative continuous bonus ratio" is calculated by "cumulative number of payouts when Type 1 special bonus is activated / cumulative total payout number x 100 (%)". it can. As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first-class special accessory is activated is 600,000 and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers is 800,000, "600,000 ÷ (600,000 + 800,000) × 100 ≒ 42. It is calculated as "9 (%)".

(E) = Cumulative bonus ratio The "cumulative bonus ratio" is "(cumulative number of payouts when Type 1 special bonus is activated + cumulative number of payouts when Type 2 special bonus is activated + cumulative total". It can be calculated by "the number of payouts when the ordinary accessory is activated) ÷ the total number of payouts in total x 100 (%)". As an example, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the Type 1 special character is activated: 500,000, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the Type 2 special character is activated: 300,000, and the total number of game medals paid out due to other triggers. If the number of sheets is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000 + 300,000) ÷ (500,000 + 300,000 + 800,000) x 100 = 50 (%)".

Further, "7U" displayed on the identification seg SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed, and "6Y" displayed on the identification seg SH10 is the continuous character ratio between 6000 games. Is displayed, and "7Y" displayed on the identification seg SH10 indicates that the character ratio between 6000 games is displayed, and "6A" displayed on the identification seg SH10. "Indicates that the cumulative continuous bonus ratio is displayed, and" 7A "displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative bonus ratio is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 220, although it was configured to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio as (a), it is not limited to this, and even if it is configured to display the cumulative designated accessory ratio as (a). Good. Here, what is the cumulative ratio of instructed accessories?
Cumulative number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called an instruction) on the main control board M is executed + cumulative number of payouts by the accessory} ÷ all cumulative payouts x 100 (%)
It is a ratio that can be calculated by, and which of the cumulative advantageous section ratio and the cumulative indicated accessory ratio is displayed on the performance display device SH may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, since the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals related to the symbol combination that can be won when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is smaller than the number of payout medals. Is paid out, the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that can be won when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. ..

<<< Display mode >>
The display mode of the performance display device SH may be configured as follows.
-The display is switched in the order of "(a)->(b)->(c)->(d)->(e)-> (a) ..." for about 5 seconds each. There is no problem even if the interval for switching the display is changed, and for example, the display may be configured to be switched every 3 seconds.
-For non-applicable items, "---" is displayed in the ratio segment. The non-applicable items are, for example, the advantageous section ratio in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section.
-Ratio display values {advantageous section ratio (%), continuous accessory ratio (%), accessory ratio (%), which are displayed on the ratio segment SH20} are displayed with the decimal point rounded down (in the case of 100%). Display as "99")
・ If the ratio display value is 70% for the advantageous section ratio, 60% for the continuous character ratio, and 70% or more for the character ratio, the ratio segment SH20 is blinked. ・ If the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio is displayed in blinking. The ratio display displays "00".-If the cumulative number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 when displaying the continuous character ratio between 6000 games and the character ratio between 6000 games is displayed. Flashing display {Including non-applicable items (for example, in a game machine that does not have an advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is a non-applicable item because there is no advantageous section ratio)}
-If the cumulative number of games played is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment is blinked when the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed. In addition, when the cumulative number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment is blinked when displaying the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and when displaying the cumulative bonus ratio (games without continuous bonuses). Including the case of a machine). That is, the cumulative number of games can be measured for 175,000 games or more in order to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the cumulative number of games can be measured for 17500 games or more for displaying the cumulative continuous character ratio and the cumulative character ratio. It is configured to be possible.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to be able to display the information of (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) described above. The configuration for executing processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) on the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) is described in detail below. Describe.

<<< Memory Map >>
First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described with reference to FIG. 221. The memory map shows the address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the built-in ROMC110 is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "27FFH", and the register area built in each circuit in the main control chip C is allocated to the space from "2800H" to "28FFH". The built-in RAMC120 is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH", and the XCS decoding area (decoding to interpret the given machine language as an internal representation is executed in the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH". Area) is allocated. By causing the CPUC 100 to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROMC 110 mainly has a first ROM area which is an area for controlling the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area for controlling processing different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed from the CPUC100 exists in the second ROM area and is CPUC100. It is configured to be larger than the amount of data accessed from).

Further, the first ROM area stores the first control area in which the program code (instruction code set for the CPUC100) is stored and the program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC100 based on this program code). The first data area is stored, the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation of the random number generation circuit C140). It has a program management area in which settings, operation settings of the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Although the memory map image in the first ROM area is illustrated in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

Further, the second ROM area stores a second control area in which a program code (instruction code set for CPUC100) is stored and program data used by the program (read by processing of CPUC100 based on this program code). The second control area is configured to have a capacity smaller than that of the first control area (in other words, it exists in the second control area and the CPUC100 exists. The program code capacity accessed from is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPUC100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed from the CPUC 100 is smaller than the program data capacity existing in the first data area and accessed from the CPUC 100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area which is an area mainly for storing information based on the progress of the game, and a second RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on processing different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related. It has a stack area that is used when the program needs to store data internally, and a first RAM area is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH". A second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and a stack area is allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is just an example. ).

Further, the first RAM area mainly has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly temporarily stores information related to errors and the like. It has a second work area, which is a work area for the user, and a checksum area, which is a work area for detecting errors in the information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The capacity of the first RAM area is larger than that of the second RAM area. Further, in the present embodiment, the checksum area is possessed only by the second RAM area (there is no first RAM area), and the checksum area is both the first RAM area and the second RAM area (). It is configured to manage checksums (total of information temporarily stored on both sides). Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the checksum is calculated, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area excluding the unused area (first). The checksum may be calculated for the work area and the second work area). Further, the method of performing error detection is not limited to the method of performing checksum check, and a method of performing other methods (for example, parity check, etc.) may be used. In that case, the checksum area is these. This is an area for storing error detection information (for example, parity bit, etc.) required when using the method.

The address of the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored may be after the address of the built-in RAM. Further, although there is no problem even if the address that is the unused area is changed, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the address between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 221, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPUC100 and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed from the CPUC100 are Since they are separated (in a non-contiguous arrangement of addresses) on the memory map and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be visually observed on the program source code or the dump list. It can be clearly separated above (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them).

Here, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to provide an unused area (unfilled area) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity from being written. It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in a young address, etc.). Further, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent data that is not normally referred to from being referred to due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, referred to in a gaming machine having different specifications) is used. It is preferable to configure the data so that it is not provided (data to be used, data used only for testing at the development stage, etc.). Further, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are packed in a young address and used, and within the area (within the area). No unused area is provided in (address of) (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H" is not set as an unused area). It is preferable to do so. In the unused area in this example, all the bits are "0", and in the area other than the unused area, any bit is "1" (not "0"). ing).

In the thirteenth embodiment, in particular, the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying the information on the performance display device SH is executed on the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M). When doing so, it is configured to perform processing in the second ROM / RAM area. Hereinafter, the details of the processing performed in the second ROM / RAM area will be described.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
FIG. 222 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the thirteenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as that of other embodiments). The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (T is set in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example). It is configured to be executed periodically with a cycle of).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC100, checking the input port of a power failure detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power failure is currently detected (in the interrupt processing this time). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the power cutoff process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power failure detection signal, the on reception sensor D10s, and the first on sensor. Information related to the detection of D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of operation and the sensor detection state of these operating members are sampled at the interrupt interval T. Will be).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M is a rotation cylinder drive control process (process related to control of the drive of the reel M50) of all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. In addition, even if No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processes of steps 1612 and 1613 are unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, in the CPUC100 of the main control board M, all the error flags are turned off (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number number error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error such as the payout abnormality error flag, the payout medal retention error flag, and the door switch flag are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is not detected) (for example, a register). (Set in the area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command related to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (an error currently occurring) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error-undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the command is applicable. It is not necessary to execute the information setting process (step 1618 may be omitted). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from the state where no error has occurred, or from the state where the first error (for example, the inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes as in the second error (for example, payout medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPUC100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control commands will be sent). Here, as commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation) and a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop). Command related to the second reel stop acceptance timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop acceptance timing (send the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), command related to stop timing of stop display symbol (sent immediately after operating the stop button as display symbol stop), winning / re-winning Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after starting lever operation), commands related to RT status (all reels Commands related to AT status (sent between the stop of all reels and the start of the next game), commands related to the state related to AT (sent between the stop and the start of the next game), Highly secured failure counter value command (sent immediately after starting lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (between all reels stopped until the next game starts, or immediately after starting lever operation (Sent), commands related to the game section (sent between the time all reels are stopped and the next game is started), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the spinning machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the information related to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing error error, a payout error error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the insertion reception sensor retention error is when the insertion reception sensor detects the retention of the game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and 7). Outputs (lights a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (update processing of random number values managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC100 of the main control board M acquires the internal information register data (the internal information register has an area in which the error flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). .. Next, in step 1634, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the error flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). To judge.

If Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM / RAM area as the process in the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Although not shown, when the process in the second ROM / RAM area is called, the CPUMC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and then performs the second stack area. Make settings to use. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the value of the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process of creating and outputting a signal for external output from the value of the first RAM area or the register used in the process in the first ROM / RAM area.

After that, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played so far. And the counter value of the counter (sometimes called the total payout counter) related to the total number of game medals paid out up to now, and the count upper limit check as a check process related to whether or not the predetermined upper limit value has been reached. Perform processing. The details of the count upper limit check process include, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions in the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total game count counter set in a predetermined register (referred to as an HL register) in the second ROM / RAM area. The check process is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the arithmetic process of the minute. The number of repetitions and the data of the count upper limit flag can be stored in, for example, the B register or the C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a counting process of the cumulative number of games played so far. The details of the game count processing include, for example, an added value stored in the A register as an unused area at the address of the total game counter set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area (here, the number of games is counted). The process of adding data (1) is performed, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs counting processing of the number of advantageous section games up to now. The number of advantageous section games is the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section. The details of the counting process of the number of advantageous section games include, first, among the data stored in the address of the game section flag set in the predetermined register of the second ROM / RAM area, the flag indicating that the advantageous section is used. When the bit concerned is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game count counter is set in the DE register. After that, the process of adding data is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts up to now and the number of payouts between 6000 games. The number of payouts is the total number of payouts regardless of the opportunity to pay out the game medals. The details of the counting process of the number of payouts are as follows: First, when the bit related to the data flag stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", The address of the total payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts and the counter for the number of payouts between 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of bonuses paid out up to now and the number of bonuses paid out between 6000 games. As details of the counting process of the number of bonuses paid out, first, the data of the bonus operating state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the accessory is operating. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the bit is set to the predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. , Set the address of the bonus payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of bonus payouts and the counter for the number of bonus payouts between 6000 games). After that, the data stored in the bonus payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. The "characters" in this process are the first type special character, the second type special character, and the ordinary character.

Next, in step 1637-6 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts up to the present and the number of continuous bonus payouts between 6000 games. As details of the counting process of the number of continuous accessory payouts, first, the data of the RB operation state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the RB is operating. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the bit is set to the predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. , Set the address of the continuous bonus payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts and the counter for the number of continuous bonus payouts between 6000 games). After that, the data stored in the continuous accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. After that, the process of data addition (here, addition of the number of payouts) is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (13th), and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. The "continuous accessory" in this process is a type 1 special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the ratio calculation process. The ratio here is shown below.
(1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: Number of advantageous section games ÷ Total number of games x 100 (%)
(1-2) Cumulative total number of instructed bonuses: {Number of payouts in the game in which push order navigation (sometimes called instructions) on the main control board M is executed + Number of payouts by bonuses} ÷ All payouts × 100 (%)
(2) Cumulative continuous bonus number ratio: Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 1 special bonus ÷ Cumulative total payout number x 100 (%)
(3) Cumulative bonus ratio: (Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 1 special bonus + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of Type 2 special bonus + Cumulative payout during operation of ordinary bonus Number of sheets) ÷ Cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)
(4) Consecutive bonus ratio between 6000 games: Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 1 special bonus ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)
(5) Character ratio between 6000 games: (Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 1 special character + Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation of Type 2 special character + Normal character Number of payouts between 6000 games during operation) ÷ Total number of payouts between 6000 games x 100 (%)
The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of the ratio calculation in the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the indicated accessory ratio of (1-2), the ratio calculation process is performed for each game, and in (2) to (5). Is configured to perform the ratio calculation process every 400 games, but for example, in (2) to (5), the ratio calculation process may be performed every one game. As described above, any of the above (1-1) and (1-2) may be calculated and displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 223 is a flow of the subroutine of the ratio calculation process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (13th). First, in step 1637-7-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, the data set in the predetermined register of step 1637-7-1 (13th) in step 1637-7-2 (13th) (the data here is the data related to the calculation number of the advantageous interval ratio). get. Next, a predetermined comparison calculation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (13th), and it is determined whether or not the number is the calculation number related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous section ratio (if it is determined as No), in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the predetermined register is entered. The data stored in the 400 game counter (for example, 2 bytes) is set, it is determined whether or not the data value at this time is "0", and when the data value is "0", it is paraphrased. Then, when the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (when it is determined to be Yes), the address data of the ratio calculation address table stored in advance in the second ROM in step 1637-7-5 (13th). Is set in the specified register. After that, in step 1637-7-6 (13th), a predetermined arithmetic process for calculating the ratio with respect to the set address data is performed.

Then, in step 1637-7-7 (13th), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data acquired in step 1637-7-2 (13th) is set. Then, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether or not the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637-. In 7-9 (13th), the same register in which the data for displaying the ratio at 99% as described above is set in a predetermined register (for example, the data acquired in step 1637-7-2 (13th)) may be used. ) (Because the ratio segment SH20 is two digits). Then, in step 1637-7-10 (13th), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register, and the process proceeds to the next process.

If Yes in step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and if No in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-5 (13th). The process proceeds to step 1637-7-9 (13th), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-10 (13th).

Next, in step 1637-8 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M performs the ratio display process. FIG. 224 is a flowchart relating to the subroutine of the ratio display process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-8 (13th). First, in step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM / RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in, for example, the D register. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (13th), it is determined whether or not a 1000-digit display request in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the 1000-digit display request, then, in step 1637-8-3 (13th), the performance display device is based on the data stored in the D register. It is determined whether or not a 100-digit display request in SH is received. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the 100-digit display request, then, in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is acquired and a predetermined value is obtained. Perform arithmetic processing. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (13th), it is determined whether or not a single digit display request in the performance display device SH is received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that the performance display device SH has not received the single-digit display request, the logical product calculation of the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set is performed in step 1637-8-6 (13th). (For example, an operation such as exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (13th), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (13th), a predetermined arithmetic process is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and the data obtained by the arithmetic is acquired. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (13th), the data related to the blinking request flag stored in advance is stored in a predetermined register, and the process proceeds to the next process.

Returning to the description of the flowchart in FIG. 222, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt end process and shifts to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the built-in random number error display (for example, sets the error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned non-recoverable error processing.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area Modification 1 >>
Next, a modification in the case where the arithmetic processing of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing for displaying the information on the performance display device SH is performed in the second ROM / RAM area will be described. As a modification 1 (sometimes referred to as a modification 1 from the 13th embodiment) of << processing in the second ROM / RAM area >> in the thirteenth embodiment, for example, a game progress control process of the main control board M (FIG. 16 to 18) can be configured to be executed. Hereinafter, a modified example of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area will be described.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14 in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment. A detailed description of the same processing as in FIG. 18 will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, unlike the thirteenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed by the interrupt processing, in the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM / RAM area related to the performance display device SH is performed. It is executed by the main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 225, the calculation process of the information displayed by the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed. The timing of performing arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is in the main loop process, for example, it may be before the game section transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
As a description of the flowchart, after the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M performs the second ROM as the process in the first ROM / RAM area in step 3501. -Call the count upper limit check process of the RAM area.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game count processing. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the advantageous section game count processing. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the payout number counting process. Next, in steps 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the bonus payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the continuous accessory payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the ratio calculation process. Next, in steps 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

As described above, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM / RAM area (calculation of the information displayed on the performance display device SH). Processing) is configured to be executed as the main loop processing. Further, although details will be described later, the display process on the performance display device SH, which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt process.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game end process and shifts to the next process.

Next, FIG. 226 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment. Since the content of the display process on the performance display device SH, which is the process in the second ROM / RAM area, is the same as that in the thirteenth embodiment, the details are omitted.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Specifically, in step 1636, when the update state of the built-in random number is normal (Yes), in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M is in the first ROM / RAM area. As the process, the ratio display process of the second ROM / RAM area is called.

<< Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPUC100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area.

<< Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area >>
Next, in step 1638, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and shifts to the next process.

As described above, in the first modification from the thirteenth embodiment, as the processing related to the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is the main loop processing. The display process on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed as an interrupt process.

With this configuration, in the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, the display processing to the performance display device SH, which needs to be constantly executed (updated), is executed by the interrupt processing, while the constant processing is performed. The data capacity used without executing unnecessary processing by configuring the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH that does not need to be executed (updated) to be executed for each game as the main loop processing. Can be reduced.

<<< Test display of performance display device SH >>>
Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment and the change example 1 from the thirteenth embodiment, as a configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH, is there a problem or the like in the seg of the performance display device SH (for example, the lighting location of the seg)? It is configured to have a test display mode for confirming whether or not the lights are evenly lit. The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be able to be executed (displayed) at the following timings.
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the setting change device control process starts (starts of the setting change mode) and ends within 5 seconds (3). ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and an error (abnormality) occurs. Display until resolved

FIG. 227 is an example of a test display in the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in the test display mode. First, the test display pattern 1 will be described. The test display pattern 1 illustrates a case where the test display is executed when the power is turned on. As described above, when the test display is executed when the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display. The case where the test display ends after 5 seconds is illustrated.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 1 >>
The test display pattern 1 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and a light-off pattern (c) (this is a display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Further, the lighting pattern (b) also has a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately executed. As a result, all the segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, and it is configured so that a segment that fails and does not illuminate can be found. The lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 by the end of the test display ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is such that all the segs are lit (the display mode may be such that all the lit parts of the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 are lit by combining the two lighting patterns).

Further, the test display pattern 1 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately displayed as (a) → (b) → (a) .... , The lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds), the display mode of the extinguishing pattern (c) for notifying the end of the test display is displayed after 5 seconds so that the test display of the performance display device SH ends. It is configured. In the test display pattern 1, the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds, so for example, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is set to 1 second, which is the test display period. Since the number of lighting cycles that can be test-displayed in 5 seconds is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, the test display is configured to end after displaying the display mode of the lighting pattern (b) for 0.5 seconds. ..

In the figure, when the test display is completed, as shown in (c), the case where the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off is illustrated, but the case is limited to this. Instead, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display is started from (a) in FIG. 220).

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Modification Example of Test Display Pattern 1 >>
As a configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a modification related to the test display will be described in detail below.

The lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 224 is set to 1 second. With this determination, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and 4 seconds elapses when the 2 lighting cycles are completed, and the next lighting cycle (third time). Lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) is executed twice to end the test display, in other words, the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is set. The test display may be configured to end when the test display is executed, or the test display is displayed by lighting in (a) for 1 second after executing the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) twice. It may be configured to end, in other words, to repeat the lighting cycle for a predetermined 5 seconds, and to end the test display at the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 2 >>
Next, the test display pattern 2 will be described. It is assumed that the test display pattern 2 is executed during the setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. It should be noted that the test display may be executed even during all the errors (or some errors) that may occur in the gaming machine according to this example.

The test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: a lighting pattern (d), a lighting pattern (e), and a light-off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of test display). The lighting pattern (d) is a display mode in which all the lighting portions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Further, the lighting pattern (e) has a display mode in which all the lighting portions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off. In this way, by alternately executing the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all the segments of the identification seg SH10 and the ratio seg SH20 are lit at least once. It is configured so that you can find segments that fail and do not light up.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are alternately lit in the order of (d) → (e) → (d). , The lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing of the setting confirmation mode (0 seconds), the test display is alternately performed for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d) → (e) → (d) .... When the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode is set), the test display also ends. That is, at the timing when the end condition of the test display is satisfied, the test display is ended regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

In the figure, when the test display is completed, as shown in (c), the case where the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off is illustrated, but the case is limited to this. Instead, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above in FIG. 220 (for example, the display is started from (a) in FIG. 220).

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 >>
Next, FIG. 228 shows the test display pattern 3. Compared with the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2, the test display when the timings at which the test display can be executed overlaps will be described as the test display pattern 3. The display mode of the lighting pattern in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, and the like are the same as those of the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. Hereinafter, FIG. 228 will be described in detail.

First, to explain in the period in which the test display pattern 3 is performed, it is the same as the test display pattern 1 that the timing at which the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is set within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display started to be executed when the power is turned on ends with the passage of time, the start condition of the test display is newly satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode. After that, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered). The flow is to end.

In the test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is set after 2.7 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is not started at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, when the test display is started when the setting confirmation mode is started, the performance display device SH is lit as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically
Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.5 seconds (a) ) → Lights in 0.2 seconds (b) → Lights in 0.3 seconds (a) → Lights in 0.3 seconds (b) → ... → When the setting confirmation mode ends, the test display will be executed as if the test display had ended.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 Deformation Example 1 >>
In the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the timing when the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds, and after the power is turned on. Although the range of 5 seconds, which is the test period, is exceeded, if the setting confirmation mode ends at an early timing, for example, if the test display period related to the setting confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the power is turned on. Starting from the timing, the period until the setting confirmation mode ends is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the range of 5 seconds, which is the test period after the power is turned on. In such a situation, the test display is not executed from the end of the setting confirmation mode to the end timing of the test display period after the power is turned on (when the setting confirmation mode ends regardless of the end timing of the setting confirmation mode). The test display may be terminated), or the test display after the power may be turned on for 0.8 seconds (until 5 seconds have passed since the power was turned on), which is the remaining period of the test display period after the power is turned on. It may be configured to restart, or it may be configured to restart the test display after the power is turned on until the end timing of the test display triggered by the power on. When restarting the test display after the power is turned on, for example, it is determined that the timing at which the setting confirmation mode ends is the starting point (at this time, the test display in the setting confirmation mode ends and the power is turned on again). , The test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds), and according to the display mode of the test display pattern 1, (a) → (b) → (a) ... And 0.8 It may be configured to display a test for a second.

<< 13th Embodiment Test Display of Performance Display Device SH Test Display Pattern 3 Deformation Example 2 >>
The configuration in the case where the test displays are duplicated, which is illustrated as the second modification of the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is only an example and can be applied to all combinations executed in duplicate as the test display.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment,
(1) The display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. (2) The display starts when the setting change device control process starts (starts of the setting change mode) and ends within 5 seconds (3). ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and an error (abnormality) occurs. The above four test displays to be displayed until they are resolved are configured to be able to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or a plurality of the above test displays may be configured to be executed. In addition, it should be added that any of the configurations related to the above-mentioned test display may be applied even in such a configuration.

Further, in the test display of (3) above, the same test display may be executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (test at the end of the setting change mode or the end of the setting confirmation mode). End the display). Further, the display period of 5 seconds according to the above (1) and (2) is only an example, and there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lighting pattern of the above (1) and the lighting pattern of the above (3) are different lighting patterns, but the lighting pattern is not limited to this, and the same lighting pattern (lighting time / extinguishing time). May be.

The lighting pattern of the test display may be a pattern other than the above, but it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern as described above in FIG. 220 (it can be visually recognized by the administrator). It is preferable to configure (different the period for switching the lighting mode, different lighting segments, etc.).

Even when the performance display device SH is executing the test display, the calculation processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (the calculation processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. May be good. As a specific example of such a configuration, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) Power off occurs → (2) Accepts the operation of the final stop reel → (3) Executes power off processing before executing the arithmetic processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH → (4) Game machine Power supply to 0 becomes 0 → (5) Recovery from power failure → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execution of processing → (8) Test display mode ends → (9) Information displayed on the current performance display device SH corresponding to the latest calculation result is displayed on the performance display device SH. Since the information displayed on the performance display device SH is displayed after the arithmetic processing is executed, the information may be different from that before the power failure occurs. Further, even if the power is cut off after the final stop reel is received, if the power off time processing is executed before the arithmetic processing of the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is executed, the above (3) and thereafter are performed. Follows the same flow.

<< 14th Embodiment >> Configuration related to suspension / automatic settlement >>
As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration relating to a gaming machine capable of executing a game progress suitable for a business form desired by a game hall manager will be described in detail below.

As an example of the business form of the amusement park
(1) Quantitative: The progress of the game is stopped by the acquisition of a predetermined number of balls, and the operation of the game machine for the day is ended (2) One exchange: The game is temporarily ended at a specific timing (3) Lucky number system: The game can be continued when a specific privilege is given, but various business forms such as temporarily ending the game when a predetermined privilege is given can be considered. As a configuration of a gaming machine capable of realizing such a business form, a gaming machine capable of executing and setting stoppage and automatic settlement is suitable.

In addition, "stop" means to stop the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and "automatic settlement" means to perform the settlement process through the operation of the player when a specific condition is satisfied. Do it without. In addition, stopping the progress of the game means that the reception of the start lever operation is invalid or the bet is invalid (the game medal cannot be inserted due to the blocker being turned off, and the reception of the bet button operation is invalid). Is.

Here, exemplifying the action in the case of stopping after a certain game is completed, the rotation of the reels related to a certain game is started, and then the stop operation is performed to stop each reel, and finally the reels are rotated. A stop operation is performed on the reel (here, the right reel M53), and the reel drive state of the right reel M53 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (the scheduled stop symbol and the passing symbol match). After setting 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms) as the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter, the 4-phase excitation of the step motor is turned on. After that, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on.
(1) When the game is a game in which the payout of game medals does not occur, stop processing should be executed in a situation where the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90). If it becomes less than 90, the stop processing is executed, and if the above-mentioned game is a game in which the payout of the game medal occurs, the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter is 0 after the payout of the game medal is completed. (2) Regardless of whether or not the game is a game in which the payout of the game medal does not occur, after the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 0 (after) It may be configured as described above to execute the stop processing (after the payout of the game medal is completed). In the case of the above configuration (1), the reel may be moving (rotating) while the counter value of the rotating cylinder drive pulse output counter becomes 100 to 90. , The stop process can be configured to not perform the stop process and the stop process to be performed after the reel is completely stopped below 90, and the player can tell that the reel has stopped and the game is over. It becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be made to recognize earlier that it is not necessary to insert the game medal related to the next game.

In addition, the settlement process related to automatic settlement (the settlement process executed when a specific condition is satisfied) and the settlement process executed by operating the settlement button are configured to be executable as the same process. It may be configured to be executable as separate and different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the configuration related to the stop / automatic settlement applicable to this example will be described in detail.

First, the predetermined conditions for executing the stop that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) at the end of all target BBs, (3) at the end of BB1, (4) at the end of BB2, and (5). It is configured to be selectable from eight items: (6) more than 500 difference sheets, (7) more than 1000 difference sheets, (7) at the end of AT3 set or more, and (8) at the end of a specific AT.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for executing the automatic settlement that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) at the end of all target BBs, (3) at the end of BB1, (4) at the end of BB2, and (5). ) Difference number of more than 500 sheets, (6) Difference number of more than 1000 sheets, (7) At the end of AT3 set or more, (8) At the end of a specific AT, (9) At the time of stopping, 9 items can be selected There is.

Regarding (5) and (6) above, if the difference number exceeds the specified number and the player is in an advantageous state such as during the execution of BB or in the advantageous section, the advantageous state is concerned. It may be configured to determine that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the above is completed. Further, in this example, the difference number is 500 or 1000, but the administrator may be able to set any number. Further, for counting the difference number, a counter (may be referred to as a MY counter or a difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum difference number in one advantageous section, in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, is provided. The counter may be used to count the difference number of sheets, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference number of sheets controlled by the main control board M different from the counter may be used. Further, instead of the difference number of sheets exceeding 500 and the difference number of sheets exceeding 1000, the difference number of sheets of 500 or more and the difference number of sheets of 1000 or more may be set as predetermined conditions.

Since the MY counter is updated only with one bet number, for example, when the number of one bet is set to "3", the counter value of the MY counter is stopped as a result of playing a predetermined game with three cards. Although the number of cards reached 500, the actual number of cards acquired may be less than 500 because the game was executed other than betting 3 cards before the arrival timing. When the stop is performed based on the counter value of the MY counter, as described above, the stop may occur even if the actual number of acquired sheets is small. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number of sheets different from the MY counter and counting the number of inserted sheets and the number of paid out sheets for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure the consistency between the actual number of acquired sheets and the execution of stopping. .. Since the two-card betting game (a game other than the three-card betting) is a game that is disadvantageous to the player by design, the two-card betting game may be regarded as some kind of capture / fraud and stopped based on the MY counter. ..

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable that AT (or ART) continues for 3 sets or more, and the timing is such that the AT and the advantageous section end. Further, when having an AT that is not so-called set number management, it may be a condition that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

Further, the specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous to the player, for example, an AT that is likely to obtain a predetermined number or more (for example, 500 or more) of game medals. ..

In addition, information on a predetermined condition for stopping and a specific condition for performing automatic settlement is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referred to when the power is turned on. It is configured to determine the predetermined condition and the specific condition. The dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM / RAM area.

The timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition with reference to the specific RAM area is not limited to only when the power is turned on, and when the setting change mode ends, the stop / automatic settlement setting mode It may be the end of the operation, the operation of the setting / reset button M30, the selection of the determination item in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode, or the like, or the configuration may be such that the determination can be made at a plurality of timings.

Further, as a method of changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition stored in the specific RAM area, the setting can be changed by operating a stop button or the like during the setting change mode. ..

The predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 229 are merely examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Further, it may be configured so that only one item is determined as a condition, or a plurality of items may be determined as a condition.

As an example of changing a predetermined condition or a specific condition, it may be configured as follows.
(1) A predetermined bonus to be satisfied when the inside of the predetermined bonus is inside (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not stopped and displayed). It is suitable when the inside is in a relatively disadvantageous state for the player (the expected value of winning the game medal is negative (the number of input medals is larger than the number of payouts), the probability of winning the AT is low, etc.). is there.
(2) A state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player during the execution of the predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus starts (the expected value of the game medal is negative (the number of input medals is larger than the number of payouts). It is suitable when there are many) and the probability of winning the AT is low).
(3) Satisfied when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section This is suitable when the winning rate of the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is high (for example, 99/100) in the normal section.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 to 232, an example of the predetermined condition and the method of changing the specific condition will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 230 is an image diagram of each mode transition. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, “stop / automatic settlement setting mode” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (a) in the figure. After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (b) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options of the predetermined conditions as the "stop setting mode". In (b), since the stop is not set, the predetermined condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If the predetermined condition is set to "None", the stop is not executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (c) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options for the specific conditions as the "automatic settlement setting mode". In (c), since the automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If a specific condition is set to "None", automatic settlement will not be executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, “1 not present” and “2 present” are set as the “notification setting mode” in the effect display device S40 as shown in (d) in the figure. When "None" is determined as the "notification setting mode", the effect display device S40 does not execute the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement even when the stop or automatic settlement is performed, and the "notification setting mode" is set. When "Yes" is determined as "", the effect display device S40 is configured to execute the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement when the stop or automatic settlement is performed.

The cursor position when the mode is changed by operating the right stop button D43 may be configured to select "1 none" at the top, or a predetermined condition currently determined, a specific condition. It may be configured to select the condition or the setting of the notification setting mode.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" shown in the figure (a) is set again, and thereafter, for each operation of the right stop button D43, (a) → (b) → (c) → It will switch as in (d) → (a) ....

In this example, the configuration in which the right stop button D43 is used as the operation member related to the mode transition is illustrated, but this is just an example, and there is no problem even if the left stop button D41 or the middle stop button D42 is used.

Next, FIG. 231 is an image diagram of item selection in the mode. In the figure, FIG. 230 illustrates a configuration related to an operation when an item is selected in one mode in the above-mentioned "stop / automatic settlement setting mode".

By shifting to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 while the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" is displayed, the effect display device S40 is displayed in the "stop setting mode" as shown in (e) in the figure. ", The options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed (similar to (b) in FIG. 230). In (b), since the stop is not set, the predetermined condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If the predetermined condition is set to "None", the stop is not executed.

After that, by operating the middle stop button D42, as shown in (f) in the figure, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" is moved, and "2 at the end of all BBs of the target" is selected.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the above-mentioned options for the specific conditions as the "automatic settlement setting mode". In (g), since the automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". If a specific condition is set to "None", automatic settlement will not be executed.

After that, by operating the left stop button D41, as shown in (h) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays the options of the predetermined conditions described above as the "stop setting mode". That is, the mode is changed for each operation of the right stop button D43 in the order of "stop / automatic settlement setting mode"-> "stop setting mode"-> "automatic settlement setting mode"-> "notification setting mode"-> "stop / automatic settlement setting mode". The transition will occur, but by operating the left stop button D41, it is configured to transition to the previous mode. In addition, the cursor in the current mode can be moved by operating the middle stop button D42 (in this example, the cursor is moved down by one). Since the cursor selected "at the end of all BBs of 2 targets" in (f), the cursor also selected "at the end of all BBs of 2 targets" when transitioning to (h). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select the initial position (such as "1 none") when a new mode is changed.

The method of determining the predetermined condition, the specific condition, and the setting of the presence / absence of notification (the method of changing the information stored in the specific RAM) in FIGS. 230 and 231 is configured as follows. May be good.
(1) Determines the item selected by the cursor when the mode changes (2) Determines that the time selected by the cursor continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) (3) Determines a predetermined operating member (start lever) By accepting operations such as), the item selected by the cursor when staying in each mode is determined. (4) By accepting the setting confirmation operation (for example, accepting the operation of the start lever) in the setting change mode, the cursor stays in each mode. (5) As an operation to end the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned on and off to determine the item selected by the cursor when staying in each mode. You may.

Further, as in the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 and 231, the setting related to the stop (sometimes referred to as the setting of a predetermined condition or the setting of the stop function) and the setting related to the automatic settlement (specific). In a state where conditions can be set and the automatic settlement function can be set), whether or not the stop function is effective and whether or not the automatic settlement function is effective when determined in the current situation. May be displayed on a display unit (for example, payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of the display mode, valid is "A" and invalid is "F", and the validity / invalidity of the stop function is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, and the payout number display device D270-1 It may be configured to display the enable / disable of the automatic settlement function in the digit of the digit. More specifically, the display mode is as follows.
Stop function: Enabled, automatic settlement function: Enabled, display of payout number display device D270 "AA"
Stop function: Enabled, automatic settlement function: disabled, display of payout number display device D270 "AF"
Stop function: Invalid, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Display of payout number display device D270 "FA"
Stop function: invalid, automatic settlement function: invalid, display of payout number display device D270 "FF"

It should be noted that the above-mentioned display of validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function may be configured to be displayed in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode before the stop function and the automatic settlement function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, in a situation where other than "1 None" is selected in the stop setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 becomes "A", and the stop setting mode is set. In the situation where "1 None" is selected, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F", and in the situation where other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the payout is made. The one-digit digit of the number display device D270 is "A", and in the situation where "no one" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the one-digit digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F". Become.

Further, when the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function is determined, the above-mentioned indication of the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function may be displayed. In this case, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination. Is displayed, and if "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "F" is displayed in the tens digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and in the automatic settlement setting mode. When a value other than "1 None" is determined, "A" is displayed in the 1st digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode. In this case, "F" may be displayed in the one-digit digit of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination.

The valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above may be displayed on a display unit controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Further, the display mode is only an example, and may be appropriately displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, or the like.

Further, when displaying the valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above on the display unit controlled by the main control board M, the display unit controlled by the sub control board S (for example, The effect display device S40) may also be configured to display the valid / invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function (at the same time). In such a configuration, the display mode in the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode in which the manager of the game hall can easily recognize the validity / invalidity of the stop function and the automatic settlement function. You may.

Next, in FIG. 232, when the "notification setting mode" is determined to be "2 present" and the "stop setting mode" is determined to be "at the end of 3 BB1", the effect display device when the stop is actually made. It is a display image figure in S40.

As shown in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays "BB1 end" which triggered the stoppage, and "300 medals acquired" which is the number of game medals acquired in BB1. The message "Please call the staff during the suspension" that is displayed when the "Notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes" will be displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2", the player can proceed with the game without being confused by notifying the player that the game has been stopped. Further, although not shown, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information indicating that the automatic settlement has been executed even when the automatic settlement is executed.

The configuration of the operating members illustrated in the 14th embodiment is just an example, and any combination of the operating members controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, as a release method in the case of being stopped, the player may not be able to release it, and the administrator may be able to release it. For example, opening the front door DU (key for opening the front door DU) It may be configured so that it can be canceled by (off → on) or by operating the setting / reset button M30.

Further, when the automatic settlement is executed, the game may be executed (the game medal can be inserted) as soon as the settlement is completed, as in the case where the player operates the settlement switch. , The game may be configured so that the game can be executed after the operation of the administrator is performed in the same manner as the stop.

The conditions for shifting to the "stop / automatic settlement setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 230 to 232 are merely examples.
(1) Transition to setting confirmation mode (2) Press and hold the setting / reset button M30 (for example, keep it on for 3 seconds) when all reels are stopped (3) Open the front door DU and main The transition condition may be the operation of any of the operating members controlled by the control board M. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned (2) or (3), it is possible to shift to the stop / automatic settlement setting mode even during the business of the amusement park and switch the setting related to the stop / automatic settlement.

Further, the above-mentioned information of the specific RAM area may be configured to be cleared when the setting is changed, or may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to suspension / automatic settlement>
The configuration related to stop / automatic settlement applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example.

After executing the processing related to turning on / off the advantageous section indicator YH, it may be configured to execute the processing of stopping and automatic settlement. With this configuration, the lighting or extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH can be matched with the game section of the next game.

The difference number is specified when the difference number is equal to or more than the specified value (for example, 500 sheets) and the player is configured to satisfy the predetermined condition or the specific condition when the advantageous state for the player ends. If the stop flag or the automatic settlement flag is turned on when the value is exceeded, and then the difference number falls below the specified value again by the end of the advantageous state for the player (for example, the advantageous section), the stop flag is set. Alternatively, the automatic settlement flag may be configured to be turned off (stopping or automatic settlement is not executed), or may be left on (stopping or automatic settlement is executed). As a specific example, any one of "5 difference number more than 500 sheets", "6 difference number more than 1000 sheets", "5 difference number 500 sheets or more", and "6 difference number 1000 sheets or more" is set as a predetermined condition ( Even if a certain game is executed and the difference number satisfies a predetermined condition, the predetermined bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a predetermined game state) after the end of the certain game. In some cases, the stop processing may not be executed immediately (the flag is turned on), and the stop process may be executed when the predetermined bonus is completed.

If the game is configured to be stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, and the re-game symbol is displayed as stopped in the game that will be stopped or automatic settlement, stop or automatic settlement will be performed before executing the automatic bet related to the re-game. It may be configured to execute, or it may be configured to execute a stop or automatic settlement after executing an automatic bet.

Even if the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the menu screen and QR code can be displayed by operating the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB by the player. Good. With this configuration, even if the player does not recognize that the game is stopped and the game is stopped due to the stop, the game history can be saved without any problem. Further, in such a configuration, even if the power is cut off, the data related to the game history may be retained.

From the start of the display of the end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous section end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that notifies the player that the advantageous state ends, without operating the operating members (without proceeding with the game) ) When the standby screen can be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to a stop, the standby screen is not displayed even after the predetermined time has elapsed. You may. Further, if a power failure occurs during the display of the end screen, the normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and the standby screen) or the standby screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, if the output condition of the external signal related to stoppage or automatic settlement is satisfied, the external signal is output even if the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement. May be configured to be sustainable.

When the game is configured to be stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit is turned on in red and the back lamp is turned off so that the game field manager can easily recognize the game stop. It may be configured to turn on / off in a lighting mode (combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp) that can be easily distinguished from the progress.

The voice data being settled may be the same or different between the settlement executed by the player operating the settlement button and the automatic settlement.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electrically stored in the credit and one or more game medals are bet.
(1) When the automatic settlement is executed, both the credit and bet game medals are settled, and even when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the credit and the bet are settled. Any game medal may be configured to be settled.
(2) When automatic settlement is executed, both credit and bet game medals are settled, and when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the bet game medal is settled. It may be configured to settle only.
(3) When the automatic settlement is executed, both the credit and bet game medals are settled, and when the settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, the medals are stored in the credit. Only game medals may be settled.

As described above in FIGS. 230 and 231. When the end condition of the stop / automatic settlement setting mode is satisfied during the setting in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode (when the game is started, the power is cut off). If this is the case, etc.), it may be configured to execute the process of confirming the item that was being selected (the cursor was selected) in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode.

A mechanical switch that can be physically switched on and off may be provided. As an example, a mechanical switch for stopping and a mechanical switch for automatic settlement may be provided, and in such a configuration, the predetermined condition and the specific condition are predetermined in the gaming machine. It may be a condition. Further, a mechanical switch related to stop or automatic settlement may be provided, and stop or automatic settlement may be set (can be set by software) in the above-mentioned stop / automatic settlement setting mode. If a mechanical switch is provided, the execution conditions for stopping or automatic settlement will be set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to execute an error display on a display unit (for example, payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when a inserted medal retention error is detected). But
(1) When the game is stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, the display unit does not display that the game has stopped. (2) When the game is stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, the display is displayed. The unit executes the display of the display mode different from that at the time of error detection. (3) When the game is stopped due to the stop or automatic settlement, the display unit executes the display of the same display mode as at the time of error detection. It may be configured as follows.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the execution of the settlement process is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (notification related to the predetermined error). May be configured to execute). Further, in such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the payout of the first game medal after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is turned on and off by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). It may be configured to stop the payout related to the settlement process immediately after (it is considered that the payout has been made).

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement process is completed (notification related to the predetermined error is executed). ) May be configured. Further, in the case where the game is configured to stop (execute the stop processing) after the execution of the automatic settlement in such a configuration, a predetermined error state is set after the stop processing is executed, so that a predetermined error occurs. Even in the state, it is possible to execute the notification related to the stop (notification related to the game stop).

When a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement process is completed (notification related to the predetermined error is executed). ), And when the game is configured to stop (execute the stop processing) after the execution of the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state may be set before the stop processing is executed. For such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that an error state has occurred.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected after the reel is stopped for the game to be stopped and before the stop processing is executed, a predetermined error is executed after the stop processing is executed. By setting the error state, it is possible to execute the notification related to the stop (notification related to the game stop) even in the predetermined error state.

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected at a timing before the stop processing is executed after the reel is stopped related to the game to be stopped, a predetermined error is made before the stop process is executed. It may be configured to be in the error state of. For such a configuration, it is possible to promptly notify that an error state has occurred.

When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB may be invalidated.

When the game is stopped due to stopping or automatic settlement, it is preferable to turn off the blocker (a state in which the game medal cannot pass).

If a predetermined error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation where notification related to stoppage or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, notification is performed by the effect control device S40), an error occurs. Notification may be executed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In such a case, when executing error notification,
(1) The notification related to the stop or automatic settlement is terminated and the error notification is executed (the notification may be a display on the effect display device S40 or a voice from a speaker).
(1-1) After that, if the error is canceled and the game by stopping or automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stopping or automatic settlement is restarted (1-2) After that, the error is canceled and the game is stopped. Alternatively, when the game by automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stop or automatic settlement is not restarted. (2) The effect display device S40 so that both the notification related to stop or automatic settlement and the error notification can be recognized. In different areas (or partially overlapping areas), the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement and the error notification may be configured as described above. In this example, even when the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, it is possible to execute the determination process of whether or not the error is a predetermined error.

In other words, in the stop / automatic settlement setting mode, the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted even in the situation where any of the screens (a) to (d) in FIG. 230 is displayed on the effect display device S40. A new screen (for example, (e) different from (a) to (d)) not shown in FIG. 230 may be provided so that the volume and volume may be increased during the display of the new screen. It may be configured so that the amount of light can be adjusted.

When the stop setting is in progress (the situation where "1 none" is determined in the stop setting mode), the setting is higher than when the stop setting is not in progress (the situation where "1 none" is determined in the stop setting mode). It may be configured to relatively increase the appearance rate of the suggestion effect (an effect that suggests the current set value, and the presence / absence of execution and the execution frequency differ depending on the current set value). This makes it possible to improve the player's willingness to play during the stop setting.

When a predetermined condition for executing the stop processing and a specific condition for executing the automatic settlement processing are set as the same condition, and if the same condition is satisfied, after executing the automatic settlement processing It may be configured to execute the stop processing. Further, in such a configuration, the stop processing may be executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes through the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). Good.

When only the stop function is valid (the predetermined condition for stopping is set and the specific condition for automatic settlement is not set), or the predetermined condition for executing the stop processing and the automatic settlement processing are When the stop processing is executed when the specific condition to be executed is set as a condition different from the specific condition to be executed, the settlement process may be configured to be executable by operating the settlement button during the stop.

While the settlement process related to the automatic settlement is being executed, the settlement process by operating the settlement button may not be executed (the settlement process is not newly executed by operating the settlement button).

The situation in which the stop setting is in progress may be referred to as "the stop function is effective", and the situation in which the stop setting is not set may be referred to as "the stop function is invalid" or "the stop function is not effective". Further, determining the predetermined condition may be referred to as "determining the predetermined condition", and the option of the predetermined condition described above in FIG. 229 or the like may be referred to as a "specific condition candidate". May include or may not include "1 none". Further, satisfying the determined predetermined condition may be referred to as "specific condition".

Further, the predetermined conditions of "5 difference number of sheets exceeding 500 sheets" and "6 difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets" described above in FIG. 229 are satisfied by "the number of game media acquired in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number". The predetermined conditions of "5 difference number of 500 sheets or more" and "6 difference number of 1000 sheets or more" are sometimes referred to as "the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period has reached a predetermined number or more". May be called.

Further, as described above in FIG. 229, in this example, a selection candidate for a predetermined condition related to stopping (sometimes referred to as a specific condition A selection candidate) and a selection candidate for a specific condition related to automatic settlement (specific condition). (Sometimes referred to as B selection candidate) is configured so as to partially overlap, but the selection candidate of a predetermined condition for stopping and the selection candidate of a specific condition for automatic settlement are
(1) All candidates are different (2) All candidates are the same (3) Only a part is the same Any of the above may be used. Even in the case of the above (2) or (3), it is possible to make the predetermined condition to be determined (set) and the specific condition to be determined (set) the same. However, it should be added that it is possible to make a difference.

The stop function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. As a specific example, as a stop processing, a stop processing of the launch function (the game ball is not fired even if the launch handle D44 is operated) and the entry of the game ball into various entrances are invalidated (enter the winning opening). The game ball is not paid out even if the ball is played, and the random number is not acquired even if the ball enters the entrance.) Processing and the like can be mentioned. As an alternative to the difference in the number of revolving pachinko machines, the difference between the number of launched balls and the number of payout balls related to the prize (subtracting the number of fired balls from the number of payout balls related to the prize) and the prize The total number of payout balls, which is the cumulative number of payout balls, can be mentioned.

<<< Configuration related to stop suggestion image >>>
The rotating body type gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be capable of displaying a stop suggestion image prompting the player to stop the rotating reel on the effect display device S40. The configuration applicable in such a configuration will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be combined with all the configurations according to this example.

<Stop suggestion image>
The stop suggestion image is an image displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side, and is a stop operation (operate the stop button to stop the reel) for the player while the reel is rotating. It is an image that prompts, for example, "Please stop the reel", "Please press the stop switch", etc. are displayed.

<Reel rotation time timer>
The reel rotation time timer is a timer controlled on the sub control board S side, and in this example, it is an increment timer, and when the reel rotation starts based on the operation of the start lever, the main control board M side. Sends a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer by receiving the reel rotation start command.

By providing the reel rotation time timer in this way, the stop suggestion image can be appropriately displayed based on the reel rotation time. Further, by configuring the reel rotation time timer to start measuring by receiving the reel rotation start command, the time during which the reel is rotating can be accurately measured.

When the reel rotation time timer is timing and all the reels are rotating, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), the sub-control board S suggests to stop. The image is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is completed, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the display of the stop suggestion image is erased. After erasing the display of the stop suggestion image, the effect display device S40 displays the corresponding effect image after the stop operation is executed (if the effect image is not switched by the stop operation, the effect image is stopped. The image displayed on the back layer of the suggestion image is displayed, and if the effect image is switched by the stop operation, the effect image after the switch is displayed).

In this way, by configuring the reel rotation time timer to be able to notify that the timer value has reached a predetermined value, it is possible to prompt the player to stop the operation and increase the number of games per vehicle per day. be able to. Further, by accepting the stop operation of the stop button (sometimes referred to as a stop switch) and erasing the display of the stop suggestion image, the visibility of the effect displayed on the effect display device S40 after the stop operation can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, when the sub-control board S receives the stop button reception command and clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero, (1) there is a reel that is still rotating after the reel is stopped by this stop operation. If so, the reel rotation time timer measurement is started again. (2) If this stop operation is the final reel stop operation and all reels are stopped, the reel rotation time timer is measured. Will not start. Further, after the stop operation is performed and the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, the effect image based on the stop operation is displayed on the effect display device.

With this configuration, it is possible to accurately measure the period during which the reel stop operation is not executed. For example, in a situation where a stop suggestion image is displayed before the stop operation related to the first stop, the game is played. Even though the person executes the stop operation related to the first stop and the stop suggestion image is deleted, a new stop suggestion image is displayed immediately after that, and the player's motivation to play is discouraged. The situation can be prevented.

The reel rotation time timer may be a decrement timer, and measurement start conditions, measurement end conditions (conditions for clearing the timer value to zero), and the like may be changed. As a specific example, the start lever is operated in a state where the operation of the start lever is valid (for example, all reels are stopped and a specified number of game medals are bet), and the start lever is operated from the main control board side. The measurement start condition may be configured such that a start lever operation command is transmitted to the sub-control board side and the sub-control board receives the start lever operation command.

Further, in a situation where the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (for example, 30 seconds) that is less than a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) for displaying a stop suggestion image, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. If a power failure occurs in which the gaming machine detects a power failure and executes power off processing, and then the power is turned on again, the initial value is set in the reel rotation time timer and the power is turned off again from the beginning. It may be configured to measure. As specific examples, (1) when the reel rotation time timer is an increment timer, the timer value is cleared to zero after the power is turned on and the timer is started again. (2) When the reel rotation time timer is an increment timer , The timer value is cleared to zero by the power off processing, and the timer is restarted after the power is turned on. (3) If the reel rotation time timer is a decrement timer, the initial value (for example, 60) is set to the timer value after the power is turned on. Seconds) may be set to start measurement, and so on.

With this configuration, even if an unexpected situation such as a power failure occurs, the reel rotation time timer is set to the initial value and the measurement is restarted from the beginning, so that an unintended stop suggestion image is displayed. It can be configured not to. The timing for resuming the measurement of the reel rotation time timer may be changed as long as it is a predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

In addition, as a configuration related to the above-mentioned minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds),
"The start lever D50 related to this game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses → Power is cut off before the minimum game time elapses → Power is restored → Measurement of the minimum game time is restarted from the middle → The minimum game time has elapsed → The reel starts to rotate, and the reel rotation start command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the reel rotation start command, so that the reel rotates. It may be configured as "start measurement of time timer".

<< Configuration related to errors >>
<Structure 1>
When a predetermined error (recoverable error, for example, a medal empty error) occurs (when detected) while displaying the stop suggestion image, the stop suggestion image is deleted and the predetermined error occurs. The error display is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, the reel rotation time timer is reset and the timing is stopped. It should be noted that the stop operation is impossible during the occurrence of the predetermined error (the rotating reel is not stopped even if the stop button is operated).

With this configuration, the error display can be displayed with priority, and the gaming machine can be made illegally strong.
<Structure 2>
In a situation where the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (for example, 30 seconds) that is less than a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) for displaying a stop suggestion image, a predetermined error (recoverable error, for example, for example) , Medal empty error) occurs (when detected), an error display related to the generated predetermined error is displayed on the effect display device S40. At that time, the reel rotation time timer is reset and the timing is stopped. Therefore, even when 30 seconds have passed from the occurrence of the error and the timing is such that the stop suggestion image should be displayed, the stop suggestion image is not displayed. It should be noted that the stop operation is impossible during the occurrence of the predetermined error (the rotating reel is not stopped even if the stop button is operated).

In the case of the above configuration 1 or 2, the rotating reel may be stopped even when a predetermined error occurs (the rotating reel can be stopped by operating the stop button).

With such a configuration, the reel can be stopped even if it takes time to clear the error, so that the stepping motor (sometimes called a step motor) is not overloaded. Can be done. If the stop operation related to the first stop is executed during the occurrence of a predetermined error, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may not be started, or the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may be started. When the stop operation related to one stop is executed, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer related to the second stop may be started.

Further, the rotating body type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Structure A)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error is resolved. The stop suggestion image is not displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts. "
(Structure B1)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → 30 seconds after the start of reel rotation. The specified error is resolved → A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
(Structure B2)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error remains unresolved. 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation, the stop suggestion image is not displayed → After that, the stop suggestion image is not displayed even if the specified error is resolved. "
(Structure C)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A predetermined error occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The predetermined error is resolved. The stop suggestion image is not displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts → The stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the predetermined error is resolved. "
It may be configured as described above.

Further, the reel rotation time timer may be configured to continue measuring even while the front door is open, and may be configured to operate as follows, for example. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Configuration D1)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → The front door is opened when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The reel rotates with the front door open. A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start. "
(Configuration D2)
"The reel starts rotating in the predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → The front door is opened when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The timer value of the reel rotation time timer is Close the front door in the situation of 30 seconds → The stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the reel rotation starts with the front door closed. "
With this configuration, even if the manager of the amusement park is working with the front door open, a stop suggestion image can be displayed, and it is properly notified that the stepping motor is under load. can do. In addition, in the situation where the front door is open, the configuration in which the error display indicating that the front door is open is not displayed on the effect display device S40 is illustrated.

Further, in the situation where the reel rotation failure occurs, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued, but the stop operation may not be accepted. For example, the reel rotation time timer may be configured to operate as follows. Good. An example is shown in which a stop suggestion image is displayed when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches 60 seconds.
(Structure E1)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A reel rotation failure occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The timer value of the reel rotation time timer. Reel rotation failure is resolved in the situation where is 30 seconds → A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
(Structure E2)
"The reel starts rotating in a predetermined gaming state, and the measurement of the reel rotation time timer starts. → A reel rotation failure occurs when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is 20 seconds. → The reel rotation failure remains unresolved. A stop suggestion image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of reel rotation. "
With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs, and even in a situation where the reel is not rotating normally (a situation where the reel is not rotating at a constant speed), a load is applied to the stepping motor. It is possible to display a stop suggestion image corresponding to the load of. In addition, by configuring so that the stop operation is not accepted during the occurrence of reel rotation failure, it may not be possible to accurately execute stop control when stopping during rotation failure, so the symbol is stopped and displayed at the wrong position. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused.

<< Operation of operating members on the main control board side >>
The reel is rotating in a predetermined gaming state, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is a specific value (a value smaller than 60 seconds from which the stop suggestion image is displayed), and the reel rotation time timer is clocked. In this situation, when the operating member controlled by the main control board M is operated, it may be configured to operate as follows.

(Action 1)
When the checkout button is operated (pressed and released immediately, or held down), the timer value is continued to be clocked. The settlement process may not be executed by the operation, or the settlement process may be executed.

(Action 2)
If the stop button is operated (pressed) while the stop button is not enabled, such as when acceleration processing for the reel is being executed, the timer value will continue to be clocked and the reel will not stop based on the operation of the stop button. ..

(Action 3)
When the stop button is operated (pressed) while the stop button is enabled, the timer value is continuously clocked and the reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button.

(Action 4)
When the bet button (max bet button, 1 bet button, etc.) is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked and the bet is not executed based on the operation.

(Action 5)
When the start lever is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the reel does not start rotating newly based on the operation (nothing happens because the reel is rotating).

(Action 6)
When the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is not changed based on the setting key switch from off to on.

(Action 7)
When the setting / reset button is operated, the timer value is continuously clocked, and the setting value is not changed or the error is not cleared based on the operation.
It may be configured as described above.

<< Configuration when push order navigation is displayed >>
When the push order navigation is executed in the game in which the predetermined game state (for example, during AT) and the predetermined combination (for example, the common bell) is won, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The push order navigation image suggesting the push order is displayed on the effect display device S40. (2) The timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), and the stop suggestion image is displayed. Even in the case of, the push order navigation image remains displayed (3) The display area of the stop suggestion image overlaps with the display area of one or more push order navigation images (4) Stops more than the push order navigation image. Suggested image has higher display priority (displayed on the front layer)
It may be configured as described above.

<< Modification example of stop suggestion image >>
As a modification of the configuration relating to the stop suggestion image, the configuration may be as follows.

<Stop suggestion voice>
The stop suggestion of the reel is not limited to the display of the stop suggestion image, and may be configured so that the stop suggestion is performed by voice. As a result, not only the visual sense but also the auditory sense can be notified. It should be noted that the stop suggestion may be given only by voice, or the stop suggestion image may be displayed and the voice may be output. Further, the stop suggestion may be given depending on the lighting mode of the lamp controlled on the sub-control board S side such as the decorative lamp unit D150, or the stop suggestion may be given in combination with the other configurations described above.

Further, as a display mode of the stop suggestion image, the content displayed on the rear surface layer may be made semi-transparent so that the content displayed on the rear layer may be visually recognized, or may be configured to blink at a predetermined cycle.

Similar to the display condition of the stop suggestion image, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) under the condition that the reel rotation time timer is timing and all the reels are rotating. Then, the sub-control board S outputs a stop suggestion sound (for example, "Please stop the reel") from the speaker S20. After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is terminated, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the output of the stop suggestion voice is terminated.

The sub-control board S also ends the display of the stop suggestion image and the output of the stop suggestion voice even when the sub input button SB is detected, and clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero. When the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero by pressing the sub-input button SB, the timer measurement is resumed immediately (a stop suggestion image can be displayed 60 seconds after the sub-input button SB is pressed. ). During reel rotation, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be cleared to zero each time the pressing of the sub input button SB is detected.

The reel rotation time timer is configured to output a stop suggestion voice when it reaches a predetermined value. However, once the stop suggestion voice is output, the stop suggestion voice is output every specific time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Output (when there is no stop operation). After that, when the player operates any of the stop buttons (when the operation of the stop button is accepted), the stop button acceptance command is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S stops. By receiving the button reception command, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is terminated, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and the output of the stop suggestion voice is terminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to periodically notify and promote the reel stop request.

<Control while the front door is open>
First, the screen display of the effect display device S40 when the front door DU is open will be described. Even when the sub-control board S detects that the front door DU is open, the sub-control board S continues to display the same effect as when the front door DU is closed on the effect display device S40. Further, when an error occurs, the sub-control board S displays an error screen for notifying the error even when it is detected that the front door DU is open. The error screen is, for example, a character display of "medal empty error" indicating that the hopper H40 is empty. It should be noted that the character display such as "medal empty error" may be displayed instead of the character display such as "HE".

With such a configuration, the production is not interrupted even when the door is opened, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, when the sub-control board S detects that the front door DU is open, it indicates that the front door DU is open to the effect display device S40 (for example, "the door is open". May be configured to display. In addition to the display on the effect display device S40, the sound may be output from the speaker. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the open state of the front door DU.

<When continuing to count the reel rotation time timer while the front door is open>
The sub-control board S may be configured to continue the measurement of the reel rotation time timer when the front door DU is opened. In such a configuration, the sub-control board S displays a stop suggestion image when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) when the front door DU is closed. And stop suggestion voice output is started. The sub-control board S does not display the stop suggestion image or output the stop suggestion voice even when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value while the front door DU is open. .. Further, the sub-control board S clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero when the front door DU is closed, or the timer of the reel rotation timer when the front door DU is closed and the setting / reset button is pressed. Clear the value to zero. When the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds) when the front door DU is closed and a stop suggestion image is displayed, the stop suggestion image is displayed by opening the front door DU. It may be configured to display the stop suggestion image again by erasing the display of and closing the front door DU.

With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly suggest the stop of the reel when the front door DU is closed without interrupting the notification of the error while the front door DU is open.

<When stopping the counting of the reel rotation time timer while the front door is open>
The sub-control board S may be configured to stop the measurement of the timer value of the reel rotation time timer when the front door DU is opened. In such a configuration, the sub-control board S clears the timer value of the reel rotation time timer to zero when the front door DU is closed, or when the front door DU is closed and the setting / reset button is pressed. The timer value of the reel rotation timer may be configured to be cleared to zero.

With this configuration, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the error notification is not interrupted while the front door DU is open.

The sub-control board S has a sub input regardless of whether the counting of the reel rotation time timer is continued while the front door is open or the counting of the reel rotation time timer is stopped while the front door is open. Even when the button SB is detected, the display of the stop suggestion image and the output of the stop suggestion sound are terminated, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero. As a result, the stop suggestion image can be erased without stopping the reel, and the effect can be made easier to see.

<Configuration to stop timer measurement during error>
The sub-control board S may be configured to stop the measurement of the reel rotation time timer when a predetermined error occurs. With this configuration, the notification of the predetermined error and the notification of the stop suggestion do not overlap, and the notification of the predetermined error can be reliably performed. In such a configuration, when a predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer may be restarted from the stopped timer value, or the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be set. It may be configured to restart the measurement after clearing zero.

<< Configuration related to power failure >>
The rotating body type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows as a configuration related to power failure.
"The game is executed in the predetermined gaming state and all the reels are rotating. → The power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing. A stop suggestion image may not be displayed even after a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of disconnection → power recovery → power recovery. ”

<< Action on stop suggestion image >>
Next, the action related to the stop suggestion image applicable to the spinning machine according to this example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236.
<Display condition 1 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
First, FIG. 233 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

On the other hand, after the front door DU is opened before the predetermined period elapses during reel rotation (for example, the front door DU is opened 30 seconds after receiving the reel rotation start signal), before the predetermined period elapses. Even when the front door DU is closed, the sub-control board S presses the "stop switch" that prompts the player to stop the reel after a predetermined period (60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel. An image display (stop suggestion image) such as "Please" or "Please stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating. If a predetermined period elapses (60 seconds have passed from the reception of the reel rotation start signal) while the front door DU is open, the effect display device S40 may be configured to be able to display a stop suggestion image. It may be configured not to be displayed.

With this configuration, even if the front door DU is opened after the reel starts rotating, the reel continues to rotate. Therefore, by continuing to measure the time during which the reel is rotating, the motor It is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the reel.

<Display condition 2 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 234 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

After that, poor rotation of the reel occurs. After that, the reel rotation failure is resolved by a game clerk or the like. Even during the occurrence of the rotation failure, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued.

The sub-control board S has "press the stop switch" and "reel" that prompt the player to stop the reel after a predetermined period (60 seconds) has passed since the reel rotation failure was resolved and the reel rotation started. An image display (stop suggestion image) such as "Please stop" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

With this configuration, reel rotation failure occurs, and even if the reel rotation seems to have stopped, the motor is continuously loaded, so the door is opened or the reel rotation is poor. Even if there is, by continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor.

In the figure, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (60 seconds) while the rotation failure is occurring (the situation where the rotation failure is not resolved), a stop suggestion image is displayed. It may be configured to be possible, or it may be configured to display when the rotation failure is subsequently resolved without displaying the stop suggestion image.

In addition, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (60 seconds) during execution of the reel reacceleration process (reel reacceleration process described in FIG. 33) related to the occurrence of rotation failure, The stop operation is invalid (the reel does not stop even if the stop button is operated). In that case, the stop suggestion image may be displayed, or the rotation failure may occur after that without displaying the stop suggestion image. It may be configured to be displayed when it is resolved.

<Display condition 3 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 235 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

Next, when the player presses any of the stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41 is pressed), the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped and displayed on the effect display device S40. The stop suggestion image that has been displayed is deleted.

On the other hand, after the stop suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device S40, a reel rotation failure occurs before the stop button is pressed, and then the stop button is pressed during the reel rotation failure. However, since the pressing of the stop button is invalid, the reel does not stop based on the pressing of the stop button. Further, even when the stop button is pressed, the stop suggestion image displayed on the effect display device S40 is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the reel in which the rotation failure occurs and the stop button pressed in the figure correspond to each other. For example, when the left stop button is operated as the stop button, the reel in which the rotation failure occurs is the left reel. ..

With this configuration, even if the reel rotation is defective and the reel rotation is apparently stopped, the motor is continuously loaded, so even if the reel rotation is defective. By continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor, and the stop button is pressed when a reel rotation failure occurs. If the reel does not stop due to the pressing, it is possible to suggest to the player or the game clerk that the reel rotation failure may continue by continuing to display the stop suggestion image.

<Display condition 4 of the stop suggestion image displayed when a predetermined time elapses during reel rotation>
Next, FIG. 236 will be described. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and starts the measurement of the reel rotation time timer (increment timer).

Next, the sub-control board S stops the reels when a predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). An image display (sometimes referred to as a stop suggestion image) such as "press the stop switch" or "stop the reel" is displayed on the effect display device S40. The reel is continuously rotating.

On the other hand, if a recoverable error occurs before the predetermined period elapses after the reel rotation starts (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer), the reel rotation will start. Even if a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, the stop suggestion image is not displayed, and the rotation of the reel is stopped because the stop button is pressed (here, the left stop button D41 is pressed). That is, while a recoverable error (for example, a medal empty error) is occurring, the error screen is displayed without displaying the stop suggestion image and the background image. Note that (1) while a recoverable error is occurring, the timer value is cleared to zero without measuring the reel rotation time timer, and when the recoverable error is resolved, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is started. Alternatively, (2) When the recoveryable error is being generated, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is continued, the recoverable error is resolved, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer has reached a predetermined value. May be configured to display a stop suggestion image, or (3) the reel rotation time timer is continuously measured while a recoverable error is occurring, and the stop button is operated while the recoverable error is occurring. By doing so, when the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, the measurement of the reel rotation time timer is started, the recoverable error is resolved, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer has reached the predetermined value. May be configured to display a stop suggestion image.

On the other hand, when a reel rotation failure occurs before the stop button is pressed and then the timer value of the reel rotation start timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, 60 seconds), a stop suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, even if the stop button is pressed while the reel rotation failure is occurring, the reel is not stopped based on the pressing of the stop button because the pressing of the stop button is invalid. Further, even when the stop button is pressed, the stop suggestion image displayed on the effect display device S40 is continuously displayed. It should be noted that the reel in which the rotation failure occurs and the stop button pressed in the figure correspond to each other. For example, when the left stop button is operated as the stop button, the reel in which the rotation failure occurs is the left reel. .. It should be noted that the left reel does not stop based on the pressing of the left stop button because the pressing of the left stop button is invalid (the acceptance of the stop operation is invalid) even when the rotation failure occurs for the middle reel. That is, when a rotation failure occurs in any of the reels, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the stop buttons becomes invalid.

With this configuration, even if the reel rotation is defective and the reel rotation is apparently stopped, the load is continuously applied to the motor, so even if the reel rotation is defective. By continuing to measure the time when the reel is rotating, it is possible to accurately measure the time when the load is applied to the motor, and when the stop button is pressed and the reel does not stop due to the pressing, By continuing to display the stop suggestion image, it is possible to suggest to the player or the game clerk that the reel rotation failure may continue. In addition, even if the motor is continuously loaded and the stop suggestion image should be displayed, the situation does not immediately affect the progress of the game, so that the progress of the game is greatly affected. It is possible to make a gaming machine capable of executing an appropriate display according to the situation of the game, in which the display of the returnable error is displayed with priority.

It is also possible to configure the stop suggestion image to be deleted when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is pressed while the stop suggestion image is being displayed. More specifically, when the sub-control board S detects that the sub-input button SB is pressed, the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, and the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero. When the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero by pressing the sub-input button SB, the timer measurement is resumed immediately (a stop suggestion image can be displayed 60 seconds after the sub-input button SB is pressed. ). During reel rotation, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer may be cleared to zero each time the pressing of the sub input button SB is detected. Further, when the sub control board S detects that the sub input button SB is pressed, the display of the stop suggestion image is erased, the timer value of the reel rotation time timer is cleared to zero, and until the reel rotation is started in the next game. The timer may not be measured (once the sub-input button SB is pressed to delete the stop suggestion image, the stop suggestion image is not displayed until the next game).

With this configuration, in a game in which the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 and a game in which an image suggesting a winning combination is displayed on the effect display device S40, the player can press the stop button. When you want to check the effect display device S40 before executing the reel stop operation (press the stop button) in order to grasp accurately, the display of the stop suggestion image is deleted by pressing the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2. Even in a gaming machine that can notify the load status of the motor by displaying a stop suggestion image, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player mistakenly operates the stop button and causes a disadvantage.

<<< Configuration / Reset Button Configuration >>>
As a configuration relating to the setting / reset button M30 included in the rotating drum type gaming machine according to this example, a configuration applicable to the rotating cylinder type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be added that one or more configurations described in detail below can be combined with all the configurations according to this example.

When the setting / reset button is ON (ON), the sensor related to the setting / reset button is detecting the pressing, and when the setting / reset button is OFF (OFF), the setting / reset button is used. Indicates a state in which the sensor related to is not detecting an operation (pressing). For example, even if the error cancellation or setting value selection operation is not executed even if the setting / reset button is operated, if the sensor detects that the setting / reset button is pressed, the setting / reset button is turned on. It is called (ON).

When an error occurs, the main control board M determines that the error has occurred and enters an error state, and a command indicating that the error has occurred is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Then, the sub-control board S grasps the occurrence of the error by receiving the command. Since the main control board M is configured to be able to transmit commands according to the type of error occurring to the sub control board S, the sub control board S grasps the type of error that has occurred by the received command. can do.

<(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (while the front door is closed)>
First, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior (while the front door is closed) when the number of credits is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) and the setting / reset button is on and various operation members are operated will be described. ..

First, the terms used in this figure will be described. The "max bet button" is the pressing of the max bet button, which is an operating member controlled on the main control board M side, which can bet the maximum number of bets in one game of the game machine by operating the max bet button. .. By pressing the max bet button, it may be possible to bet only the maximum number of bets. That is, when the credit is 3 or more, the number of bets is 0 and the number of bets is 3, the number of bets is 1 and the number of bets is 3, and the number of bets is 2 and the number of bets is 3. If the credit is 2 and the number of bets is 0, the bet will not be bet even if the max bet button is pressed, and if the credit is 1 and the number of bets is 1, the bet will not be bet even if the max bet button is pressed. You may. The fact that the "max bet button" is invalid means that even if the max bet button is operated in a situation where the credit is 3 or more and the number of bets is 0, no bet is made.

By operating the "1 bet button", it is possible to bet 1 bet each time the player presses within the range of the maximum number of bets in one game of the game machine (the number of bets is 1 or 2 in one operation). The number of bets is 3) by operating the number 2 or 3 times. This is the pressing of the 1-bet button, which is an operating member controlled on the main control board M side. It should be noted that even if the 1-bet button is operated a plurality of times, the number of bets may be set to 1 only (1 operation with 0 bets and 1 operation with 1 bet). The number of bets is 1 and the number of bets is 2, the number of bets is 1, and the number of bets is 3 and the number of bets is 1). In addition, "1 bet button" is invalid means that even if the 1 bet button is operated in the situation where the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 0, no bet is made.

"Medal insertion" means that the player manually inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot. "Automatic bet" means that when the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can play the game again without inserting a medal or pressing the bet button. It is a control to bet the same number of bets in this game. The "start lever" is to start the rotation of the reel by operating the start lever. The "left stop button" is a pressing of the left stop button to stop the rotation of the left reel. The "middle stop button" is a pressing of the middle stop button to stop the rotation of the middle reel. The "right stop button" is the pressing of the right stop button to stop the rotation of the right reel. The "payment button" is an operation of the payment button for executing a payment process for paying out bets and credits that have already been made as medals. The operation of the settlement button for executing the settlement process includes a single press (for example, 0.1 second on → off) and a long press (on for 0.3 seconds or more), and the settlement process is executed by the operation. When the bet is made, all the bet game medals and the credit game medals may be settled, or if there is no bet game medal, the credited game medal is settled and bet. If there are game medals, only the bet game medals may be settled.

The "setting / reset button (error cancellation)" is the pressing of the setting / reset button to be pressed to cancel the error. In the setting change mode, the setting value may be selected by operating the setting / reset button.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.
The pattern 4 may be applied at all times when the setting / reset button is on. As an example, when the set / reset button is on, the start lever, stop button, bet button (all bet buttons such as max bet button and 1 bet button may be disabled, or some bet buttons may be disabled. It may be configured to enable). With this configuration, even if the setting / reset button is turned on due to a failure, it can be configured so as not to affect the progress of the game.

(Pattern 5)
In pattern 5, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: invalid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.
The pattern 5 may be applied at all times when the setting / reset button is on. In addition, all bet buttons such as the max bet button and the one bet button may be disabled, or some bet buttons may be disabled. With this configuration, when the setting / reset button is on, even if the setting / reset button is illegally operated, the game can be stopped to prevent fraud. Further, even in a situation where the result is not notified in the final game of the continuous production, the result of the continuous production can be confirmed by inserting the game medal by care.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Disable, Start Lever: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Disable, Start Lever: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 9)
In pattern 9, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 10)
In pattern 10, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 11)
In pattern 11, max bet button: valid, 1 bet button: valid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 12)
In pattern 12, max bet button: valid, 1 bet button: valid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement Button: Enabled.

As described above, in the situation where the front door is closed and the setting / reset button (sometimes referred to as a reset switch) is on, the pattern 1 to the above pattern 12 may be configured to operate.

(Change example)
When it is configured in any of the above-mentioned patterns 1 to 12, it may have the following configuration.

When the betting operation (operation of the max bet button or operation of the 1-bet button) is invalid, the medal insertion (maintenance of the medal) is effective, but the start lever may be configured to be invalid.

When a predetermined operating member controlled by the main control board is being operated and the betting operation (max bet button operation or 1 bet button operation) is invalid and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped, automatic betting is performed. However, the start lever may be configured to be invalid.

The configuration may not have a 1-bet button. That is, the configuration excluding the item of "1 bet button" in patterns 1 to 12 in the figure may be applied.

The settlement button and the 1-bet button may be the same button. With this configuration, for example, when pressed for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), it functions as a 1-bet button, and when pressed for a long time (for example, 1 second or more), it functions as a settlement button. It can be configured to work.

When canceling the error with the setting / reset button, the error may be canceled based on the rising signal when the button is pressed (the error can be canceled by turning off → on). With this configuration, even if the setting / reset button breaks down when the setting / reset button is pressed and the button is continuously pressed on, the button is pressed (off → on). The error can be cleared with.

When the error is canceled by the setting / reset button, the error may be canceled based on the falling signal when the button is pressed (the error can be canceled by turning on → off). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to cancel an error due to fraud. More specifically, even if the setting / reset button is turned off → on due to fraud, it is necessary to turn it on → off in order to clear the error, and it takes time to clear the error. Therefore, it becomes difficult to cancel the error due to fraud.

In a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, from the situation where only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the reel related to the final stop is used. The setting / reset button is turned off → on when a slip is occurring, and then the setting / reset button is on. After the reeling is completed, the payout process is executed, but the pressing of the bet button is invalidated. (Bet is not made even if the bet button is operated). With this configuration, the progress of the game can be stopped when fraud is performed.
Similarly, in a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, since only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the final stop is received. When the reel related to the stop is slipping, the setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on. After the slip is completed, the payout process is executed, but the start lever It may be configured so that the game does not start (the reel does not rotate) based on the operation. By configuring in this way, if the player is slipping, a privilege is given to the player for the result of the game, but by preventing the progress of the next game, damage is caused if it is fraudulent. It can be suppressed.

In a game in which a small winning combination of PB = 1 (for example, a common bell) is won, from the situation where only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted and the reel related to the final stop is used. The setting / reset button may be turned off → on when slip occurs, and then the payout process may not be executed after the setting / reset button is on and the slip is completed (reel is stopped). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent profit acquisition due to fraud by stopping the progress of the game without giving profit due to fraud.

In the game in which the replay of PB = 1 is won, when only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted, and the reel related to the final stop is slipped. The setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on. After the reeling is completed, an automatic bet is made, but the subsequent operation of the start lever is invalidated (operate the start lever). However, the reel may not start rotating). With this configuration, the progress of the game can be stopped when fraud is performed.

In the game in which the replay of PB = 1 is won, when only the reel related to the final stop is rotating, the stop operation for the reel related to the final stop is accepted, and the reel related to the final stop is slipped. After the setting / reset button is turned off → on, and then the setting / reset button is on, the automatic betting may not be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent profit acquisition due to fraud by stopping the progress of the game without giving profit due to fraud.

<(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open) will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, 1 Bet Button: Enabled, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Enabled, Start Lever: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Disable, 1 Bet Button: Disable, Medal Insertion: Enabled, Automatic Bet: Disable, Start Lever: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disabled.

(Pattern 3)
In pattern 3, max bet button: invalid, 1 bet button: invalid, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: valid, start lever: valid only once, left stop button: valid only once, middle stop button: valid only once Enabled, right stop button: valid only once, settlement button: valid only once.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 has a max bet button: valid only once, a bet button: valid only once, medal insertion: valid, automatic bet: invalid, start lever: valid only once, left stop button: valid only once, medium. Stop button: Valid only once, Right stop button: Valid only once, Settlement button: Valid only once.

"Valid only once" means "max bet button", "1 bet button", "automatic bet", "start lever", "left stop button" after turning the setting / reset button off → on. , "Middle stop button", "Right stop button", or "Settlement button" is valid, and after performing any of the first operations, all the above operations are invalid. is there.

In this way, in the situation where a predetermined error occurs, the front door is opened, the setting / reset button is turned off → on in the situation where the front door is open, and the on state is maintained, the above It may be configured to act like pattern 1 to pattern 4.

In the above patterns 1 to 4, the front door is opened in a situation where no error has occurred, and the setting / reset button is turned off → on in a situation where the front door is open to maintain the on state. It may be applied to the situation.

It may also be configured as follows:
(1) After turning the setting / reset button off → on (error is cleared) (on continues), "max bet button", "1 bet button", "automatic bet", "left stop button", The first operation of the "middle stop button", "right stop button", or "payment button" may be enabled only once, and the "medal insertion" and "start lever" may be enabled. The "start lever" is effective after performing "medal insertion" while the setting / reset button is on, and if the reel starts rotating by operating the start lever, then the stop button is operated only once. It will be possible.
(2) After turning the setting / reset button off → on (error is cleared) (on continues), "medal insertion" is effective, and after "medal insertion", "payment button" is effective. It may be configured as follows. In addition, if there is a game medal bet in such a configuration and only the game medal bet is settled by one settlement process (credits are not settled), the settlement process is concerned. After that, the betting operation (max bet button or 1-bet button) may be invalidated (“medal insertion” is valid).

(Change example)
During the reel rotation, the error may not be notified even if a predetermined error occurs, or the predetermined error may not be notified even when the front door is open.

While the reel is rotating, if a predetermined error occurs, the error is notified, but the error may not be cleared by operating the setting / reset button.

When the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is on, the configuration may not notify the error even if a predetermined error occurs. In such a configuration, when the stop button is turned on → off, a predetermined error may be notified.

When the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is on, an error is notified when a predetermined error occurs, but the error may not be canceled by operating the setting / reset button.

<(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the Max Bet button is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is start lever: valid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is: start lever: invalid, left stop button: valid, middle stop button: valid, right stop button: valid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is: start lever: valid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: valid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is start lever: invalid, left stop button: invalid, middle stop button: invalid, right stop button: invalid, settlement button: invalid, setting / reset button (error cancellation): valid.

As described above, in the situation where the max bet button is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) In the situation where the credit is 0 and the number of bets is 0, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (2) The situation where the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 0. The situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (3) When the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 1, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (4) The situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the bet number is kept on when the credit is 50 and the number of bets is 3. (5) The credit is 0 and the number of bets is 3. Situation where the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (6) When one or more reels are rotating, the max bet button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. Situations that may be applied to the above situations.

<(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on will be described.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Enabled, Middle Stop Button: Enabled, Right Stop Button: Enabled, Settlement Button: Disable, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is Max Bet Button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Clearing): Enabled.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is Max Bet button: Enabled, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disable, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Enabled, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is Max Bet Button: Disable, Left Stop Button: Disable, Middle Stop Button: Disable, Right Stop Button: Disable, Settlement Button: Disable, Setting / Reset Button (Error Cancellation): Enabled.

As described above, in the situation where the start lever is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) When the number of bets is 0, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (2) When the number of bets is 1, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (3) The situation where the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued in the situation where the number of bets is 3. (4) The re-game symbol is stopped and the automatic bet is displayed. In the executed situation, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. (5) In the situation where one or more reels are rotating, the start lever is turned off → on and the on state is continued. The situation may be applied to the above situation.

<(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a pattern assumed as a behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on will be described. The on of the stop button in FIG. 237 (E) indicates the on during the period when the stop button is invalid. That is, the situation in which one of the stop buttons is pressed during the period when the stop operation by the stop button is not accepted (for example, all reels are stopped) is described. "Left stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the left stop button is valid, and "Middle stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the middle stop button is valid. Therefore, "right stop" indicates whether or not the stop operation based on the operation of the right stop button is effective. In this example, if any one of the stop buttons is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it indicates whether the other stop buttons are valid or invalid, and is turned on. It should be added that it does not indicate whether the stop button is enabled or disabled. For example, when the left stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "middle stop" and "right stop", but not to the item of "left stop". .. Similarly, when the middle stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "left stop" and "right stop", but it is applied to the item of "middle stop". Not done. Similarly, when the right stop button is turned from off to on and the on state continues, it is applied to the items of "left stop" and "middle stop", but it is applied to the item of "right stop". Not done.

(Pattern 1)
Pattern 1 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 2)
Pattern 2 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Disabled, Setting / Reset button (Error clearing): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 3)
Pattern 3 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 4)
Pattern 4 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Enabled, Middle stop button: Enabled, Right stop button: Enabled, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 5)
Pattern 5 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 6)
Pattern 6 is: Start lever: Enabled, Max bet button: Enabled, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 7)
Pattern 7 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Enabled, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

(Pattern 8)
Pattern 8 is: Start lever: Disable, Max bet button: Disable, Left stop button: Disable, Middle stop button: Disable, Right stop button: Disable, Settlement button: Disable, Setting / Reset button (error cancellation): Enabled. is there.

As described above, in the situation where any of the stop buttons is on, it may be configured to operate as in the above patterns 1 to 8.

In the above patterns 1 to 8, the pattern 8
(1) When the reel is rotating and the stop button is effective (constant speed state, etc.), the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued. In some situations, the start lever is turned off → on. (2) When the reel is stopped and the stop button is invalid, the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued (3) Reel rotation The situation where the stop button is turned off → on and the on state is continued in the situation where the stop button is disabled (acceleration state, etc.) may be applied to the above situation.

Although "error cancellation" is enabled in all of the above patterns 1 to 8, the error may not be cleared in any of the patterns. For example, (1) the stop button is turned off → on while the reel is rotating, and the reel is stopped. When the on state of the stop button is continued, (2) the stop button is pressed as the final stop operation during the reel rotation. It may be configured so that "error cancellation" cannot be performed when the reel related to the final stop is slipping from off to on and the stop button related to the final stop is continuously on.

(Change example)
Regarding the operation of various buttons and start levers, it seems that whether or not the subsequent game progress is possible differs depending on whether the operation is turned on when the operation is valid and when the operation is turned on when the operation is invalid. It may be configured. With this configuration, the game progresses when the operation member is turned on when the operation is valid, but if the on continues, there is a possibility of fraud related to the progress of the game. The operation of other operating members is invalidated, but the game does not proceed depending on the on by the operation of the operating member when the operation is invalid, so there is a possibility of fraud related to the progress of the game even if the on continues. Since it is low, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly distrusted without invalidating the operation of other operating members.

In addition, when the left stop button is turned from off to on when all reels are stopped and the on state is continued, the betting operation (max bet button or 1 bet button) and the "start lever" are effective. , In the situation where the reel is rotating by operating the start lever after operating the max bet button and betting the maximum number, the "middle stop button" and the "right stop button" are disabled (the left stop button is on). It may be configured to remain in the state). It can also be applied to a configuration in which the middle stop button is turned on and a configuration in which the right stop button is turned on. In such a configuration, when the left stop button is turned on → off while the reel is rotating, and then off → on, the stop operation of the left stop button is accepted and the left stop button is kept on. May be configured so that the middle stop button or the right stop button is enabled (accepts a stop operation). With such a configuration, the result of the game may differ depending on the reel stop order and the timing of accepting the stop operation, but usually one of the stop buttons is already turned on at the start of reel rotation. If the situation is different from the progress of the game, you can prevent such a situation by disabling the operation of the stop button, and if the stop button is turned on → off, the above Since the situation different from the normal game progress has been resolved, the stop button can be enabled to smooth the game progress.

In addition, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped and the right reel is rotating, the operation of the right stop button is accepted (off → on), the right reel stops and the game ends. When the right stop button is still on, the betting operation (max bet button or 1 bet button) and the "start lever" are effective, and after operating the max bet button and betting the maximum number, the start lever The "left stop button" and the "middle stop button" may be enabled in the situation where the reel is starting to rotate by operating. With such a configuration, the off → on of the right stop button as the final stop operation related to the previous game is detected, and if the on continues after that, the player executes the final stop operation. There is a high possibility that the game is still on, and it is unlikely that the right stop button is out of order. Therefore, by configuring the game so that it can proceed as usual, the progress of the game will be smooth. can do. It should be noted that the fact that the right stop button is the final stop operation is just an example, and the configuration can be applied even when the left stop button or the middle stop button is the final stop operation.

In addition, as described above, in the situation where one of the stop buttons is continuously on and one of the reels is rotating, the power is cut off, and then the power is restored, and when the power is restored, either one is used. If the stop button of is on, all stop buttons may be configured to be disabled. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the power is restored, and the left stop button remains on even when the power is restored ( If it was continued before the power was turned off, all stop buttons will be disabled.
(2) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the left stop button is released (on → off), and then the left stop button is pressed (). (Off → On), then the power is restored, and if the left stop button is still on at the time of the power restoration, all the stop buttons are invalidated.
(3) When the left stop button is on and all reels are rotating, the power is cut off, then the left stop button is released (on → off), and then the middle stop button is pressed (). (Off → On), then the power is restored, and if the middle stop button remains on at the time of the power restoration, all the stop buttons become invalid.
It may be configured as described above. With such a configuration, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure in the game hall, etc. in a situation different from the normal game progress in which one of the stop buttons is already turned on at the start of reel rotation. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the result of the game differs depending on the reel stop order or the timing of accepting the stop operation.

In addition, in the situation where the left stop button is still on and the middle stop button and the right stop button are disabled, the power is turned off, then the power is restored, and the left stop button is turned on. In the continuous situation, the operation of the middle stop button and the right stop button may be valid, and the operation of the middle stop button and the right stop button may be invalid.

Regarding the operation of various buttons and start levers, whether or not the subsequent game progress is possible differs depending on whether the operation is turned on when the operation is valid and when the operation is turned on when the operation is invalid. Will be described in detail below.

<Structure 1>
The start lever that causes the reel to rotate is maintained on (when the start lever is turned off → on in a valid situation, and the reel starts rotating based on the fact that the start lever is turned off → on). When it is, the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) is invalid, but the start lever turns off → on while the reel is rotating (the start lever turns off → on in the invalid situation). , The stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button) when the on is maintained may be enabled (in the case of a constant speed state). With this configuration, it is difficult for the game to proceed when the game is started illegally, but the operation of the start lever after the game is started may cause a failure or an operation error. By enabling the progress of the game because it is high, it is possible to maintain the fraud prevention effect and not hinder the progress of the game.

<Structure 2>
One of the stop buttons operated as a reel stop operation is turned on (when the stop button is turned off → on in a valid situation, and the reel is stopped based on the fact that it is turned off → on). When it is maintained, the other stop buttons are disabled, but after the reel is stopped, one of the stop buttons is turned off → on (the stop button is turned off → on in the invalid situation), and the on is maintained. When it is set (for example, when the left stop button is turned off → on in the situation where the left reel is stopped and the left stop button is kept on), the other stop buttons are enabled. May be.

<Structure 3>
When the bet button (max bet button, 1 bet button) is kept on (when the bet button is turned off → on in a valid situation, it is newly based on the fact that it is turned off → on. The operation of the start lever (betting) is invalid, but when the betting button is turned off → on (the betting button is turned off → on in an invalid situation) and the on state is maintained after the bet is completed. The operation of the start lever may be enabled.

<Structure 4>
It is in a state where no bet is made (the number of bets is 0), and the setting / reset button for clearing the error is turned on (when a predetermined error occurs, the setting / reset button is turned off → on. (The error is cleared based on the fact that the error is cleared) is maintained, the operation of the bet button is invalid, but the setting / reset button is turned off → on in the situation where no error has occurred, and The operation of the bet button while the on state is maintained may be valid.

In addition, the setting / reset button for clearing the error is turned on (when a predetermined error occurs, the setting / reset button is turned off) when the bet is not bet (the number of bets is 0). → The error is cleared based on the fact that it is turned on), the operation of the bet button is invalid, but the setting / reset button is turned off → on when an error occurs. However, when the cause of the error is not resolved and the error is not cleared, the operation of the bet button while the on state is maintained may be valid.

Further, when the setting / reset button is kept on, the setting may not be changed.

<< An example of a combination of configurations related to the operation member on the main side >>
An example of a combination of configurations relating to the above-mentioned operation member on the main side (operation member controlled on the main control board side) will be described in detail below.

<Combination 1>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 1
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 1
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 1
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 1

By combining and configuring as described above, all but the "max bet button", "1 bet button", and "payment button" in the special situation where the setting / reset button is turned on while the front door is closed Since it can be enabled, the game can proceed smoothly.
<Combination 2>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 1
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 3
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 4
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 4
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 5

By combining and configuring as described above, even if the same setting / reset button is turned on, the "max bet button", "1 bet button", and "payment button" can be set while the front door is closed, which is a special situation. It is disabled so that a new game cannot be started, and when the error is cleared while the front door is open, it is set / reset by enabling only once except for "medal insertion" and "automatic bet". Even when the error canceling operation of turning on the button is continued, the manager of the game hall can confirm whether or not the error is cleared and the game can be executed.
<Combination 3>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 5
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 8
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 8
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 8

By combining and configuring as described above, when the setting / reset button is on, basically all operations of the operating members on the main side can be invalidated, and an illegally strong gaming machine can be configured. it can.
<Combination 4>
(A) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when the front door is closed): Pattern 10
(B) Behavior when operating various operating members when the setting / reset button is on (when an error is cleared while the front door is open): Pattern 1
(C) Behavior when operating various operating members when the max bet button is on: Pattern 7
(D) Behavior when operating various operating members when the start lever is on: Pattern 7
(E) Behavior when operating various operating members when the stop button (left stop button, middle stop button, or right stop button) is on: Pattern 7

By combining and configuring as described above, when the main member is operated, the operation of the main member related to the progress of the game is invalidated, while the operation of the settlement button related to the end of the game is performed. By enabling it, it is possible to settle the medals held by the player even in an abnormal situation so as not to suffer any disadvantage.

Although the configuration related to the setting / reset button has been described above, the error may be canceled by turning on / off the door key switch operated when the front door is opened / closed (for example, the door key is inserted to the right). When twisted, the front door can be opened, and when twisted to the left, the error can be cleared). When configured in this way, it may be configured as follows.

<Structure 1>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and all the operations at the time of error cancellation and the errors that can be canceled are the same. As an example, when canceling the medal empty error, the error can be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, or turning the door key switch off → on.

<Structure 2>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and some or all of the operations at the time of error cancellation and the errors that can be canceled are different. As an example, (1) When canceling the medal empty error, it can be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, and it cannot be canceled by turning the door key switch off → on, and the door is opened. When canceling the error, it cannot be canceled by turning the setting / reset button off → on, but it can be canceled by turning the door key switch off → on, or (2) a medal empty error. When canceling, the setting / reset button may be turned off → on → off, or the door key switch may be turned off → on.

<Structure 3>
The error can be canceled by either the setting / reset button or the door key switch (the same error or different error may occur), and when canceling the error by the setting / reset button, The condition includes that the front door is open, and the condition may include that the front door is closed when the error is cleared by the door key switch.

<Structure 4>
The error can be canceled by either the setting / reset button or the door key switch (the same error or different error may occur), and when canceling the error by the setting / reset button, The condition includes that the front door is open, and when the error is cleared by the door key switch, it may be configured so that whether the front door is closed or open is not included in the condition.

<Structure 5>
It has a setting / reset button and a door key switch, and when the setting / reset button is on (pressed) and when the door key switch is on (door key is twisted to the left). In some cases, the valid / invalidity of the operation member controlled by the main control board M may be different. As an example, the operation of the start lever may be invalid when the setting / reset button is on, and the operation of the start lever may be effective when the door key switch is on.

In addition, one or a plurality of the above <configuration 1> to <configuration 5> may be combined. Further, the above-mentioned configuration related to the setting / reset button (the configuration related to the setting / reset button may be replaced with a door key switch) may be applied to the gaming machine adopting the above <configuration 1> to <configuration 5> (the configuration related to the setting / reset button may be replaced with a door key switch). The above-mentioned configuration that is valid only once, and various valid / invalid configurations).

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machine having the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to the present embodiment has been described. In the configurations from this example to the sixth embodiment, they can be appropriately combined and configured. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine in which the configurations according to this example are combined across the configurations according to the sixth embodiment. Are listed.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of <Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, the configuration according to <Structure 1> of << Configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> in this example, and <<< A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to <4th embodiment medal return member >>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion is , It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the medal is bounced up to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Distributor >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing for starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and when a player who receives a game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the player can receive the game medal payout from the first card to the predetermined number of games at the same interval. , It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the sixth embodiment. <When the processing command and channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement according to the sixth embodiment >>><< Configuration 1 >> To be a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the voice. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>> in the third embodiment and <<<< 4th in the fourth embodiment. Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the medal return member >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing It is possible to prevent the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though the above is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is relative to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a sufficient distance and capable of preventing a situation in which the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, in the third embodiment, <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>><< Configuration 1 >>, and in the fifth embodiment, <<<< Fifth Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to the drive control of the medal payout device >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing It is possible to prevent the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the game medal is not executed, and when the player who receives the game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals. It is possible to receive the payout of game medals from the first piece to a predetermined number at the same interval, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >>> in the third embodiment and <<<< 6th embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Form A configuration in which the processing command and the channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement >>><< configuration 1 >> It will be a game machine that has been played.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but when an error occurs at this timing, , The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the above is not executed, and while the processing accompanied by the audio output is being executed, the main control board M and the main control board M When the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player does not end the output of the voice, so that the user-friendly gaming machine can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine. Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the 4th embodiment and <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device in the 5th embodiment >> in the 5th embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medals bounce back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medals pays out the predetermined number of game medals, the same interval from the first to the predetermined number of medals. It is possible to receive the payout of game medals at, and to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<< medal return member >>> in the fourth embodiment and <<< the main processing related to the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment during execution. Processing when communication between the control board and the sub-control board is disconnected When the command and the channel are one-to-one >>> The gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion. However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medal is bounced up to the medal receiving port D341, and the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process accompanied by the output of the voice is being executed. In such a case, the player does not end the output of the voice, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, the configuration according to <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>> in the fifth embodiment and <<< execution of the process related to the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a player who receives a game medal payout pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal can be paid out at the same interval from the first card to the predetermined number of game medals. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the player, and when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the sound output, the player hears the sound. Since the output of is not terminated, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the above configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. It prevents the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine capable of preventing a situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<<<<< drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. Prevents the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When the medals are paid out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 13>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. <Example of medal addition processing by the input sensor in the third embodiment >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> in << Configuration 1 >> and <<<<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. The configuration according to <<<<<< the drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>>> in the fifth embodiment and the processing related to <<< the settlement of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during execution When the command and channel are one-to-one >>> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> To do.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player sees. It is possible to surely prevent the situation where it cannot be done, and in the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that an error occurs, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition processing is performed. Prevents the medal from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the game medal. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal receives a predetermined number of game medals. When paying out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number, so the player does not feel uncomfortable, and while the process accompanied by the output of voice is being executed, the main When the communication between the control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the game machine because the output of the voice is not completed. It is possible to provide a friendly game machine.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of <Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a game machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. The first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on. In the state, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error occurs, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off). Then, the blocker D100 prevents the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the execution process (such as refunding the game medal to the outlet D240) is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that enables it.

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to << Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is the game medal. A user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the machine and makes it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving entrance D341. Can be provided.

<Combination configuration 16>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Distributor >>>>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. When the cards are paid out, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first card to a predetermined number of cards, so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in this example, << configuration related to display start of push order navigation >><configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and << configuration in the sixth embodiment. <When the processing command and channel are one-to-one when the communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during the execution of the processing related to the settlement according to the sixth embodiment >>><< Configuration 1 >> To be a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting. By determining the speed state → the period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), for example, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on by the lamp (book). In the example, it can be executed by using the reel window frame lamp D310, etc.), and it is unlikely that the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the voice is not completed. Can provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 18>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and <<< example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >>> in the third embodiment < A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to <Structure 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden that the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When the closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error has occurred. , The execution processing of the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the game medal is not executed even though the credit addition processing is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the user from getting into the game machine (swallowing).

<Combination configuration 19>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining them.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player must visually recognize the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of being able to visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, and the medal falls. The depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance from the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving entrance D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent.

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, it relates to the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> in this example, and <<<< the drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the push order navigation must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden that the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, and the game medal. When a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player who receives the payout can receive the payout of the game medals from the first piece to the predetermined number at the same interval, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable and user-friendly. A game machine can be provided.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << configuration related to the display end of push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<< sixth embodiment settlement processing in the sixth embodiment, the main control board and the sub The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are different, so that the two display devices are displayed. It is possible to avoid the situation where the player must visually recognize the push order navigation at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of the player being able to visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process accompanied by the output is being executed, the player does not end the output of the sound, so that some kind of thing is done in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize that a problem has not occurred.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, << Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >> in this example, and << Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor in the third embodiment >> in the third embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to <Structure 1 >>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credits are still available. If an error occurs at this timing even though the addition process is not performed, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the error occurs, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off and the blocker D100 turns off the blocker D100). It is possible to prevent the game medal from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the execution process (such as refunding the game medal to the discharge port D240) is not in time and the credit addition process is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >> and the configuration related to <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. It is a gaming machine configured by combining.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clarified, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is relative to the diameter of the gaming medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance and makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that collides with the collision portion bounces off to the medal receiving entrance D341. ..

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, in this example, it relates to the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >>, and in the fifth embodiment, it relates to <<< drive control of the medal payout device in the fifth embodiment >>>>. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of winning medals due to a mistake in the pushing order, and when the player who receives the payout of the game medals pays out the predetermined number of game medals. Since the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first card to a predetermined number of cards, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation >>, and the configuration related to <<< sixth embodiment settlement processing in the sixth embodiment, the main control board and the sub The gaming machine is configured by combining the processing command at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board and the configuration related to << Configuration 1 >> of >>> when the channel is one-to-one.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Because it is clear, it is unlikely that the player will have an unintended disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of cards to be acquired due to a mistake in the push order, etc. A user-friendly game that enables the player to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end when the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. Machines can be provided.

The example of the gaming machine combined over the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to this example has been described above, but these are examples, and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment from the configuration according to this example is appropriate. , Can be combined and configured.

<<<<<< Disclaimer of the 15th embodiment >>>>>
Next, as a fifteenth embodiment, an example of the structure of the front door locking device and the back box (base) UB will be described. In the fifteenth embodiment, the spinning machine P shown in FIG. 2 is different from the spinning machine shown in FIG. 2 in that the cover of the locking device shown by the reference numeral CV in FIG. 2 is not provided. Is different. Hereinafter, this point and the like will be described, but with respect to the housing and each member and the like in the housing, FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 66, FIG. 117 and the like used in the above-described embodiment will be referred to as appropriate as necessary. I will do it. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, for convenience of reference and explanation with reference to FIG. 2, a new reference is added to a member which has already been described but is not designated in the above-described embodiment, such as the back box UB. Or, in the above-described embodiment, a member (for example, the above-mentioned "hinge HJ") and the like which are newly described by giving a name or a reference to a member which appears only in the drawings will appear. Needless to say, it does not exist only in the 15th embodiment, but also exists in each of the above-described embodiments. Needless to say, this is not limited to the fifteenth embodiment, but the same applies to the above-described embodiment.
<<< Schematic structure of the fifteenth embodiment >>>

First, the schematic structure of the housing KY will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 243, the housing KY of the revolving pachinko machine P has a back box UB having an opening on the front side and a front door DU capable of opening and closing the opening of the back box UB. .. The back box UB is formed in a box shape including a bottom surface portion UB10 on which the medal payout device H and the like are placed, left and right side surface portions UB12A and UB12B, a top surface portion UB14, and a back surface portion UB16. Further, two hinges HJs that support the front door DU so as to be openable and closable are provided on the left side surface portion UB12A of the back box UB at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, of the back surface side of the front door DU, the side portion on the anti-hinge side (the position where the cover CV is located in FIG. 2. The rotating body type gaming machine P of the present embodiment does not have the cover CV in FIG. 2 as described above. (Although it is in a state, the illustration is omitted), as shown in FIGS. 238 and 243, a locking device DJ for locking the front door DU is provided.
<<< Structure of the locking device in the 15th embodiment >>>

The locking device DJ is a predetermined key by rotating the front door DU in the open state (open state) that is unlocked by the locking device DJ to a position that closes the opening of the back box UB. It is locked without being inserted and turned, and can be unlocked by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole D260 (see FIG. 1) and turning it in the locked state. As shown in FIG. 238, this locking device DJ has a lock portion DJ10 for locking the front door DU and a lock portion DJ30 for operating the lock portion DJ10 with a key inserted through a keyhole D260. ing.
<<< Structure of lock front DJ10 >>>

The lock portion DJ10 is rotatably supported by a fixing member DJ11 fixed to a structure on the back surface side of the front door DU and an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the fixing member DJ11 via pins DJ12a, respectively, and the front door Two hook-shaped upper hooks DJ13A and lower hooks DJ13B that protrude toward the back surface side of the DU and are provided at intervals in the vertical direction, and a first moving member DJ14 that is vertically movablely attached to the fixing member DJ11. And a second moving member DJ15, and the upper hook DJ13A and the lower hook DJ13B are provided on the back box UB at intervals in the vertical direction, respectively, with the upper locking member UB20A and the lower locking member. The front door DU is locked by locking the UB 20B (see FIG. 2), and the front door DU is unlocked by releasing the lock.

As shown in FIG. 238, the fixing member DJ11 fixes the first moving member DJ14, the second moving member DJ15, the upper and lower hooks DJ13A and DJ13B, and the lock portion DJ30 while supporting them on the back surface side of the front door DU. .. The fixing member DJ 11 is integrally provided with a first side portion DJ 11A substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU and extending vertically and a second side portion DJ 11B substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU and extending vertically. This is a metal plate whose cross-sectional shape is formed into a substantially L-shape. The upper hook DJ13A and the lower hook DJ13B are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the fixing member DJ11, respectively, as described above, and the lock portion DJ30 is located near the lower end portion when viewed from the vertical center portion of the fixing member DJ11. Is installed (more on this later).

A locking recess DJ13a for locking to the upper locking member UB20A is formed at the tip of the upper hook DJ13A, and the rear end of the upper hook DJ13A is connected to the upper end of the first moving member DJ14 via a pin DJ12b. It is attached so that it can rotate. In the upper hook DJ13A, a portion between the locking recess DJ13a and the pin DJ12b and slightly above the locking recess DJ13a is rotatably fixed to the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11 via the pin 12a.

With this configuration, the first moving member DJ 14 moves upward from the locking position (initial position) shown by the solid line in FIG. 238 toward the unlocking position shown by the alternate long and short dash line along the fixing member DJ 11. Then, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 238, the pin DJ12b moves upward together with the first moving member DJ14 and pushes up the rear end portion of the upper hook DJ13A, so that the upper hook DJ13A is moved upward. It rotates (swings) around the pin DJ12a so that its tip is lowered, so that the locked state with the upper locking member UB20 is released (the front door DU is unlocked). It has become.

A locking recess DJ13b for locking to the lower locking member UB20B is formed at the tip of the lower hook DJ13B, and the second side of the fixing member DJ11 is formed at the rear end of the lower hook DJ13B via a pin DJ12a. It is rotatably supported by the portion DJ11B. Further, in the lower hook DJ13B, a portion between the locking recess DJ13b and the pin DJ12a and slightly below these is rotatably attached to the lower end portion of the first moving member DJ14 via the pin DJ12b.

With this configuration, when the first moving member DJ14 moves upward from the locking position shown by the solid line in FIG. 238 toward the unlocking position shown by the alternate long and short dash line along the fixing member DJ11, the pin DJ12b is moved. It moves upward together with the first moving member DJ14 and pushes up the portion of the lower hook DJ13B between the pin DJ12a and the locking recess DJ13b. As a result, the lower hook DJ13B rotates about the pin DJ12a so that its tip portion rises upward, and the locked state with the lower locking member UB20B is released.

The first moving member DJ14 is interposed between the protruding piece DJ11C protruding from the first side portion DJ11A of the fixing member DJ11 toward the back surface of the front door DU and the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11. The locking position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 238 or the position of FIG. 239 (a)) and the front door DU that lock the front door DU along the fixing member DJ11 while being guided by the second side portion DJ11B and the protruding piece DJ11C. Is provided so as to be movable up and down at the unlocking position (the position of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 238 or the position of FIG. 239 (b)).

Although only one projecting piece DJ11C as a guide member for the first moving member DJ14 is shown in FIG. 238, a plurality of projecting pieces DJ11C may be provided at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the guide member is not limited to this protruding piece DJ11C. For example, the second side portion DJ11B of the fixing member DJ11 is provided with a protruding piece protruding from the second side portion DJ11B toward the first moving member DJ14, while the first moving member DJ14 is provided with an elongated hole extending vertically, and the elongated hole is described above. By configuring the protruding piece of the second side portion DJ11B of the above to be inserted, the vertical movement of the first moving member DJ14 with respect to the fixing member DJ11 may be guided. In short, it is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to guide the vertical movement of the first moving member DJ14 with respect to the fixing member DJ11. Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting piece DJ11C is provided integrally with the first moving member DJ14, but it goes without saying that a projecting piece of another member may be provided instead.

The first moving member DJ14 extends from the first hanging DJ14A substantially hanging from the upper end thereof and the first hanging DJ14A in the side direction (right side when viewed in FIG. 238) on the hinge HJ side of the front door DU. The first bent portion DJ14B bent in the direction, the second hanging portion DJ14C substantially hanging from the extending direction tip (right end when viewed in FIG. 238) of the first bent portion DJ14B, and the first from the second hanging portion DJ14C. The second bent portion DJ14D bent so as to extend in the direction of the hanging portion DJ14A (left side when viewed in FIG. 238), and the second bent portion DJ14D which is substantially hung from the extending direction tip (left end when viewed in FIG. 238). It consists of the lower part of the three hangings DJ14E.

A spring hooking portion DJ14a to which the upper end portion of the spring BN is attached is integrally provided at the central portion in the vertical direction of the first hanging portion DJ14A and the end portion on the first side portion DJ11A side of the fixing member DJ11. The moving member DJ14 is constantly urged downward by this spring BN. Further, the second hanging portion DJ14C is formed with an upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and a lower insertion hole DJ15Cb through which the upper protrusion DJ32 and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 in the lock portion DJ30 described later are inserted, respectively. Further, the second bent portion DJ14D of the first moving member DJ14 is integrally provided with a handle DJ14F for projecting toward the back surface side of the front door DU and inserting and gripping the first opening UB17 described later. ing. In the present embodiment, the handle DJ14F is provided integrally with the second bent portion DJ14D to form a part of the first moving member DJ14, but instead of this, a separate handle DJ14F is attached / detached. It may be provided so as to be free. Further, in the present embodiment, the first moving member DJ14 is provided with the handle DJ14F, but the first moving member DJ14 without the handle DJ14F may be used.

Like the first moving member DJ14, the second moving member DJ15 has a first hanging DJ15A substantially hanging from the upper end thereof and the first hanging DJ15A in the direction of the hinge HJ side of the front door DU. The first bent portion DJ15B bent so as to extend, the second hanging portion DJ15C substantially hanging from the extending direction tip of the first bent portion DJ15B, and the second hanging portion DJ15C extending in the direction of the first hanging portion DJ15A. It is composed of a second bent portion DJ15D (see FIG. 239) bent in this manner and a third hanging portion DJ15E (see FIG. 239) substantially hanging from the tip of the second bent portion DJ15D in the extending direction.

As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the second moving member DJ15 is arranged so that the first bent portion DJ15B is located above the first bent portion DJ14B of the first moving member DJ14 in the locked position. This position is the initial position of the second moving member DJ15. The first hanging portion DJ15A of the second moving member DJ15 is integrally provided with a spring hooking portion DJ15a located below the spring hooking portion DJ14a of the first moving member DJ14 and to which the lower end portion of the spring BN is attached. The second moving member DJ15 is constantly urged upward by this spring BN. Further, in the second hanging lower portion DJ15C of the second moving member DJ15, the upper insertion hole and the lower insertion hole (not shown) similar to the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb of the first moving member DJ14 are provided. It is formed so as to overlap and communicate with DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb. Therefore, the upper protrusion DJ32 and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 in the lock portion DJ30 described later are inserted into the upper insertion hole and the lower insertion hole of the second hanging lower portion DJ15C via the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca and the lower insertion hole DJ15Cb. It is possible.

Further, the third hanging portion DJ15E of the second moving member DJ15 is integrally provided with a detection piece DJ15Ea protruding toward the second hanging portion DJ15C. The detection piece DJ15Ea is provided in the housing KY and is for being detected (to release the error state) by the photosensor FS having the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2 shown in FIG. 238. That is, as shown in FIG. 239 (a), when the second moving member DJ15 is in the initial position, the light emitting element FS1 is in a light receiving state (ON state) receiving light from the light receiving element FS2. In this state, when the lock portion DJ30 operates by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)} as described above (this will be described later), the initial position. By moving the second moving member DJ15 in the above to the reset position below it (see FIG. 239 (c)), the detection piece DJ15Ea is interposed between the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2, and the light receiving element DS1 is used. By blocking the light, the light receiving element FS2 is put into a non-light receiving state (OFF state), and for example, an error state such as a door opening error is released (the error state is reset). In order to release this error state, for example, the error state may be released by pressing the reset button provided in the housing. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection piece DJ15Ea is provided integrally with the second moving member DJ15, but it goes without saying that a detection piece of another member may be provided instead.
<<< Structure of the lock portion DJ30 of the 15th embodiment >>>

As shown in FIGS. 240 and 242, the lock portion DJ30 is arranged so as to be located between the first bent portion DJ14B and the second bent portion DJ14D of the first moving member DJ14 on the back surface side of the front door DU. It is located below the center CML (see FIG. 242) in the vertical direction of the front door DU. As shown in FIG. 240, the lock portion DJ30 has an inner cylinder (not shown) that is rotated by a key inserted from a keyhole D260 (see FIG. 1) inside the outer cylinder DJ31, and is on the opposite side of the inner cylinder from the keyhole D260. A plate-shaped cam DJ34 having an upper protrusion DJ32 and a lower protrusion DJ33 is attached to the end portion of the above. The upper protrusion DJ32 of the cam DJ34 can be inserted into the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca of the first moving member DJ14 and the upper insertion hole of the second moving member DJ15, and the lower protrusion DJ33 of the cam DJ34 is inserted into the upper insertion hole of the first moving member DJ14. It can be inserted into the lower insertion hole of the hole DJ14Cb and the second moving member DJ15.

Therefore, when the key inserted into the inner cylinder through the keyhole D260 is turned clockwise (in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction) in the closed state (closed state) in which the front door DU is locked, the initial stage is changed. The cam DJ34 at the position (the position shown in FIG. 239 (a)) rotates about the rotation shaft DJ34a so that the lower protrusion DJ33 faces upward, so that the lower protrusion DJ33 becomes the first moving member DJ14. The lower insertion hole DJ14Cb is pushed up while entering the lower insertion hole of the lower insertion hole DJ14Cb and the second moving member DJ15 (see FIG. 239 (b)). As a result, the first moving member DJ 14 moves upward, and as described above, the locked state of the upper hook DJ 13A and the lower hook DJ 13B is released along with this movement.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the inner cylinder through the keyhole D260 is turned counterclockwise while the front door DU is closed, the cam DJ34 in the initial position has its upper protrusion DJ32 directed downward. By rotating around the rotation shaft DJ34a, the upper protrusion DJ32 enters the lower insertion hole of the second moving member DJ15 via the upper insertion hole DJ14Ca of the first moving member DJ14, and enters the lower insertion hole. It will be pushed down (see FIG. 239 (c)). As a result, the second moving member DJ15 moves downward, and the detection piece DJ15Ea of the second moving member DJ15 cuts the photosensor FS (the detection piece DJ15Ea is between the light emitting element FS1 and the light receiving element FS2 of the photosensor FS. By intervening), the error state will be released.

As shown in FIG. 240, the lock portion DJ30 is provided on the back surface side of the front door DU by a fixing portion including a fixing base DJ36, a screw hole DJ36a, an insertion hole DJ11a, a screw hole DJ11b, and a screw N on the back surface side of the front door DU. It is a structure that is fixed from. Specifically, a fixed base DJ36 in which a screw hole DJ36a is formed is provided on the opposite side of the keyhole D260 of the outer cylinder. Further, in the first side portion DJ11A of the fixing member DJ11, an insertion hole DJ11a for inserting the outer cylinder DJ31 of the lock portion DJ30 from the back surface side of the front door DU, and a screw hole into which the screw N of the lock portion DJ30 is screwed. A screw hole DJ11b is formed at a position corresponding to the DJ36a and into which the screw N is screwed.

Then, while inserting the outer cylinder DJ31 of the lock portion DJ30 into the insertion hole DJ11a of the fixing member DJ11 from the back surface side of the front door DU, the positions of the screw hole DJ36a of the lock portion DJ30 and the screw hole DJ11b of the fixing member DJ11 are aligned. In this state, the lock portion DJ30 is fixed to the fixing member DJ11 by inserting the screw N, which is a fixture, from the back surface side of the front door DU into these screw holes DJ36a and DJ11b and screwing them together. As described above, the lock portion DJ30 has a structure that can be attached to and detached from the fixing member DJ11 (with respect to the back surface of the front door DU) by the screw N.

In the present embodiment, the screw N is used as the fixing tool of the fixing portion, but other fixing tools such as pins may be used as long as the lock portion DJ30 can be fixed, and welding or Needless to say, it may be fixed directly by adhesion or the like. Further, in order to allow the lock portion DJ30 to be attached only from the back surface side of the front door DU, the inner diameter of the insertion hole DJ11a of the fixing portion FB gradually increases from the back surface side to the front side of the front door DU. The shape may be tapered so as to be narrowed, and the outer shape of the outer cylinder DJ 31 inserted through the insertion hole DJ 11a may also be made to match the taper shape.

As described above, the lock portion DJ30 has a structure of being fixed from the back side of the front door DU and cannot be attached to or detached from the front side of the front door DU. Therefore, when the front door DU is closed, the front door DU is frontal. It cannot be removed from the side, and the lock portion DJ30 cannot be removed unless the front door DU is opened. For this reason, even if you try to remove the lock DJ30 by fraudulent activity, you cannot do it unless you have the key, and even if you have the key, you must perform a conspicuous act of opening the front door DU. This type of fraud can be prevented because it makes it harder to cheat.

<<< Structure of back box UB in the 15th embodiment >>>
Next, the structure of the back box UB will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the back surface UB 16 of the back box UB has a substantially rectangular first opening UB 17 for inserting a hand when performing various operations such as maintenance inside the housing KY. The front door DU is formed so as to straddle the central CML (see FIG. 242) in the vertical direction (in other words, the central CML passes substantially the center in the height direction of the first opening UB17).

The first opening UB17 is formed so that its maximum diameter (in this embodiment, the diagonal distance TS10 described later) is equal to or larger than the width of the human hand so that a person can insert a hand. This person's hand width is the radial middle hand point (second middle hand head) with the fingers and palm extended, the 2nd to 5th fingers (from the index finger other than the thumb to the little finger) aligned, and the thumb abducted. It is the linear distance from the point that protrudes most to the thumb side of the hand) to the middle hand point on the scale side (the point that protrudes to the little finger side of the fifth middle hand head).

The approximate size of human hand width, especially Japanese hand width, is known from statistics. For example, according to the database "AIST (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology) Human Body Size Database 1991-92" of the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, the average value of the hand width of an adult male is 83.3 mm. The maximum value is about 95.1 mm, and the average value is about 74 mm and the maximum value is 82.1 mm for the hand width of an adult female. In addition, according to the database "AIST (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology) Human Body Size Database 1997-98" of the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, the average value of the hand width of an adult male is 81.8 mm. The maximum value is about 89 mm, and the average value of the hand width of an adult woman is 73.6 mm, and the maximum value is 85 mm. In addition to the above, statistical information on the dimensions of the human body includes the "Human Characteristics Database" of the Human Life Engineering Research Center.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first opening UB17 is such that the width WI10 is about 90 mm, the height HI10 is about 86 mm, and the diagonal distance TS10 is about 120 mm. The distance TS10 is larger than the maximum diameter of the human hand width of 95.1 mm in the above statistics, and the hand can be inserted into the first opening UB17 with a margin. .. The first opening UB17 has a rectangular shape as described above, but each corner of the four corners is chamfered in a substantially arc shape in order to smoothly insert a hand. Needless to say, even in the case of such a rounded quadrangle with rounded corners, the maximum diameter thereof is still the distance TS10 of the diagonal line TS.

Here, regarding the size of the first opening UB17, the larger the size, the easier it is to insert a hand and perform various operations. On the other hand, if the size is too large, the medal payout device inside the housing KY from the first opening UB17. (Game medium payout device) H, the main board case M40, and the like may fall off to the outside or be taken out by fraudulent acts. Therefore, regarding the size of the first opening UB17, it is preferable that the hopper H40 and the main substrate case M40 are of a size that cannot be pulled out from the first opening UB17.

Specifically, the medal payout device H has, for example, a small one having a width of about 200 mm, a height of about 200 mm, and a depth of about 200 mm, and the main substrate case M40 has a size of about 200 mm. For example, a small one has a horizontal width (vertical direction as seen in FIG. 128) of about 380 mm and a vertical width (horizontal direction as seen in FIG. 128) of about 170 mm. In this case, from the viewpoint that neither the medal payout device H nor the main board case M40 can be pulled out as the size of the first opening UB17, the size of the first opening UB17 is these medal payout devices. Of the above-mentioned sizes of H and the main board case M40, it is sufficient if the size is smaller than the vertical width of 170 mm of the smallest main board case M40. In this case, the size of the first opening UB17 may be such that the diagonal distance TS10 is less than 170 mm. As described above, the lower limit of the size of the first opening UB17 is the size at which the hand can be inserted as described above (the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter, is equal to or larger than the human hand width or larger than the human hand width) ( For example, 100 mm or more), a predetermined member that is not to be pulled out in the housing KY (referring to the above-mentioned medal payout device H, main board case M40, etc. Of course, other members in the housing KY may be used. Needless to say, the upper limit may be a size that does not allow passage (the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter, is equal to or less than the minimum diameter of a predetermined member or less than the minimum diameter), depending on the specifications and requests. It can be set as appropriate.

In this way, the lower limit of the size of the diagonal distance TS10, which is the maximum diameter of the first opening UB17, is set to be equal to or larger than the human hand width or larger than the human hand width, and the upper limit thereof is set to be equal to or lower than the minimum diameter of the predetermined member. By setting the value to less than, it becomes easy to insert a hand from the first opening UB17 to perform various operations in the housing KY, and to pull out a predetermined member in the housing KY from the first opening UB17. It is possible to prevent falling off. The shape of the first opening U17 is not limited to the above-mentioned rectangle, and can be appropriately set, for example, a circular shape or an elliptical shape. In short, regardless of the shape, if the lower limit of the maximum diameter is greater than or equal to the width of a person's hand or larger than the width of a person's hand and the upper limit is within or less than the minimum diameter of a predetermined member It is not particularly limited, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the back surface portion UB16 of the back box UB, in addition to the above-mentioned first opening portion UB17, a substantially circular second opening portion UB18 located at the lower left of the first opening portion UB17 is formed. Specifically, the second opening UB18 is formed in the back surface UB16 of the back box UB at a position facing the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14, and as shown in FIG. 243, the second opening is formed. By looking into the portion UB18, the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14 can be directly visually recognized. Further, in the back surface UB16 of the back box UB, in addition to the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18 described above, a plurality of the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18 are above and below the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18. A long-hole-shaped third opening UB19 is formed, and light outside the rotating body type gaming machine P is inserted through these third openings UB19 (lighting is possible). ..

The shape of the second opening UB18 is not limited to a circular shape, but can be an appropriate shape such as a rectangular shape or an elliptical shape. It may have such a shape. Further, the shape of the third opening UB19 may be any shape as long as it is opened so that light from the outside of the rotating body type gaming machine P can enter. Further, the position of the third opening UB19 can be formed at an appropriate position, for example, at least one of the left and right sides of the first opening UB17 and the second opening UB18. Further, the first to third openings UB17, 18 and 19 are provided on the back surface portion UB16 of the back box UB, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, any of both side surface portions UB12A and UB12B of the back box UB. It can be provided at an appropriate place on the back box UB, such as by providing it.

By forming the second opening UB18 in this way, when a hand is inserted from the first opening UB17 to perform various operations in the housing KY, various operations are performed while visually checking the inside of the housing KY. Can be done, and the efficiency of various industries can be improved. Further, by forming the third opening UB19, it is possible to collect light into the housing KY, and the visibility inside the housing KY can be improved.
<<< Positional relationship of devices in the housing KY >>>

Next, the positional relationship of the devices in the housing KY will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 242, a medal payout device H is mounted on the bottom surface portion UB10 of the back box UB so as to be movable back and forth along the rail Ra. The power supply unit E is arranged on the left side (right side when viewed in FIG. 242), and the medal auxiliary tank HS is on the bottom surface of the medal payout device H on the right side (left side when viewed in FIG. 242) when viewed in FIG. It is placed on the UB10 so that it can be moved. As is clear from FIG. 242, the height of the medal payout device H from the bottom surface portion UB10 is lower than the lower end of the first opening portion UB17. Further, the height of the power supply unit E from the bottom surface UB10 is lower than the height of the medal payout device H from the bottom surface, and the height of the medal auxiliary tank HS from the bottom surface 10 is the bottom surface of the power supply unit E. The height of each of the medal payout device H, the power supply unit E, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is lower than the height of the part (in other words, they are all lower than the central CML, and they are all central. It is located below the CML).

As shown in FIG. 242, when the front door DU is in the closed state, a gap GU1 is formed between the medal payout device H and the locking device DJ in the left-right direction of the housing KY. Further, as shown in FIG. 244, when the front door DU is in the closed state, between the medal payout device H and the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14 in the locking device DJ in the front-rear direction of the housing KY. Also, a gap GU2 is formed. Therefore, in this state, the medal payout device H is not in contact with any part of the lock portion DJ10 or the lock portion DJ30 of the locking device DJ. Further, neither the auxiliary tank HS nor the power supply unit E is in contact with the back surface of the front door DU or various structures provided on the back surface. Further, the first opening UB17 of the back box UB is formed between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU, and is formed in the gap GU3 between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU from the first opening UB17. You can put your hand in it.

In FIG. 242, the lower end of the reel unit RU and the upper end of the first opening UB17 are slightly separated from each other, but the position is not limited to this, and the lower end of the reel unit RU and the upper end of the first opening UB17 Or the lower end of the reel unit RU may be located slightly below the upper end of the first opening UB17. In short, the positional relationship is not particularly limited as long as at least one of the gaps GU1 to 3 into which the hand can be inserted from the first opening UB17 is formed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaps GU1 and GU2 between the medal payout device H and the locking device DJ and the gap GU3 between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU have been described as examples, but the description is limited thereto. Not done. That is, among the devices mounted on the bottom surface UB10 of the back box UB, the devices protruding toward the front door DU side (medal payout device H in the above example) and the devices on the back surface side of the front door DU. -A device having a predetermined gap formed between the member (locking device DJ in the above example) and having the highest height among the devices mounted on the bottom surface UB10 of the back box UB (the above example). Then, it is sufficient that a predetermined gap is formed between the medal payout device H) and the reel unit RU. In the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is mounted in the back box UB, but instead of this, the reel unit RU may be mounted directly on the back surface of the front door DU. By doing so, the gap between the reel unit RU and the back box UB becomes wider than when the reel unit RU is installed in the back box UB, and various operations in this gap can be performed. Can be easy.
<<< Action of the 15th embodiment >>>

Next, the operation based on the configuration of the fifteenth embodiment described so far will be described. When performing maintenance of the housing KY of the rotating game machine P, the front door DU is opened with a key to replenish the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H with a game medal, or the game medal is full. The auxiliary tank HS is taken out to remove the game medal in the auxiliary tank HS, the power supply unit E is turned on / off, etc. At this time, the key is placed in the housing KY. If you accidentally close the front door DU or lose the key itself, you will not be able to open the front door DU (Situation 1). Further, for example, when performing maintenance of the locking device DJ, the lock portion DJ30 may be removed, and if the front door DU is accidentally closed in such a state, the front door DU can be opened even if there is a key. It disappears (Situation 2).

In the present embodiment, when the situation 1 and the situation 2 and the like are encountered, the front door DU can be opened as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 243, while looking into the second opening UB18 and confirming the position of the handle DJ14F of the first moving member DJ14, insert a hand from the first opening UB17 and lift the handle DJ14F upward while holding the handle DJ14F. .. As the first moving member DJ14 moves upward along with this, the hooks DJ13A and DJ13B of the locking device DJ move from the position of the solid line shown in FIG. 238 (the position of FIG. 239 (a)) to the position of the alternate long and short dash line. (Position in FIG. 239 (b)), the locked state of the locking members UB20A and UB20B is released, and the front door DU is opened. In the above example, the first moving member DJ14 is moved upward by holding the handle DJ14F, but for example, the first moving member DJ14 is directly held by a portion other than the handle DJ14F such as the second bent portion DJ14D. Needless to say, it is possible to move the handle upward.

If the medal payout device is close to the front door DU and it is difficult to perform the work when the hand is inserted from the first opening UB17, the medal payout device H is moved toward the back portion UB16 ( In FIG. 244, the medal payout device H may be moved to the right side) to widen the gap GU1 between the medal payout device H and the front door DU to secure a work space. Further, as the work performed by inserting a hand through the first opening UB17, not only the above-mentioned unlocking of the front door DU but also the positions of the medal payout device H and the auxiliary tank HS are set to appropriate positions if they are misaligned. Returning, turning on / off the power to the power supply unit E, picking up the game medals scattered in the back box UB, moving the game medals in the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H to the auxiliary tank HS, etc. You may perform various operations such as.

As described above, by forming the first opening UB17, the front door DU cannot be opened without the key, or the front door DU cannot be opened even with the key. Even if it falls into the above, the front door DU can be opened because the first moving member DJ14 can be directly touched from the first opening UB17. Further, by forming the second opening UB18, the position of the handle DJ14F can be directly visually recognized through the second opening UB18, and the work can be carried out while checking the handle DJ14F. The work on the moving member DJ14 can be facilitated.

Further, in the situation where the front door DU is in the closed state, since the medal payout device H and the first moving member DJ14 and its handle DJ14F are not in contact with each other, a hand is inserted from the first opening UB17 and the first moving member is inserted. It is possible to easily perform operations such as directly operating the DJ14 and gripping and operating the handle DJ14F. Further, since the gaps GU1 to GU3 are formed between the medal payout device H and the back surface of the front door DU, and between the medal payout device H and the reel unit RU, insert a hand through the first opening UB17. A space for unlocking the front door DU can be secured, and this work can be easily performed. Further, since such a space can be secured, even in a situation where the front door DU cannot be opened, not only the work on the first moving member DJ14 described above, but also the medal payout device H and the auxiliary as described above. Return the tank HS to the proper position, turn on / off the power to the power supply unit E, pick up the game medals scattered in the back box UB, and assist the game medals of the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. Various operations such as returning to the tank HS can be easily performed.
<<< Deformation example of the locking device DJ in the 15th embodiment >>>

The locking device DJ of the present embodiment has the above configuration. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, as a locking device, a cover for preventing fraud on the first moving member DJ14 and the second moving member DJ15. Further CVs may be provided. In this case, next to the cover CV, for example, an operation unit similar to the handle DJ14F described above and a link mechanism for moving the first moving member DJ 14 up and down in conjunction with the operation of the operation unit are provided, and the first opening is provided. The front door DU may be unlocked by moving the first moving member DJ14 in the cover CV up and down by inserting a hand from the UB 17 and operating the above-mentioned operation unit. The point is that the first moving member DJ14 can be touched directly (a state in which the cover CV can be directly touched without the cover CV as in the present embodiment) or indirectly (the cover CV is present as in the present modification). It suffices if it can be moved to the above-mentioned operation unit and link mechanism) when it cannot be performed.
<<< Structure of Door Switch D80 >>>

Next, the structure of the door switch (open / close detection device) D80 capable of detecting the open / close chain state of the front door DU will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 248, the door switch D80 is provided above and inside the right side surface portion UB12B on the opposite hinge side of the back box UB. The door switch D80 has an initial protruding position (position shown in FIG. 248 (a)) and a retracted (retracted) retracted position (shown in FIG. 248 (b)) with respect to the main body D80A. It has a detection piece D80B that can appear and disappear at the position), and the detection piece D80B is always urged to the initial position by an urging member (not shown) when the front door DU is open. In the present embodiment, the door switch D80 is the upper part of the right side surface portion UB12B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a central portion or a lower portion of the right side side surface portion UB12B. In short, it suffices if it is provided in the back box UB at a position where the opening and closing of the front door DU can be detected.

When the detection piece D80B of the door switch D80 is pressed by the closed front door DU and is in the retracted position, the open / close sensor (front door sensor) (not shown) for detecting the detection piece D80D is turned on and the front door is turned on. Detects the closed state of the DU (detects the closure of the front door DU) (the ON signal, which is a detection signal, is output to the main control board M). Further, the detection piece D80B of the door switch D80 moves toward the protruding position in accordance with the operation of opening the front door DU, and the front door DU is SK (specifically, the front door DU) a predetermined distance from the back box UB. It will be located in the protruding position when it is separated by the distance between the right end of the back surface and the right end of the front of the back box UB), and at this time, the open / close sensor is turned off and the open state of the front door DU is detected (front door). The opening of the DU is detected) (the OFF signal, which is a detection signal, is output to the main control board M).

In other words, from the state in which the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU (the state in which the detection piece 80B is located in the retracted position), the moment when the open / close state is detected (the detection piece 80B is in the protruding position). The open state of the front door DU is detected at the moment when the front door DU is located (hereinafter, the open state of the front door DU at this time is simply referred to as a "slightly open state"). That is, the open / close sensor is either from the state where the front door DU is in the closed state to the state before the front door DU in the closed state is in the slightly opened state (predetermined open state) separated from the back box UB by a predetermined distance SK. At the specific distance TK (not shown), which is the distance between the two, the closed state of the front door DU is detected, and after the front door DU is slightly opened, the open state of the front door DU is detected. In short, the open / close sensor is the maximum distance among the specified distance TK (the specific distance TK immediately before the predetermined distance SK) from the locked and closed front door DU (the distance between the front door DU and the back box UB is 0). ), When the front door DU is located at a specific open position, the opening of the front door DU is not detected, and after a predetermined distance SK (after the slightly open state, which is a predetermined open state), the front door DU It is designed to detect opening. Therefore, the relationship between these distances is 0 <specific distance TK (closed detection state) <predetermined distance SK (moment of open detection).

When the open / close sensor detects the open state of the front door, error processing is performed by the main control board M and the sub control board S as described in the above-described embodiment. That is, again, when the main control board M receives a signal from the open / close detection sensor that the front door DU is open and determines that a door open error has occurred, an error due to this detection occurs. The detection command is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag, or, as shown in FIG. 249, "door opening error". By performing processing such as displaying an image display such as "" on the effect display device S40, a notification that the front door DU is in the open state (hereinafter, simply referred to as "door opening error notification") is sent. It is configured to be done.

In the open / close sensor, when the detection piece 80B is in the initial position, it is turned off to detect the closed state of the front door, and when the detection piece 80B is in the protruding position, it is turned on and the front door DU is in the open state. May be detected. Regarding the ON / OFF state of the open / close detection sensor, an opening error process or the like is performed by outputting the fact to the main control board M. Further, as the one that detects the opening of the front door DU by the detection signal of the open / close sensor, the one that detects only that the front door DU is in the open state may be used. That is, when the front door DU is in the open state, the open / close detection sensor is in the detection state (the state where there is a detection signal from the open / close detection sensor), and the main control board M recognizes the open state of the front door DU. When the front door DU is in the closed state, the open / close detection sensor is in the non-detection state (there is no detection signal from the open / close detection sensor), so that the main control board M recognizes the closed state of the front door DU. You can do it. Similarly, as the open / close detection sensor, a sensor that detects only the closed state of the front door DU is used, and when the open / close sensor is in the detected state, the main control board M recognizes the closed state of the front door DU and does not detect it. The main control board M may recognize the open state of the front door DU depending on the state.

<<< Positional relationship between the medal shooter DS92 and the hopper H40 >>>
As shown in FIG. 248 (b), the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 of the front door DU were appropriate medals (medals satisfying the standard) by the medal selector DS (see FIG. 3). In this case, the medal shooter DS92, which is the shoot body schematically shown in FIG. 135, is used to insert the medal into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. That is, the medal shooter DS92 is a communication passage (specific communication passage) that guides an appropriate medal among the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 to the hopper H40. The base end of the medal shooter DS92 extends in the horizontal direction substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU (horizontal direction as seen in FIG. 2), and is inside the medal selector DS substantially parallel to the back surface of the front door DU. It is designed to accept game medals that have passed through the medal flow path DR. Further, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 is bent in an arc shape so as to be substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU from the base end portion, and the game medal passing through the medal shooter DS92 is transferred to the back surface of the front door DU. It is designed to discharge in a direction almost perpendicular to the door. That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 extends substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU, and the game is played in this direction. The medals are ejected and inserted into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H.

Regarding the shape of the medal shooter DS92, for example, when the medal flow path DR of the medal selector DS extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the front door DU, the bent tip portion as described above is used. It can be appropriately changed according to the direction of the medal flow path DR of the medal selector DS, such as forming a straight gutter shape from the base end portion to the tip end portion without providing the medal selector DS. In short, the game medal ejected from the tip of the medal shooter DS92 may be inserted into the hopper H40, and its shape is not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of surely inserting the game medal into the hopper H40, it is desirable that the game medal discharged from the medal shooter DS92 has a direction and a length so as to be discharged to a substantially central portion of the hopper H40.

The positional relationship between the hopper H40 and the medal shooter DS92 is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 (the tip in the moving direction of the game medal) is the opening H30 of the hopper H40 (see FIG. 66). (The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located between the front side wall H42 and the rear side wall H46 of the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 65). The game medal that has been inserted into the medal shooter DS92 and has passed through the medal shooter DS92 is inserted into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), at the moment when the front door DU is separated from the back box UB by a predetermined distance SK, in other words, the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU. The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is still above the hopper H40 even under the condition that the front door DU is opened at the moment when the opened state is detected as described above and the door opening error is notified. The game medals that have been inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and passed through the medal shooter DS92 are inserted into the hopper H40. In the present embodiment, the predetermined distance SK is less than twice the diameter b of the medal (predetermined distance SK <2 × diameter b), but the distance is not limited to this, and the door switch described above is not limited to this. Needless to say, it is variable according to the protrusion length of the detection piece 80B of the D80.

<<< Deformation example of the positional relationship between the medal shooter DS92 and the hopper H40 >>>
In the above-described embodiment, the tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located above the hopper H40 in the closed state and the slightly opened state of the front door DU, but the medal shooter DS92 is located in the closed state and the slightly opened state of the front door DU. Is located in front of the front end of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40 (in the direction of the front door DU), and a predetermined first distance is provided between the tip of the medal shooter DS92 and the tip of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40. The tip of the medal shooter DS92 is located above the hopper H40 in the closed state of the front door DU, but the tip of the medal shooter DS92 is on the front side of the hopper H40 in the slightly open state. Even if it is located in front of the front end of the side wall H42 (in the direction of the front door DU) and a predetermined first distance is formed between the tip of the medal shooter DS92 and the tip of the front side wall H42 of the hopper H40. good. As the predetermined first interval, since the game medal that has popped out (discharged) from the medal shooter DS92 has the momentum at the time of popping out, the diameter b of the game medal shown in FIG. 116 (as described above, 24. It may be less than twice the diameter (preferably about 5 mm to 25.5 mm), but from the viewpoint of surely inserting the game medal from the medal shooter DS92 into the hopper H40, it is preferable that the diameter of the medal is less than b. is there.
<<< Positional relationship between the game medal outlet H60 of the hopper H40 and the medal receiving entrance D341 of the medal return member D340 >>>

As shown in FIG. 248 (b), when the front door DU is in the closed state, the medal receiving of the game medal exit H60 of the hopper H40 (see also FIG. 2) and the medal return member (predetermined communication passage) D340. The entrance D341 (see also FIGS. 116 and 117) is in contact with each other, and the game medal from the game medal exit H60 is received by the medal receiving entrance D341, and the medal tray (receiving portion) is received via the discharge port D240. It will be paid out to D230. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), in a situation where the front door DU is in a slightly opened state and a door opening error notification is made, the game medal exit H60 and the medal receiving entrance D341 have a predetermined second interval. Only separated.

The predetermined second interval is substantially the same as the above-mentioned predetermined distance SK, and similarly to the above-mentioned predetermined first interval, the game medal that has popped out from the game medal exit H60 has the momentum at the time of popping out. , It is set to be less than twice the diameter b of the game medal. Even in this predetermined second interval, the diameter of the medal is preferably smaller than b from the viewpoint of reliably accepting the game medal from the game medal outlet H60 into the medal receiving port D341. When the front door DU is in the closed state, the game medal outlet H60 of the hopper H40 and the medal receiving entrance D341 of the medal return member D340 are separated from each other within the range of the second interval. Is also good. In short, regardless of whether the front door DU is closed or slightly opened, it is sufficient that the medal receiving entrance D341 can accept the game medal from the game medal exit H60.

In this way, even when the front door DU is slightly open, the game medal from the medal shooter DS92 is inserted into the hopper H40, so that the game medal is erroneously awarded when the front door DU is slightly open. The game medal was inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 without noticing that it was inserted into the insertion slot D170 or the front door DU was slightly opened, or the game medal was inserted into the medal insertion slot D170. Immediately after (the inserted game medal is passing through the medal selector DS and the medal shooter DS92), even if the front door DU is slightly open, etc., the game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 is surely inserted. It can be inserted into the hopper H40 of the medal payout device H. As a result, when the front door DU is slightly open, the inserted game medals are scattered in the housing KY outside the medal payout device H, or fall out of the rotating body type game machine P. It is possible to prevent it from happening. In particular, since it is possible to prevent the game medals from being scattered in the portion of the housing KY outside the medal payout device H, it is possible to prevent the game medals from staying in the portion outside the medal payout device H. Even if the front door DU is opened in this state, the game medal in the portion outside the medal payout device H can be prevented from falling to the outside P of the rotating drum type game machine. Therefore, there is no need to pick up the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating machine P, and the maintainability can be improved.

Further, even when the front door DU is slightly opened, the game medal from the game medal exit H60 is accepted by the medal receiving entrance D341, so that the medal payout device H is used to pay out the game medal. Even if the front door DU is erroneously opened slightly during the process, the game medals from the medal payout device H can be reliably paid out to the medal tray D230. As a result, in a situation where the front door DU is slightly open, the game medals from the medal payout device H are scattered in the portion other than the medal payout device H in the housing KY, or the spinning type game. It is possible to prevent the machine P from falling out of the machine P. Therefore, under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened, the game medal from the medal payout device H is not paid out to the medal tray D230 and falls to a part other than the medal payout device H or to the outside of the rotating drum type game machine P. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money. Furthermore, the trouble of picking up the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating game machine P is eliminated, and the game prevention that the player does not notice the game medals that have fallen outside the rotating game machine P is prevented from being lost. can do. Moreover, regardless of whether the front door DU is closed or slightly open (whatever the state of the front door DU), the inserted game medals and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H are displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the game medal from spilling out of the pachinko / pachislot machine P, there is no need to worry about the game medal spilling out of the pachinko / pachislot machine P, and stable gaming can be performed. ..
<<< Structure of front door DU and back box UB >>>

Next, the structures of the front door DU and the back box UB will be further described. FIG. 245 is a perspective view schematically showing the front door and the back box under the condition that the front door DU is in the open state. As shown in FIG. 245, the front door DU is formed by assembling the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b extending in the vertical direction and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU10c and DU10d extending in the horizontal direction in a square shape, and is in a closed state. The outer frame portion DU10 projecting toward the back box UB in the front door DU, and the left and right vertical plate members DU11a and DU11b and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU11c and DU11d are legally formed in the same manner as the outer frame portion DU10. It has an inner frame portion DU 11 that is about one size smaller than the outer frame portion DU 10 and projects toward the back box UB in the closed front door DU.

Specifically, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the upper part on the back surface side of the front door DU, and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the bottom (lower part) on the back surface side of the front door DU. However, the left vertical plate member DU10a of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the left side portion (side portion on the hinge side) on the back surface side of the front door DU, and the right vertical portion of the outer frame portion DU10 is on the right side portion on the back surface side of the front door DU. Each of the plate members DU10b is configured to project toward the back box UB. Further, the upper horizontal plate member DU11c of the inner frame portion DU11 is located above the back surface side of the front door DU and below the upper horizontal plate member DU10, and is located at the bottom of the front door DU on the back surface side and above the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. The lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11 is provided on both sides of the back surface side of the front door DU, and the left and right vertical plate members DU11a of the inner frame portion DU11 are inside the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b. And DU11b are configured to project toward the back box UB, respectively. The back surfaces of the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are in contact with the front surface of the back box UB in the closed front door DU, and form a part of the back surface of the front door DU. (Of the entire back surface of the front door DU, it constitutes the back surface located closest to the back box UB). In the present embodiment, the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are integrally provided on the front door DU, but instead of these, they are configured as separate members from the front door DU. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

The back box UB is formed by assembling the left and right vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b extending in the vertical direction and the upper and lower horizontal plate members UB15c and UB15d extending in the horizontal direction in a square shape, and becomes the front door DU in the closed front door DU. It has a back box frame portion UB15 that projects toward it. That is, from the front side (front side of the back box UB) of the left and right side surface portions UB12A and UB12B of the back box UB, the left and right vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b are on the front side (back side) of the top surface portion UB14 and the bottom surface portion UB10, respectively. From the front side of the box UB), the upper horizontal plate member UB15 projects toward the front door DU. In the present embodiment, the back box frame portion UB15 is provided as a separate member from the back box UB, but instead of this, the back box frame portion UB15 is provided integrally with the back box UB. Needless to say, it is also good. The back box frame portion UB15 having such a configuration is inserted between the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 of the front door DU in a state where the front door DU is closed. Next, this point will be described in detail one by one.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB when the front door DU is closed, and FIG. 246 is a side view when the front door is closed. , (B) is a top view under the condition that the front door DU is closed. Further, FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU is slightly open, and FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the front door DU and the back box UB, and FIG. (B) is a top view under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened.

As shown in FIG. 246 (a), when the front door DU is closed, a back box is placed between the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10 and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c of the inner frame portion DU11. The upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the frame portion UB15 is inserted (intervened state), and this upper horizontal plate member UB15c functions as an insertion piece (first piece), and the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and each of them The DU 11c is configured to function as a plurality of receiving pieces (second pieces) for receiving the upper horizontal plate member UB15c that functions as an insertion piece. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c of the outer frame portion DU10, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the back box frame portion UB15, and the inner frame portion DU11. The upper horizontal plate member DU11c is arranged in this order, and of the upper horizontal plate member DU10c as the second piece, the portion from the substantially central portion to the tip is located above the upper horizontal plate member UB15c as the first piece. Of the upper horizontal plate member DU11c as the second piece, the portion beyond the central portion is located below the upper horizontal plate member UB15c as the first piece, and is in a plan view (housing KY). (Viewed from above), the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other.

Further, a state in which the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15 is inserted between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11 (intervening state). The lower horizontal plate member UB15d functions as an insertion piece, and the lower horizontal plate members DU10d and DU11d each function as a plurality of receiving pieces for receiving the lower horizontal plate member UB15d that functions as an insertion piece. It has become. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15, and the outer frame portion DU10. The lower horizontal plate member DU10d is arranged in this order, and of the lower horizontal plate member DU11d as the second piece, the portion from the substantially central portion to the tip is located above the lower horizontal plate member UB15d as the first piece. Of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d as two pieces, the portion beyond the substantially central portion is located below the lower horizontal plate member UB15d as the first piece, and is in a plan view (housing KY). (Viewed from above), the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other.

In the present embodiment, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is fixed to the lower surface of the top surface portion UB14, and the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is fixed to the upper surface of the bottom surface portion UB10. The upper horizontal plate member UB15c is not limited to this, and the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is configured to project directly from between the upper surface and the lower surface of the top surface portion UB14 (in other words, the front surface of the top surface portion UB14). Also, the configuration may be such that it projects from between the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom surface portion UB10 (in other words, the front surface of the bottom surface portion UB10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), when the front door DU is closed, between the right vertical plate member DU10b of the outer frame portion DU10 and the right vertical plate member UB11b of the inner frame portion DU11. The right vertical plate member UB15b of the back box frame portion UB15 is in a state of being inserted, and this right vertical plate member UB15b functions as an insertion piece, and the right vertical plate member DU10b and the right vertical plate member DU11b, respectively, are inserted pieces. It is configured to function as a plurality of receiving pieces for receiving the right vertical plate member UB15b. In other words, in the situation where the front door DU is closed, in FIG. 246, from the top (from the left in the front view of the front door DU), the right horizontal plate member DU11b of the inner frame portion DU11 and the back box frame portion. The right horizontal plate member UB15b of the UB15 and the right horizontal plate member DU10b of the outer frame portion DU10 are arranged in this order, and the right horizontal plate member DU11b as the second piece is above the right horizontal plate member UB15b as the first piece (front door). Located on the left side in the front view of the DU), and the right horizontal plate member DU10b as the second piece is located below the right horizontal plate member UB15b as the first piece (right side in the front view of the front door DU). When viewed from the side surface side of the housing KY, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship of overlapping each other.

The left vertical plate member DU10a, the left vertical plate member DU11a, and the left vertical plate member UB15a have the same configurations as the right vertical plate member DU10b, the right vertical plate member UB11b, and the right vertical plate member UB15b, respectively. , The illustration and description thereof will be omitted. Further, these vertical plate members UB15a and UB15b are also fixed to the inside of both side surface plates UB12 of the back box UB, but like the above-mentioned upper and lower horizontal plate members UB15c and UB15d, both side surface plates UB12A And UB12B may be configured to protrude from the front surface. Further, each member functioning as the above-mentioned insertion piece may be in a state of being entirely inserted or a part thereof may be in a state of being inserted. In short, at least a part of the insertion piece (in other words, at least a part of the second piece located above and / or below the first piece, or to the left and / or right of the first piece) is inserted. I just need to be there.

Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), even under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened and the door opening error notification is made, the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the inner frame portion DU11 of the outer frame portion DU10 The tip of the upper horizontal plate member UB15c of the back box frame portion UB15 is located between the upper horizontal plate member DU11c. Therefore, even in this slightly open state, the upper horizontal plate member UB15c is maintained in a state of being inserted between the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c. Further, in this slightly open state, the tip of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15 is also between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10 and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11. It is in a positioned state, and the state in which the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is inserted between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), even under the condition that the front door DU is slightly opened and the door opening error notification is made, the right vertical plate member DU10b and the inner frame portion DU11 of the outer frame portion DU10 The tip of the right vertical plate member UB15b of the back box frame portion UB15 is located between the right vertical plate member UB11b, and the right vertical plate member is located between the right vertical plate member DU10b and the right vertical plate member UB11b. The configuration is such that the UB 15b is maintained in the inserted state.

By providing the outer frame portion DU10, the inner frame portion DU11, and the back box frame portion UB15 inserted between them in this way, the front door DU can be seen from between the front door DU and the back box UB under the condition that the front door DU is closed. Since the path of the fraudulent device to be inserted is in the shape of a crank, it can be very difficult to reach the fraudulent device to the destination in the housing KY. As a result, it is possible to prevent the insertion of the unauthorized instrument from any direction of the housing KY from the top, bottom, left and right. Further, even if the front door DU is in a slightly open state, the back box frame portion 15B is still maintained in a state of being inserted between the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11, and the illegal device is used. Since the path is maintained in a crank-like state, it is possible to prevent the insertion of an unauthorized device from any of the top, bottom, left, and right directions of the housing KY even under this situation.
<<< 15th Embodiment Modification of the structure of the front door DU and the back box UB >>>

In the present embodiment, the left and right vertical plate members DU10a and DU10b and the upper and lower horizontal plate members DU10c and DU10d are assembled in a square shape, and an outer frame portion DU10 is provided so as to surround substantially the entire back surface of the front door DU. For example, there is only the left vertical plate member DU10a of the outer frame portion DU10, the left vertical plate member DU11a of the inner frame portion DU11, and the left vertical plate member 15a of the back box frame portion UB15 inserted between them. The lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, and the lower horizontal plate member 15d of the back box frame portion DU15 inserted between them. It may be provided at a necessary place according to a possible intrusion route of an unauthorized device, such as providing only a door.

Further, in the present embodiment, two frame portions, an outer frame portion DU10 and an inner frame portion DU11, are provided. For example, a frame portion slightly smaller than the inner frame portion DU11 is provided inside the inner frame portion DU11. The number of frame portions is not particularly limited, for example, the number of frame portions is not particularly limited. In short, a pair of receiving pieces into which each plate member UB15a, UB15b, UB15c and UB15d can be inserted as an insertion piece (in the present embodiment, a set of the left vertical plate member DU10a and the left vertical plate member DU11a, the right vertical plate member). It suffices to have a set of the DU10b and the right vertical plate member DU11b, a set of the upper horizontal plate member DU10c and the upper horizontal plate member DU11c, and a set of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d, respectively).

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11 are provided on the front door DU, and the back box frame portion UB15 is provided on the back box UB. A frame portion similar to the DU 10 and the inner frame portion DU 11 may be provided, and a frame portion similar to the above-mentioned back box frame portion UB 15 inserted between these frame portions may be provided in the front door DU. In short, one of the front door DU and the back box UB is provided with a frame portion similar to the outer frame portion DU10 and the inner frame portion DU11, and the other of the front door DU and the back box UB is the same as the back box frame portion UB15. It suffices if a simple frame portion is provided.
<<< Dimensional relationship between each lower horizontal plate member DU10d, DU11, UB15d and the game medal >>>

Here, the dimensional relationship between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d of the outer frame portion DU10, the lower horizontal plate member DU11d of the inner frame portion DU11, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d of the back box frame portion UB15, and the game medal will be described. As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the thickness of the game medal is a, the diameter of the game medal is b, the distance (distance in the vertical direction) between the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and the lower horizontal plate member DU11d is c, and the lower horizontal plate. The distance between the member DU11d and the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is d, the length of the lower horizontal plate member DU10d is e, the distance between the lower horizontal plate member UB15d and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d is f, and the thickness of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d. When g is set, the dimensional relationship is such that the following relational expression holds under the condition that the front door DU is in the closed state.
a <d ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (5)
c (= d + g + f)> d ... Equation (6)
b <e ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (7)
a <f ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (8)

By satisfying the formula (5), even if the front door DU is closed with the spilled game medal on the bottom surface UB10, the game medal can enter within the above interval d. It is possible to prevent the game medal from being sandwiched between the front door DU and the back box UB, and the front door DU can be closed without sandwiching the game medal.

Further, by satisfying the equation (6), it is possible to prevent the game medals spilled on the bottom surface portion UB10 from entering the interval c in the standing state and being pinched. In this case, as is clear from FIG. 246 (a), when the projecting length of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d from the front surface of the bottom surface portion UB10 is h (not shown), the length of this h and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. The relationship between e and the game medal thickness a is "a <(e-h)". That is, assuming that the distance from the tip (left end in the figure) of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d to the end of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d is i (= e-h) (not shown), this distance i (for example, the lower horizontal plate member UB15d) From the tip of the front door to the back surface of the front door DU, or from the tip of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d to the structure / device located on the back surface side of the front door DU and facing the tip of the lower horizontal plate member UB15d. Since the interval) is larger than the medal thickness a (i> a), the standing game medals can be inserted with a margin within this interval i, and the game medals can be prevented from being pinched. It is helping.

Further, by satisfying the equations (7) and (8), the game medal can be placed on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d in a lying state with a margin, and even if the front door DU is closed in this state. The game medal is not pinched. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage due to pinching of the game medal, and it is also possible to prevent unauthorized equipment from being inserted from the defective portion due to this damage.
<<< 15th Embodiment Dimensional Deformation >>>

The dimensional relationship in the present embodiment is as described above, but is not limited to this, and for example, the following relational expression can be satisfied.
a> d ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (9)
b / 2 <e ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Equation (10)
b / 2 <e <b ... Equation (11)
b / 2 <e and a> f ... Equation (12)

By satisfying the formula (9), even if the front door DU is closed with the game medal spilling on the bottom surface UB10, this game medal is used by the lower horizontal plate member DU11d to form the back box UB. Since it is pushed back toward the back portion UB16 (toward the right side in FIG. 246 (a)), it is possible to prevent the game medal from being pinched between the front door DU and the back box UB, and the game medal is sandwiched. The front door DU can be closed without any need. Further, by satisfying the equation (10), when the front door DU is in the open state (open state), the game medal is lying on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d and a part of the game medal. Can be placed in a state of protruding from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d.

Further, by satisfying the formula (11), the same operation and effect as the above-mentioned formula (10) is obtained, and the game medal is placed on the lower horizontal plate member DU10d in a state where a part of the game medal protrudes from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. Even if you try to close the front door DU in this state, the game medal is caught and the front door DU cannot be closed. Therefore, in this state, the game medal intervenes between the front door DU and the back box UB. You can tell that you are doing it. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to remove the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB from falling out of the rotating machine P, and the player falls out of the rotating game machine P. It is also possible to prevent the game medal from being lost without being noticed.

Further, by satisfying the formula (12), the same action and effect as the above-mentioned formula (10) can be obtained, and the lower horizontal plate member DU10d has a part of the game medal protruding from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d. Even if you try to close the front door DU in the mounted state, the game medal is caught and the front door DU cannot be closed, but in this state, the part of the game medal that protrudes from the lower horizontal plate member DU10d is spaced apart. It can be in a state of being held by entering the inside of f. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game medal interposed between the front door DU and the back box UB from falling outside the rotating game machine P, and the player can be prevented from falling outside the rotating game machine P. It is also possible to more reliably prevent a game medal that has fallen into the door from being lost without being noticed.
<<< Operation of the rotating machine P when an opening error occurs >>>

Next, the operation of the rotating drum type gaming machine P at the time of an opening error will be described with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is an image diagram showing the operation of the rotating machine P before and after the opening error. First, the rotation of the reel is stopped in a predetermined game state, and the symbol combination related to the re-game is stopped and displayed. Further, a background image of a tree and a giraffe is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of the reels when the player operates the start lever, and transmits a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub-control board S receives the reel rotation start command and performs processing corresponding to the command (measurement of the reel rotation time timer, etc.).

An open / close detection sensor that detects that the front door DU has been opened before a predetermined period has elapsed since the reel rotation started (after receiving the reel rotation start command and starting the measurement of the reel rotation time timer). Is detected, the main control board M transmits an error processing command to the sub control board S, so that the door opening error notification process is performed by the sub control board S. That is, the sub-control board S notifies the effect display device S40 of a door opening error such as displaying a "door opening error". On the other hand, when the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred, the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated so that the rotation of the reel does not stop even if the stop button is pressed (the reel is stopped). Make it impossible).

By performing the error notification in this way, in the slightly opened state of the front door DU, it is possible to notify the player who does not notice this that the front door DU is open, so that the front door DU is slightly opened. Even if the stop operation is invalidated due to the open state, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, in a slightly open state where the front door DU does not seem to be open at first glance, the front door DU in the slightly open state is notified in order to notify the hall clerk that the front door DU is open. In the above, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting fraudulent instruments through the gap.

When the open / close sensor detects the closed state of the front door DU by closing the front door DU (closing the front door DU) in the situation where the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated, a signal to that effect is the main control. It is output to the board M. Even if the main control board M receives the signal indicating that the closed state is received, the main control board M still maintains the invalidation of the stop operation for the stop button (maintains the state in which the reel cannot be stopped).

In this state, by inserting the key from the keyhole D260 of the housing KY and performing the reset operation of rotating this key counterclockwise, the second moving member DJ15 moves downward and the second moving member DJ15 is detected. One DJ15Ea turns off the photosensor FS (see FIG. 239 (c)), and the main control board M that receives this detection signal cancels the door opening error. Further, in addition to the process of canceling the door opening error, the main control board M cancels the invalidation of the stop operation for the stop button and enables the stop operation for the stop button. That is, if there is a door opening error during the rotation of the reel, the main control board M performs a stop operation on the stop button until the door opening error is cleared, even if the front door DU is opened or closed during that time. It is designed to be disabled.

Here, the open / closed chain state of the front door DU from the closed state to the fully opened state of the front door DU and from the fully opened state to the return to the closed state, the valid / invalid of the stop operation, and the error cancellation by the above reset operation. The relationship between the validity and invalidity of is as follows. First, under the condition that the reel is in steady rotation and the stop button is in the effective state, the front door DU is opened in each of the states (A) to (D) from the closed state to the fully open state of the front door DU. The relationship between the closed state and the validity / invalidity of the stop operation is as follows.

(A) The front door DU is closed (the distance between the front door DU and the back door UB is 0. Hereinafter referred to as the original position).
(A-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (detection piece D80B is retracted position)
(A-2) Valid / invalid stop operation: Valid (no open error has occurred in the first place)
(A-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: invalid (no open error has occurred in the first place)

(B) From (A) above to before the front door DU is slightly opened (specific opening position)
(B-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (between the detection piece D80B from the retracted position to the front of the protruding position)
(B-2) Valid / invalid stop operation: Valid (no open error has occurred in the first place)
(B-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: invalid (no open error has occurred in the first place)

(C) The moment when the state is slightly opened from the above (B) (predetermined opening position)
(C-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(C-2) Validity / invalidity of stop operation: Invalid (However, if an error is cleared, it becomes valid for a moment, but immediately becomes an error state and becomes invalid.) Note that the stop operation in this (C-2) Hereinafter, the validity / invalidity of the above will be simply described as "same as C-2 above".
(C-3) Error clearing enabled / disabled: Enabled (However, the error is cleared for a moment, but since the open / close sensor is still open detection, an error state occurs immediately. Note that the error cancellation here is disabled. It may be present.) Note that the error cancellation effectiveness in this (C-3) will be simply described as "similar to the above C-3".

(D) From (C) above until the front door DU is fully opened (predetermined open position (normal open position))
(D-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(D-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(D-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (similar to C-3 above)
On the other hand, the relationship between the open / close chain state of the front door DU and the validity / invalidity of the stop operation in each of the states (E) to (I) from the fully open state to the closed state of the front door DU is as follows.

(E) From the fully open state to the front of the slightly open state of the front door DU (predetermined open position (normal open position))
(E-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is protruding position)
(E-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(E-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (similar to C-3 above)

(F) The moment when the state is slightly opened from the above (E) (predetermined opening position)
(F-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Open detection (detection piece D80B is in the protruding position; the front door DU moving in the closing direction is in contact with the detection piece D80B, but is still pressed toward the retracted position. Not in the state)
(F-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(F-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (same as C-3 above)

(G) From (F) above to before the closed state (specific open position)
(G-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Detects open state (From the state of (F-1) above, the front door DU moving in the closing direction moves the detection piece D80B toward the retracted position. On the way, the detection piece D80B is not yet detected by the open / close sensor)
(G-2) Enable / disable stop operation: Invalid (same as C-2 above)
(G-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: valid (same as C-3 above)

(H) The moment when the state is closed from the above (G) (original position)
(H-1) Detection state of open / close sensor: Close detection (after the detection piece D80B is detected by the open / close sensor at the retracted position)
(H-2) Valid / invalid of stop operation: Invalid (However, if there is an error cancellation, it will be "valid", but in reality it is impossible to cancel the error at the moment of closing detection, so it is practically invalid. Can say)
(H-3) Error clearing valid / invalid: Valid (Error clearing is effective from this moment, but in reality, error clearing is impossible at the moment of closing detection, so it is practically synonymous with invalidity)

(I) Closed state of front door DU after (H) above (original position (normal closed position))
(I-1) Detection status of open / close sensor: Close detection (I-2) Valid / invalid of stop operation: Invalid (However, if the error is cleared, it becomes "valid")
(I-3) Error cancellation valid / invalid: Valid (This error cancellation makes the stop operation "valid" and the error cancellation valid / invalid becomes "invalid". Also, until the error is cleared, The stop operation remains "invalid")

Regarding the release of the door opening error, not only the error is released by the above-mentioned key, but also, for example, when a door opening error occurs (from the moment when the open / close sensor detects the opening of the front door DU), the error release timer (increment timer). ) Is started, and when the error release timer measures a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds) (when the predetermined time elapses), the door opening error may be automatically canceled. On the contrary, the door opening error may be canceled when the front door DU is closed. Specifically, the measurement of the error release timer is started from the moment when the open / close sensor detects the closure of the front door, and when the error release timer measures a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) (after a predetermined time elapses), The door opening error may be automatically canceled. Further, these error release timers may be combined with the present embodiment. That is, as a general rule, the relationship between the open / close chain state of the front door DU and the valid / invalid state of the stop operation is as described in the above (A) to (I) states, but the above (C) to (H). In the state, the door opening error may be canceled when the error release timer measures a predetermined time. In this case, in the above states (C) to (H), even if the error is cleared, the opening / closing sensor detects the opening of the door door DU, so that the error state is immediately established and the stop operation is immediately invalidated. Needless to say.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the above-mentioned (C) to (G), when the open / close sensor is in the detection state, even if the reset operation or the error cancellation by the error cancellation timer is performed, the error state is immediately set. Instead of this, once the stop operation becomes "valid" by the above reset operation or error cancellation by the error release timer, the "valid" state is maintained even if the open / close sensor is in the detection state. After that, the stop operation may be set to "invalid" only in the case of the above (H), and then the stop operation may be set to "valid" again in the case of the above (I). In short, regardless of whether the stop operation is enabled or disabled in other states, it is sufficient that the stop operation is "invalid" at least in the above (H).

Further, in the present embodiment, the door opening error is detected when the front door DU is slightly opened. For example, a sensor for detecting the state where the front door DU is fully opened is provided, and this sensor is used as the front door. A door opening error may occur only when the fully opened state of the DU is detected. In short, it suffices if it is possible to detect the open state of any of the front door DUs from the slightly open state of the front door DU to the fully open state of the front door DU, and the detection timing is not particularly limited. Further, the error that invalidates the stop operation by the main control board M is not only the above-mentioned door opening error but also a recoverable error such as the above-mentioned medal empty error (among the errors, the error may be automatically recovered. It may be a minor error) or the like.

In this way, when a door opening error occurs, the stop operation for the stop button is invalidated regardless of whether the front door DU is opened or closed until the door opening error is cleared. Since the stop operation is invalidated at the moment when the door DU is closed, the stop button is activated by the impact when the front door DU is closed while the reel is rotating, contrary to the player's intention. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping without permission.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
It has a strip-shaped reel tape (eg, reel strip MO) wound around the outer circumference of a reel base (eg, reel frame MW).
A plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the reel tape along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape.
As the type of the symbol, at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol) are included.
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol.
The second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged at each of both ends of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer circumference of the surface on which the reel tape is wound at the reel base.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a revolving gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU) and
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing a game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting excess game media stored in the main tank member is provided.
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
The main body of the game machine and
A front door (for example, a front door DU) that is openable and closable to the gaming machine body,
In a revolving gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU) and
A main tank member (for example, a hopper H40) installed below the pedestal portion and storing a game medium, and
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member and for retracting excess game media stored in the main tank member is provided.
The reel unit and the pedestal portion are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component located at a position closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
With multiple reels (eg reel M50),
With multiple stop switches (eg, stop button D40),
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect.
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is stopped at the end of the plurality of reels. One game can be completed by performing the final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, for example) is displayed on the effect display unit. , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, a sub input button SB) is operated after one game is completed, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image.
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time.
When the predetermined operating member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operating member is operated. When a specific operating member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the lapse of time, the predetermined image is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operating member. 2 While the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even after a predetermined time has elapsed,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly operated before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation of the above is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. Is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if the bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. The game is characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even if the first predetermined time elapses from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. It is a machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A setting switch (for example, a setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to an advantage for a player can be changed. With a key switch)
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute interrupt processing, which is processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals.
When the power is cut off in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode and power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the mode shifts to the setting changing mode. If the power is cut off after the power is turned off and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the mode is configured to shift to the setting change mode.
When the power is cut off in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode and power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, and the power is supplied from the start. If the power is cut off before the predetermined time elapses and the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the setting change mode is not set. It is a characteristic gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A stop switch (for example, left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reels.
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing a game medium within a predetermined number range, and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the output of the effect.
The main game club
The role lottery means to execute the role lottery,
A reel control means for stopping and controlling the reel so as to correspond to a winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means when the stop switch is operated is provided.
A storage number increase process that increases the number of game media stored in the storage means, and
It is possible to execute a payout process that executes payout of game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the player can be given a game medium.
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and a specific number of game media is given, the storage number increase process is executed. It is configured to perform the payout process without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In some cases, it is configured to execute the storage number increase processing and not to execute the withdrawal processing.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium of is given, it is configured to execute the payout process after executing the storage number increase process.
The main game club
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium grant information can be transmitted to the sub-game unit.
The sub-game club
Based on the reception of the game medium addition information, the game medium addition sound, which is an effect sound related to the addition of the game medium, can be output from the speaker.
When the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given, the game medium grant information. Is received, a predetermined game medium granting sound (for example, a game medium granting sound output when the credit is increased by 1 and a game medium granting sound output when one game medal is paid out) is played. Can be output and
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the predetermined game medium addition sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium addition information.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number is displayed. When the game medium is given, the predetermined game medium giving sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium giving information.
The time value from when the number of gaming media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to A + 1 during the execution of the storage number increase process, and N (N is a natural number, 2 ≦ N). ) M (M is a natural number, 1 ≦ M ≦ (N-1)) from the start of execution of the payout process for the third game medium during the execution of the payout process for paying out the game media. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process related to the gaming medium of the eye is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on when the production is executed,
It is equipped with a setting value display unit (for example, setting display LED) that can display the setting value.
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77).
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77).
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77).
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, and has a plurality of extinguishing times.
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be carried out at the time of a predetermined abnormality, a second lighting pattern that can be carried out when the set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a set value display that is not at the time of the predetermined abnormality. It has at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the unit.
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode.
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured so as not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A storage means capable of electrically storing the game medium within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, the game medal can be electrically stored as a credit in the game machine).
A switch that is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means, and is a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) capable of betting a plurality of game media.
A predetermined lamp (for example, 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet, and
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Equipped with a role determination means that can determine the winning combination,
As a winning combination that is determined by the combination determination means, it is configured so that the re-game combination can be determined.
The sum of the game medium stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the specified number, in the predetermined game state, the re-game combination has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the game medium is stored in the storage means. Moreover, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up.
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the number of bets reaches the specified number in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production.
It seems that the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the occurrence of the power failure to the end of the power supply to the gaming machine. It is composed and
The time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the main game unit is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub-game unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in such a manner.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even when the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. , The predetermined symbol combination is displayed even if the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that and the power cutoff process based on the detection of the power cutoff is executed, so that the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. Is

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. Is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the fact that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is configured so that it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is a gaming machine characterized in that the lamp of the above is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result are provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined lamp is turned on after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined production sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, a predetermined rotation with respect to the N-1st reel is performed even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation with respect to the N-1st reel of the player. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect sound can be output from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels due to a defect. ..

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Although each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the identification is made due to a predetermined rotation defect to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, the specific lamp is configured so as not to be notified that it is valid.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. After each of the corresponding symbols is stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. It is composed and
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols have been stopped, and even though the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off was executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Although each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the predetermined reel corresponding to the final stop operation is specified. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to poor rotation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing the game value within a predetermined number range, and
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means and can bet a plurality of game values.
With certain lamps (eg, max bet lamps) that can signal that the bet switch operation is valid,
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the corresponding symbols is stopped, and after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are stored. Each of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, and even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the notification that the specific lamp is valid is given after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even after the symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined It is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the predetermined stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the feature is that the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine to play.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the predetermined stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed.
It is a special game state, and is a game newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special game state is satisfied by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Is configured to
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, and the power off time processing based on the detection of the power off is executed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and then the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a gaming value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After each symbol is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels. After that, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of being played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After each symbol is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. It is configured to be runable and
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of the fact that the reel is thrown in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
As a game state, it has at least a special game transitionable state that is advantageous for the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a subsequent game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
From the time when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, the special game transition state can be achieved.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, as the final stop operation of the player, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, the freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game in which the special game transition is not possible and the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After each is stopped, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a subsequent game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. It is a gaming machine characterized by being a reel.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Each of the symbols corresponding to the above is stopped, and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, and the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are caused by the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured so as not to shift to the second winning combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and the symbol is specified as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input.
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power off even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after the return.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is configured so that it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player after that.
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the machine has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off is executed, so that the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it can shift to the second lottery state after the power is restored even when the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
N reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (N is a natural number of 3 or more) and
A speaker that outputs a directing sound (for example, speaker S20) and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
When a power outage is detected, it is configured to be able to execute the power outage processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the player is given a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. ,
In the game in which the predetermined game state is set and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively, and the player after that. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power off processing based on the detection of the power disconnection even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply is supplied. After returning, it is configured to give the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, and each of the stopped reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined production sound (for example, tempai sound) from the speaker.
In the game executed in the specific gaming state, even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player, the power off processing based on the detection of the power off. Is executed, and even if a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each of the stopped reels, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. It is a game machine characterized by.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and
Internal lottery means and
A reel control means for controlling the reel is provided.
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which the probability that a specific result is determined is different from the first lottery state.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
Each of the games executed in the first lottery state and stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. Each symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second It is configured to be able to shift to the lottery state,
In a game that is executed in the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. Even though the game has been stopped and the player has stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
The gaming machine is characterized in that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is

It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.
As the specific condition candidate, the gaming machine is characterized in that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition candidate can be set as the specific condition from a plurality of types of specific condition candidates.
As the specific condition candidate, the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or more than a predetermined number.
In a situation where the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is set to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number as the specific condition, after a certain game is executed, the specific condition is set to a predetermined gaming state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute a stop processing when it is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when certain conditions are met.
It is configured to be able to execute a stop process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination process related to a predetermined error can be executed even when the stop processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
It is configured so that the stop function becomes effective when the predetermined condition A is satisfied.
The automatic settlement function is enabled when the predetermined condition B is satisfied.
When the stop function is enabled, if the specific condition A is satisfied, the stop process that stops the progress of the game can be executed.
When the automatic settlement function is enabled and the specific condition B is satisfied, the automatic settlement process can be executed.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition A candidate can be set as the specific condition A from a plurality of types of specific condition A candidates.
It is configured so that at least one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B from a plurality of types of specific condition B candidates.
At least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same.
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that different conditions can be set between the specific condition A and the specific condition B.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and a moving member can be operated through the first opening.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The lock is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located below the center of the front door in the vertical direction.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
A gaming machine characterized in that a second opening is formed in the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate through the second opening.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
A game medium dispensing device mounted on the bottom surface of the substrate,
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The height of the game medium dispensing device is lower than the height from the bottom surface to the lower end of the first opening.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that a gap is formed between the gaming medium payout device and the moving member in a situation where the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With the lock
A lock portion having a movable member that can be moved to a locking position for locking the front door and an unlocking position for unlocking the front door in conjunction with the operation of the lock portion.
With
A first opening having a maximum diameter of 100 mm or more is formed on the back surface of the substrate, and the moving member can be operated through the first opening.
The lock is a gaming machine characterized in that it is fixed from the back side of the front door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
The game medium paid out from the game medium payout device at a predetermined open position is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be guided to a receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, at a predetermined open position, the gaming medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the gaming medium dispensing device via a specific communication passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a predetermined open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via the predetermined communication passage.
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, at a predetermined open position, the gaming medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the gaming medium dispensing device via a specific communication passage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
With
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the opening of the front door is detected, and then the stop switch is detected at the moment when the closing of the front door is detected. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D10) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a predetermined open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via the predetermined communication passage.
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the front door is detected to be open, and then the stop switch is set when the front door is detected to be closed. It is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify that the front door is in the open state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D11) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
With multiple reels
With multiple stop switches
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
While the reel is rotating, it is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by the stop switch when the front door is detected to be open, and then the stop switch is set when the front door is detected to be closed. It is configured so that the reel cannot be stopped by
It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify that the front door is in the open state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D12) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a predetermined open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via the predetermined communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "base bottom") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "front door bottom"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D13) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
Game medium payout device and
The receiving part that receives the game media paid out from the game media payout device,
A predetermined communication passage provided on the back side of the front door and leading to the receiving part of the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device,
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via a predetermined communication passage.
At a predetermined open position, the game medium paid out from the game medium payout device is configured to be guided to the receiving portion via the predetermined communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "base bottom") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "front door bottom"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
When the front door is closed, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship where they overlap each other.
Even when the front door is in a predetermined open state, the first piece and the second piece are configured to overlap each other.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D14) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "base bottom") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "front door bottom"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D15) is
A box-shaped substrate with an open front side (for example, a back box UB) and
A front door that can open and close the opening of the substrate,
The slot and
Game medium payout device and
A specific communication passage provided on the back side of the front door to guide the game medium inserted from the slot to the game medium payout device.
Front door sensor and
With
The front door is unlocked from the closed state where the front door is locked. At a specific open position where the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a specific distance, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. Without
When the front door is locked and closed, the front door is unlocked and separated from the substrate by a predetermined distance. At a predetermined open position, the front door is detected by the detection signal of the front door sensor. And
At a specific open position, the game medium inserted from the slot is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via the specific communication passage.
The game medium thrown in from the slot at a predetermined open position is configured to be guided to the game medium payout device via a specific communication passage.
Under the condition that the front door is closed, the bottom of the substrate on the front door side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "base bottom") is the bottom of the front door on the substrate side (hereinafter, simply referred to as "front door bottom"). Provide the first piece overhanging toward
When the front door is closed, the bottom of the front door is provided with a second piece that projects toward the bottom of the substrate.
When the front door is closed, the first piece and the second piece are in a positional relationship where they overlap each other.
Even when the front door is in a predetermined open state, the first piece and the second piece are configured to overlap each other.
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the gap between the first piece and the second piece is configured to be larger than the thickness of the gaming medium when the front door is closed.

P-turning machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input reception sensor D20s 1st input sensor, D30s 2nd input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch (Open / close detection device)
D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 input number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 medal tray D240 outlet, D250 special game status display device D260 keyhole, D270 payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member (predetermined communication passage)
D341 Medal reception D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game Minimum interval timer S sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 turn cylinder backlight S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device (game medium payout device), H10s first payout Sensor H20s 2nd payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disc, H50a disc rotation axis H60 game medal outlet, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bet button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K timer board, K10 timer timer K20 timer sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button KHc high securing obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining number of games counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU reel unit, BU pedestal part, H62 discharge guide part, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw , DE full detection electrode M55 1st end, M57 2nd end, M58 overlapping part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band M main control board MN11ta-A 1st main game win / loss lottery table, MN11ta- B 2nd main game win / fail lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win / fail lottery table, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol Determining lottery table MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP11t-C 1st and 1st 2 Main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game timer MP52c Time reduction counter, MT10 command Transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st Main game symbol hold display Part B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd Main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric combination Object C20 2nd prize opening, C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd prize opening Electric accessory, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start Mouth H11s Auxiliary game start mouth Ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 1st hold display section, SG13 2nd hold display section KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, KE10 payout unit D16 transparent plate, KR prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH prize ball payout control board Ea power switch, D42 launcher E power supply unit, D40 launch control board DL10 left-handed area, DR10 right-handed area ML10 left-handed route (first flow route), MR10 right-handed route (2nd flow route)
D50 Right-handed route outlet NKc Number of balls entered counter P10 Left general winning opening, P20 Right general winning opening HSc Left-handed instruction counter, MSc Right-handed instruction counter MP51c Probability variation counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hit game timer, MP41t -2 Discharge standby counter C22 Specific area (V winning port), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 2nd large winning port Discharge port, C23s 2nd large winning port Discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning Mouth ball detection device SM26c Look-ahead effect execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Number of consecutive villas counter SB sub-input button, SBs sub-input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission / reception control means 3110 Reception control means 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout processing related information Temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port Winning counter, 3311b 2nd main game start opening winning counter 3311c 1st big winning opening winning counter, 3311d 2nd big winning opening winning counter 3311e General winning opening winning counter, 3312 Number of balls held counter 3313 Enclosed game ball number counter, 3400 firing Control means 3410 Launch control related information Temporary storage means, 3500 Initial processing control means at the time of power failure / recovery from power failure 3510 Information temporary storage means at power failure 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal winning detection device 2122 Normal electric accessory, 2221 Distribution winning detection device 2222 Distribution electric accessory, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area entry detection device, 2224-2 Discharge ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 gate CPUMC microprocessor, SH performance display device SH10 identification segment, SH20 ratio segment M90 setting display LED
KY housing, UB back box (base), UB17 first opening, UB18 second opening DJ10 lock, DJ14 first moving member (moving member)
DJ30 lock, DS92 medal shooter (specific communication passage)
DU10a left horizontal plate member (second piece), DU10b right horizontal plate member (second piece)
DU10c upper vertical plate member (second piece), DU10d lower vertical plate member (second piece)
DU11a left horizontal plate member (second piece), DU11b right horizontal plate member (second piece)
DU11c upper vertical plate member (second piece), DU11d lower vertical plate member (second piece)
UB15a left vertical plate member (first piece), UB15b right vertical plate member (first piece)
UB15c upper horizontal plate member (first piece), UB15d lower horizontal plate member (first piece),

Claims (1)

First information display means and
Second information display means and
MAX bet lamp and
MAX bet switch and
And an internal lottery means,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub-game club that controls the production <br />
The game section has a first section and a second section.
In the first section, the first information display means is configured so that information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed.
In the first section, the second information display means is configured so that information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed.
In the second section, the first information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second section, the second information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the second section, in a game in which the specific lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a predetermined situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the first information display means provides information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. After being displayed, the second information display means is configured to display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
Information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch for the second information display means in a game in which the specific lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a specific situation in which the minimum game time has not elapsed in the second section. Is displayed, the first information display means may display information regarding an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
The main game department can send the first command to the sub game department side,
The main game department can send a second command to the sub game department side,
The sub-game unit can start measuring the rotation time of the reel when the first command is received.
When a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command, the second information display means may display stop suggestion information prompting the stop operation of the stop switch.
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. After the front door is opened and the front door is opened, and after the front door is closed and the front door is closed before the predetermined time elapses after receiving the first command. When the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command without receiving the second command, the stop suggestion information can be displayed on the second information display means. ,
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. When the front door is opened and the front door is opened, information regarding the opening of the front door is displayed on the second information display means, and after the front door is opened, the first command is received. After the front door is closed after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second information display means is configured to display the stop suggestion information.
In a situation where the front door is closed and the second command has not been received since the first command was received, before the predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first command. When a predetermined error occurs and the predetermined error occurs, information about the predetermined error is displayed on the second information display means, and after the predetermined error occurs, the first command is received. After the predetermined error is cleared after the predetermined time has elapsed, the stop suggestion information is not displayed on the second information display means.
In the game in which the predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped based on the acceptance of the player's stop operation.
When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be given.
The predetermined lottery result is determined by the internal lottery means in a predetermined game in a certain situation, and then the number of bets related to the next game of the predetermined game is "0", and the storage number display means displays the storage number. When a predetermined number is displayed, the MAX bet lamp is lit, and then when one game medium is inserted into the slot, the MAX bet is placed at the first timing after the game medium is inserted. Bet by operating the switch is not possible, but the MAX bet lamp is lit, and at the second timing thereafter, betting by operating the MAX bet switch is possible and the MAX bet lamp is configured to be lit. A game machine featuring.

Images